AGFA Drystar 4500 Film Printer Service Manual - Revision 2

HEALTHCARE
Imaging >
Technical Documentation
Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M
Type 5363 / 100/110
Order No.: DD+DIS005.03E
*1VY3NK1*
1 Piece VY3NK MA1
2nd Edition
printed in Germany 07 / 2003
HEALTHCARE
Imaging >
Technical Documentation Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M

Type 5363 / 100/110
*1VY3NK1*
1 Piece VY3NK MA1
2nd Edition
To order spare parts and spare part assortments:
Tel.: Fax.:
xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 3760 xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 7388
To order documentation: Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3553 Fax.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 7271
Caution: This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations. These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must only be performed by qualified technical personnel.
Note: Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician. Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician. CE Declaration: The CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consens of the manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
AGFA-GEVAERT AG - MI CSO / Information & Projects Tegernseer Landstr. 161 D-81539 Mnchen
OVERVIEW
0. 1. Orderlist, List of effective page, notes Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedure Functional Description Repair and Service
Pictograms and Conventionen for this Documentation

In this documentation some special conventions (pictograms, writing styles) are used, to support, that you can easily recognize and find the required information.
Meaning of the Pictograms

High Voltage ! Waiting Time Required Tools Removal Assembly Hint Mechanical Adjustment Required Spare Part Electrical Adjustment Required Time Key-Operator menu Calibration
2. 3.
3.1 Machine specific safety intructions and hints for repair work 3.2 Machine specific tools, Software tools and auxiliary means 3.3 Troubleshooting 3.4 Electrical and mechanical codes, fuse tables 3.5 Replacement of parts 3.6 Calibrations and adjustments 3.7 Software menues, Settings 3.8 Software-Releases, Patches 3.9 Frequently Asked Questions 4. Reference and Circuit Diagrams Spare Parts List
Attention !
Info
5. 6. 7. 8.
Service Menu Accessories Field Modifications Manufacturing Standard Modifications Maintenance
Conventions
Activity Explanation for an action, Writing style Switch on the device <omni-cd.exe> Example Switch on the device
9.
10. Fieldservice Bulletins
11. Installation Planning

1 2 3
Activity with the mouse or return key
Double click the icon <omni-cd.exe> Enter vips and click on <Continue>
12. Glossary and Key Word Index
required text entry via key board
vips
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services
Generic Safety Directions
Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products
Purpose of this document

This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant information for the Service Engineer. It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products. and part of each Service Documentation as well as Installation Planning document. The latest version is available via MEDNET => GSO Library => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual
Document History
Edition. Revision Release Date Changes
compared to previous Revision 1.1 Editorial rework to improve comprehensibility
1.2
04-2007
Referenced Documents
Document Title
n.a.
n.a.
04-2007
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE: Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled. Document Node ID: 11849633 printed in Germany Enclosure_e_template_v02
Agfa Company Confidential
Copyright 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
WARNING: Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION: Read this document prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the equipment. Strictly observe all safety directions within this document and on the product.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007
Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 3 Document number: DD+DIS238.06E Agfa Company Confidential
List of Contents
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 2 3
DISCLAIMER .........................................................................................................6 USED ICONS.........................................................................................................7 LABELS..................................................................................................................8 3.1 3.2 3.3 CE Mark ...................................................................................................8 System Labels..........................................................................................8 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation.............................................9
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
PRODUCT COMPLAINTS ...................................................................................10 REFERENCES.....................................................................................................10 INTENDED USE ..................................................................................................11 INTENDED USER................................................................................................11 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS ..........................11 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.........................................................12 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................13 COMPLIANCE .....................................................................................................14 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION .........................................................16 RADIATION PROTECTION .................................................................................17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION .........................17 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES........................17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES .............18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES ................................20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES.........21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES..........................23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................23
List of Contents
21 22 23 24 25 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS ................................ 24 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ................. 24 WASTE DISPOSAL ............................................................................................. 24 RECYCLING........................................................................................................ 25 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI)................................... 25
Disclaimer
Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services. Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting installation or service procedures. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare. Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose. Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this document. Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you dont operate the product correctly or if you dont have it serviced correctly. Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE: In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to, distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.
Used Icons
Used Icons
Icon Name and Circumstances CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can be the consequence WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible mistreatment of patients can be the consequence. DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries can be the consequence. INSTRUCTION: If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the subject of the warning or caution. If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally as described. IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to prevent malfunction. NOTE: Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action Highlights unusual points Indicates background information Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the graphical user interface. Is additional information without influence on the action or step!
Labels
3
3.1
Labels
CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2
System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service document in the appropriate section. Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864. This list is not complete.
Hot Surface
Laser Beam
Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
Obstacles
Corrosive Liquid
High Voltage
Hand Injuries
C&W_005.cdr
Labels
3.3
System Labels concerning Laser Radiation

According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries. Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4. The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed instructions in the user manual and technical documentation. Class 1: Class 2: Not dangerous to the human eye. Laser units having a maximum output of 1 mW. The accessible laser radiation only lies within the visible range of the spectrum (400 nm to 700 nm). With brief exposure times (up to 0.25 s) there is no danger due to the blink reflex. Laser units having a maximum output of 5 mW. The accessible laser radiation becomes dangerous for the eye, if the cross section of radiation is reduced by optical instruments. If this is not the case, the emitted laser radiation in the visible region of the spectrum, with short exposure times (up to 0.25 s), is not dangerous in the spectral regions, even for long irradiation times. Proper use must be observed. Required safety equipment must be used. Laser units having a maximum output of 500 mW. Dangerous to the human eye and in particular cases to the skin. Proper use must be observed. Required safety equipment must be used. Laser units having a higher output than 500 mW. Extremely dangerous to the human eye and dangerous to the human skin. Proper use must be observed. Required safety equipment must be used.
Class 3A:
Class 3B:
Class 4:
Manufacturer AGFA GEVA ERT N.V. Septestraat 27-2640-Mortsel-BELGIUM 1011 Da te: 200 6-07 Type 5175/1 00 S/N 50 -60Hz 100-120/220-240V 2 .0/1 .0A Ma de in Germa ny Pei ssenb erg July 200 6
Figure 1: Example for Laser Classification
Product Complaints - References
Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure. If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written correspondence to the following address: Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on: www.agfa.com
Agfa Septestraat 27 2640 Mortsel, Belgium. Fax +32 3 444 7094
References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare support organisation (Paper). Access to MedNet: IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
Intended Use - Intended Users - Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological environment by qualified staff. It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards, which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks). AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases. Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate handling, especially by children. The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic XRay clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks

This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be performed by qualified technical personnel. The Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product before attempting to work with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country. Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make sure that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the force of law. Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.
Connections to other Equipment
Connections to other Equipment

Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare service on request. Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the hospital. The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment: Warning: Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION: Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other equipment. Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include: Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1 harmonized national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is responsible for complying with the systems standard. If required, contact your local service organization.
Accessories and Spare Parts
10
Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION: Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts. Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure. Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com
Compliance
11
Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products: Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices (OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12) ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of users. ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Full quality assurance system ISO 13485 ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION The clinical evaluation follows a defined and methodologically sound procedure.
Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential performance ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices Application of risk management to medical devices IEC 60601-1-2 It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential in determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the electromagnetic environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment of use to permit the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and provide its ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.
Compliance
Additional standards for documentation: IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation Harmonization: Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user, patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products. It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations. Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member countries of the CB Scheme. Details see www.iecee.org
Radiation of radio frequency: CAUTION: For USA only: This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference to radio communication.
Note: This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference. The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at his own expense.
Safety Directions for Operation
12
Safety Directions for Operation

Accessibility of the mains power switch: CAUTION: Do not obstruct the mains power switch. Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power connection. Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this Technical Documentation. All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be confused with diagnostic t information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic information could be corrupted, Additional investigations must be performed to get clear diagnostic information. Ventilation openings must not be covered. If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from the mains. Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device. If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped. Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields, since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment: DANGER: Risk of explosion. Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen which may cause an explosion. Usage of an un-interruptible power supply: Warning: Images can be lost due to power failure. Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional standby generator.
Radiation Protection - Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection General Safety Directions for Service Activities
13
Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the jurisdiction in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those authorized by the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be made of all radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories. Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
14
Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection

Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service documents. Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.
15
General Safety Directions for Service Activities

This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations. Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician. The safety directions for operation (see section 12) are also valid for all service activities. During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations). All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated torque values! Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8. All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data. If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text. Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232 ,RJ45, USB or other interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).
General Safety Directions for Service Activities Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be observed: o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards. o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers. o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering (electrostatic charge). o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components: CAUTION: Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed: For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap (CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.
16
Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Accessibility of the power disconnection device: Warning: Electrical device. Shock possible. INSTRUCTION: Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation. Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their engineers.
Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology. This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m 1.5m 1.5m Patient environment
This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor: Warning: Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage: Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load: CAUTION: Heavy device may damage the floor covering. Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling: CAUTION: Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or damage: Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Safety Directions for Installation Activities
17
Safety Directions for Installation Activities

If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare trained personnel. If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA representative. Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by mechanical means or by several people. When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is easily accessible. Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely. This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Connection of the device to the power supply: CAUTION: Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply: INSTRUCTION: Prior to connecting the device to the mains ... Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available power supply in the installation room. Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses. Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply. Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.
Safety Directions for Installation Activities Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
Ground potential differences : CAUTION: To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be connected to the same power source. INSTRUCTION: Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source as the PC. When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
18
Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities

This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the periods to be applied. In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device immediately after the tests. Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor control board. Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage. After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden or disconnected. If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to the customer. First repair the machine casing. Cleaning optical elements: CAUTION: Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements. When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.
Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
Secured screws: CAUTION: Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device adjustments: Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer. Sharp edges: CAUTION: Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible. Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts. Replacing batteries: WARNING: Battery can explode, causing chemical burns. INSTRUCTION: Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity. Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the manufacturer. Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
Checking ground connections: WARNING: Improper ground connection of the device metal housing may lead to electric shocks. In case of power supply replacements or maintenance check the protective earth resistance according to the national regulations. Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers are present
Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts, Accessories and Devices
Opening PCs and Workstations: Warning: Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible. Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual. Unplug before opening. Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses: Warning: Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard! Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on the device.
19
Safety Directions for remote Service Activities

Remote Service Activities: Warning: During remote service activities images can be lost. Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to stop working on the system.
20
Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts, Accessories and Devices
In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) must be shipped with batteries disconnected. Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.
Safety Directions concerning Modifications Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials - Waste Disposal
21
Safety Directions concerning Modifications

Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare. This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances, removal of locks/instructions etc.).
22
Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials

'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The Hazardous Material instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with when performing work to avoid health risks. Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the hazardous substances.
23
Waste Disposal
The Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), which entered into force as European law on 13th February 2003, resulted in a major change in the treatment of electrical equipment at end-of-life. The purpose of this Directive is, as a first priority, the prevention of WEEE, and in addition, to promote the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such wastes so as to reduce the disposal of waste. The WEEE logo on the product or on its box indicates that this product must not be disposed of or dumped with household waste. The owner of the equipment is liable to dispose of all electronic or electrical waste equipment by delivering to the specified collection point for recycling of such hazardous waste, collection and proper recovery of electronic and electrical waste equipment at the time of disposal will allow the producer to help conserve natural resources. Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment will ensure safety of human health and the environment. For more information about electronic and electrical waste equipment disposal, recovery and collection points, please contact your local, waste disposal service or producer / distributor of this equipment. If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.
Recycling - Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
24
Recycling
Recycling pass see http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf
25
Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)

AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or parts that are removed from the customers site. This also applies to the exchange of spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.
Document No: DD+DIS238.06E Copyright 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare All rights reserved. Technical modifications reserved.
Published by Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH Tegernseer Landstrae 161 D - 81539 Mnchen Germany AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert NV
printed in Germany Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures
Chapter 1: List of Contents
1
1.1
Safety ............................................................................................... 1
General Safety Instructions ............................................................................. 1
2
2.1
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4
Controls and Connections ............................................................. 3

Controls of user interface ................................................................................ 3
Status indicator LED ....................................................................................................... 3 Stop / Unlock button ....................................................................................................... 3 Power / Reset button ...................................................................................................... 3 Keypad............................................................................................................................ 4
2.2
Connections ...................................................................................................... 5
3
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7
Installation Prerequisites ............................................................... 6

Check installation site prerequisites............................................................... 6 Compare voltage indicated on type label with available power supply ....... 7 Check shipment completeness ....................................................................... 8 Remove transport protection blocks .............................................................. 8 Mount drum drive belt ...................................................................................... 9 Mount the thermal head screwdriver ............................................................ 11 Confirm installation readiness ...................................................................... 11
4
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
Printer Set-up ................................................................................ 12

Connect the cables (mains cable, network cable) ....................................... 13 Set the printer at its final position and set the brakes................................. 14 Switch the printer on ...................................................................................... 15 Load Films....................................................................................................... 18 Automatic Film Calibration ............................................................................ 20
5
5.1
Printer Settings Selection / Set-up .............................................. 21

Spoken language selection............................................................................ 23
Printed copies of this document are not controlled. The reader should always refer to MedNet to ensure that they are working with the latest copy of the document.
Edition 2, Revision 4 2005-08-30
Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 1 / I Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8
Date and time set-up ...................................................................................... 24 Film format set-up for lower tray................................................................... 24 Film type set-up for films in upper and lower tray....................................... 25 Film view selection for films in upper and lower tray.................................. 25 Film calibration on/off Selection ................................................................... 26 Default Densitometer Selection..................................................................... 26 Beep on empty Tray Selection....................................................................... 27
6
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
Network Settings Selection / Set-up............................................ 27

Called AE title change .................................................................................... 29 Hostname change........................................................................................... 30 Printer IP-address change ............................................................................. 30 Service host IP address change.................................................................... 31 Netmask change ............................................................................................. 31 Router IP address change.............................................................................. 32
7
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5
7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4
Printer Hook up ............................................................................. 33

Select Modality................................................................................................ 34 Modality set-up ............................................................................................... 35 Logical printers Set-up................................................................................... 35 Printing of test- and diagnostic images........................................................ 38 Adjust Image Quality ...................................................................................... 38
Image Adjustments as described in the Connectivity Release Document ....................39 Image Adjustment at the Modality .................................................................................40 Basic Image Adjustment at the Printer via Key-Operator Menu....................................43 Alternative: Image settings via DICOM host profile:......................................................46
8 9
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4
Acceptance Test............................................................................ 48 Completion of Installation ............................................................ 49

Customer Instruction ..................................................................................... 50 Confirm Installation ........................................................................................ 50 Site Data Entry ................................................................................................ 51 Save Configuration......................................................................................... 52
Chapter 1 / II 2005-08-30
Edition 2, Revision 4 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Appendix.................................................................................................... A
Installation Checklist.................................................................................................... A Removal of transport protection blocks..................................................................... C Image Adjustments Overview...................................................................................... G
Chapter 1 / III Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedure
The Installation Checklist in the appendix, page A, of this chapter gives an overview of all steps and guides through the complete installation process.
1
1.1
Safety
General Safety Instructions
The Drystar 4500 is suitable for continuous operation. The Drystar 4500 enables or aids in the diagnosis of a patient. When operating or maintaining the Drystar 4500 always observe the following safety guidelines: Have electrical or mechanical defects repaired by skilled personnel only! Do not override or disconnect the integrated safety features. Ventilation openings may not be covered. Always switch off the Drystar 4500 and disconnect the power cord from the outlet before carrying out any maintenance work. Always take into account the markings provided on the inside and outside of the printer. A brief overview of these markings and their meaning is given below: Safety warning, indicating that the Drystar 4500 User and Reference Manuals should be consulted before making any connections to other equipment. The use of accessory equipment not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this printer may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting system. Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include: Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity. Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-2 harmonized national standard. In addition, all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system configurator and is responsible for complying with the systems' standard. If required contact your Agfa Service Organization. In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any covers. Caution hot: Keep hands clear from the Decurl unit.
Chapter 1 / 1 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Type B equipment: Indicates that the Drystar 4500 complies with the limits for type B equipment. Supplementary protective earth connector: Provides a connection between the Drystar 4500 and the potential equalization busbar of the electrical system as found in medical environments. This plug should never be unplugged before the power is turned off and the power plug has been removed. Intergrounding connector: Provides a connection between the printer and other equipment that might exhibit minor ground potential differences. These differences may degrade the quality of communication between different equipment. Never remove connections to this terminal. Protective earth (ground) Provides a connection between the printer and the protective earth of the mains. Do not remove this connection, because this will have a negative influence on the leakage current. Power/Reset Button (Stand-by switch) Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall outlet in order to disconnect the unit entirely from the mains. Precautions for use in USA only: Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped; if the printer is connected to a 240 V/60 Hz source instead of a 120 V/60 Hz source. Transport after installation The user has to be very cautious concerning stability, when moving the printer. When doing this, he has to take into account the condition and the structure of the subsoil, obstructions and slopes. The appliance can only be transported with all covers closed. The brakes have to be loose. The appliance may not be transported continuously from one location to the other. Waste disposal and environmental regulations In most countries Drystar film is considered industrial waste and is not allowed to be disposed of as household waste. Please consult your local waste disposal regulations. Agfa recommends disposal of Drystar film to be hauled away by a licensed company. After its life span, do not dispose of the Drystar 4500 without consideration of local waste disposal regulations. Please consult your local service organization.
DD+DIS275.05E
2
2.1
Controls and Connections

Controls of user interface
1 2 3 4 5 Status indicator LED Stop / Unlock button Power / Reset button Display Keypad
2 3 4
53 63 01 ch .cd r
Figure 1 2.1.1 Status indicator LED Color / Light Constant Blinking Constant Red Blinking Warning status Status Ready (stand by) Busy or in key-operator mode Error status Check display for messages Action Proceed Wait
Green
2.1.2
Stop / Unlock button The Stop / Unlock button is used to safely unlock the printer for accessing the input tray(s) or opening the covers.
2.1.3
Power / Reset button The Power / Reset button is used to switch the printers power on or off and to reset the printer.
DD+DIS275.05E
2.1.4
Keypad
536301gb.cdr
Figure 2 Emergency key to place emergency jobs at the top of the queue to be printed with priority. Delete key to delete print jobs. Key-operator key to access advanced key-operator functions. Service key to access service-level functions. Escape key to quit current functions or to exit a menu without saving changes. Confirm key to select a menu or to accept an entry in a menu. Up key to move cursor one position up to previous entry field and to scroll upwards or to increment digits in a numeric entry field. Down key to move cursor one position down to next entry field and to scroll downwards or to decrement digits in a numeric entry field. Left key to scroll backwards through multiple choices within a field, to move entry position in a numerical field in descending order (from right digit to left digit) and to toggle between values in a field. Right key to scroll forwards through multiple choices within a field, to move entry position in a numerical field in ascending order (from left digit to right digit) and to toggle between values in a field.
DD+DIS275.05E
2.2
Connections
2 3
4 5
536301gc.cdr
Figure 3
1 2 3 4 5
Port for Service PC (RS232 Interface female DTE 25 pins sub D) Network connection (RJ45 UTP for 10/100BaseT network, according to IEC601) Mains connection (100 240 V AC power supply) Supplementary grounding cable connection Potential equalization connection to the host (6 mm metric thread; not used)
DD+DIS275.05E
Installation Prerequisites
The purpose of this section is to show the required tasks before installation, to guarantee a smooth printer installation. The following table lists these tasks: Task Check installation site prerequisites Compare voltage indicated on type label with available power supply Check shipment completeness Remove transport protection locks Mount drum drive belt Mount the thermal head screwdriver Confirm installation readiness The time required for the steps within this section should be entered in the service / installation report under task code INS. Details see.. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 Task code:
3.1
Check installation site prerequisites

Check that all prerequisites shown in the Installation Readiness- Checklist (see at the end of chapter 11) are fulfilled.
DD+DIS275.05E
3.2
Compare voltage indicated on type label with available power supply

The type label is located inside of the printer on the floppy holder. (1) Open top cover. See Figure 4. (2) Compare voltage indicated on type label with the supplied voltage in the installation room. Refer to the note below.
2 1
536301gd.cdr
Figure 4 The printer has an auto switching power supply built in. This adapts itself to the input voltage. The input voltage has to be between 100/240 V (AC), 50/60 Hz.
DD+DIS275.05E
3.3
Check shipment completeness

Check shipment completeness by comparing with the packing list, which is part of the accessories-box. In case it is not complete, inform the national service manager. He will initiate the required steps. Additionally, note the missing item(s) in the installation report.
Drystar 4500 M
English
Packing slip
Example of a packing list:
Nederlands
Paklijst
When unpacking the machine, take care not to throw away any small parts together with the packaging. In case of a claim for missing contents, send this packing slip to your local Agfa representative.
Let er bij het uitpakken op dat u geen kleine onderdelen met het verpakkingsmateriaal weggooit. Indien bepaalde onderdelen ontbreken, stuurt u deze paklijst op naar de lokale Agfa-vertegenwoordiger.
Contents of the packing:

! ! !
Installation set:
! ! ! ! !
Inhoud van de verpakking:

! ! !
Installatieset:
! ! ! ! !
Documentation set:
! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Documentatieset:
! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Deutsch
Packzettel
Espaol
Lista de embalaje
Beim Auspacken bitte darauf achten, da kleine T eile nicht versehentlich mit dem Verpackungsmaterial weggeworfen werden. Bei Inhaltsreklamationen diesen Packzettel an die rtliche AgfaVertretung einsenden.
Al desembalar el aparato, tenga cuidado de no tirar, inadvertidamente, pequeas piezas, con el material de embalaje. En caso de reclamaciones en lo referente al contenido, srvase enviar esta hoja al representante local de Agfa.
Inhalt der Verpackung:

! ! !
Beipack mit Installationsmaterial:

! ! ! ! !
Contenido del embalaje:

! ! !
Juego de instalacin:
! ! ! ! !
Juego de documentacin:
! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Beipack mit Dokumenten:

! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Franais
Fiche demballage
Italiano
Scheda di imballaggio
Pendant le dballage, prenez garde de ne pas jeter, par inadvertance, des petites pices avec le matriel demballage. En cas de rclamations concernant le contenu, prire denvoyer cette fiche la reprsentation locale de Agfa.
Quando si estrae lapparecchio dallimballaggio, bisogna stare attenti a non buttare via inavvertitamente dei pezzi piccoli assieme al materiale dimballo. In caso di reclami riguardanti il contenuto, si prega, in ogni caso, di inviare questa lista dimballaggio alla rappresentanza locale Agfa.
Contenu de lemballage:
! ! !
Jeu de pices dinstallation:

! ! ! ! !
Contenuto dellimballaggio:
! ! !
Kit di installazione:
! ! ! ! !
Ensemble de documents:
! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Insieme di documentazione:
! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
2807 A 12T 20020711
Figure 5
3.4
Remove transport protection blocks

To remove transport protection locks refer to appendix Removal of transport protection blocks page C at the end of this chapter.
DD+DIS275.05E
3.5
Mount drum drive belt

(1) Open the top cover (2) Unlock fast-lock A on right side cover (3) Lift the two locks B (4) Remove the right side cover C
4 C 2 3 B 1 A
536301ge.CDR
Figure 6
DD+DIS275.05E
(5) Disconnect the motor plug. (6) Mount the detached belt A. (7) Assist by slowly turning the pulley B by hand. Refer to hint below. (8) Re-connect the motor plug.
B A
536301gf.cdr
Figure 7 Caution: When the pulley is turned in order to mount the drum drive belt, the motor reacts like a generator. The MEB board which drives the drum drive motor can be damaged. We strongly recommend disconnecting the motor before turning the pulley. The drum drive belt is detached before the printer is put on stock, to prevent pressure marks on the belt. Pressure marks could lead to slight density variations on the film. In case the printer is out of operation for more than 4 weeks, it is recommended to remove the belt again during this period. Subsequent adjustment of the belt tension is not necessary after mounting of the drum drive belt.
DD+DIS275.05E
3.6
Mount the thermal head screwdriver

(1) Clean the sticking point for the thermal head screwdriver with alcohol. (2) Mount the holder A, delivered with the printer, on the left hand side. (3) Place the thermal head screwdriver B, also delivered with the printer, in the holder
A B
536301gg.cdr
536301tc.cdr
Figure 8
3.7
Confirm installation readiness

Confirm installation readiness, referring to the Installation Checklist in the appendix, page A of this chapter. Only proceed with installation, if all preconditions for installation are fulfilled. If not, note the missing precondition(s) in the installation report.
DD+DIS275.05E
Printer Set-up
The purpose of this section is to show the required steps of the mechanical printer set-up. The following table lists these tasks: Task Connect the cables (mains cable, network cable) Set the printer at its final position and set the brakes Switch on the printer Load films Automatic film calibration The time required for the steps within this subsection should be entered in the service / installation report under task code INS. Details see.. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Task code:
DD+DIS275.05E
4.1
Connect the cables (mains cable, network cable)

(1) Connect the network cable at the rear of the printer and the wall outlet or respectively the network switch/hub. (2) Two different mains cables are delivered with the printer. A Euro version and a US/CAN version. Connect the appropriate mains cable at the rear of the printer. (3) Plug in the mains cable at the wall outlet.
220 - 240 V 50 Hz 3m Euro Version US/CAN Version 110 - 120 V 60 Hz
536301gh.cdr
network cable 5m
Figure 9
DD+DIS275.05E
4.2
Set the printer at its final position and set the brakes
(1) Put the printer at its final position (2) Set the brakes
Figure 10
(3) Mount the strain relief for the power cord
536301gj.cdr
Figure 11
DD+DIS275.05E
4.3
Switch the printer on

(1) Press power button to switch the printer on. (2) After approx. 3 minutes, the message Lower Input Tray Empty appears, load the lower and upper film tray (refer to section 4.4)
POWER
approx. 2 min.
1 53630
r gk.cd
Ready Please WAIT Self test proceeding 62%
Figure 12 The printer starts a self-test of the display, followed by a software self-test. A graphical indicator shows the progress of the self-test After approx. 3 min. the display shows Lower Input Tray Empty.
DD+DIS275.05E
Possibility to shorten Installation Time After switch on it is already possible to connect via service PC to the printer. This allows to start the printer installation wizard (refer to section 5) before the printer shows the READY screen, to shorten installation time. This should be used by experienced Field Service Engineers only. Possibility 1: Adjust network settings manually (1) Connect via serial connection to the printer (2) Enter user name and password (mega / ******) (3) Set IP address via command setip <IP address> (example: setip 192.9.200.201> (4) Set subnetmask via command setsubnetmask <subnetmask> (example: setsubnetmask 255.255.255.0) (5) Make a network connection to the printer (6) Enter IP address in the browser address window (7) Go to "Service Engineer Tools - Enter key-operator command session" and proceed as described in section 5. Possibility 2: Use APIPA network setup (1) Configure service PC for APIPA (Automatic Private IP Addressing). Refer to note next page (2) Make a network connection to the printer (3) Open a DOS box at the service PC (4) Enter <ipconfig> to check whether APIPA assigned already an IP address (will be in the range of 169.254.0.0 - 169.254.255.255). This takes approx. 2 minutes. (5) Enter IP address 169.254.10.10 in the browser address window (6) Go to "Service Engineer Tools - Enter key-operator command session" and proceed as described in section 5.
DD+DIS275.05E
Note: PC Settings for APIPA: Windows 98 / Windows ME / Windows 2000: Select Control Panel Network Properties Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Obtain an IP address automatically". Refer to Figure 13. Note: The path may differ for different operating systems. Windows XP: Select Control Panel Network Connections Local Area Connection Properties Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Tab: Alternative Configuration Automatic Private IP address". Refer to Figure 14 next page. As the IP address of the printer after installation is usually different from 169.254.XXX.XXX, APIPA connection can only be used during installation. After change of the IP address to one different from 169.254.XXX.XXX and reboot the APIPA connection is not possible anymore.
Figure 13: Windows 98, ME, 2000 network setting
Figure 14: Windows XP network setting
Recommendation: Make a bookmark in your browser for IP address 169.254.10.10
DD+DIS275.05E
4.4
Load Films
Load the 8 x 10 and 10 x 12" films in the upper and lower film tray. Use the films delivered with the printer. The films delivered with the printer may only be used for test purposes.
(1) Open the tray completely
536301gm.cdr
536301aa0.cdr
Figure 15 (2) Open the plastic bag and take out the film pack.
.c gn 01 63 53 dr
536301aa2.cdr
Figure 16 (3) Place the new film pack in the film tray. Make sure that the perforated sheet delivered with the film pack is facing downwards.
536301go.cdr
536301aa3.cdr
Figure 17
DD+DIS275.05E
(4) Verify that the film pack is kept in place under the two retainers.
536301gp.cdr 536301aa4.cdr
Figure 18 (5) Place the appropriate film type sticker (which is part of the printer delivery) on the film tray.
r 1gq.cd 53630
536301aa5.cdr
Figure 19
In case the customer does not use 10 x 12" format, adjust the lower tray for 8 x 10" format: To adjust the film format for the lower tray to 8 x 10". In the key operator menu: Change settings lower tray - film format. Mechanically, open tray and pull up the two plastic tabs at the bottom of the tray. Figure 20
536301ci.cdr
DD+DIS275.05E
4.5
Automatic Film Calibration

After insertion of the film package(s) an automatic film calibration per film tray is initiated. A test film is printed and measured with the internal macro densitometer. After calibration completes successfully the Dmax value is displayed (example: Calibrating printer finished. Dmax value = 2.96) - Blue base film = ~3.10 O.D.
-
Clear base film = ~2.95 O.D. - Mammo film = ~3.70 O.D. One film calibration takes approx. 7 minutes. Figure 21
536301gl.cdr
DD+DIS275.05E
Printer Settings Selection / Set-up

The purpose of this section is to show how to set/select the basic settings of the printer. Another possibility to define all printer settings is to use the Printer Installation Wizard. Select in key-operator menu
Show settings Change settings Print Image Save configuration Restore Configuration Calibration
Installation
Printer install.wizard
536301gw.cdr
New print head Upgrade from floppy
Select via PC (For Browser Connection refer to chapter 3.2)

Welcome to this DryStar 4X00 printer Welcome to this DryStar 4X00 printer
Key-Operator - Main 1. Show settings 2. Change settings 3. Print image 4. Save configuration 5. Restore config. 6. Calibration 7. Installation 8. Quality Control 9. Reboot Printer leave remote session
Key-Operator - Installation 1. Install Datasets 2. Printer Installation Wizard Go back
536301fa.cdr
DD+DIS275.05E
The following table lists these settings to be entered on the local keypad at the printer: Printer Setting Display Adjustment Language Date and time Film format Film type Film view Film Calibration Default Densitometer Beep on empty tray Importance optional optional mandatory mandatory mandatory optional optional optional optional How to access/enter 1 Details see.. Note next page 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8
The time required for the steps within this subsection should be entered in the service/installation report under task code INS.
Task code:
Note: First of all check contrast of display. If it is too dark to read, enter service menu
Show info Maintenance Save data Show error Install data Configure Test & diagnose
8 Adjust & Calibrate
2 Adjust display
Calibrate Print test images
Adjust mechanics
536301da.cdr
= key-operator menu
= service menu
DD+DIS275.05E
The following diagram represents the way to select and enter the above mentioned basic settings of the printer in the key-operator menu:
Show settings
Change settings
Print Image Save configuration Restore Configuration Calibration Installation
General Upper input tray Lower input tray

Network (DICOM) Image Quality
Date and time Language Film type Film view Film type Film format Film view
536301aq.cdr
Figure 22
5.1
Spoken language selection

Show settings
Change settings
General
Upper input tray Lower input tray Network (DICOM) Image Quality
Language
Date and time
536301ar.cdr
In the key-operator menu go to the "Language" screen. Select the desired language with the Press and key. Figure 23
to confirm the selection.
DD+DIS275.05E
5.2
Date and time set-up

Show settings
Change settings
General
Upper input tray Lower input tray Network (DICOM) Image Quality
Date and Time

Language
536301as.cdr
In the key-operator menu go to the "Date and Time" screen. Select the desired digit with the and key. Change the setting with the key. and Press to confirm the set-up.
DATE AND TIME 04-JAN-1999 dd-mmm-yyyy 14:24:34 hh:mm:ss
Key-operator Change setting X < :quit :ok >:select :change

536301gs.cdr
Figure 24
5.3
Film format set-up for lower tray

Show settings
Change settings
Lower input tray

General Upper input tray
<
<
Film format
Film view
Film type
536301at.cdr
In the key-operator menu go to the "Film format" screen. Select the desired size with the and key. Figure 25
Check film format tab adjustment in the lower tray (10x12" or 8x10") Press to confirm the set-up.
DD+DIS275.05E
5.4
Film type set-up for films in upper and lower tray

In the key-operator menu go to the "Film type" screen. Select the desired type with the and Press key.
Show settings
Change settings
Upper input tray Lower input tray

General
Film type
Film format Film view
536301au.cdr
FILM TYPE *Drystar DT1B Drystar DT1C
Key-operator Change setting X :quit :ok
536301gt.cdr
to confirm the set-up.
Figure 26
If the printer is a Drystar 4500 Mammo, in the selection also Mammo film type is displayed.
5.5
Film view selection for films in upper and lower tray
Show settings
Change settings
Upper input tray Lower input tray

General
Film view
536301av.cdr
Film format Film type
In the key-operator menu go to the "Film view" screen. Select the desired film view with the Press and key. Figure 27
DT1 film material may still have a slight curl after printing. At the light box, the lower edge is bent away from the light box. To avoid this effect, back view printing (= Film view "back") can be selected: The image is printed on the film as a mirror image. At the light box, the lower edge then is bent towards the light box
DD+DIS275.05E
5.6
Film calibration on/off Selection

Show settings
Change settings
Image quality
General Upper input tray Lower input tray Network (DICOM)
General settings
Select default for Film Calibration

536301ef.cdr
The calibration on/off selection is optional. Select off only, if the customer wants to deactivate the automatic film calibration, whenever a new film package is inserted. Default = on. In the key-operator menu go to the "Film calibration" screen. Select on or off with the key. Default: On. Press and
Figure 28
In case of selection "on" the number of film packs has to be selected, after which the calibration is executed. Default: 1
5.7
Default Densitometer Selection

Show settings
Change settings
Image Quality
General Upper input tray Lower input tray Network (DICOM) Logical Printers
General
536301bv.cdr
Host Profile XYZ
In the key-operator menu go to the "Default Densitometer" screen. Select the densitometer the customer is using with the key. Default: MacBeth. Press and Figure 29
DD+DIS275.05E
5.8
Beep on empty Tray Selection

Show settings
Change settings
General
Upper input tray Lower input tray Network (DICOM) Logical Printers Image Quality
Beep on empty tray

Date and time Language
536301bw.cdr
In the key-operator menu go to the "Beep on empty tray" screen. Select the required setting with the and key. Default: Audible alarm on - beep 5 times Press to confirm the selection. Figure 30
Network Settings Selection / Set-up

The purpose of this section is to show how to set/select the network settings of the printer. Another possibility to go through all network settings, excluding hostname and domain name, is to use the Printer Installation Wizard. Select in key-operator menu
Installation
536301gw.cdr
Select via PC (For Browser Connection refer to chapter 3.2)

Key-Operator - Installation 1. Install Datasets 2. Printer Installation Wizard Go back
536301fa.cdr
DD+DIS275.05E
The following table lists these settings to be entered on the local keypad at the printer: Network parameter Printer AE_title Hostname Domain name IP-address Service Host Netmask Router IP address Importance mandatory optional not used mandatory optional mandatory optional 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 How to access/enter
2
Details see.. 6.1 6.2
The time required for the steps within this subsection should be entered in the service/installation report under task code SIC.
Task code:
The following diagrams represent the two ways to select and enter the above mentioned basic settings of the printer in the key-operator and service menu respectively:
Key-operator menu: select the desired menu with the

Show settings
and
key.
Change settings
Network (DICOM)
Image Quality
Called AE title Hostname Domain name Printer IP address Service host IP-add Netmask Router IP address
Remove modality Add modality
536301aw.cdr
Figure 31
= key-operator menu;
= service menu
DD+DIS275.05E
Service menu: select the desired menu with the

Show info Maintenance Save data Show error Install data
and
key.
6 Configure
Test & diagnose Adjust and calibrate
1 Network settings
Printer settings Alarm mailing
1 Printer IP address 2 Printer AE title 3 Printer hostname 4 Netmask 5 Default router 6 Service host 7 Configuration host 8 Domain name
536301ax.cdr
Figure 32
6.1
Called AE title change

Show settings
Change settings
Network (DICOM)
Image Quality
Called AE title
Hostname Domain Name Printer IP address Service host IP-add Netmask Router IP-address Remove modality Add modality
536301bh.cdr
In the key-operator menu go to the "Called AE title" screen. Select the desired character with the and key.
Select the desired digit with the and key. Press to confirm the set-up. Figure 33
In DICOM, a network node is defined by its IP address and the AE - title. It is a DICOM convention to enter the AE - title in uppercase.
DD+DIS275.05E
6.2
Hostname change
Show settings
Change settings
Network (DICOM)
Image Quality
Called AE title
Hostname
Domain Name Printer IP address Service host IP-add Netmask Router IP-address Remove modality Add modality
536301bi.cdr
In the key-operator menu go to the "Hostname" screen. Select the desired character with the and key. Figure 34
Select the desired digit with the and key. Press to confirm the set-up.
6.3
Printer IP-address change

Show settings
Change settings
Network (DICOM)
Image Quality
Called AE title Hostname Domain name
Printer IP-address
Service host IP-add Netmask Router IP address Remove modality Add modality
536301bk.cdr
In the key-operator menu go to the "Printer IP-address" screen. Select the desired number with the and key. Figure 35
DD+DIS275.05E
6.4
Service host IP address change

Show settings
Change settings
Network (DICOM)
Image Quality
Hostname Domain Name Printer IP address
Service host IP-add

Netmask Router IP-address Remove modality Add modality
536301bp.cdr
In the key-operator menu go to the "Service host IP address" screen. Select the desired number with the and key.
SERVICE HOST IP-ADDRESS 192.009.200.201 --- --- --- ---
Key-operator Change setting X < :quit :ok >:select :change

536301gy.cdr
Figure 36
6.5
Netmask change
Show settings
<
<
Change settings
Network (DICOM)
Image Quality
Called AE title Hostname Domain name Printer IP-address Service host IP-add
Netmask
Router IP-address Remove modality Add modality
536301bl.cdr
In the key-operator menu go to the "Netmask" screen. Select the desired number with the and key. Figure 37
DD+DIS275.05E
6.6
Router IP address change

Show settings
Change settings
Network (DICOM)
Image Quality
Called AE title Hostname Domain name Printer IP-address Service host IP-add Netmask
Router IP-address
Remove modality Add modality
536301bm.cdr
In the key-operator menu go to the "Router IP address" screen. Select the desired number with the and key. Figure 38
DD+DIS275.05E
Printer Hook up
The purpose of this section is to show how to hook up the printer in the existing network, and to set it into operation. The following table lists these tasks: Task Select Modality Modality set-up Importance mandatory mandatory Has to be performed at the modality! How to access/enter 3 Details see.. 7.2 7.3
Set-up logical printers Print test- and diagnostic images
optional mandatory 7.4 7.5
or or
Adjust image quality Whenever the image does not show the information as desired.
The time required for the steps within this subsection should be entered in the service/installation report under task code APPL.
Taskcode:
= service menu
= Browser web pages
DD+DIS275.05E
7.1
Select Modality
Show settings
Change settings
Network (DICOM)
Image Quality
Add modality
536301gx.cdr
Called AE title Hostname Domain name Printer IP-address Service host IP-add Netmask Router IP-address Remove modality
In the key-operator menu go to the "Add Modality" screen. Follow online instructions and fill in or select necessary data
Collect following info: Modality Modality Modality Modality daily used name brand type AE-title
Key-operator Add modality X :quit :continue
536301gu.cdr
Figure 39 For first installation there is another possibility to select modality, by Installation wizard at key-operator menu:
Installation
536301gw.cdr
If modality brand Other is selected a Host Profile with the default printer settings is created. If a specific modality brand (e.g. Siemens) is selected, a Host Profile including these modality specific parameters is created on top of the default printer settings.
DD+DIS275.05E
7.2
Modality set-up
Each modality, from which the customer wants to print, needs the printer DICOM network data, in order to be able to print on the printer. The following data have to be given to the host modality service engineer: AE - title (e.g. DS4500) IP address (e.g. 192.9.200.201) Hostname (e.g. ds4500)
7.3
Logical printers Set-up

Purpose: Define more than one logical printer. This may be required in case a modality sends images from different applications to the printer and the images of the different applications require different image adjustments. See also Info next page Before creating additional logical printers, first try to adjust the Image Quality parameters at modality side! The default Image Quality of the printer fits almost all applications! Only if changes at the modality side cannot be done, or the modality does not deliver the required results, create logical printers and make adaptations for these applications at the printer side to reach the customers Image Quality requirements. Logical Printer Setup is accessible via menu: Browser pages - Service Engineer Tools - DICOM profile editor - Setup DICOM print SCP Servers
DD+DIS275.05E
Default values: Only one logical printer Internal name: DEFAULT_SCP Called AE title: DS4500
HOME HELP DICOM Print SCP Setup
Setup one or more Dicom SCP servers on this device: One 'Dicom Print SCP server' is capable of handling multiple Dicom print associations Dicom Print SCP Internal Name: DEFAULT_SCP Called AE title: DS4500 Listen at Port: 104 Max. allowed associations: 10 Secure channel (SSL): Comments:
OK
Create new Dicom Print SCP
Cancel
Changes require reboot

5363_Reg01_003_e.cdr
Figure 40: Default browser screen for Logical Printer Setup
DD+DIS275.05E
Configuration of logical SCP printers can be necessary, in case printing is initiated at a PACS system, which has several modalities as input. Example: The PACS system collects CR and Mammo images. CR images shall be printed with taste LUT Kanamori Mammo images shall be printed with linear taste LUT and with Mammo application specific adjustments (Dmax 3.6 O.D.; small clear border; chest wall recognition) Problem: The workstation at the PACS system has one AE title. The Drystar 4500 does not recognize, for which type of modality (CR or Mammo) the user wants to print.
Figure 41
Solution: Create one logical printer 'Drystar4500_CT' and one 'Drystar4500_MAMMO'. Create two different host profiles for the two logical printers, one with Kanamori LUT and Mammo parameter set on "no", the other with linear taste LUT and Mammo parameter set on "yes". In the workstation setup both printers: The user has to select the proper logical printer.
The number of logical SCP printers is technically not limited. Because of limited CPU resources we recommend to define max. 4 logical printers.
DD+DIS275.05E
7.4
Printing of test- and diagnostic images

(1) Send one test image and one diagnostic image from every modality to the printer. (2) Put the images at the light box and compare them with the image on the modality monitor. In case the modality monitor is calibrated correctly, the printed images should show the same image impression regarding contrast than the host modality monitor. If the contrast setting is not satisfactory, and the monitor is calibrated correctly, the taste look-up-table adjustment in the printer can correct this. Refer to section 7.5, Adjust Image Quality.
7.5
Adjust Image Quality
Image adjustments in general can be made at the modality and / or the printer. For many modality - printer combinations the required image adjustments are described in a Connectivity Release Document. The systematic image adjustment is split up in following steps: Step # 1 Description Perform adjustments as described in the Connectivity Release Document for the modality - printer combination. If required, try to perform image adjustments at the modality In case the required image adjustment at the modality is not possible, perform it at the printer. Possibility 1: Via Key-operator menu Possibility 2: Via DICOM profile Browser pages Details see... 7.5.1
2 3
7.5.2
7.5.3 7.5.4
A summary of the 3 steps is also available in the Appendix "Image Adjustments Overview". This summary is in the appendix to be able to take the two sheets as a quick reference guide to the customer.
DD+DIS275.05E
In case the printer is part of a solution (e.g. DR Mammography Solution), refer to the solution specific requirements concerning image adjustments.
7.5.1
Image Adjustments as described in the Connectivity Release Document Connectivity Release Documents describe all parameters and required adjustments to guarantee: Communication between modality and the printer Image adjustment at the modality and / or the printer
MEDNET path: Connectivity Release Documents are available in MEDNET, HealthCare Library - General Info - Connectivity & Application
(1) Perform adjustments as described in the Connectivity Release Document (2) In case ... The customer is not satisfied with the adjustments as described in the Connectivity Release Document or For this modality connection no Connectivity Release Document exists continue with next step: Image Adjustment at the Modality. In case a Connectivity Release Document for a modality - printer connection is available for Drystar 5500 or Drystar 5300 only, this can also be used for Drystar 4500 (M). The Drystar 4500 (M) behavior is with some exceptions the same as the behavior of the other printers mentioned above.
DD+DIS275.05E
7.5.2
Image Adjustment at the Modality Before adjusting the image quality at the printer, first try to adjust it at the modality! The default Image Quality of the printer fits almost all applications! Only if changes at the modality cannot be done, or the modality does not deliver the required results, make adaptations for these modalities at the printer to reach the customers Image Quality requirements.
Contrast Adjustment The Look-Up-Table is responsible for the contrast of the image (in combination with Dmin and Dmax) and may be named at the modality as follows: Taste LUT Perception LUT Correction LUT Presentation LUT Usually it is possible to select different taste LUTs at the modality. If possible use the "Kanamori Taste LUT" (if available also Dmax) to define the contrast.
Sharpness Adjustment Case 1: Modality sends in page mode: In case the modality sends the images in page mode (i.e. it does not send single images to the printer but already the complete, prepared image information for one film) use Cubic Bell interpolation. It is defined via following smooth factors: Cubic Bell smooth factors Possible range Reasonable values Printer default value 299 (less sharp) to 200 (very sharp) 251 (less sharp) to 235 (very sharp) 245
DD+DIS275.05E
Interpolation Smooth Factors 299 less sharp 251 245 235 sharp 200 Cubic Bell
Legend Limits Default 299 251 245 235 200
too sharp
Reasonable values
536601GJ.CDR
Figure 42
Case 2: Modality sends in image mode: In case the modality sends the images in image mode (i.e. it sends single images to the printer to let the printer compose the single images for one film) use Cubic High Res interpolation. It is defined via following smooth factors: Cubic HighRes smooth factors Possible range Reasonable values Printer Default value 199 (less sharp) to 101 (very sharp) 148 (less sharp) to 138 (very sharp) 143
Interpolation Smooth Factors 199 less sharp 148 143 138 sharp 101 Cubic High Res
too sharp
536601GK.CDR
Figure 43
DD+DIS275.05E
The printer switches automatically to cubic Bell interpolation when no image scaling (i.e. magnification or reduction) is required: Cubic HighRes interpolation type does not sharpen the image. Interpolation type 'Cubic Bell' sharpens the image however, independent whether scaling is required or not.
This automatic switching is only performed in case the Interpolation Type is adjusted to 'cubic high res' in the user profile (= default). This behavior can be switched off via browser pages: Path "Service Tools Scaling Setup"
HOME HELP Controller Setup Reduction icon on image: yes Kernel: when no image scaling is needed for CubicHighRes: Automatically switch to CubicBell: Use CubicBell smooth factor: 0.9 OK Changes require reboot
536401GN.CDR
yes
( >= 0.1 and <= 10 )
Figure 44
DD+DIS275.05E
7.5.3
Basic Image Adjustment at the Printer via Key-Operator Menu
Figure 45 The following modality parameters can be changed at the printer side via menu 3 Change Settings - 5 Image Quality - <Modality Name>: Look-up table Interpolation Dmax Figure 45 shows the different screens at the local keypad. Figure 46 shows the valid "Kanamori_like values". Figure 47 show the possible smooth factor values for Cubic Bell and Cubic HighRes interpolation smoothfactors.
DD+DIS275.05E
Possible Look up table settings Dmax
Kanamori curve and Kanamori like value 220

mori Kana
200 100 75
Kanamori_like 100 = Kanamori Kanamori_like 200 = linear Kanamori_like 220 = logarithmic Input 255
536401GM.CDR
Dmin 0
Figure 46
Interpolation Smooth Factors (Kernel values)

1.1 0.9 0.7
Legend Limits Default

5.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.1
5.9
0.1
Cubic Bell
Reasonable values
4.9 less sharp -0.2 -0.7 -1.2 sharp -4.9
536601GL.CDR
Cubic High Res
too sharp
Figure 47
Interpolation setting "Linear" usually gives too smooth image impression. Interpolation settings "Replication" usually gives too "pixely" image impression. Both settings are used in exceptional cases only.
For details regarding image adjustments refer to the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS078.05E.
DD+DIS275.05E
Each of the image adjustment parameters can be set for a specific modality. Changing a parameter value will change the value of the respective parameters in the 'DICOM Host profile for that specific modality.
Important remark: In changing parameter values this does not automatically ensure that the value is applied. Two situations can be distinguished In case the modality does not send a parameter, the value set in the printer is applied to the modality print job. In case the modality sends a parameter value, even when an empty value (" ") is sent, this value still has priority above the value set in the printer. So, the value sent by the modality has higher priority then the value set in the printer, and therefore it is always preferred to set the required parameter value at the side of the modality. If this cannot be done, an overrule flag can be set for the respective parameter in the 'DICOM Host profile'. Setting this overrule flag can only be done by editing the 'DICOM Host profile' via browser. Refer to section 7.5.4.
DD+DIS275.05E
7.5.4
Alternative: Image settings via DICOM host profile: Accessible via menu: Purpose: Browser pages - Service Engineer Tools - DICOM profile editor Adjust Image Quality in case it cannot be adapted at the modality Refer to Figure 48
HELP Host Profile: Name XYZ
Default value: Example browser screen:
These are the default settings for all print jobs coming from the host (modality) specified under 'Calling AE title'. The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input. You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the left side. Nick Name: Name XYZ Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': Host AE Use this profile only for local SCP server: all Host Profile type: GENERIC-GENERIC Change Number of Copies: Print Priority: low Polarity: normal Film Orientation: portrait Trim: no Film Size ID: Medium Type: Print even if Film Size ID/Medium type not supported: yes Print even if Application type not supported: no Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes): 100 site Edit Custom Kernel: Magnification: Edit Edit Pixel Size: Perception LUT: kanamori Kanamori Like value: Custom value: Illumination (cd/m2): Reflected Ambient Light (cd/m2): Border Density (OD x100): Empty Image Density (OD x100): Minimum Density (OD x100): site Maximum Density (OD x100): Header Annotation: Contents: none Edit Custom Font: site Edit Custom Footer Annotation: Contents: none Edit Custom Font: site Edit Custom Window (%): Level (%): Image Orientation: r0 Conformance/Status Level: 0 Nevent enabled: off Mammo modality: NO site Association Timeout (s): Image Timeout (s): Allow IMPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: Allow EXPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: Allow EXPLICIT VR BIG ENDIAN: Resolution: 508 Supported SOP classes: Edit LR like: off OK Cancel Show Defaults Show last Input
Manually customized items are show in red The last received input values are show in blue (click 'Show Last Input' button)
536301qr.cdr
Figure 48
DD+DIS275.05E
For details regarding image adjustments refer to the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS078.05E.
For each of these parameters the value used can be set for a specific modality. Changing a parameter value will change the value of the respective parameters in the 'DICOM Host profile for that specific modality. Important remark: In changing parameter values this does not automatically ensure that the value is applied. In application, if the value is set at the printers side there has to be a distinction between the two situations: In case the modality does not send a parameter, the value set in the printer is applied to the modality print job. In case the modality sends a parameter value, even when an empty value (" ") is sent, this value still has priority above the value set in the printer. So, the value sent by the modality has higher priority then the value set in the printer, and therefore it is always preferred to set the required parameter value at the side of the modality. If this cannot be done, an overrule flag (Checkboxes at the left side of the DICOM host profile; see Figure 48) can be set for the respective parameter in the 'DICOM Host profile'. Setting this overrule flag can only be done by editing the 'DICOM Host profile' via web browser access (see chapter 3.2, Tools).
DD+DIS275.05E
Acceptance Test
Purpose of the acceptance test: Proof of printer reproduction capability of image on the monitor
Figure 49 Perform the acceptanc test according to national regulations. Example for Germany: DIN6868 Part 56 The German DIN6868 Part 56 is similar to the Image Quality Control procedure based on IEC1223-2-4. The Image Quality Control procedure based on IEC 1223-2-4 is described in the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS078.05E
DD+DIS275.05E
Completion of Installation
The purpose of this section is to show the required steps to finalize the installation. The following table lists these tasks: Task Instruct the Customer in operation of the printer Confirm installation Enter site data Save settings on backup floppy Via Service Web Pages How to access/enter 4 -Details see.. 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4
The time required for the steps within this subsection should be entered in the service/installation report under task code INS.
Task code:
= service menu
DD+DIS275.05E
9.1
Customer Instruction
(1) Instruct the customer in following tasks: Task Switching on the printer: Warm up time 3 min. Switching off the printer. It can take up to 20 secs. until the printer switches off Loading films Removing film jams Refer to User or Reference Manual .... User manual: "Switching on the Drystar 4500" User Manual: "Switching off the Drystar 4500" User Manual: "Loading films" Reference manual "Troubleshooting: Clearing of film jams"
Show dust stripes on a previous test film and Reference manual how to prevent: "Troubleshooting Checklist" Keep printer always closed Clean TH resistor line with alcohol and lint free cloth when dust stripes appear or when printer displays "Printhead cleaning (2) Hand over the user and reference manual to the customer
9.2
Confirm Installation
It is necessary to confirm the installation for the printer warranty. This can only be done in the service menu:
(1) Select the service menu (2) Leave it again by pressing . Now the "Installation Confirmation" screen appears. (3) Press to store the current date as installation date. Figure 50
DD+DIS275.05E
9.3
Site Data Entry

Accessible via menu: Purpose: Service menu - 6 Configure - 2 Printer Settings - 6 Site Data Fill in site data to have an entry in the infocounter about the installation site. None
Default value: Example browser screen:
Welcome to this DryStar 4X00 printer
Service - CONFIGURE
Site Site name: Site address: Site city: Department name: Phone number: Modem number: Comment:
Accept Changes
Discard Changes
Reset Values
5363_Reg01_008_e.cdr
Figure 51
DD+DIS275.05E
9.4
Save Configuration
Change settings Print image
Save Configuration
Restore Configuration Installation
536301en.cdr
(1) In the key-operator menu select the "Save configuration" screen. (2) Press to store the configuration. (3) Follow the instructions displayed on the keypad. The backup floppy is located inside the printer. Refer to Figure 53.
Figure 52
2 1
536301gv.cdr
Figure 53
DD+DIS275.05E
Appendix
Installation Checklist
Purpose of the installation checklist is: To give an overview of all steps, that are required for the installation of the printer. To provide a reference to the corresponding section of the "Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedure section", where the topic is further explained. # Step Installation Prerequisites: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check installation site prerequisites Compare voltage indicated on type label with available power supply Check shipment completeness Remove transport protection blocks Mount the drum drive belt Mount the thermal head screwdriver Confirm installation readiness Printer Set-up: 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Connect the mains and network cable Set printer at its final position and set the brakes Switch on the printer Load films Perform automatic film calibration Printer Settings Selection / Set-up: 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. Select Language Select Date and time Select Film format Select Film type Select Film view Select Film calibration on/off Select Default densitometer SIC SIC SIC SIC SIC SIC SIC 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 INS INS INS INS INS 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 INS INS INS INS INS INS INS 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 Task Code Refer to Okay section
Chapter 1 / A Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
20. #
Adjust Beeps on empty tray Step Network Settings Selection / Set-up:
SIC Task Code
5.8 Refer to Okay section
21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.
Select Printer AE_title Select Hostname Select IP-address Select Service Host Select Netmask Select Router IP address Printer - Modality connection
SIC SIC SIC SIC SIC SIC
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.
Select Modality Modality set-up Set-up logical printers Print test and diagnostic images Adjust image settings Acceptance Test Perform acceptance test Completion of Installation:
APP APP SIC APP APP APPL
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 8
33. 34. 35. 36.
Instruct the Customer in operation of the printer Confirm installation Enter site data Save configuration on backup floppy
APPL INS INS INS
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4
Chapter 1 / B Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Removal of transport protection blocks

Protection foam in upper tray
A
2 1
1 3
536301ca.cdr
Protection foam in lower tray
536301cb.cdr
Chapter 1 / C Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Thermal head protection
C
4
2 1
536301cc.cdr
Chapter 1 / D Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Film output unit protection and Film hand-over protection
536301cd.cdr
MEB board protection
536301ce.cdr
Make sure that the metal MEB board cover is locked down on both sides when the tape is removed. If not, you may get an image artifact.
Chapter 1 / E Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Macrodensitometer protection
2 1
536301cf.cdr
Chapter 1 / F Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Image Adjustments Overview

Step 1:
Get up-to-date Connectivity Release Document from MedNet, HealthCare Library
Path: General Info
Connectivity & Application
Perform image adjustments as described at the Modality and/or the Printer Continue with Step 2, in case the customer is not satisfied with the image or for this modality no Connectivity Release Document exists
In case the printer is part of a solution (e.g. DR Mammography Solution), refer to the solution specific requirements concerning image adjustments.
Step 2: Try to adjust Contrast and Sharpness at the Modality
Contrast Adjustment
Use Kanamori Taste LUT If available also Dmax
Sharpness Adjustment
Cubic High Res + smoothfactor 2 (modality sends in image mode) or Cubic Bell + smoothfactor 2 (modality sends in page mode)
Interpolation Smooth Factors (DICOM values)3 Software > SW Rel. 3 299 251 245 235 200 Cubic Bell
199 less sharp
148
143 138 sharp
101
Cubic High Res
too sharp
Legend
Limits Default 299 251 245 235 200
Useable values
Refer to note 1 next page Refer to note 2 next page 3 Refer to note 3 next page
2
536401gh.cdr
Chapter 1 / G Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Contrast and Sharpness adjustment at the Modality
The Look-Up-Table, which is responsible (in combination with Dmin and Dmax) for the contrast of the image, may be named at the modality Taste LUT Perception LUT Correction LUT Presentation LUT 536401gh.cdr
In case of "Presentation LUT" selection, also enter lightbox illumination and reflected ambient light.
Autoswitch to cubic bell functionality of the printer: When no image scaling (i.e. magnification or reduction) is required, Cubic HighRes interpolation type does not sharpen the image. Interpolation type 'Cubic Bell' sharpnes the image however, independant whether scaling is required or not. This automatic adjustment is only used, in case the Interpolation Type is adjusted to 'cubic high res' in the user profile (= default).
HOME HELP Controller Setup
Access to this window: Browser Pages

yes
Reduction icon on image: yes Kernel: when no image scaling is needed for CubicHighRes: Automatically switch to CubicBell: Use CubicBell smooth factor: 0.9 OK Changes require reboot
Service Tools Scaling Setup
( >= 0.1 and <= 10 )
At printers with Software < SW Rel. 2 the interpolation smoothfactor setting is different compared to printers with Software > SW Rel. 3.
Interpolation Smooth Factors (DICOM values) Software < SW Rel. 2 299 221 217 207 200
Cubic Bell
199 less sharp
135 125 115
101
Cubic High Res
sharp
too sharp
Chapter 1 / H Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Step 3: In case Contrast and Sharpness adjustment at the Modality not possible, adjust it at printer. Can be made via 1 local keypad 2 Service Engineer Browser pages 1 Contrast and Sharpness adjustment
via key-operator menu "Image Quality" Access via Keypad or Browser Key-Operator Menu 3 Change Settings 5 Image Quality Contrast * Adjustment <select Modality> 2 Select Other 1 Look up table Kanamori Linear Kanamori_like Cubic Bell Cubic High Res Linear Replication 2.80 - 3.20 (2.80 - 3.80 Mammo printers)
* Sharpness Adjustment
2 Interpolation 3 Dmax
2 Contrast and Sharpness Adjustment

via DICOM Host Profile Access via Browser only
HELP
Host Profile: Name XYZ
These are the default settings for all print jobs coming from the host (modality) specified under 'Calling AE title'. The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input. You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the left side. Nick Name: Name XYZ Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': Host AE Use this profile only for local SCP server: all Host Profile type: GENERIC-GENERIC Change Kernel: site Edit Custom
* Sharpness Adjustment
Perception LUT: kanamori Kanamori Like value: Custom value:
* Contrast Adjustment
Maximum Density (OD x 100) LR like: off OK Cancel Show Defaults
site
300
Show last Input

536301gh.cdr
Manually customized items are show in red
*Refer to notes next page
Chapter 1 / I Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Contrast and Sharpness adjustment at the printer
Interpolation Smooth Factors (Kernel values) Software > SW Rel. 3 5.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.1 Cubic Bell
4.9 less sharp
-0.2 -0.7 -1.2 sharp
-4.9
Cubic High Res
too sharp
At printers with Software < SW Rel. 2 the interpolation smoothfactor setting is different compared to printers with Software > SW Rel. 3.
Interpolation Smooth Factors (Kernel Values) Software < SW Rel. 2 5.9 0.5 0.35 0.15 0.1
Cubic Bell
4.9 less sharp
-1.7 -2.5 -3.3
-4.9
Cubic High Res
sharp
too sharp
Perception LUT / Look up table settings at the Printer Dmax
Kanamori curve and Kanamori like value 220

mori Kana
200 100 75
Kanamori_like 100 = Kanamori Kanamori_like 200 = linear Kanamori_like 220 = logarithmic Input 255
Dmin 0
For more details refer to the Hardcopy Application Manual on MEDNET, GSO Library
Legend
Limits Default 4.9 -0.2 -0.7 -1.2 Useable values
536401gh.cdr
-4.9
Chapter 1 / J Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS110.05E
Functional Description
List of Contents 1 2
2.1
Introduction ................................................................................1 Drystar 4500 M: Printer for digital Mammography..................2

Details about mammography functionality.............................................. 2
3
3.1 3.2
Comparison Drystar 4500 to other AGFA B&W printers ........5

Technical data ............................................................................................ 5 Technology and image manipulation....................................................... 6
4
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
Filmrun........................................................................................7
Film input unit ............................................................................................ 7 Drum assembly and Print head unit......................................................... 8 Film handover unit..................................................................................... 9 Film output unit.........................................................................................10
5 6 7
7.1 7.2
Hardware Components............................................................11 Calibrations ..............................................................................13 Software....................................................................................14

Software Architecture...............................................................................14 Error handling Drystar 4500.....................................................................15
7.2.1 Online Diagnosis: Error Classification and treatment.............................................16 7.2.2 Offline Diagnosis: Components..............................................................................17
7.3
Thermal Model: A#Sharp..........................................................................18
Layout specifications of Drystar 4500 and Drystar 4500 M .21
Chapter 2 / I
DD+DIS110.05E
Introduction
Purpose of the printer High resolution (508 dpi) DICOM network printer for 8x10" and 10x12" films. Printing principle Direct thermal transfer on thermo-sensitive, dry films with blue based or clear based base-layer. Main application Drystar 4500 fits particularly to CR / DR applications (like ADC Compact Plus or ADC Solo). Refer to Figure 1. Drystar 4500 M fits particularly to Digital Mammography applications. Both printers (Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M) fit to all other medical applications, too Connections Only network connection Service Concept Customer installable No service PC needed for installation, maintenance and service Replacements mainly on assembly level Full remote service capability Interactive printer online diagnosis: All switches, sensors and motors are monitored via current measurement on main engine board. If online diagnosis does not detect the exact reason for the error, an offline diagnosis system based on an expert system assists in troubleshooting.
AGFATEK Link Printer Ultrasound
ADC QS
Digitizer: ADC Compact Plus
53 63 02 aa .cd r
Figure 1: Typical network installation of a Drystar 4500
Chapter 2 / 1
DD+DIS110.05E
Drystar 4500 M: Printer for digital Mammography

Digital mammography is a mammography system where x-ray film is replaced by solid-state detectors that convert x-rays into electric signals. These detectors are similar to those found in digital cameras. The electrical signals are used to produce images of the breast that can be seen on a computer screen or printed on special films to look like regular mammograms. From the patient's point of view, mammography with a Full Field Digital Mammography (FFDM) system is essentially the same as the screen-film system. The mammograms will be taken the same way. Special at the Drystar 4500 M compared to the Drystar 4500 is the higher density (Dmax up to 3.7 O.D.) and the smaller borders. The smaller borders require higher accuracy in horizontal adjustment. This is achieved with a new 'horizontal image adjustment' (used in 'Mechanics 2 Printers').
Differences Drystar 4500M compared to Drystar 4500: New layouts compared to CR/DR printers (different size of printable area) Clear and black borders are minimized 'Triangle corners' are blank High accuracy in horizontal alignment Chest wall recognition done by means of image recognition software
2.1
Details about mammography functionality

Main requirements for a digital mammography printer: Dmax 3.6 Resolution 10 line pairs per mm (508 dpi) Images with black borders, to have no 'dazzling' light between the images of the left and right breast. The Drystar 4500 M reaches all of these requirements. For a thermal printer, however, it is not possible to really print black borders. Black borders can only be printed contact less (e.g. with a laser beam), as otherwise the thermal head would have to print a few lines on the print drum, to equalize tolerances in film width and film centering. Printing on the print drum and especially on the sharp edges of the film would destroy the sensitive thermal head.
Chapter 2 / 2
DD+DIS110.05E
Functional Description To achieve the goal 'black borders' the Drystar 4500 M the proceeding in the printer is as follows: 1. A minimal clear border of approx. 1.1 mm is printed. Refer to Figure 2: Mammography layout and section 8, Layout specifications of Drystar 4500 and Drystar 4500 M. 2. A 'chest wall recognition software' analyzes the image data and determines the chest wall of the image (i.e. the opposite side of the nipple). The 'chest wall' of the image will be printed towards the side of the film with the minimal clear border. As the border is minimal, the corners of the film are partly blank, due to the round edges of the film (otherwise the Drystar 4500 M would possibly print on the film edge or the drum). This is what we call 'triangle corners are blank'. 3. Additionally the chest wall recognition software determines which image is the left and which one the right breast by determination of the graphical 'center of gravity' of the image. The Drystar 4500 M then rotates the image of the left breast by 180 before printing. 4. Before hanging the image at the lightbox, the customer is rotating the image of the left breast again by 180, and overlaps the two images by > 1 mm, leading to a black border between the two images. Refer to Figure 3.
3.5 mm
2.5 mm
1.1 mm 4672 pixel
0.25 mm
1.1 mm
2.5 mm
3.6 mm
8 x 10 Diagnostic Area
3728 pixel 1.0 mm
Diagnostic Area
5760 pixel
0.2 mm 4.0 mm
3.6 mm
12 x 10
4672 pixel 2.0 mm
2.5 mm
0.25 mm
536302va.cdr
Figure 2: Mammography layouts For exact specifications of the 8x10" and 12x10" layouts refer to section 8, page 21.
4.0 mm
1.1 mm
Chapter 2 / 3
DD+DIS110.05E
Film 1
Printed 180 rotated
Film 2
Rotate 180 before hanging at the lightbox
Chapter 2 / 4
L
Lightbox
Figure 3
DD+DIS110.05E
3
3.1
Comparison Drystar 4500 to other AGFA B&W printers

Technical data
DRYS TAR
3000
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M Weight [kg] Power [W] 95 530 (100-240 V, 50/60 Hz; Autoswitching power supply)
Drystar 3000 125 920 (100-240 V, 50/60 Hz; Autoswitching power supply)
LR5200 475 300 (LR-S) to 3000 (LRP) (200 to 240 V; Voltage adaptation necessary) 80 (14"x17") up to 240 (8x10")
Throughput [films / h]
SW 1.94: 55 (10"x12") up 50 up to 70 (14"x17) to 61 (8"x10) SW 2.0: 66 (10"x12") up to 86 (8"x10)
Access time Density [O.D.] Resolution [dpi] Number of resistors of TH: Grey levels Warm-up time [minuntes] Lifetime of print head Film Shelf life: Archivability Nr. of simultaneous Inputs
approx. 1,5 min. for 8x10" approx. 1 min. approx. 2 min for 10x12" <0,23... 3.1 (DS4500) <0,23... 3.7 (DS4500M) 508 4992 4096 out of 65535 3 3 years or 90.000 films 18 months 30 years 10 DICOM network associations <0,25...... 3.1 320 4352 256 out of 4096 5 > 30.000 films 18 months 30 years 3 local+6 network (APIP/DICOM/PS) 14x17, 14x14, 14x11 1
approx. 1 min. <0,1...... 3,8 315 to 630 (switchable) 256 or 4096 out of 65535 1 up to approx. 20 with processor Laser tube > 20.000 h 24 months 30 years 3 local +7 network (APIP/DICOM/PS) 8x10, 11x14, 14x14, 14x17 2
Film formats [inch] 8 x 10, 10 x 12 Film formats used simultaneously 2
Chapter 2 / 5
DD+DIS110.05E
Max. number of image pixels on a film
4844 x 5856 (10 x12") 12 bit
4256 x 5174 (14x17") 8 bit 22,02 MB All medical applications
8512 x 10348 (14x17" high res) 8 bit 88, 08 MB All medical applications. High quality images
Max. size of image 56,73 MB composition map Applications All medical applications
3.2
Technology and image manipulation

DRYS TAR
3000
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M Drystar 3000 Printing principle: Calibration: Dmax monitoring Image formats Operating system Direct thermal Automatic yes (default) DICOM, TIFF, PS (Option) Portex Java Direct thermal Automatic yes (default)
LR5200 Photochemical via red laser beam manual or semi automatic no
APIP, DICOM, TIFF, PS APIP, DICOM, TIFF, PS (Option) (Option) Portex (AOS shell) telnet, ftp yes Adjustments to be performed by service / application specialist at the printer. Portex (AOS shell) telnet, ftp yes Adjustments to be performed by service / application specialist at the MG3000.
Network protocols telnet, ftp, SMTP, for remote service HTTP Interpolation Other image manipulation (taste LUT etc.) yes Adjustments are made at the modality in the DICOM settings. In exceptional cases adjustments can be done via "DICOM host profile editor" at the printer.
Chapter 2 / 6
DD+DIS110.05E
4
4.1
Filmrun
Film input unit
Time
Part 1
From: rear film edge on position 1 To: front film edge on position 2
536302bk.cdr
Example: Filmrun of 8x10" film from upper magazine
Note: In this table and the sketches on this page only parts are mentioned, that are involved in this specific part of the filmrun.
M4
S3
Filmrun START Display: Upper input tray empty

Sensor S3 detected empty magazine ?
Comment S3 is checked for empty magazine when M4 turns backwards (see step at "2.2 secs"). The status of S3 is remembered till the printer is ready for printing the next film. First M4 presses rollers against the film. Second it transports the film out of the magazine. The roller pair driven by M5 (which runs backwards) transports the film between magazine and M9. The roller pair driven by M9 transports the film downwards, before it is free falling.
M5
S14
0 sec. yes no
0.1 secs
Start motor M4
M9 S9 S18
0.1 secs Start motor M5 backwards
0.2 secs
Start motor M9
M1
0.3 secs Activate solenoid EM1 Sets the stop for an 8x10" film
EM2 EM1
Drum S10
1.7 secs
Display: Remove film jam
no
Sensor S14 detects film?
S14 checks the correct filmrun between film magazine and S9. yes
2.2 secs
536302ba1.cdr
Start motor M4 backwards
By turning M4 backwards the film transport rollers are lifted away from the film. The film is completely out of the magazine.
Note: The belt and gear drives are simplified !
3.8 secs
Stop motor M4
4.9 secs
no
S9 checks the correct filmrun between M9 and S10.. yes A backwards rotating drum prevents the film from sticking on the drum. It assists the free fall of the film. The cover sheet has a hole. Sensor S18 and S9 detect this hole, no matter which way the cover sheet was (by mistake) left in the magazine. The film does not need the assistance of motor M5 anymore, as it is free falling now.
S14
5.0 secs
S3 M5 M4 M1
M9
5.4 secs
Display: Remove cover sheet
Sensor S18 and S9 detect cover no sheet?
S18
6.6 secs
Stop motor M5
To keep the flowchart simple, the release of the different sensors is not described. In case a sensor is not released in time, an error message is generated, too.
7.3 secs
no
Sensor S10 detects film? yes
The film is now resting on the stops of the vertical alignment. Motor M9 is not needed anymore. The film is already transported completely down. The assistance of motor M1 is not needed anymore. The film is already transported completely down. The film is centered by pressing it against a fixed reference stud.
7.4 secs
Stop motor M9
7.5 secs
Stop Motor M1
S9 S10
EM2
EM1
7.6 secs 8.0 secs. Activate solenoid EM2 (2x)
flowchart_filminput.cdr
Chapter 2 / 7
DD+DIS110.05E
Part 2 Example: Filmrun of 8x10" film from upper magazine
Time
4.2
Drum assembly and Print head unit
3 2
536302bi.cdr
Comment
8.1 secs
Start motor M3
Motor M3 drives the TH towards the drum. The final position is called "print position": The TH has close contact to the film. As the film is soon fixed between TH and drum, the clamping of EM2 is not needed anymore. TH print position is detected by a certain sequence of S1/S2 interrupts yes
8.3 secs
De-activate solenoid EM2
S1 S2 M3 TH F1 S12
8.3 secs 10.9 secs.
Display: HC108XY Printer Defect. Call Service
no
Sensor S1/S2 detect TH print position?
8.7 secs
Start fan F1
To have constant TH temperature during printing, F1 blows air to the TH.
10.9 secs
Stop motor M3
As the TH is in print position now, M3 stops. The drum, driven by M1, starts to move the film upwards. Printing starts. The first 10" pixel row is written on the film.
EM2
11.6 secs Start motor M1
EM1
11.6 secs
536302ba2.cdr
Start printing: First pixel row is transferred to the film

19.5 secs
no
Sensor S12 detects film? yes
S12 checks the filmrun between the drum and S13 Printing is finished. The last 10" pixel row is written on the film.
46.5 secs
Stop printing: Last pixel row is transferred to the film
46.5 secs
De-activate solenoid EM1
The 8x10" stop is not needed anymore, as the film is on its way up. As soon as M1 stops, the film is not further transported upwards. It stands still for 2.2 secs waiting for the TH to go to its home position. Printing is finished, so cooling of the TH is not needed anymore.
46.5 secs
Stop motor M1
46.6 secs
Stop Fan F1
flowchart_print.cdr
S1
S2
M1
M9
S12 EM1
F1
M3 S8
EM2
Chapter 2 / 8
Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363/100)
DD+DIS110.05E
4.3
Film handover unit

3
Part 3
536302bh.cdr
Time
Comment
46.6 secs
Start motor M6
By switching M6 on, the roller pair of M6 is pressed on the film. M6 is switched off again, as the film is not yet released by the TH. If M6 would go on turning, the film would be stretched (as the TH/drum still clamp it). M3 moves the TH towards home position.
S13 M2 S1 S2 M3
47.5 secs
Stop motor M6
47.6 secs
Start motor M3
M6
47.8 secs 50.3 secs
Display: HC108XY Printer Defect. Call Service no Sensor S1/S2 detect TH print position?
TH home position is detected by a certain sequence of S1/S2 interrupts yes
48.6 secs
Start motor M2
M2 starts to be prepared for the film soon driven again upwards. Now the roller pair of M6 transports the film upwards again .
48.7 secs
Start motor M6
50.4 secs
536302ba0.cdr
Stop motor M3
The TH is now in its home position.

54.5 secs
Display: Remove internal jam
S13 checks the filmrun between S12 and S15. yes The film is now driven by M2, so M6 is not needed anymore.
54.6 secs
Stop motor M6
flowchart_filmhandover.cdr
S13
M2
S1 S2
M6
M3
Chapter 2 / 9
DD+DIS110.05E
5
4.4
Film output unit

Part 4
4 From: rear film edge on position 1 To: front film edge on position 2 5
536302bj.cdr
M7
Time
S15
Comment
54.6 secs
M2
Lifts the film transport roller pair up, to keep the film path free for the next film.
55.8 secs
M6
Stop motor M6
The roller pair is in its home position.
73.7 secs
Display: Remove output jam
Sensor S15 Start motor M3
no
detects film?
S15 checks the filmrun between S13 and film output. yes
73.8 secs
Start motor M7
M7 is ready to transport the film out of the printer. The film is laying on the top cover. M7 is not needed anymore.
91.9 secs
Stop motor M7
536302ba4.cdr
92.0 secs
Stop motor M2
The film is laying on the top cover. M2 is not needed anymore.
Filmrun finished 8x10" upper magazine

flowchart_filmoutput.cdr
S15 M7
M2
M6
Chapter 2 / 10
DD+DIS110.05E
Hardware Components
This section shows an overview of all hardware components and lists their purpose.
Key 4 board Display Proteus CPU Power PC 740 128 MB RAM RS232 IDE ETH FireWire Sensors Motors Solenoids RS232 MEB board Power PC 850 32 MB RAM Thermal Head Power Supply Floppy drive SCSI Hard disk drive > 4 MB
DSH Board Densitometer Control
536302da.cdr
Figure 4: Hardware Components Overview Hardware Component Proteus CPU / Crius CPU (as of April 2005) Description CPU. Keeps the operating system and application software in RAM (Proteus 128 MB / Crius 256 MB) during operation. Keeps a flash EPROM for Bootup Provides for following connections: SCSI interface to hard disk IDE interface to floppy drive FireWire Interface to MEB board Ethernet 10/100 Mb/sec. twisted pair interface RS232 service port Connection to Key 4 board Has no direct access to the hard disk, it has to fetch its programs via the FireWire connection Controls all sensors, motors and solenoids Controls the power supply Controls the DSH board Sends the image data to the Thermal Head
MEB Board
Chapter 2 / 11
DD+DIS110.05E
Key 4 Board
Controls the display with 240 (width) x 64 (height) pixels Controls all buttons and LEDs required for operation Controls the halogen lamp of the densitometer Reads the density values Hard disk with size of 18,3 Gbyte up to 73 GB or higher. It keeps the operating system, all application software and diagnostic data. The harddisk is divided into four partitions: Partition C: application software with fixed data, write protected during normal operation Partition D: variable data to be changed during operation like configuration files, HW specific installable data (TH data), user images and image annotation files, datasets archives, calibration files.Partition E: composed image / diagnostic data to print on the film (data image composition maps)Partition F: image queue with diagnostic data 3 inch floppy disk drive to save or install data via floppy disk Transfers the diagnostic data (pixels) via 4992 heating elements to the heat sensitive film Supplies all voltages for the printer (+3,3 V, + 5 V, +12 V, -12 V, +20 V, +24 V, + 55V) Connected via RS232 interface to the MEB board, to allow saving temporary data before switch off
DSH Board
Hard disk
Floppy drive Thermal head
Power supply
Chapter 2 / 12
DD+DIS110.05E
Calibrations
The following table lists the different Drystar 4500 calibrations:
MDM TH profile Film Registration
Film printed
Purpose
To determine new reference values for the densitometer assembly. This is done via an external densitometer.
To reduce vertical macro banding (vertical density irregularities). Only macro density compensation is possible (in opposite to micro compensation in production) due to the measurement resolution of about 5 pixels. At maintenance Unacceptable line artifacts visible in medical service test image After replacement of the thermal head After replacement of the print drum
To measure the film sensitometry and to use these values for internal reference, so that the printer behaves linear regarding density reproduction. In addition, the maximum density is adapted
Reduces the mechanical missregistration of the densitometer assembly carriage during a film scan
To be done .....
Whenever the internal densitometer has to be adapted to an external densitometer (for image quality control) if density reproduction check is not ok After densitometer assembly replacement After exchange of the densitometer lamp
At maintenance To compensate small density variations of the new film, when a new film package is used. In case of a drift of the maximum density.
Refer to comment below
Automatic yes/no
no
Yes; no. of cycles between two calibrations can be adapted.* -
yes, but only if switched on**
no
Comment
Part of TH profile calibration wizard
* to be adapted via service menu '6 configure - 2 printer settings - Cycles to calibrate TH' ** to be switched on via menu '2 Change settings - 5 Image Quality - 1 General Select Default for Film Calibration. Edition 2, Revision 2 Agfa Company Confidential Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110) Chapter 2 / 13
DD+DIS110.05E
Software
The chapter 'Software' is divided in two subchapters subchapter Software Architecture Error handling Refer to ... 7.1 7.2
The content of these sub-chapters is independent from the printer software version.
7.1
Software Architecture
Portex utils
EDT XT ZIP UNZIP
Application Software Hard disk Java virtual machine + JIT compiler
Boot EPROM
PORTEX - DOS disk operating system + network servers (portex commands) PORTEX - MON: monitor (monitor commands)
536302dh.cdr
Figure 5: Software Architecture SW Module Portex Mon Portex DOS Description Monitor level of the operating system Portex on the boot EPROM. Starts up basic commands even when access to the data on hard disk is not possible. The prompt mon> is shown if bootup via hard disk was not performed. Operating system on the boot EPROM. Starts up disk operating system and network protocols like http, telnet and ftp, even if access to the data on hard disk is not possible. Utilities on the boot Eprom for software installation Platform for the application software Can only be loaded from hard disk Software for printing Can only be loaded from hard disk Figure 6
Portex Utils Java Application Software
Chapter 2 / 14
DD+DIS110.05E
7.2
Error handling Drystar 4500

The printer has an "online" diagnosis system, that permanently monitors the device. About 80% of all errors will be clearly detected by this "online" diagnosis system. In case the reason for a defect is not clear, the (offline) diagnosis software has to be started. This offline diagnosis software is based on an expert system.
Reason and cure clear
Image faults Unexpected software problems Reason not clear start Diagnosis Software
Figure 7
errors.cdr
Chapter 2 / 15
DD+DIS110.05E
7.2.1
Online Diagnosis: Error Classification and treatment Errors are internally divided into incidents warnings defects
In general incidents are user clearable, warnings are "key-operator" (= experienced user or hospital technician) clearable, whereas defects have to be repaired by service personnel. Warnings and error messages are written into the infocounter.
Errors: Classification and treatment Filmrun Step 1 user clearable Message in plain text. E.g. 'close upper cover'
Online Diagnosis
key-operator clearable everything okay? yes Infocounter service clearable Filmrun Step n Error message: HC10907: Decurl motor M2 not connected or malfunctioning no incident warning defect Message in plain text: E.g. Decurl unit has shut down
Reason not 100% clear
Start Offline Diagnosis Software
Reason clear! E.g. Motor M7 defective or disconnected. Replace CM+........
error_handling.cdr
Figure 8
Chapter 2 / 16
DD+DIS110.05E
7.2.2
Offline Diagnosis: Components The "offline" printer diagnosis is based on an expert system. This expert system guides the service engineer at troubleshooting. AD converters on the MEB board measure the current through the different sensors, switches and consumers in the different assemblies of the device. The diagnose manager controls the tests of the different modules, and gives feedback to the expert system.
53
63 0
2a b.c dr
fact advice
Expert system
Ok / not okay
Printer Diagnosis
Initiate test
Diagnose manager
Film Input Unit Densito meter Module Print head unit D Film hand over Unit Film Output Unit
Drum assembly
MEB Board
Current yes/no
M
diagnosis1.cdr
Figure 9 For more information to the printer diagnosis refer to chapter 3.2, 'Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary means', subchapter Printer Diagnosis.
Chapter 2 / 17
DD+DIS110.05E
7.3
Thermal Model
The thermal model is a mathematical description of the interaction Film TH.. The thermal model uses parameters like film thickness, thermal conductivity of the film, TH temperature; environmental temperature, print speed and resolution of the print head. The thermal model TMML (Thermal Model Multi Layer; R&D name of the product official name 'A # Sharp') describes this interaction more accurate, leading to a very precise reproduction of the image. It does not use new parameters for calculating. Refer to Figure 10 and Table 1. With the thermal model "TMML" the image looks much sharper and has the image quality of a Laser Imager.
Parameter 3 Parameter 2 Parameter 4
Parameter 1
Parameter 5
Thermal Model
Pixel Stream
Mathematical Thermal Model Description of Interaction Film - TH
Pixel Stream
Parameter X
Parameter 6
Parameter 9 Parameter 8
Figure 10 Software Version SW Version 1.9X SW Version 2.XX SW Version 3.0.0
Parameter 7
Type of Thermal Model Thermal Model Version 1 Thermal Model Version 1 TMML
Table 1: Correlation between SW Version and Thermal Model
Chapter 2 / 18
DD+DIS110.05E
Consequences of the new thermal model TMML: # 1 Description Crius IV replaces Proteus CPU: As the calculations are more complex now, more processing power is required for the TMML and the associated SW upgrade: In case a printer, which was previously delivered with SW < 3.0.0 is upgraded to SW Rel. 3.0.0, the Proteus CPU (with 128 MB RAM) has to be replaced by the Crius IV CPU (with 256 MB RAM). In case SW Rel. 3.X.X is installed on a Drystar 4500 (M) without replacing the CPU to Crius IV, TMML will automatically stay switched off. 2 Different Interpolation smoothing factors Before the pixel data are adapted by the Thermal Model, a pre processing takes place, where the interpolation algorithm as defined during configuration (e.g. High res cubic oder Cubic Bell) is applied:
Image Data Preprocessing (Interpolation) Thermal Model TMML to TH
The interpolation settings have to be adapted to the new thermal model. The interpolation smooth factors are automatically adapted during SW upgrade to the default TMML values. Interpolation Type Cubic High Res Cubic Bell Default smoothfactor Default smoothfactor Thermal Model Version 1 TMML -2.5 0.35 -0.7 0.9
Chapter 2 / 19
DD+DIS110.05E
Some more details to interpolation types and values: Cubic High res -0.5' and 'Cubic Bell 1.0' means: The image is not sharpened at all. The default of 'Cubic High res -0.7' and 'Cubic Bell 0.9' with the new TMML shows, that nearly no interpolation is required, to have a very sharp image. In case the 'old' smoothfactor values are kept during an upgrade to the new TMML, the image is sharpened much too much: It gets very noisy and even image artifacts like black dots are visible. Interpolation type 'Cubic high res' is only effective (i.e. sharpening the image), in case the modality sends in image mode. In case the modality sends in page mode, only the interpolation type 'Cubic Bell' is capable to sharpen the image. Note: In the 'Scaling Setup' window of the service engineer tools in the web pages it can be adjusted, that the printer automatically switches to Cubic Bell, in case a modality sends in page mode. A high signal to noise ratio of the image to be printed (i.e. only little noise in the image) means, that it can be sharpened a lot, before noise in the image gets disturbing. Rule of thumb: 1. DR images are less noisy than CR images. Interpolation cubic high res -1.0 may be okay for a DR image. At a CR image - due to its noise - a less sharp interpolation setting (e.g. cubic high res -0.6) may be required. 2. As higher the dose as less noisy the image Interpolation cubic high res -1.0 may be okay for a CR image made with high dose. At a CR image with low dose due to its noise - a less sharp interpolation setting (e.g. cubic high res -0.6) may be required.
Chapter 2 / 20
DD+DIS110.05E
Layout specifications of Drystar 4500 and Drystar 4500 M

DI4500 508 (20) 4992 10 x 8 252.0 x 201.6 transparent 84 (4.2) 84 (4.2) 74 (3.7) 70 (3.5) 4872 x 3888 black 100 (5.0) 100 (5.0) 78 (3.7) 82 (3.5) 4672 x 3728 10 x 12 252.0 x 303.2 transparent 78 (3.9) 78 (3.9) 84 (4.2) 84 (4.2) 4872 x 5900 black 70 (3.5) 70 (3.5) 100 (5.0) 100 (5.0) 4672 x 5760 DI4500 M 508 (20) 4992 10 x 8 252.0 x 201.1 transparent 22 (1.1) 50 (2.5) 70 (3.5) 70 (3.5) 4968 x 3882 black 160 (8) 136 (6.8) 77 (3.85) 77 (3.85) 4672 x 3728 10 x 12 252.0 x 302.5 transparent 70 (3.5) 70 (3.5) 22 (1.1) 50 (2.5) 4968 x 5910 black 75 (3.75) 75 (3.75) 160 (8) 136 (6.8) 4672 x 5760
DPI (pixels/mm) number of heating elements film format (inch) film size (mm) borders top pixels (mm) bottom pixels (mm) left pixels (mm) right pixels (mm) printable area none diagnostic band top pixels (mm) bottom pixels (mm) left pixels (mm) right pixels (mm) final diagnostic area
Chapter 2 / 21
Repair and Service DD+DIS005.03E

Machine specific safety instructions and hints for repair work
List of Contents
1
1.1 1.2
Machine specific safety equipment, precautions and hints ..1

Safety equipment for repair work ............................................................. 1 Safety precautions of the printer.............................................................. 1
1.2.1 Safety switches ........................................................................................................2 1.2.2 Supplementary ground cable ...................................................................................2
1.3
1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4
Guidelines regarding safety during service work ................................... 3

General safety guidelines for service work ..............................................................3 Safety guidelines for the decurl unit .........................................................................4 Safety Guidelines for Printed Circuit Board Replacements......................................4 Safety Guidelines for Thermal Head Replacements ................................................4
1.4
Guidelines regarding safety during remote service work ...................... 5
2
2.1 2.2
Safety check upon completion of the repair work ..................5

Visual check ............................................................................................... 6 Electrical check.......................................................................................... 6
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.1 / I

Machine specific safety equipment, precautions and hints

This section describes all machine specific safety aspects to be considered during repair work at the printer. It is divided in following sub-sections: Sub-section Safety equipment for repair work Safety precautions of the printer Guidelines regarding safety during service work Guidelines regarding safety during remote service work Details see.. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
1.1
Safety equipment for repair work

During repair work at printed circuit boards it is mandatory to wear an antistatic wrist strap (order no.: CM+9.9999 0830.0). This avoids static discharges on electronic components. Static discharges can lead to defective components on the printed circuit boards.
1.2
Safety precautions of the printer

This section describes all machine specific safety precautions built into the printer. It lists following safety precautions: Safety precaution Safety switches Supplementary ground cable Details see.. 1.2.1 1.2.2
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.1/ 1
Repair and Service

DD+DIS005.03E
1.2.1
Safety switches The machine has two safety switches, SW1 and SW2 (see Figure 1). They serve as a safety feature if a customer opens the machine e.g. to remove a jamming film. When the top cover or the thermal head section is opened the corresponding safety switch is activated. It cuts off the voltage for all motors, clutches, the thermal print head, and the decurl unit. Exception: The decurl motor M2 and the drum motor M1 can still be activated by pressing the jam clearance button SW5.
536106as.CDR
SW2
SW5
SW1
Figure 1 For service purposes the safety switches, SW1 and SW2 can be overridden by means of a service key. In this case there is a risk of injuries by moving mechanical or current-carrying electrical parts. Before the printer is closed the service key must be removed again, otherwise the mechanism of the safety switch may get damaged. 1.2.2 Supplementary ground cable To meet the regulations for the printer according to the machine standards EN60601-1 and IEC601-1, usually there is no Supplementary ground cable required. This also applies to installations in the patient's room. Exception: The printer is located in the patient's room AND is connected to equipment not corresponding to EN60601-1/IEC601-1.
Chapter 3.1 / 2
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)

In this exceptional case a supplementary ground cable connection must be made at the provided connector on the back of the printer. For this purpose an additional ground cable is required which is not included in the machine shipment. Specifications of the cable: green/yellow color cross-section of 4 mm2
536131at.CDR
Figure 2
1.3
Guidelines regarding safety during service work

This section describes the safety guidelines to be considered during service work. Safety precaution General safety guidelines for service work Safety guidelines for the decurl unit Safety Guidelines for Printed Circuit Board Replacements Safety Guidelines for Thermal Head Replacements Details see.. 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4
1.3.1
General safety guidelines for service work The following points must be observed during all repair or maintenance work: Make sure to always disconnect the machine to be repaired or maintained from the mains. Caution: Even when the machine is switched off, as long as it has not been disconnected from the mains some components are still supplied. Caution: If the mains connection is absolutely necessary for the respective action (repair and maintenance work), this job must only be done by specially trained personnel. Before printer service or replacing conductive parts always switch off the printer and disconnect the power. Before switching the printer off make sure that there are no films being printed at this time. Replace defective parts by original spare parts only.
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.1/ 3
Repair and Service

DD+DIS005.03E
1.3.2
Safety guidelines for the decurl unit During operation the decurl unit gets hot (up to 90 C). Avoid contact with the decurl unit due to the risk of burn. Observe the corresponding sticker on the decurl unit.
536106at.CDR
Figure 3 1.3.3 Safety Guidelines for Printed Circuit Board Replacements When handling printed circuit boards the following points must be observed: Always switch off the printer and unplug the power cord, before you disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards. When working on printed circuit boards, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers. Printed circuit boards have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a printed circuit board without protection bag and walk on a carpet or plastic floor covering (electrostatic charge). Once the printed circuit board is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
1.3.4
Safety Guidelines for Thermal Head Replacements When replacing the Thermal Head the following points must be observed: The thermal head has a printed circuit board integrated. This means, that the same safety guidelines apply for the Thermal Head than for printed circuit boards (see 1.3.3). The aluminum surface, on which the Thermal Head is mounted, may not be scratched during replacement of the Thermal Head. Possible scratches have to be removed with a sand paper or a file, to prevent uneven pressure of the Thermal Head on the film. When replacing or cleaning the Thermal Head take care not to damage the Thermal Head: Too high pressure on the TH film guide can lead to the failure of single heating elements. Be aware, that the Thermal Head is a very sensitive part and has to be treated very cautiously
Chapter 3.1 / 4
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)

1.4
Guidelines regarding safety during remote service work

The printer allows to perform all service actions which can be done on site via local keypad or Service PC also remotely (via browser interface). Depending on the qualification level (which is defined by user name and password) different menus can be accessed. To avoid a printer breakdown or obstruction of the hospital staff working with the printer observe following guidelines for remote service: Printing is stopped during a remote service session: Always inform the hospital staff before you start a remote service action about this fact. Have somebody on site whom you can inform to make a reset (or other service actions) in case the remote connection gets lost and cannot be established anymore.
Safety check upon completion of the repair work

Upon completion of any repair job, especially after replacing or installing conductive parts, check the following points as a routine safety check. Country specific regulations must be observed as well. Safety check Visual check Electrical check Details see.. 2.1 2.2
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.1/ 5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS005.03E
2.1
Visual check
Make sure that the power cord and the cables inside the machine do not show any signs of damage. Make sure that the ventilation slots before thermal head and power supply are free and that the thermal head and power supply ventilation is working properly. Make sure, that no hindrances can cause stumbling (e.g. cables) and that no defective covers, sharp edges or sticking out parts in the vicinity of the machine can cause injuries. Make sure, that no smoldering spots or wrong cabling is visible. Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers are present.
2.2
Electrical check
In case of repairs in on parts of the mains supply check the protective earth resistance according to the national regulations. Example Germany (according to Standard VDE 0701 part 1): 1. Internal circuit of the machine to be tested. 2. Gauge to measure the grounding resistance. 3. Connection between the gauge and the machine ground 4. Connection between the gauge and conductive, touchable parts in the machine.
Figure 4
Chapter 3.1 / 6
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)

Practical example for Drystar 4500: Use a multi-meter that is capable to measure a resistance < 1 Ohm Put one probe at the ground connector of the mains input Put the other probe at a few metallic parts, the customer could touch (in the example in Figure 5 the frame below the rear cover). Check: The electrical resistance has to be 0.3 Ohm
< 300 m
1
536331dp.cdr
Figure 5
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement is > 0.3 Ohm check the printer for loose grounding connections!
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.1/ 7

Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary means
List of Contents
1
1.1 1.2
Machine specific Tools..............................................................1

Mandatory tools ......................................................................................... 1 Optional tools............................................................................................. 2
1.2.1 Minimum configuration of the Service PC ................................................................2 1.2.2 Recommended configuration of the Service PC ......................................................2
2
2.1
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4
Software Tools ...........................................................................3

Service menu on the local keypad ........................................................... 3
Infocounter ...............................................................................................................4 Test images..............................................................................................................7 Show error..............................................................................................................18 Printer diagnosis ....................................................................................................18
2.2
2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5
Web Pages.................................................................................................20
Operator Tools .......................................................................................................21 Key-Operator Tools................................................................................................22 Service Engineer Tools ..........................................................................................23 Connection to the web pages.................................................................................25 Usage of the web pages ........................................................................................28
2.3 2.4
Printer Logging during Startup................................................................39 ADVP ..........................................................................................................44
2.3.1 Setup of the HyperTerminal ...................................................................................40 2.4.1 ADVP as DICOM print SCU ...................................................................................44 2.4.2 ADVP as DICOM print SCP (Print Emulator) .........................................................45 2.4.3 ADVP as Communication Recorder.......................................................................47
3
3.1
Software Installation: Updates, Installation on empty Hard Drive, SW Re-Installation ........................................................50

SW Update: Loading a SW Patch ............................................................50
3.1.1 Software Update via floppy ....................................................................................51 3.1.2 Software Update via a remote computer................................................................51
3.2 3.3
Software Re-installation ...........................................................................52 SW Installation on a new, empty Hard Drive ..........................................52
3.3.1 Software Installation on empty hard drive via floppies ...........................................52 3.3.2 Software Installation on empty hard drive via batch file .........................................53
3.4
Emergency Software installation.............................................................55
3.4.1 Emergency SW Installation via Floppies................................................................55 3.4.2 Emergency SW Installation via batch file ...............................................................57
Chapter 3.2/I

Machine specific Tools

In addition to the conventional service tools which every service engineer has in his toolbox, the following tools are required for service on the printer:
1.1
Mandatory tools
The mandatory tools are required for repair, troubleshooting or maintenance of the printer. Tool Anti-static wrist strap Densitometer* Part Number CM+9.9999.0830.0 Purpose To avoid static discharges on electronic components
To be bought locally To perform MDM calibration To clean thermal print head To override the safety switch To check the serial and network interface To check image quality of films at the lightbox
Cleaning tissue (box of 50 CM+309931.0 pieces) Service key (2 pieces required) CM+7.0426.6309.0
Loopback connectors (1 CM+339977.0 piece for network; 1 piece for RS232 interface) Loop 8x CM+9.9579.9904.0
*As DT film used in the Drystar printers has a slightly different color compared to conventional films, different densitometers give different density readings, depending on the light source. To make a correct density measurement use only a calibrated densitometer MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, X-Rite 341, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag D200-2. For these densitometers recalculation Exel tables are available on MEDNET, GSO library.
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/1
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
1.2
Optional tools
The optional tools are required in exceptional cases only. Tool Part Number Purpose To get access to the printer homepage, in case access via the hospital network is not possible. To get access to the printers terminal level. Only required in exceptional cases for troubleshooting. To perform different service actions (access to the printer homepage; evaluate infocounter etc.) Crossed network EB+72010270 or cable commercially available RS232 cable for CM+9.9999.1008.0 the Service PC (SUB D 9M/25F) Service PC Commercially available. See also 1.2.1 and 1.2.2 on page 2.
1.2.1
Minimum configuration of the Service PC The following specification is an absolute minimum configuration for the Service PC: Type Screen Mouse CPU RAM Hard disk Disk drive CD-ROM drive Serial port Network board Operating system Browser Modem Laptop VGA compatible, 800x600 Pixel integrated Pentium, 133 MHz 64 Mbytes 2 Gbytes 3.5 1.44 Mbytes 24-times COM1 or COM2 available Ethernet 10 Mbps Windows 95, 98 or NT Internet Explorer 5.0 analog 56 Kbps or ISDN
1.2.2
Recommended configuration of the Service PC The national Agfa GICS department (Global Information and Communication Services) is responsible for selection and configuration of the Service PC. The actual specification is available via Agfa Intranet: Follow the link: Agfa Intranet IT helpdesk - GICS Intranet - Infrastructure Standards - Agfa standards for PCs, laptops, printers, organizers, mobiles,...
Chapter 3.2/2

For employees not directly working at Agfa - and so not getting the service PC directly from GICS, we recommend to use the minimum configuration of the Service PC mentioned above as a guideline regarding PC hardware and software.
Software Tools
Following software tools are available Software Tool Service menu on the local keypad Web Pages Terminal level ADVP Purpose Perform most of the required service actions Perform DICOM attribute adjustments, e.g. image adjustments View the online logging for troubleshooting purposes Test the DICOM communication between modality and printer Details see.. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Besides the functions offered in the Service menu and the WebPages no other service software is available nor required.
2.1
PURPOSE
Service menu on the local keypad

The printer service menu allows most of the service actions, which are required for installation, repair and maintenance of the printer. (1) Press the service menu key to select the service menu. (2) For password press 4x the emergency key (3) With the and keys select the desired menu (4) Within a menu use the and keys to select the desired digit. (5) Press to confirm a selection or to cancel.
USAGE
4x
53 63 32 ac .c
dr
Figure 1
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/3
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
An overview of all service menus is available in section 3.7, Software menus, Settings. The following tools, available in the service menu, are explained in this section in greater detail: Service Tool Infocounter Test images Show error Printer diagnosis 2.1.1 PURPOSE Infocounter The infocounter is used for troubleshooting purposes and for investigation of the printer history before maintenance. It contains following information:
-
Refer to 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4
General information about the printer Information about the installation site of the printer Information about the configuration and hardware components of the printer Statistics about service interventions Statistics about machine reliability Error history
This information about the printer is located in a persistent database. Every 10 minutes there is an automatic update of the database on the hard disk. A copy of the infocounter data is always stored in the battery RAM of the printer. At software installation the contents of the battery RAM are written to the hard disk drive. This guarantees, that the infocounter data are not lost after exchange of the hard disk drive
Chapter 3.2/4
Repair and Service DD+DIS110.05E USAGE

(1) Insert an empty floppy in the printer floppy drive. Refer to Figure 2. (2) In the service menu select 3 Save data 1 Infocounter file. (3) Insert the floppy in the Service PC (4) Unzip the file di45_xxxx_icn.zip (xxxx stands for serial number)
MG3000 Infocounter
27.4.2001
536332bb.cdr
(5) Start an editor (e.g. notepad or wordpad). (6) Open the file infocounters.txt (7) For the meaning of the different entries refer to Table 1 below. Table 1: Infocounter evaluation
Figure 2
Infocounters.txt evaluation What to check in the infocounter 1.1 Serial number and Installation date Comment Compare device serial number to chapter 8 Manufacturing Standard Modification to determine whether the device is modified or possibly requires a modification. Note: Refer to 3.3 (infocounter.txt), HW Modification History, too. 1.4 Software Info It is recommended to have the latest software installed. Each SW-Version has its inherent characteristics. Refer to chapter 7 Field Modifications to see what the latest released software is. Refer to chapter 10, Field Service Bulletins for software specific faults. 2.2 Throughput For throughput most important are the cycles per day. They should be between 50 and 200 (1 cycle = 1 print). Potential foreseeable problems exist due to drastic reduction or increase in the throughput of the printer. Refer to 2.3 in infocounters.txt.
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
Infocounters.txt evaluation What to check in the infocounter 2.3 Reliability 3.3 Hardware Modification History 3.4 Software modification history Comment Should normally be not higher than 0.05. Higher fault rates need a thorough investigation. By comparing the status of the device with the available modifications (refer to chapter 7) the exact hardware status can be determined. By checking the software modification history it can be determined, whether a recent software upgrade solved a problem, that occurred quite often in the error list (refer to 2.4, infocounters.txt) in the past. Many retries (> 1%, based on relative prints) have to be investigated: They may reduce the throughput of the device. Retries film feeding unit: Check rollers / check mechanics Retries communication MEB: Check cabling between MEB board and CPU-Board. Possibly replace MEB or CPU. Retries communication ETH (Ethernet): Check network cabling, hub. 5.7 Error History Check which errors occurred in the last days, how often they appeared as well as the CBF (cycles between failures) of these errors. This gives an overview of the current status of the machine. Troubleshoot these errors with the help of the technical documentation, chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting.
5.3 Retries
5.8 Error list (sorted by relative) and 5.9 Error list (sorted by total):
Chapter 3.2/6

2.1.2 PURPOSE
Test images The test images are used to check the complete printer function as well as checking the image quality and certain adjustments The list enclosed gives an overview of the different test images. This list is based on software release 2.0. Name / Purpose 'STI_4500' Composed of many different test images to check all aspects of image quality. Available for 8x10 and 10x12 film formats 'Footprint' Test image to check image artifacts originated by mechanical problems (scratches) or the decurl rollers (dark stripes due to heat) Available for 10x12 film format DSI_wedge Composed of several different test images to check most aspects of image quality. Available for 8x10 film format SMPTE Standard test image for evaluation of image quality. Available for 8x10 and 10x12 film formats 10x12 align Test image to check horizontal and vertical alignment of the 10x12 film. Only fro exceptional cases. Available for 10x12 film format 2.1.2.4 2.1.2.4 2.1.2.3 2.1.2.2 Thumbnail picture Details see.. 2.1.2.1
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/7
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E 2.1.2.6
1.1+0.1 to right film edge C R I G H T
8x10 align Test image to check horizontal and vertical alignment of the 8x10 film. Only fro exceptional cases. Available for 8x10 film format Medical_image Test image to check, whether image artifacts, which are slightly visible in one of the technical images, are also visible in a medical test image. Available for 10x12 film format DrumPos_4x00_8x10 Test image with 2 critical grey values, which show artifacts, in case the drum position is not adjusted properly. Available for 8x10 film format.
L E F T
1st printline = 200.0=15 mm to bottom film A -3 <= 0.15 mm
Testimage 8" x 10" A332341
248.4 (4968 pix)
BOTTOM
2.1.2.7
2.1.2.8
2.1.2.1 PURPOSE USAGE
Testimage STI_4500_xxxyy.tif Composed of many different test images to check all aspects of image quality. (1) In the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 4 Print Testimage - STI_4500_xxxyy.tif' (xx stands for the film format; yy stands for the film material. Refer to note below). (2) The test image as displayed in Figure 3 will be printed.
Figure 3
Chapter 3.2/8

If Drystar 4500 M uses Drystar Mammo films (Dmax 3.7) as well as DT1B / DT1C film (Dmax 3.1): Film in use DT1B / DT1C (Dmax 3.1) Drystar Mammo (Dmax 3.7) Select test image... STI.....TM1.TIF STI.....TM2.TIF
EVALUATION
Evaluate the test image at the lightbox as follows: (1) Field 1 consists of 256 small squares, with grey values from 0 to 255.
Each square has inside another smaller square, with a grey level which is 2 grey steps darker than the surrounding square. Figure 4
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/9
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
Check: all 256 squares must be visible. In addition, a contrast difference must be visible between the individual square and the small square inside. (2) Field 2 consists of 7 squares of different target grey values, which are written in the corresponding square. Check: Measuring these squares with a calibrated X-Rite 331 or 341 densitometer must show the grey values written in the squares. (3) Field 3 contains 3 x 5 white spots. The spot size is 1, 4 and 8 pixels. Check: all spots, especially the small one (1 pixel) must be visible. (4) Field 4 contains a continuous grey wedge from grey value 0 to 255. Check: no single grey steps may be visible (in case single grey steps are visible, this is called 'contouring'. The naming for this artifact is derived from the contour lines in a hiking map). (5) Field 5 contains a flat field with density value 1.0. Check: no stripes in any direction may be visible. (6) Field 6 contains a small flat field with density Dmax. Check: no image artifacts like small white or grey dots may be visible. In case an artifact in the image can be observed, refer to chapter 3.3, troubleshooting for symptom, reason and cure.
Chapter 3.2/10

Testimage Footprint.tif Test image to check image artifacts originated by mechanical problems (scratches) or the decurl rollers (dark stripes due to heat) (1) In the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 4 Print Testimage - STI_4500_xxxyy.tif' (xx stands for the film format; yy stands for the film material. Refer to note below). (2) The test image as displayed in Figure 5 will be printed.
foot_print.cdr
Figure 5 EVALUATION Evaluate the test image at the lightbox as follows: (1) Locate scratches, print marks or stripes on the film. To find scratches it is advised to keep the film also horizontal, with a bright light source on top. Check: The location of the image artifact on the test film shows, which parts may cause the problem.
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/11
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
Testimage DSI_wedge.tif Composed of several different test images to check most aspects of image quality. (1) In the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 4 Print Testimage - DSI-wedge.tif'. (2) The test image as displayed in Figure 6 will be printed.
Figure 6 EVALUATION Evaluate the test image at the lightbox as follows: (1) Field 1 consists of 15 squares, with grey values from 0 to 255. Check: all 15 squares must be visible (2) Field 2 consists of 4 small rectangular fields. Each of these 4 small fields has another smaller rectangular field inside, which is 5 grey values brighter than the surrounding one. Figure 7
Chapter 3.2/12

Check: a contrast difference must be visible between the individual rectangle and the small rectangle inside. (3) Field 3 consists of 3 continuous grey wedges. Each grey wedge has a different increase form white to black. Check: The grey wedges must be continuous. In addition, a difference between the 3 grey wedges must be visible. (4) Field 4 consists of 4 small rectangular fields. Each of these 4 small fields has another smaller rectangular field inside, which is 5 grey values darker than the surrounding one. Check: a contrast difference must be visible between the individual rectangle and the small rectangle inside. (5) Field 5 contains a continuous grey wedge from grey value o to 255. Check: no single grey steps may be visible (in case single grey steps are visible, this is called 'contouring'. The naming for this artifact is derived from the contour lines in a hiking map).
Testimage SMPTE.tif Standard test image for evaluation of image quality and for trouble shooting (see chapter 3.3.). (1) In the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 4 Print Testimage - SMPTE.tif'. (2) The test image as displayed in Figure 8 will be printed.
Figure 8
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/13
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
EVALUATION
Evaluate the test image at the lightbox as follows: (1) Fields 1 (4x) consist of 6 squares with horizontal and vertical black and white stripes (1, 2 and 3 pixels wide). Check: Each of the 6 squares must show constant distance between the black and white lines (no interferences may be visible, leading to unequal distances). (2) Fields 2 (4x) have the same pattern as fields 1, but less contrast
Figure 9
Check: All 6 squares must be visible. (3) Fields 3 (3x) consist of several squares with the same density. Check: The individual squares must show constant density. No stripes or other artifacts. (4) Field 4 consists of a black square (100% black) with a smaller grey square inside (95% black) The square must show 2 different densities, i.e. inside there must be a smaller square with slightly lower density. (5) Field 5 consists of a white square (0% black) with a smaller grey square inside (5% black) Check: The square must show 2 different densities, i.e. inside there must be a smaller square with slightly higher density. (6) Field 6 consists of a black square (100% black). Check: The square must show Dmax (default: 3.1 O.D.) (7) Fields 7 consists of a white square (0% black). Check: The square must show fog level (for clear based film approx. 0.1 O.D., for blue based film approx. 0.2 O.D.)
Chapter 3.2/14

2.1.2.5 PURPOSE
Testimage 10x12_align.tif Test image to check horizontal and vertical alignment of the 10x12 film. Only for exceptional cases. (1) In the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 4 Print Testimage - 10x12_align.tif'. (2) The test image as displayed in Figure 10 will be printed.
USAGE
1.1 + 0.1mm to right film edge (D)
1.1 + 0.1mm to right film edge (C) Testimage 10" x 12" A332342 R I G H T
1.1 + 0.1mm to right film edge (E) Bottom
Figure 10 EVALUATION This test image only has to be printed in case it is advised by the GSC. The GSC will also tell how to interpret the result.
2.1.2.6 PURPOSE
Testimage 10x8_align.tif Test image to check horizontal and vertical alignment of the 10x8 film. Only for exceptional cases. (1) In the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 4 Print Testimage - 10x8_align.tif'. (2) The test image as displayed in Figure 11 will be printed.
L E F T 1st printline = 200.0=15 mm to bottom film A -3 <= 0.15 mm
USAGE
1.1+0.1 to right film edge C Testimage 8" x 10" A332341 R I G H T
248.4 (4968 pix)
BOTTOM
Figure 11 EVALUATION This test image only has to be printed in case it is advised by the GSC. The GSC will also tell how to interpret the result. Edition 2, Revision 2 Agfa Company Confidential Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110) Chapter 3.2/15
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
2.1.2.7 PURPOSE
Testimage Medical_Image.tif Test image to check, whether image artifacts, which are slightly visible in one of the technical images, are also visible in a medical test image. (1) In the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 4 Print Testimage - Medical_image.tif'. (2) The test image as displayed in Figure 12 will be printed.
USAGE
Figure 12 EVALUATION Evaluate the test image at the lightbox as follows: (1) This medical test image of a chest is the most critical medical test image regarding visibility of image artifacts, due to its huge bright areas. In bright areas the eye is most sensitive. Check: image artifacts, like stripes in horizontal or vertical direction, which are slightly visible in a technical image (e.g. STI test image), may not be visible in the medical test image.
Chapter 3.2/16

2.1.2.8 PURPOSE
Testimage DrumPos4x00_8x10.tif Test image with 2 critical grey values, which show artifacts, in case the drum position is not adjusted properly. (1) In the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 4 Print Testimage DrumPos4x00_8x10.tif'. (2) The test image as displayed in Figure 13 will be printed.
USAGE
Figure 13 EVALUATION This test image is used during drum position adjustment or in the trouble shooting procedures (see chapter 3.3). Check: for information on evaluation of this test image refer to chapter 3.6, adjustments.
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/17
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
2.1.3 PURPOSE
Show error View Reason - Meaning - Cure at the local display to an error that appeared at the printer. It is possible to view the last error code or to select the desired error in the error hitlist. Possibility 1: View the last error code: (1) In the service menu select 4 Show error - 1 Last error code - 1 explain error Possibility2: View any error code of the error hit list: (1) In the service menu select 4 Show error - 2 Error hitlist (2) select the desired error (3) select 1 explain error
USAGE
2.1.4 PURPOSE
Printer diagnosis The printer diagnosis is an interactive software tool to troubleshoot the printer systematically. It has an expert system included. Its goal is, to find the reason for a fault, by a combination of selftests and questions (yes/no) to the service engineer. It has to be used if the proposed remedy of a displayed error code does not solve the problem.
USAGE
Following diagnostic tools exist: Diagnose power supply 1 Film input unit Diagnose mechanics 2 Densitometer module 3 Drum assembly 4 Printhead unit 5 Film hand over unit 6 Film output unit (1) In the service menu select 7 Test & Diagnose - 5 diagnose power supply - 6 Diagnose mechanics, depending on where the fault is presumed. (2) Select 1 Film input unit or 2 Densitometer module or 3 Drum assembly or 4 Printhead unit or 5 Film hand over unit or 6 Film output unit, depending on where the fault is presumed Refer to Table 2 next page to see which sensor/actuator is tested with which module diagnosis, in case you suspect already a certain sensor/actuator. (3) Follow the further instructions on the local display. With the key always the last step of the printer diagnosis can be repeated
Chapter 3.2/18

Sensor/Actuator EM1 EM2 F1 F2 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 S01 S02 S03 S04 S05 S06 S07 S08 S09 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S21 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Tested in diagnose of Film input unit Film input unit Printhead unit Drum assembly Film output unit Printhead unit Film input unit Film input unit Film hand over unit Film output unit Densitometer Module Film input unit Printhead unit Printhead unit Film input unit Film input unit Film input unit Film input unit Densitometer Module Drum assembly Film input unit Film input unit Film input unit Drum assembly Film hand over unit Film input unit Film output unit Film hand over unit Film input unit Drum assembly -
Film output unit Film input unit
Film hand over unit Printhead unit
Drum Assembly Densitometer Module
536332ca.cdr
Figure 14
Table 2: Which sensor/actuator is tested with which module diagnosis
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/19
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
2.2
Web Pages
The web pages provide for following menus:
Operator tools Key-operator tools Service engineer tools Specialist tools Security Tools HELP
* * *
* Menu not available in SW < 3.0.0_C1

Figure 15 Menu Operator Tools Key-Operator Tools Service Engineer Tools Content (Short description) Printer queue management for the operator Same like Key-Operator menu on local display Same like Service menu on local display plus functions for configuration and troubleshooting of the Controller part of the printer Software tools reserved for R&D to perform special actions during test phase of the printer. Software Tools to configure user access control and secure communication as defined by HIPAA. This menu is reserved for the Hospital Security Manager Describes purpose and content of the Web pages menus. Refer to ..... 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3
Specialist Tools
Not further described Not further described
Security Tools
Help
Not further described
A detailed structure of the web pages can be found in chapter 3.7, Software menus, settings.
Chapter 3.2/20

For more information to the webpages refer to ..... section 2.2.4 for Connection to the web pages section 2.2.5 for three examples about the Usage of the web pages
2.2.1
Operator Tools
Operator - Printer Status HOME Id Patient Name Host Created On Sent Status Priority Normal 875 CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Printing XYZ Normal 876 CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Printing XYZ Normal 877 CT_A 16-02-2005 0/46 Printing XYZ 878 CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Calculating Normal XYZ Normal 879 CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Waiting XYZ Delete Set Emergency View Status
Figure 16 Main Purpose Username / Password Sub menus Comment Printer queue management for the operator None None Only available for SW 3.0.0_C1
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/21
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
2.2.2
Key-Operator Tools
HOME
KEY OPERATOR TOOLS Remote sessions Enter key-operator command session Release remote command session
Figure 17 Main Purpose Username / Password Sub menus Provides same functions like Key-Operator menu on local display drystar / 4500 1. Enter key-operator command session: Shows list of menus like Key-Operator menu on local keypad. 2. Release remote command session: Makes a reset on the key-operator command session, to release the connection, in case the keyoperator command session hangs. Comment Only available for SW 3.0.0_C1
As long as a key-operator or service command session via web pages is active, access to the printer via local keypad is not possible. The printer will show the message: 'Remote Service active'. Do not work with the key-operator or service command session web pages at the printer as long as the customer is using the printer.
Chapter 3.2/22
Repair and Service DD+DIS110.05E 2.2.3

Service Engineer Tools

SERVICE TOOLS HOME General information List of errors Infocounters report DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report * Software versions * Remote sessions Show printer status Enter key-operator command session Enter service command session Release remote command session Reboot Drystar * Connectivity tools Scaling Setup * DICOM profile editor LPD Profile Editor Network configuration * Printqueue editor * Controller logging
Menu not available in SW < 3.0.0_C1

Figure 18
Main Purpose
Provides same functions like Service menu on local display plus functions for configuration and troubleshooting of the Controller part of the printer mega / ****** 1. List of errors: Shows list of all HC.... error codes. Same content like chapter 3.3, appendix, error codes.. 2. Infocounters Report: Shows printer infocounter. 3. DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report*: Shows infocounter of the Controller part of the printer. 4. Software versions*: Shows SW versions of printer and controller part of the printer. 5. Show printer status: Shows possible warnings or defects or user messages which are currently displayed at the local display. 6. Enter key-operator command session: Same function like Key-operator Menu on local keypad.
Username / Password Sub menus
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/23
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
7. Enter service command session: Same function like Service Menu on local keypad. 8. Release remote command session: Makes a reset on the Key-operator / Service command session, to release the connection, in case the session hangs. 9. Reboot Drystar*: Rebbots the printer. 10. Scaling Setup*: Menu to define general image interpolation related settings 11. DICOM profile editor: Different menus to define printer behavior regarding DICOM communication. 12. LPD profile editor: Different menus to define printer behavior regarding Postscript communication 13. Network Configuration*: Allows special network settings to adapt to other network devices. 14. Printqueue editor*: Provides functions for extended queue management. 15. Controller logging*: Provides functions to view, filter, adapt and save log files. Comment Menus marked with "*" only available for SW 3.0.0_C1
As long as a key-operator or service command session via web pages is active, access to the printer via local keypad is not possible. The printer will show the message: 'Remote Service active'. Do not work with the key-operator or service command session web pages at the printer as long as the customer is using the printer.
Chapter 3.2/24

2.2.4 USAGE
Connection to the web pages (1) Connect the Service PC to the network (2) Start the browser (Netscape 4.X or Internet Explorer 4 or 5) (3) Enter the IP address of the printer in the address window. In case the printer homepage is not displayed, refer to 2.2.4.1 Adaptation of the PC IP address next page.
Printer Service PC
53
63
11
AA
R .CD
53 63 32 aa .cd r
Figure 19 As an alternative, if it is not possible to put the Service PC into the hospital network: (1) Use a crossed network UTP cable to connect the network interface of the Service PC directly with the network interface of the printer. (2) Start the browser (Netscape 4.X or Internet Explorer 4 or 5) (3) Enter the IP address of the printer in the address window. In case the printer homepage is not displayed, refer to 2.2.4.1 Adaptation of the PC IP address next page.
Printer Service PC
536311dp.cdr
Crossed network UTP cable

536332ad.cdr
Figure 20
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/25
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
2.2.4.1
Adaptation of the PC IP address To connect the printer and the Service PC via network, usually the IP address of the Service PC has to be adapted. Basic rules: Case 1: The service PC is part of the hospital network. (1) Get the IP address and possibly the subnet mask* for the Service PC from the hospital network administrator. In case the hospital network administrator wants to have the Service PC working only in a subnet, get from him the netmask (also called subnet mask). (2) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 21 to Figure 24. Case 2: The service PC is not part of the hospital network, but connected via crossed UTP network cable to the printer. (1) Look up the printer IP address and subnet mask in the printer key operator menu show settings - Network. (2) Define an IP address for the Service PC by adding or subtracting 1 to the last digit of the IP address. Example: Printer IP address = 10.6.5.121 Service PC address = 10.6.5.122 or 10.6.5.120 (3) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 21 to Figure 24.
Figure 21 *Default Subnet Masks (set for NO subnetting) Class A B C First 3 digits of IP 0......126 128......191 192.......223
Figure 22
subnet mask 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0
Chapter 3.2/26

Figure 23
Figure 24
2.2.4.2
Adaptation of the Browser Proxy Settings In case the connection to the Internet is configured for a connection via Proxy server, this has to be disabled to be able to connect to the printer: (1) In the Internet Explorer select "Tools - Internet Options" (2) Select tab "Connections" (3) In case a proxy server is configured, tick the checkbox "Bypass Proxy server for local addresses".
Figure 25
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/27
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
2.2.5
Usage of the web pages (1) Enter the IP address of the printer in the address window. In case the printer homepage is not displayed, refer to 2.2.4.1 Adaptation of the PC IP address previous page. (2) Select the desired menu (3) Enter user name and password when prompted (mega / ******) Enclosed three examples which shall explain the usage of the web pages: # 1 2 3 Example description Save a session file Adapt the taste LUT for a certain host by creating a host specific DICOM host profile Adapt the annotations for all DICOM inputs refer to ... 2.2.5.1 2.2.5.2 2.2.5.3
Figure 26: Homepage of the printer (SW Rel. 2.00_C1)
Chapter 3.2/28
Repair and Service DD+DIS110.05E 2.2.5.1 Example 1

Example 1: Save a session file Save a session file from the Drystar 4500 to the service PC. (1) In the printer homepage select 'Service Engineer tools - Enter service command session' Enter username and password
(2)
Figure 27 The printer will initialize the remote session. From now on 'remote service active' will be displayed at the local display. Figure 28 (3) Select '3 Save Data
Figure 29 (4) Select '4 Session Files'
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/29
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E Figure 30
(5)
Select '2 This Computer'
Figure 31 Now the data are collected on the printer
Figure 32 (6) Click on the displayed link to download the session file
Figure 33
Chapter 3.2/30
Repair and Service DD+DIS110.05E (7)

Select 'save the file to disk' to save it on the local computer
Figure 34 (8) When finished, leave the 'Save Data' and the 'Service main menu'
Figure 35 When exiting the Service command session, the printer indicates this in the web page. Now the local keypad is accessible again.
Figure 36
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/31
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
2.2.5.2 Example 2
Example 2: Adaptation of the taste LUT (contrast) Whenever the host with AE title CTSCAN200 sends a print job to the printer, the taste LUT shall be adapted to Kanamori_like 80. (1) In the printer homepage select 'Service Engineer tools - Enter service command session' Enter username and password Select DICOM profile editor Select New. Refer to Figure 38.
(2) (3) (4)
Figure 37
Figure 38 (5) In the host profile window select change at the host profile type, to see, whether the connected host is part of the hosts database. Refer to Figure 39.
Chapter 3.2/32

Figure 39: Host profile editor SW Re. 2.00_C1
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/33
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
(6)
Select the connected host if present, otherwise leave it on generic.
Figure 40 Select the desired parameter, in this case Perception LUT = Kanamori_like and set the Kanamori_like value to 80. (8) Check the checkbox before Perception LUT. (9) Enter AE title and nickname (nickname = the name the stuff uses for this modality. The nickname will be displayed in the queue). Refer to Figure 41. (10) Select Submit Now whenever the host with AE title CTSCAN200 sends a print job to the printer, the taste LUT will be adapted to Kanamori_like 80. In case the checkbox is checked before a parameter in the DICOM profile editor, this parameter is used, no matter whether the modality sends the parameter or not (overwrite functionality) In case the checkbox is not checked, the value defined in the host profile is only used, in case it is not sent by the modality. (7)
Image adaptations should be made preferably at the DICOM modality. According to DICOM specifications, controlling the printer completely is done at the modality. The description below about creating a DICOM profile should only be required, in case the modality does not allow to adapt a certain parameter or does not provide it.
Chapter 3.2/34

Figure 41
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/35
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
In general: all DICOM host profile and LPD profile web pages have an online documentation included. It can be viewed by pressing the HELP button.
Figure 42
2.2.5.3 Example 3
Example 3: Define annotations for all inputs In this example the defaults for all hosts, independent of the AE title are adapted. Here it is only possible to adapt the annotations. (1) In the printer homepage select 'Service Engineer tools - Enter service command session' (2) Enter username and password (3) Select DICOM profile editor (4) Select Default site annotations: EDIT. Refer to Figure 43.
Figure 43
Chapter 3.2/36

(5) Select Annotation 1 Refer to Figure 45. Refer to Figure 44 to see, where annotation 1 is located. (6) Enter the annotation text: Example: St Joseph's Hospital..... (7) Possibly adapt the font and font size of the annotation. (8) In the Annotation Box 1 select Submit. (9) Check the checkbox before Annotation 1. (10) Select Submit. Now independent of the AE title all films will have annotation 1 St. Joseph's Hospital..... Figure 44
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/37
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
Figure 45: Site Defaults Window SW Rel. 2.00_C1
Chapter 3.2/38

2.3
PURPOSE
Printer Logging during Startup

The printer terminal level provides following service action: An online logging, which displays all actions of the printer software during bootup.
The printer terminal level is not intended to be used as official service tool. It is only used for troubleshooting, e.g. to view the boot-up messages. USAGE (1) Connect the Service PC to the printer as displayed in Figure 46. (2) Start the HyperTerminal as displayed in section 2.3.1. (3) Switch the printer on: Now the bootup message appears When the Printer login appears the bootup message is finished.
Printer Service PC
536311dp.cdr
536332ae.cdr
RS232 cable (SUB D 9M/25F: CM+9.9999.1008.0)
Figure 46
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/39
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
2.3.1
Setup of the HyperTerminal The hyper terminal setup as displayed here can be used for all AGFA devices. Instead of the HyperTerminal following other programs can be recommended to connect to terminal level: xt. xt.exe is an AGFA program, which is part of the IMOS package. It can be started in a DOS box by typing xt IMOS Start Menu. The IMOS Start Menu software has a terminal built in. Select tools terminal. Depending on the configuration of IMOS Start, either a DOS box with xt will be opened or a Hyper terminal window will pop-up.
(1) To start the setup of the HyperTerminal, go to Programs - Accessories HyperTerminal - HyperTerminal
Figure 47 (2) Enter a name for the connection, e.g. AGFA
Figure 48
Chapter 3.2/40

(3) Select COM1 or COM2 for communication port (depending on what you are using on the Service PC)
Figure 49 (4) Make the setup of the HyperTerminal session as displayed here, i.e.
-
9600 Bps 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit flow control Xon/Xoff
(5) Select OK
Figure 50
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/41
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
(6) Select Properties
Figure 51 (7) Select settings
Figure 52
Chapter 3.2/42

(8) Select VT100 for emulation type (9) Press OK
Figure 53 (10) Press <Enter>
Now the bootup message or login prompt is visible.
Figure 54
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/43
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
2.4
ADVP
The latest version of ADVP can be downloaded from MEDNET (Hardcopy General Info - CSO Freeware) PURPOSE USAGE DICOM troubleshooting tool ADVP can be used for following purposes: # 1 2 3 Purpose Send test images from the service PC to the printer via network Record DICOM print sessions for further troubleshooting. Record DICOM print sessions for changing and resending them to the printer. Details see 2.4.1. 2.4.2 2.4.3.
ADVP can run on the service PC or any Windows PC in the network. The only pre-requisite: The PC must be part of the network.
720132zx.cdr
Figure 55 2.4.1 ADVP as DICOM print SCU ADVP as DICOM print SCU can be used to check the DICOM interface of the printer. In this case ADVP sends a test image to the printer.
Chapter 3.2/44

(1) Start ADVP (2) Select 'Basic Grayscale' in the 'Start up configuration' screen. (3) Select 'Test - Print Film' (4) Select 'SMPTE' (or any other test film). (5) In the 'Configuration' window fill in Called (Printer) AE Title and 'Printer IP address'. (6) Select 'OK'. Now the desired test film is sent to the printer.
Figure 56: ADVP as Print SCU 2.4.2 ADVP as DICOM print SCP (Print Emulator) ADVP as DICOM print SCP can be used to check the DICOM communication sent from the modality. ADVP in this case emulates the printer. The communication can be evaluated on site or by a product specialist in the GSC or RSC.
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/45
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
(1) Disconnect the printer from the network. (2) Give the IP address of the service PC the same IP address like the printer* (3) Start ADVP (4) Select 'Basic Grayscale' in the 'Start up configuration' screen. (5) Select 'Application - Print Emulator - Start' (6) In the following window fill in - Called (Printer) AE Title (this is the AE title of the printer), - 'Called (Host) AE Title' - ADVP Listen port (usually 104: this is the port the modality sends DICOM messages). (7) Select okay. Now ADVP is prepared for recording the communication between modality and the printer. Figure 57: ADVP as Print Emulator *In case ADVP runs on the printer, just select 'Stop Controller' to stop the application software (and so switch off the DICOM SCP functionality of the printer). When communication recording is finished, close ADVP and select 'Start Controller'.
Chapter 3.2/46

2.4.3
ADVP as Communication Recorder ADVP as Communication recorder is recording the communication between the modality and the printer, and allows to modify every single DICOM attribute as well as resending the recorded image with the changed attribute(s). In general, following configurations are possible: a) Service PC is part of the network: The modality sends to the service PC, the service PC transmits the DICOM image and control data on the fly to the printer. Modifying the DICOM data can be done without changing the configuration. b) Service PC is only temporary integrated in the network to emulate the printer: The modality sends to the service PC, ADVP on the service PC transmits the DICOM image and control data to a DICOM Print SCP on the service PC (e.g. ADVP as Print Emulator). Re-sending the DICOM data to the printer then requires re-configuration of ADVP. In this chapter we describe the possibility a) Service PC is part of the network.
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/47
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
Part 1: Recording the DICOM data (1) Change the IP address of the printer to any free IP address in the network (e.g. 192.9.200.202) (2) Give the service PC the former IP address of the printer (e.g. 192.9.200.201) (3) Start ADVP (4) Select 'Basic Grayscale' in the 'Start up configuration' screen. (5) Select 'Application - Comms Recorder - Start' (6) In the following window fill in - Called (Printer) AE Title (this is the AE title of the printer), - 'Called (Host) AE Title', - ADVP Listen port (usually 104: this is the port the modality sends DICOM messages), - Printer IP address (this is the IP address of the printer) - printer listen port (usually 104). (7) Select okay. Now ADVP is prepared for recording the communication between modality and the printer. Figure 58: ADVP as Comms Recorder
Chapter 3.2/48

Part 2: Resending the DICOM data (1) Select 'Application - Comms Recorder - Stop' (2) Select 'Application - Comms Recorder - Modify' (3) In the Printer Snapshot edit the desired parameters (4) Select 'Application - Comms Recorder - Replay': Now the image is re-sent to the printer and printed at the printer with the adapted data.
Figure 59: Resending the DICOM data
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/49
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
Software Installation: Updates, Installation on empty Hard Drive, SW Re-Installation

The software installation procedures described here are only available as of Drystar 4500 software release 2. In case the printer is still running on software release 1.9X refer to Drystar 4500 technical documentation edition 1, DD+DIS072.00E You want to ... Upgrade the SW to a higher basic release Update the SW with a patch Re-install the software on a completely booted printer Install SW on a new, empty hard drive Example SW Upgrade from SW Rel. 1.9X or 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1 SW Update from 3.0.0_C1 to 3.0.1_C1 Re-install the already loaded SW 2.00_C1 Install SW 3.0.0_C1 on an empty hard drive Refer to ..... Chapter 7, Modifications 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
Re-install the software on a Printer does not boot-up printer in ERROR - SYSTEM anymore after a failed SW FAILURE state: "Emergency update Software Installation".
A software upgrade is a functional extension. It is usually sold through the Sales and Services Channels A software update is a corrective modification of the basic software version. It does not include new functionality. SW Updates (Patches) are available on MedNet.
3.1
SW Update: Loading a SW Patch

This chapter describes the SW Update with a patch. For instructions regarding SW upgrade to a higher basic release (e.g. SW Upgrade from SW Rel. 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1) refer to Chapter 7, Modifications A SW Update can be performed in two ways: SW Update via ... Service menu at the local keypad using a floppy Service menu in the Webpages using the network connection Refer to ..... 3.1.1 3.1.2
Chapter 3.2/50
Repair and Service DD+DIS110.05E 3.1.1 Purpose SW Upgrade

Software Update via floppy Software Update: Installation of a software patch (1) In the service menu select '5 Install data - 1 Software - 1 Floppy disk' (2) You will be asked to insert the first floppy of the floppy set as displayed in Figure 60. (3) Follow the further instructions on the local keypad. (4) After the software update print a SMPTE test image (Key Operator menu: 3 Print Image - 1 Testimage - 2 SMPTE.tif') and a test image from every modality to confirm the successful update.
MG3000 MG3000
536332bc.cdr
Figure 60
3.1.2 Purpose SW Upgrade
Software Update via a remote computer Software Update: Installation of a software patch (1) Establish a web browser connection to the printer. Refer to chapter 2.2, Web Pages (2) In the printer homepage select 'Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service Command Session - 5 Install Data - 1 Software - 1 This computer' (3) Select 'Browse' (4) Select the ZIP file to be uploaded (e.g. DS45_SWR_301C1.zip). Figure 61 (5) Follow the further instructions in the web pages (6) After the software update print a SMPTE test image (Key Operator menu: 3 Print Image - 1 Testimage - 2 SMPTE.tif') and a test image from every modality to confirm the successful upgrade.
During file upload it is not checked, whether the software you are uploading is really software for Drystar 4500. Be sure to upload the correct ZIP file. The ZIP file is only available via MEDNET - GSO library - Hardcopy Dry Imagers Drystar 4500 Freeware
Do not reboot the printer before requested by the web pages.
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/51
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
3.2
Purpose SW ReInstallation
Software Re-installation
For re-installation of the software, in case it is suspected to be corrupted. (1) In the service menu on local keypad or web pages select ' '5 Install data 1 Software - 2 Printer hard disk' (2) Follow the further instructions on the local keypad or browser respectively. As long as the hard disk is not formatted, a copy of all so far installed software versions is also stored on the hard disk. All available software versions are displayed during software re-installation. Preferably select the latest software version.
3.3
SW Installation on a new, empty Hard Drive

This chapter describes the SW Installation on an empty hard drive, e.g. after exchange of the hard drive. A SW Installation on a new, empty hard drive can be performed in two ways: SW Installation on empty hard drive ... Via floppies. The only way of SW installation if previous SW release was < 3.0.0_C1 Via batch file: Only works for SW release 3.0.0_C1 Refer to ..... 3.3.1 3.3.2
3.3.1 Purpose
Software Installation on empty hard drive via floppies For software installation after exchange of the hard disk. The only way of SW installation on an empty hard drive if previous SW release was < 3.0.0_C1 Important remark: After formatting of the hard drive or SW installation on a new, empty hard drive the printer is only fully operational, if an up-to-date backup is restored. If possible check beforehand the backup floppy or perform a new backup (of course it is not possible to create a backup in case the hard disk is defective and had to be replaced). In case the backup floppy is lost or not readable, contact your GSC (Global Support Center) for further support.
Chapter 3.2/52

SW Installation (1) Insert the first floppy of the floppy set as displayed in Figure 62. on empty HD (2) Reboot the printer' (3) Follow the further instructions on the local keypad. (4) Select menu "5 Restore Configuration" to reload the previous configuration when finished.
MG3000 MG3000 MG3000 MG3000 MG3000 MG3000 MG3000 MG3000 MG3000
536332bc.cdr
Figure 62 During software installation from scratch, the hard disk is formatted. The formatting of the hard disk has to be confirmed either at the local keypad or - in case the Service PC is connected via serial port - in a terminal window.
EMERGENCY SOFTWARE INSTALLATION HARDDISK will be formatted Press y(es) on terminal Keyboard or (V) on local Keypad to proceed Press n(o) on terminal Keyboard or (X) on local Keypad to abort
536332xs.cdr
3.3.2 Purpose
Software Installation on empty hard drive via batch file For software installation after exchange of the hard disk. Only works for SW release 3.0.0_C1 Important remark: After formatting of the hard drive or SW installation on a new, empty hard drive the printer is only fully operational, if an up-to-date backup is restored. If possible check beforehand the backup floppy or perform a new backup (of course it is not possible to create a backup in case the hard disk is defective and had to be replaced). In case the backup floppy is lost or not readable, contact your GSC (Global Support Center) for further support. The execution of the batch file 'remote_emergency_install.bat' requires the Java Virtual Machine (JVM). In case it is not installed an error message 'jvew cannot be found' will be issued. The Java Virtual Machine can be downloaded at www.microsoft.com. It is usually installed with the Internet Explorer.
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/53
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
How?
(1) Make a network connection from service PC to the printer. (2) In the Windows explorer doubleclick on file \remote\remote_emergency_install.bat'. (3) In the window that opens (refer to Figure 63) enter the IP address of the printer and select install (4) At question "Ok to backup configuration files and restore them afterwards" (refer to Figure 63) select "No" (5) Select menu "5 Restore Configuration" to reload the previous configuration when finished.
Figure 63 Important remark: DO NOT SHUTDOWN the printer during software installation as the Key, MEC, Themis and Crius boards are programmed during the software installation.
Chapter 3.2/54

3.4
Emergency Software installation

This chapter describes the SW Installation on a printer in ERROR - SYSTEM FAILURE state: It is also called "Emergency Software Installation". An Emergency SW Installation can be performed in two ways: SW Installation on empty hard drive ... Via floppies. The only way of Emergency SW installation if previous SW release was < 3.0.0_C1 Via batch file: Only works for SW release 3.0.0_C1 Refer to ..... 3.4.1 3.4.2
3.4.1 Purpose
Emergency SW Installation via Floppies For re-installation of the software, in case it is suspected to be corrupted, and Software Re-installation did not cure the problem. This section describes the emergency software installation with using a Service PC. It is also possible to perform the emergency software rel. 2.00_C1 / rel. 3.0.0_C1 installation procedure without the use of a service PC. All required actions of the wizard are also displayed on the local display. The logging on the service PC however shows more information. Important remark: After formatting of the harddisk, the printer is only fully operational, if an upto-date backup is available. Check whether the backup floppy is readable before starting the emergency software rel. 2.00_C1 / rel. 3.0.0_C1 installation procedure. In case the backup floppy is lost or not readable, contact your GSC (Global Support Center) for further support.
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/55
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
SW Installation (1) Connect the Service PC to the printer as displayed in Figure 64. incl. (2) Start the HyperTerminal as FORMATTING displayed in section 2.3 on page 39. (3) Press <Enter>. Now the Printer login appears. (4) Login with "mega" / "******". (5) Insert floppy1 in the printer floppy drive and switch off/on the printer (6) Confirm the question about formatting of the hard disk. Refer to Figure 65.
Printer Service PC
536311dp.cdr
536332ae.cdr
Figure 64
Figure 65
Figure 66
(7) At the question "Do you want to preserve the printers configuration" select yes. Refer to Figure 66 (8) Follow the further instructions on the printer or the PC display respectively.
Chapter 3.2/56

3.4.2 Purpose
Emergency SW Installation via batch file For software installation on a printer in ERROR - SYSTEM FAILURE state: Only works for SW release 3.0.0_C1 The execution of the batch file 'remote_emergency_install.bat' requires the Java Virtual Machine (JVM). In case it is not installed an error message 'jvew cannot be found' will be issued. The Java Virtual Machine can be downloaded at www.microsoft.com. It is usually installed with the Internet Explorer. How? (1) Make a network connection from service PC to the printer. (2) In the Windows explorer doubleclick on file \remote\remote_emergency_install.bat'. (3) In the window that opens (refer to Figure 67) enter the IP address of the printer and select install (4) At question "Ok to backup configuration files and restore them afterwards" (refer to Figure 63) select "Yes" (5) Follow the further instructions on the display.
Figure 67
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Chapter 3.2/57
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
Important remark: DO NOT SHUTDOWN the printer during software installation as the Key, MEC, Themis and Crius boards are programmed during the software upgrade. Important remark: The emergency upgrade procedure via batch file can be done with and without saving of the configuration data. Refer to Figure 63. Only select not to backup configuration files in case a backup of the configuration data is available on floppy or service PC. First check, that the floppy is readable. During Emergency SW Installation via batch file following steps are executed internally: A backup of the printer specific data is created and copied to RAM The software is sent from the PC to the printer via FTP and inflated The boards are programmed The backup is restored from RAM
Chapter 3.2/58

Troubleshooting
List of Contents 1
1.1
Troubleshooting Flowchart.......................................................1
Usage of the troubleshooting tools.......................................................... 2
2 3 4 5 6 7
7.1 7.2
Symptom Classification ............................................................3 No LCD display ..........................................................................4 Error message HC....................................................................5 Warning message ......................................................................6 Images are not shown in the printer queue.............................7 Film Jam .....................................................................................9
Message: Remove Input Jam.................................................................... 9 Message: Remove internal Jam................................................................ 9
8
8.1
8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6
Artifacts on the film .................................................................10

Contrast and density reproduction faults...............................................11
Dmin too high .........................................................................................................12 Dmax too high or too low .......................................................................................12 Density reproduction not okay................................................................................14 Optimal perceivable levels not okay.......................................................................15 Contouring visible; 'Landscaping'...........................................................................16 Contrast and/or sharpness not okay ......................................................................17
8.2
8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5
Line artifacts in transport direction.........................................................18

Dust stripes ............................................................................................................18 Line artifacts < 1mm...............................................................................................19 Line artifacts > 1mm...............................................................................................21 Regular wide dark Stripes: Decurl banding ............................................................24 Wide bands with lower density at the left and/or right hand side of the film...........27
8.3 8.4
8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4
Line artifacts vertical to the transport direction.....................................30 Point artifacts ............................................................................................31

Pinholes .................................................................................................................31 Bubbles ..................................................................................................................32 Dust particles on the printdrum ..............................................................................33 Dust particles in the film .........................................................................................34
8.5 8.6
Surface artifacts........................................................................................35 Film is uneven; 'Curl' ................................................................................38
8.6.1 Curl towards the back layer too high......................................................................38 8.6.2 Curl towards the emulsion layer too high. ..............................................................39
Chapter 3.3 / I

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Flowchart
The printer has several provisions built in, that assist in troubleshooting. The flowchart enclosed shows the recommended proceeding for troubleshooting. With the recommended troubleshooting proceeding these tools are utilized most efficiently. In section 2 some special symptoms are treated in detail. Following troubleshooting tools are available: 1) Show error 2) Info counter evaluation 3) Tests 4) Diagnosis Refer to section 1.1 next page for more information to these tools. In section 2 some special symptoms are treated in detail.
Consult 1 "Show error" Troubleshooting Flowchart
Error Message e.g. HC10813
Reason for error message clear ? No Check 2 Infocounter Execute "Test System" and/or "Test board" and/or "Test disk drives" 3
Yes
solve problem
Additionally the status of the different LEDs help at troubleshooting. They are explained in chapter 3.4, Electrical and mechanical codes, fuse tables and LEDs.
Reason for error message clear ? No Diagnose power supply and/or mechanics 4
Yes
solve problem
Reason for error message clear ? No call Support Center
Yes
solve problem
536333ca.cdr
Figure 1
Chapter 3.3 / 1
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
1.1
Usage of the troubleshooting tools

The following tools for troubleshooting are accessible via: Service menu on the local keypad Service WEB pages Service menu on terminal level Tool Show error When to use Whenever an error message is displayed. Note: A paper version of the show error tool on the keypad is also available in the appendix of this chapter. Info counter Whenever the show error tool and its Reason - Meaning Cure explanation does not provide enough information to solve the problem. In this case an infocounter evaluation will give hints, where to search. Whenever a sporadic problem comes up, that needs a thorough investigation about the exact circumstances, in which cases the fault comes up. Whenever the show error tool and its Reason - Meaning Cure explanation does not provide enough information to solve the problem. In this case, the different tests can exclude or confirm suspicious parts. Whenever the show error tool and its Reason - Meaning Cure explanation does not provide enough information to solve the problem nor does the tests find any problem or do not find it precise enough.
Tests
Diagnosis
For a detailed instruction how to use the tools refer to chapter 3.2 Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary means
Chapter 3.3 / 2

Troubleshooting
Symptom Classification
The following symptoms are explained in greater detail:
1
No LCD display. Refer to section 3

536333AD.CDR
Figure 2
2
Error message HC... Refer to section 4
ERROR HC10803
536333AA.CDR
Figure 3
3
Warning message Refer to section 5
WARNING Thermal head out of range

536333AB.CDR
Figure 4
4
Images are not shown in the printer queue. Refer to section 6
Ready ???
DR .C AC 33 63 53
Figure 5
Film jam. Refer to section 7
Output Jam
536333DA.CDR
Figure 6
6
Artifacts on the film: Refer to section 8
A 33 63 53
DR E.C
Figure 7 Edition 2, Revision 2 Agfa Company Confidential Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110) Chapter 3.3 / 3
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
No LCD display
Symptom After power on, the printer does not start up: The LCD display stays blank more than 10 secs. Power or data cable to the hard disk is not connected, the supply voltage is not present or the hard disk is defective. How to check: Connect service PC (refer to chapter 3.2, Tools). Open a terminal session. Check the prompt of the printer: pmon> printer did not boot from the hard disk: Hard disk defective. Power or data cable to the hard disk not connected login: hard disk is accessible. Reason must be defective or disconnected LCD keypad (see below, Reason 2). No prompt: Reason must be defective CPU.
Reason 1
Note: In case no prompt is present, also check the CPU LED's (refer to chapter 3.4, Electrical and mechanical codes, fuse tables and LEDs), as it might be possible, that the RS232 cable or the terminal session parameters are not correct. Cure 1 Check power and data cable to the harddisk Exchange hard disk. Install the software as explained in chapter 3.2, Machine specific tools, Software tools and auxiliary means.
Reason 2
LCD display defective or not properly connected. How to confirm: The printer boots up correctly. Films sent from the host modalities are printed. During boot-up different motors are activated.
Cure 2
Check cabling of LCD display Exchange the Key4 board
Reason 3
CPU defective. How to confirm: See description at reason 1 above, hard disk defective.
Cure 3
Exchange CPU board
Chapter 3.3 / 4

Troubleshooting
Error message HC...

Symptom After power on or during operation the printer shows an error message on the local display, beginning with HC... The online diagnosis software detected a defect during startup or operation. Look up Meaning - Reason - Cure of the error: In the service menu select '4 Show error - 1 Last error code' The complete list of all possible errors with Meaning Reason - Cure is also available in the appendix of this chapter. Perform the tests supplied in the Service menu Test & Diagnose Perform the printer diagnostics supplied in the Service menu Test & Diagnose.
Reason
Cure 1
Cure 2
Cure 3
For a list of sensors and motors tested with the printer diagnosis refer to chapter 3.2 Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary means
Chapter 3.3 / 5
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
Warning message
Symptom After power on or during operation the printer shows a warning message on the local display, e.g. Thermal head out of range The online diagnosis software detected a problem (which is internally interpreted as a problem with less importance than a defect and so reported as a 'warning') during startup or operation. To solve the problem a service intervention is required. Nevertheless, without solving the problem, printing can continue with reduced quality, functionality or performance. Cure 1 Look up Meaning - Reason - Cure of the error. In the service menu select '4 Show error - 1 Last error code'. The complete list of all possible errors with Meaning - Reason - Cure is also available in the appendix of this chapter.
Reason
Chapter 3.3 / 6

Troubleshooting
Images are not shown in the printer queue

Symptom An image which was sent from the host modality to the printer is not displayed in the printer queue. Network cable disconnected or defective; Wrong network configuration at the host modality or the printer, Defective network hub or router, Defective Proteus/ Crius CPU (networking part).
Reason 1
How to check: (1) In the service menu select '7 Test & Diagnose - 4 Test communication' - 1 Network' (2) Select the corresponding host. The Service Menu function '7 Test & Diagnose - 4 Test communication 1 Network sends a ping to the selected host modality. If this test is positive, i.e. the host modality replies, the problem can be a hang-up of the communication in the printer or the host modality. Refer to reason 2, below. It also can be a mismatch in DICOM communication between host modality and the printer. Refer to reason 3, below If this test is negative, i.e. the host modality does not reply, try to connect to another host modality (if available). If this test also fails, check the internal communication: How to check: (1) Put the network loopback connector (refer to chapter 3.2; Mandatory Tools) into the network connector at the printer (2) In the service menu select '7 Test & Diagnose - 4 Test communication' - 3 Internal Communication' In case this test fails, the reason must be a defective Proteus / Crius CPU (networking part). Remark: As there is a little chance that the loopback connector is defective, either test it at another Drystar 4500 (to confirm that it is okay) or continue with the troubleshooting steps as described below. In case the test is successful the reason for the problem must be a disconnected or defective network cable; wrong network configuration at the host modality or the printer.
Chapter 3.3 / 7
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
Cure 1
Check cabling, e.g. use a crossed network cable, make a direct connection from the printer to the Service PC and send a ping from the Service PC to the printer. Refer to chapter 3.2, Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary means (section 'Adaptation of the PC IP address') for detailed information regarding network connection from printer to Service PC. If cabling is okay, check printer AE-title at the host modality or printer IP address. Check modality AE title and IP address entered at the printer.
Reason 2
Hang-up of the communication between host modality and printer Reset printer and host modality.
Cure 2
Reason 3
Mismatch in DICOM communication between host modality and the printer. (1) Start up ADVP (AGFA DICOM Visual Print) on the Service PC. (2) Send an image from the modality to the laptop. (3) Send an image from ADVP to the printer. For more info to ADVP refer to chapter 3.2 Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary means, section 'ADVP'. Possibly send the logfile to your GSC for evaluation.
Cure 3
Chapter 3.3 / 8

Troubleshooting
7
7.1
Film Jam
Message: Remove Input Jam
Symptom Frequent Input jams. Message 'remove input jam' at the local display. Mechanical problem in the area of the film input. (1) Look up Meaning - Reason - Cure of the error.: In the service menu select '4 Show error - 1 Last error code'. Troubleshoot according to the displayed Reason Meaning - Cure.
Reason 1
Cure 1
(2) Reason 2
Film pickup mechanics not optimized
Cure 2
Exchange film pickup unit with latest revision. Refer to chapter 8 for the list of modifications and related serial numbers.
7.2
Message: Remove internal Jam

Reason 1 Mechanical problem inside the printer, between film input and film output. (1) Look up Meaning - Reason - Cure of the error. In the service menu select '4 Show error - 1 Last error code'. Troubleshoot according to the displayed Reason Meaning - Cure.
Cure 1
(2) Reason 2
Sensor bracket S10/S11 of old revision installed (Type 5363: SN < 1391; Type 5363/110: SN < 1041). Refer to chapter 7 for more detailed information.
Cure 2
Chapter 3.3 / 9
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
Artifacts on the film

Symptom Artifacts on the film or in the diagnostic image: Diagnostic image on the monitor at host modality and diagnostic image on the printed film are different. Can be sporadic or persistent. Reason Either a problem of the host modality or the printer.
Cure
Refer to the list of image faults further in this chapter.
The list of artifacts on the film is divided in following types of artifacts: # 1. 2. 3. Artifact Contrast and density reproduction faults Line artifacts in transport direction Line artifacts vertical to the transport direction Point artifacts Surface artifacts Film is uneven; 'Curl' Example Dmax 2.7 instead of 3.0 O.D. Bright lines in transport direction 'Banding' vertical to transport direction (parallel to print drum) Very small white dots Scratches Film is not flat at the lightbox Refer to 8.1 8.2 8.3
4. 5. 6.
8.4 8.5 8.6
Chapter 3.3 / 10

Troubleshooting
8.1
Contrast and density reproduction faults

The customer will usually complain about Image overall too dark Image overall too bright On the monitor the image looks better than on the film. Refer to remark below. Image not sharp enough Enclosed a table which divides the symptoms mentioned above in 6 different symptoms: # 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Artifact Dmin too high Dmax too high or too low Density reproduction not okay Optimal perceivable levels not okay Contouring visible; 'Landscaping' Contrast and/or sharpness not okay Refer to 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6
Symptoms 3 to 6 are quite similar. In case you are not sure which of the artifact fits to the problem at your Drystar 4500, start with the troubleshooting procedure as described in section 8.1.6, Contrast and/or sharpness not okay.
In case the customer complains about 'on the monitor the image looks better than on the film' it is advised to check the monitor calibration. This can be done by loading a SMPTE test image on the monitor, and checking whether the 5% and 95% fields are visible.
Figure 8
Chapter 3.3 / 11
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
8.1.1
Dmin too high Symptom The minimum density on the clinical (white areas, e.g. text) and test images (white areas, e.g. 100% field of SMPTE test pattern) is more than 0.02 density units higher than before printing. Example: Fog level before printing 0.20 O.D. Fog level after printing 0.25 O.D. Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the 100% square of the SMPTE test image (1) (2) (3) (4) Film calibration not performed and/or MDM needs re-calibration Perform a film calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6 Print the image SMPTE.tif and measure the 100% square If Dmin is still not OK, perform an MDM calibration followed by a film calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6. Print the image SMPTE.tif and measure the 100% square
Cure
8.1.2
Dmax too high or too low Symptom The maximum density on the clinical (black areas, e.g. frame around the image) and test images (black areas, e.g. 0% field of SMPTE test pattern) is more than 0.1 density units lower or higher than the target Dmax (Target Dmax for Mammo printer = 3.7, Target Dmax for CR printers = 3.1). Refer to note below regarding density measurement. Example: Dmax at Mammo printer = 3.5 O.D. Testimage This fault can best be observed in the 0% square of the SMPTE test image
Chapter 3.3 / 12

Troubleshooting
Density measurement of Drystar films: For density measurement of Drystar films a calibrated densitometer MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag D200-2 is required. The reference densitometer for Ds4500(M) is the Mac Beth TR924 densitometer. The aperture of the spot is 3mm and a visual filter must be used. In the field the Mac Beth TR924 is not available. Normally, other densitometers can only be used provided that an approved recalculation table or recalculation function for the used densitometer is available. The densitometers X-rite 331 and X-rite 341 with a spot aperture of 2 mm can be used for OD-measurements in the field without recalculation of the measured densities! Recalculation tables are available for X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310 and Gretag D200-2. Refer to MEDNET, GSO library. The densitometers must be calibrated with the calibration wedge of the supplier according to the instructions of the supplier. Reason Film calibration not performed and/or MDM needs re-calibration and/or TPH profile needs to be calibrated and/or Drum position needs adjustment (1) Perform a film calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6 (2) Print the image SMPTE.tif and measure the 0% square (3) If Dmax is still not OK, use another filmbatch (other emulsion number) (4) Perform a film calibration (5) If Dmax is still not OK, perform an MDM calibration followed by a film calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6 (6) Print the image SMPTE.tif and measure the 0% square (7) If Dmax is still not OK perform a Printhead profile calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6. (8) Perform a film calibration. (9) Print the image SMPTE.tif and measure the 0% square. (10) If Dmax is still not OK, adjust the drum position according to the 'adjustment of the print drum position procedure. Refer to chapter 3.6. (11) Perform a film calibration (12) Print the image SMPTE.tif and measure the 0% square. (13) If Dmax is still not OK, order new film with other emulsion number.
Cure
Chapter 3.3 / 13
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
8.1.3
Density reproduction not okay Symptom Customer complains about 'on the monitor the image looks better than on the film' This fault requires to measure the 0% to 100% squares of the SMPTE test image Reason (1) (2) Film calibration not performed and/or MDM needs re-calibration and/or TPH profile needs to be calibrated and/or Drum position needs adjustment
Testimage
Cure
Perform a film calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6 Print the image SMPTE.tif and perform a density reproduction check. Refer to chapter 3.6, Adjustments, section 'Checks'. (3) If the density reproduction is still not OK, perform an MDM calibration followed by a film calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6 (4) Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the density reproduction. Refer to chapter 3.6 (5) If the density reproduction is still not OK perform a Printhead profile calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6 (6) Perform a film calibration. (7) Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the density reproduction. (8) If the density reproduction is still not OK, adjust the drum position according to the 'adjustment of the print drum position procedure. Refer to chapter 3.6 (9) Perform a Film Calibration (10) Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the density reproduction.
Chapter 3.3 / 14

Troubleshooting
8.1.4
Optimal perceivable levels not okay Symptom Customer complains about 'on the monitor the image looks better than on the film'. Some details are better visible on the monitor. This fault can best be observed in the 256 squares in the STI test image. Refer to Figure 9. Each square differs from its neighbor by 2 density value (2 of 256). Each square has inside a small square which is 2 density units darker than the outside square.) Reason (1) (2) Film calibration not performed and/or MDM needs re-calibration and/or Printhead profile needs to be calibrated Perform a film calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6 Print a STI test image (refer to note below) and check the squares in the field A (the density of the small square is always 2 density units lower than the density of the big square - starting with 253/255 and ending with 1/3) If the small squares inside the bigger squares are not all visible, perform an MDM calibration followed by a film calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6 Print the STI test image and check the squares in the field A. If the squares are still not all visible, perform a Printhead profile calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6. Perform a Film Calibration Print the STI test image and check the squares in the field A again.
Testimage
Cure
(3)
(4) (5) (6) (7)
Figure 9: STI test image Edition 2, Revision 2 Agfa Company Confidential Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110) Chapter 3.3 / 15
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
In case Drystar 4500 M uses Drystar Mammo films (Dmax 3.7) as well as DT1B / DT1C film (Dmax 3.1): Film in use DT1B / DT1C (Dmax 3.1) Drystar Mammo (Dmax 3.7) 8.1.5 Contouring visible; 'Landscaping' Symptom Gray shaded areas do not show a continuous grey shading but show visible, hard grey steps (also called 'landscaping', i.e. it looks like contour lines in a hiking map) This fault can best be observed in the 'quarter circle continuous grey step' in the STI test image. Refer to Figure 10. Reason Cure Sensitometry far away from the real film characteristics - calibration not performed and/or Printhead profile needs to be calibrated Select test image... STI.....TM1.TIF STI.....TM2.TIF
Testimage
(1) Perform a film calibration (2) Print the STI test image (refer to note below) and check the contouring (3) If the contouring is still not OK, perform an MDM calibration followed by a film calibration (4) Print the STI test image and check the contouring (5) If the contouring is still not OK perform a Printhead profile calibration (6) Perform a film calibration (7) Print the STI test image and check whether contouring is still visible.
Figure 10
Chapter 3.3 / 16

Troubleshooting
In case Drystar 4500 M uses Drystar Mammo films (Dmax 3.7) as well as DT1B / DT1C film (Dmax 3.1): Film in use DT1B / DT1C (Dmax 3.1) Drystar Mammo (Dmax 3.7) Select test image... STI.....TM1.TIF STI.....TM2.TIF
8.1.6
Contrast and/or sharpness not okay Symptom Contrast compared to image on the monitor not okay, or sharpness not okay. This fault can best be verified in a medical image (medical_image.tif) Reason Printer problem (film calibration, Printhead profile, MDM calibration) Modality wrong configured (e.g. taste LUT linear instead of Kanamori) Printer adjustment not correct (e.g. modality only can send taste LUT linear; a user profile needs to be made to correct the problem)
Testimage
Cure
(1) Print the medical service test image (medical_image.tif) (2) If the contrast and/or sharpness in the medical test image is not okay, refer to 8.1.3 (3) If the contrast and sharpness in the medical test image are OK, optimize the user taste and/or the interpolation settings according to the image quality fine tuning procedure described in the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS265.03E, section 5.2 "Image Quality Parameters".
Chapter 3.3 / 17
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
8.2
Line artifacts in transport direction

Enclosed a table which divides the line artifacts in 5 different symptoms: # 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Artifact Dust stripes Line artifacts < 1mm Line artifacts > 1mm Regular wide dark Stripes: Decurl banding Wide bands of lower density at the left and/or right hand side of the film Refer to 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5
8.2.1
Dust stripes Symptom

10x12" Film 8x10" Film
536333SA.CDR
Figure 11 Dust stripes are most often white, sometimes dark lines, and mostly ragged and not sharp. Are always in the transport direction, and are from a few cms long up to the total length of the film. Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. Dust on the film. The dust particle stays on the thermal head for a certain time. This leads to less heat on the film as long as the dust particle stays between the thermal head and the film. Normally okay after next film, otherwise clean the thermal head. For cleaning instructions refer to chapter 3.6, 'Check for dust stripes'.
Cure
Chapter 3.3 / 18

Troubleshooting
8.2.2
Line artifacts < 1mm Symptom

536333SB.CDR
Figure 12 Dark line(s) in print direction. Width can be< 1mm (Sub mm TPH banding) or 0.05 mm (one pixel line). Can be one or more lines. Line can be intermittent. Can be a combination of dark and white lines. Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. One or more defective resistors of the TH (sharp lines). Shift of the resistor values of the resistor elements (unsharp lines). Deposits on the TH Cure (1) Clean the thermal head (see chapter 3.6, 'Check for dust stripes'. This check also contains a TH profile calibration in case wet TH cleaning does not improve the fault). (2) If this does not help exchange the thermal head.
Chapter 3.3 / 19
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
Symptom
10x12" Film
8x10" Film
536333SC.CDR
Figure 13 White or bright line(s) in print direction. Width can be< 1mm (Sub mm TPH banding) or 0.05 mm (one pixel line). Can be one or more lines. Line can be intermittent. Can be a combination of dark and white lines. Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. One or more defective resistors of the TH (sharp lines). Shift of the resistor values of the resistor elements (unsharp lines). Scratches o Film moves along a sharp mechanical part inside the printer o Contamination of the TH Cure (1) Clean the thermal head (see chapter 3.6, 'Check for dust stripes'. This check also contains a TH profile calibration in case wet TH cleaning does not improve the fault). (2) If the fault is still visible, check the film for scratches. Refer to section "8.5, Surface artifacts" (3) In case the fault is still visible exchange the thermal head.
Chapter 3.3 / 20

Troubleshooting
In case Drystar 4500 M uses Drystar Mammo films (Dmax 3.7) as well as DT1B / DT1C film (Dmax 3.1): Film in use DT1B / DT1C (Dmax 3.1) Drystar Mammo (Dmax 3.7) 8.2.3 Line artifacts > 1mm Symptom
Select test image... STI.....TM1.TIF STI.....TM2.TIF
536333SE.CDR
Figure 14 Narrow (between 1 and 5 mm) to wide (> 5 mm) lines in print direction. Lines can be brighter or darker. This fault is named "mm TPH banding" (1 to 5 mm) or "Macro TPH banding" (> 5 mm) Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. Dirt on the TH. Dirt on the print drum TH resistor drift TH driver defective. See also example images next page Cure (1) Clean the thermal head (see chapter 3.6, 'Check for dust stripes'). (2) Print a STI test image (refer to note below). (3) If problem is still visible, perform a printhead calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6, Calibrations
Chapter 3.3 / 21
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
Symptom
9,60 mm or 4,80 mm or 2,40 mm
9,60 mm or 4,80 mm or 2,40 mm
536333SK.CDR
Figure 15 Persistent dark line in print direction. The width of the dark line is 2.40 or 4.80 or 9.60 mm. In comparison to TPH banding (see previous symptom) the dark line is more pronounced. This fault is called "TH driver banding" Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. TH driver defective
Cure
Replace the Thermal Head
Chapter 3.3 / 22

Troubleshooting
Symptom
10x12" Film
8x10" Film
9,60 mm or 4,80 mm or 2,40 mm
9,60 mm or 4,80 mm or 2,40 mm
536333SL.CDR
Figure 16 Persistent blank line in print direction. The width of the blank line is 2.40 or 4.80 or 9.60 mm. This fault is called "TH driver drop" Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. TH driver defective
Cure
Symptom
10x12" Film
8x10" Film
9,60 mm or 4,80 mm or 2,40 mm
9,60 mm or 4,80 mm or 2,40 mm
536333SM.CDR
Figure 17 Intermittent white line in print direction. The width of the blank line is 2.40 or 4.80 or 9.60 mm. This fault is called "Intermittent TH driver drop"
Chapter 3.3 / 23
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
Testimage Reason
This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. TH driver defective
Cure
8.2.4
Regular wide dark Stripes: Decurl banding Symptom

536333SG.CDR
Figure 18 Wide, dark, regular vertical stripes. The stripes correspond to the shape of the decurl rollers. Often only the edge of the decurl rollers is visible. Testimage Reason 1 This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. Dirt on the infrared sensor (in this case the sensor measures a lower temperature, leading to a higher decurl temperature) or decurl temperature sensor defective
Chapter 3.3 / 24

Troubleshooting
Cure 1
(1) Print one medical service test image (Medical_image.tif). (2) Print again one medical service test image and stop (i.e. switch off) the printer just after printing. Remove the film out of the printer and compare the 2 test films. (3) If decurl banding is only observed in the first printed film, clean the decurl temperature sensor (4) Print the STI test image and check for decurl banding (5) If the decurl banding is still not acceptable, replace the decurl temperature sensor (6) Print the STI test image and check for decurl banding (7) If the decurl banding is still not acceptable, replace the decurl unit Software release < 3.0.0_C1 installed and 2nd version of Mammo films used for printing. The new film is more sensitive for decurl banding than the previous one. How to recognize the Drystar Mammo Film 2nd version o Emulsion number xx16xxxx (elder film xx15xxxx) o Less glossy back
Reason 2
DRYSTAR MAMMO
DRYSTAR MAMMO REV LOT EGVPX 11.2005 43167802 100 NIF 10 x 12 IN
REV
EGVPX 11.2005
100 NIF 10 x 12 IN
536310ag.cdr
LOT 43167802
Emulsion number
Chapter 3.3 / 25
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
Cure 2
(1) Check whether software < 3.0.0_C1 is installed and the customer is using Drystar Mammo Film 2nd version (Emulsion number xx16xxxx) (2) In case Drystar Mammo Film 2nd version is used, check the setting for automatic film calibration on/off: In the key-operator menu go to 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality - 1 General (3) In case automatic film calibration is switched off, perform a film calibration for both film magazines (4) From service menu "8 Adjust & Calibrate" print a STI_........_TM2.TIF test image (5) Check the image at the light box for decurl stripes curl towards the light box (6) In case decurl stripes are visible and/or the curl properties are worse compared to the previous Mammo films, install software patch "rel200_FLM_C1" via key-operator menu "7 Installation 2 Upgrade from floppy". (7) Reset the printer (8) Again, print a STI_........_TM2.TIF test image and check for decurl stripes.
*Software patch "rel200_FLM_C1" can be downloaded from the MEDNET, GSO library, menu "Hardcopy Dry Imagers Drystar 4500 Freeware". After installation of the floppy following parameters are changed: The decurl speed is increased from 12 mm/s to 16 mm/s The decurl temperature is decreased from 100 C to 90 C Changing these two parameters prevents decurl banding and improves the curl towards the light box. Software patch rel200_FLM_C1 may only be installed at Drystar 4500 M equipped with SW Rel. 2.00 at printers with software < Rel. 2.00 at Drystar 4500 CR/DR printers (Type 5363/100) At printers with SW 3.0.0_C1 already installed. At SW 3.0.0_C1 the decurl speed is already adapted for Drystar Mammo Film 2nd version (Emulsion number xx16xxxx). It must not be used
Chapter 3.3 / 26

Troubleshooting
8.2.5
Wide bands with lower density at the left and/or right hand side of the film Symptom
536333SH.CDR
Figure 19 Uneven density at the right and/or left hand side of the image. Density is too low compared to the middle part of the image. Testimage This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. The reason for this fault is bad TPH pressure / position or aged print drum (changed elasticity of the rubber of the drum)
Indications to distinguish between bad TPH pressure and an aged print drum: Bad TPH pressure / position (refer to reason 1 to 7 below): o the uneven density is more pronounced o the Dmax decreases to a very low level, sometimes to zero. o the uneven density most often shows up right after the installation of a thermal head Aged print drum (refer to reason 8 and 9 below) o the Dmax decrease is less pronounced compared to bad TPH pressure. o uneven density related to an aged print drum will come up after a certain number of films. With a drum life time of 100.000 prints the uneven density is probably caused by drum ageing.
Chapter 3.3 / 27
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
Reason 1
MEB cover plate presses partly against the aluminum casting of the TH compartment. Check whether the 2 yellow tapes on the MEB cover plate are removed. Check whether the lid of the MEB board is completely closed (if it is partly open it presses against the TH compartment) One or both springs A that press the TH against the film are not completely hooked in
Cure 1
Reason 2
A
536333pf.cdr
Figure 20 Cure 2 Check whether the two springs A that press the TH against the film are completely hooked in. Front cover positioned this way, that the lock rod does not reach the bottom of recess A in locked position (and so does not keep the TH compartment in a fixed position).
Reason 3
536333pg.CDR
Figure 21 Cure 3 Remove the front cover and re-mount it this way that the lock rod rests completely in recess A when the cover is closed. Aluminum surface below the TH is damaged after lifting a defective thermal head with a screw driver (i.e. deep scratches prevent, that the TH lies flat on the surface)
Reason 4
Chapter 3.3 / 28

Troubleshooting
Cure 4
Check whether the aluminum surface below the Thermal Head is damaged after lifting a thermal head with a screw driver (to see this surface, the Thermal Head has to be dismounted). If this does not help perform a Printhead profile calibration. Cable trees at the lower side of the TH compartment press against the TH compartment. Remove the front cover. Check, that none of the cable trees presses against the TH compartment. Wrong positioned or no pins between TH and aluminum casting. How to check: 1 Remove the front cover. 2 Print a test image 3 During printing press against the TH compartment at this side, where the lower density occurs. 4 If this does not improve the image quality, most likely wrong positioned or no pins between TH and aluminum casting are the reason. Mount the Thermal Head again with pins in the aluminum casting. Printhead profile was once made with wrong TH pressure (e.g. one spring was temporarily not completely hooked in) Perform a Printhead profile calibration. After exchange of the print drum the Printhead profile was not executed Perform a Printhead profile calibration. Aging of the print drum: Different elasticity of the print drum rubber over the drum width. Perform a Printhead profile calibration. In case this does not help, exchange the print drum.
Reason 5
Cure 5
Reason 6
Cure 6
Reason 7
Cure 7
Reason 8
Cure 8
Reason 9
Cure 9
Chapter 3.3 / 29
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
8.3
Line artifacts vertical to the transport direction

Symptom
536333SD.CDR
Figure 22 Regular line structure 90 to print direction, also called 'banding' or 'transport shocks' Usually only visible in areas, where the density is constant. Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. Irregularities in the film transport system (mechanical problem). Depending on the distance of the banding lines, following parts can cause such a banding: 94.2 mm distance: Print Drum, Flat belt pulley, drum bearings 110 mm distance: Flat belt 14,6 mm distance: Toothed belt 12,7 mm distance: Encoder bearings 2,2 mm distance: Main drive motor bearings; toothed belt tension too high; small pulley for toothed belt. Random distances: Connector of TH data cable Cure Check the complete print drum drive (motor bearings, drum, belt pulleys, belt tension). Cure depends on the distance of the lines. In case of random distances replace the TH data cable "Ribbon cable TH - MEB (P12 MEB1 or P2 MEB2 respectively)"
Chapter 3.3 / 30

Troubleshooting
8.4
Point artifacts
Enclosed a table which divides the point artifacts in 4 different symptoms: # 1. 2. 3. 4. Artifact Pinholes Bubbles Dust particles on the printdrum Dust particles in the film Refer to 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4
8.4.1
Pinholes Symptom
536333TB.CDR
Figure 23 These errors show as small transparent and isolated dots, typically < 0.2mm. Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. Pinholes are present in the film before printing Pinholes must be regarded as a film problem (which cannot be avoided).
Cure
Chapter 3.3 / 31
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
8.4.2
Bubbles Symptom
536333TA.CDR
Figure 24 Bubbles show up as clusters of small pinholes, usually in the Dmax area of the film. Bubbles must be evaluated with a magnifying glass. Bubbles disappear by lowering the print drum position. Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. Drum position not optimized.
Cure
(1) (2)
Perform a film calibration Print the image DrumPos4x00_8x10.tif and check for bubbles (3) If the bubbles are still present do the density reproduction check, if necessary perform an MDM calibration followed by a film calibration. (4) Print the image DrumPos4x00_8x10.tif and check for bubbles (5) If the bubbles are still present, adjust the drum position according to the procedure Adjustment drum position (6) Perform a film calibration (7) Print the image DrumPos4x00_8x10.tif and check for bubbles (8) If the bubbles are still present, use film with different emulsion number, if possible. (9) Perform a film calibration (10) Print the image DrumPos4x00_8x10.tif and check for bubbles
Chapter 3.3 / 32

Troubleshooting
8.4.3
Dust particles on the printdrum Symptom
approx. 94 mm
approx. 94 mm
536333TD.CDR
Figure 25 Oval or round spot with a lower (or higher) density. There is sometimes a zone of higher density in the center of this area. The error is repeated a few times on the film. Distance between errors equals the drum diameter (=94.2mm) Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. Dust/dirt on the print drum. Drum errors are easy to detect since the diameter of the drum is small compared to the length of the film. This results in the same drum error a number of times on the same printed film having a distance between errors equal to the drum diameter (=94.2mm) (1) Print the STI test image (refer to note below). (2) Clean the print drum with a cleaning tissue soaked in water (3) Print again the STI test image.
Cure
Chapter 3.3 / 33
Print direction
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
8.4.4
Dust particles in the film Symptom
536333TE.CDR
Figure 26 Transparent spots, usually a black particle can be seen in the middle of the transparent spot. Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. Dust particles or aggregates in the top layer of the film Dust particles in the film are a general film problem (which cannot be avoided 100%).
Cure
Chapter 3.3 / 34

Troubleshooting
8.5
Surface artifacts
Symptom
536333TF.CDR
Figure 27 The artifact looks like dirt spread out on the surface of the film. It is called 'blemish'. Blemish is also visible on the light box. Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. Drum position not optimized.
Cure
(1) Perform a film calibration (2) Print the image DrumPos4x00_8x10.tif and check for blemish (3) If the blemish is still present, adjust the drum position according to the procedure Adjustment drum position (4) Perform a film calibration (5) Print the image DrumPos4x00_8x10.tif and check for blemish (6) If the blemish is still present, use another filmbatch, if possible. (7) Perform a film calibration (8) Print the image DrumPos4x00_8x10.tif and check for blemish.
Print direction
Chapter 3.3 / 35
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
Symptom
10x12" Film
8x10" Film
536333SC.CDR
Figure 28 Scratches appear as one or more bright line over the whole length of the film. To judge whether a bright line is caused by a scratch, take the film from the light box and check the surface at both sides of the film by keeping it horizontally with light in the background. In addition scratches can be felt with the finger nail. Testimage Reason This fault can best be observed in the STI test image. Most likely contamination of the TH Mechanical part inside the printer (unlikely) Cure (1) Clean the TH. Refer to chapter 3.6, section "Check for dust stripes". (2) In case this does not improve the stripes, print the image footprint.tif from the service menu "8 Adjust & Calibrate - 4 Print Test image Footprint.tif". Refer to Figure 29: Test image "footprint.tif". The mechanical part which possibly causes the line artifact will be indicated by the scratch on the film. (3) In case the mechanical part which causes the scratch(es) cannot be detected, most likely persistent deposits on the TH are the cause of the scratches. In this case replace the TH.
Chapter 3.3 / 36

Troubleshooting
Figure 29: Test image "footprint.tif"
Chapter 3.3 / 37
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS110.05E
8.6
Film is uneven; 'Curl'

Decurl problems can be split up in two different symptoms: # 1. 2. Artifact Curl towards the back layer too high. Curl towards the emulsion layer too high Refer to 8.4.1 8.4.2
8.6.1
Curl towards the back layer too high. Symptom Curl towards the back layer* too high. *The back layer is this side of the film which is rougher than the emulsion layer. Testimage Reason This fault can best be judged by the SMPTE test image. Decurl temperature too low
Cure
(1) Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the curl towards the back layer (2) Use another filmbatch, if possible (3) Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the curl towards the back layer (4) If the curl is still unacceptable, clean the decurl temperature sensor (5) Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the curl towards the back layer (6) If the curl is still unacceptable , replace the decurl temperature sensor (7) Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the curl towards the back layer (8) If the curl is still unacceptable , replace the decurl unit
Chapter 3.3 / 38

Troubleshooting
8.6.2
Curl towards the emulsion layer too high.
Symptom
Curl towards the emulsion* layer too high *The emulsion layer is this side of the film which is less rough than the back layer.
Testimage Reason
This fault can best be judged by the SMPTE test image. Decurl temperature too high
Cure
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
Perform a film calibration Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the curl towards the emulsion layer If the curl is still too high, use another filmbatch, if possible, and perform a film calibration Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the Dmax and curl towards the emulsion layer If the curl is still too high and the Dmax is too high go first to the trouble shooting Dmax If the curl is still too high, and the Dmax is OK, perform an MDM calibration followed by a film calibration Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the curl towards the emulsion layer If the curl is still too high, clean the decurl temperature sensor Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the curl towards the emulsion layer If the curl is still too high , replace the decurl temperature sensor Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the curl towards the emulsion layer If the curl is still too high, replace the decurl unit Print the image SMPTE.tif and check the curl towards the emulsion layer
Note: There is no solution for the curl increase of the film at the light box.
Chapter 3.3 / 39
Repair and Service DD+DIS110.05E Appendix: Error Catalogue

The error catalogue is part of the device software (file "error.xml"). It cane be extracted from floppy # 11, File DS45_SWR_R3.0.0C1_11.zip errorshandler.jar error.xml / displayerrors.xsl. The print-out supplied here is based on software release 3.00 (error.xml dated 28/06/04) It is also available via browser pages, menu 'Service Engineer tools - List of Errors' Troubleshooting
LIST OF ERRORS HC10000 : frontend * Type * Meaning * Reason Cure Part HC10001 : frontend.batt * Type * Meaning * Reason Cure Part
Defect CPU PCB is not functioning correctly CPU PCB is defective Power off printer and replace PROTEUS
Defect Test of CPU battery RAM failed CPU Battery RAM is defective Power off printer and replace CPU board PROTEUS
HC10002 : frontend.memory * Type Defect * Meaning Test of CPU RAM failed * Reason CPU RAM is defective Cure Power off printer and replace CPU board Part PROTEUS HC10003 : frontend.temperature * Type Defect * Meaning Excessively high temperature is detected on CPU board. * Warning Message Front-end CPU board too hot * Reason1 Ambient temperature too high what could be caused by continuous printing in an already warm environment or the environment temperature is just too high Cure1 If caused by continuous printing , this can be cured by waiting until temperature comes down ; otherwise it has to be made sure that the environment temperature comes down * Reason2 Cooling of CPU board not efficient because of blocked airflow Cure2 Make sure that enough airflow is available for the CPU board by insuring that air inlets and outlets are completely free * Reason3 Connection problem Cure3 Check connector P3 on CPU board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from connector P3 to fan F2 motor : if not OK fix wiring * Reason4 Defect fan F2 Cure4 Power off printer and replace Part F2 HC10004 : backend.temperature * Type Defect * Meaning Excessively high temperature is detected on backend CPU board. * Warning Message Back-end CPU board too hot * Reason1 Ambient temperature too high what could be caused by continuous printing in an already warm environment or the environment temperature is just too high Cure1 If caused by continuous printing, this can be cured by waiting until temperature comes down; otherwise it has to be made sure that the environment
Edition 2, Revision 2 Appendix: Error Catalogue Chapter 3.3 /Appendix page 1 Agfa Company Confidential Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS111.05E
Reason2 Cure2 Reason3 Cure3
Reason4 Cure4 Part
temperature comes down Cooling of back-end CPU board not efficient because of blocked airflow Make sure that enough airflow is available for the back-end CPU board by insuring that air inlets and outlets are completely free Connection problem Check connector P16 on back-end CPU board: if not OK, reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from connector P16 to fan F1 motor: if not OK fix wiring Defect fan F1 Power off printer and replace F2
HC10100 : meb * Type * Meaning * Reason Cure Part HC10200 : dsh * Type * Meaning
Defect Test of MEB PCB failed MEB PCB is defective Power off printer and replace MEB
Defect Test of DSH failed
HC10300 : powersupplymodule * Type Defect * Meaning Test of powersupplymodule failed * Warning Message Call service * Reason Powersupplymodule is defective Cure Power off printer and replace Part PS_spare HC10301 : powersupplymodule.temperature * Type Defect * Meaning Temperature of powersupplymodule is too high * Warning Message Call service * Reason Powersupplymodule is defective Cure Power off printer and replace Part PS_spare HC10400 : thmodule.threoutofrange * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning After measuring all TH resistors and calculations of the average resistance value ; it is found that this calculated value is out of the tolerated range as specified in D:\thsystem\default.thpar . Engine is still allowed to print but image quality may decrease * Warning Message Printhead problem * Reason1 Aging and/or damage to thermal head has caused a change in the average resistance value of the thermal head . Cure1 Power off printer and replace with one of the following spareparts: the first partnumber can only be used for Drystar4500 CR/DR printers ,the second one for Drystar4500 CR/DR and Drystar4500 mammo printers and the third (if defined) only for Drystar4700 Mammo high resolution printers Part TH * Reason2 Thermal head resistance measurement not OK due to bad connections to thermal head
Chapter 3.3 / Appendix page 2 Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M
Appendix: Error Catalogue (Type 5363 / 100/110)

Cure2 * Reason3 Cure3 Part Troubleshooting Check for bad connections in the power connector coming from P3 of the MEB board to the thermal head : if not OK , fix or replace connector Measurement functionality failure on MEB board Power off printer and replace MEB
HC10500 : frontend.disk.hd0 * Type Defect HC10600 : frontend.disk.fd0 * Type Defect HC10700 : keypad * Type
Defect
HC10800 : engine.coveropen1sensor * Type Defect * Meaning SW1 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to SW1 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connectors, check connector P9 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from SW1 to MEB1/P9 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 SW1 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part SW1 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10801 : engine.coveropen2sensor * Type Defect * Meaning SW2 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to SW2 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connectors, check connector P9 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from SW2to MEB1/P9 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 SW2 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part SW2 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10802 : engine.jamclearancesensor * Type Defect * Meaning Jam clearance toggle switch SW5 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to SW5 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connectors, check connector P9 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from SW5 to MEB1/P9 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 SW5 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part SW5
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting * Reason3 Cure3 Part Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Power off printer and replace MEB
DD+DIS111.05E
HC10803 : pickupmodule.upperfeederclosedsensor * Type Defect * Meaning Upperfeederclosed sensor S5 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S5 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P23 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S5 to MEB1/P23 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S5 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S5 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10804 : pickupmodule.upperfeederemptysensor * Type Defect * Meaning Upperfeederempty sensor S3 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S3 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector XS2: if not OK , reconnect or replace connector , check connector P9 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S3 to XS2 and from XS2 to MEB1/P9 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S3 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S3 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10805 : pickupmodule.upperpickuppassedsensor * Type Defect * Meaning Upperpickuppassed sensor S14 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S14 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector XS4: if not OK , reconnect or replace connector , check connector P23 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S14 to XS4 and from XS4 to MEB1/P23 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S14 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S14 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10806 : free * Type
Defect
HC10807 : pickupmodule.lowerfeederclosedsensor * Type Defect * Meaning lowerfeederclosed sensor S6 is not connected or malfunctioning

* * Troubleshooting
Warning Message Call service Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S6: if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P23 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S6 to MEB1/P23 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring Reason2 S6 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S6 Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB
HC10808 : pickupmodule.lowerfeederemptysensor * Type Defect * Meaning lowerfeederempty sensor S4 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S4 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P23 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S4 to MEB1/P23 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S4 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S4 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10809 : free * Type
Accidental
HC10810 : pickupmodule.feederpassedsensor * Type Defect * Meaning feederpassed sensor S9 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S9 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector XS5: if not OK , reconnect or replace connector , check connector P23 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S9 to XS5 and from XS5 to MEB1/P23 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S9 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S9 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10811 : pickupmodule.coversheetsensor * Type Defect * Meaning feederpassed sensor S18 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S18 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector XS5: if not OK , reconnect or replace connector , check connector P9 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S18 to XS5 and from XS5 to MEB1/P9 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S18 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting Part Reason3 Cure3 Part S18 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Power off printer and replace MEB
DD+DIS111.05E
HC10812 : pickupmodule.upperpreloadsensor * Type Defect * Meaning upperpreload sensor S10 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S10 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P23 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S10 to MEB1/P23 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S10 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S10 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10813 : pickupmodule.lowerpreloadsensor * Type Defect * Meaning lowerpreload sensor S11 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S11 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P23 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S11 to MEB1/P23 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S11 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S11 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10814 : drummodule.drumpassedsensor * Type Defect * Meaning drumpassed sensor S12 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S12 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P23 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S12 to MEB1/P23 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S12 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S12 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10815 : drummodule.drumspeedsensor * Type Defect * Meaning Drum encoder S21 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S21 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P13 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S21 to MEB1/P13 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S21 defect

Cure2 Part Reason3 Cure3 Part Power off printer and replace S21 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Power off printer and replace MEB Troubleshooting
HC10816 : drummodule.gearratiosensor * Type Defect * Meaning Printdrum reference position sensor S8 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S8 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P23 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S8 to MEB1/P23 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S8 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S8 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10817 : drummodule.ambienttemperature * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning No Ambient temperature measurement . Engine is still allowed to print but image quality may decrease * Warning Message Ambient temperature problem * Reason Ambient temperature sensor on MEB board is malfunctioning Cure Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10818 : free * Type
Accidental
HC10819 : mdmmodule.lightsensor * Type Failure * Warning Message MDM lightsensor fails HC10820 : mdmmodule.homesensor * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning MDM home position sensor S7 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Calibration module not working * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S7 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P23 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S7 to MEB1/P23 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S7 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S7 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS111.05E
HC10821 : takeovermodule.takeoverexitsensor * Type Defect * Meaning Take over exit sensor S13 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S13 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P23 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S13 to MEB1/P23 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S13 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S13 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10822 : takeovermodule.takeoverspeed * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning Take over speed sensor S16 is not connected or malfunctioning . Normal printing is still possible and allowed without loss of image quality . MDM functionality however is strictly limited to film to film density correction . * Warning Message Calibration module not working * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S16: if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P9 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S16 to MEB1/P9 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S16 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S16 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10823 : decurlmodule.decurlexitsensor * Type Defect * Meaning Decurl exit sensor S15 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S15 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector XS1: if not OK , reconnect or replace connector , check connector P9 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S15 to XS1 and from XS1 to MEB1/P9 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S15 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S15 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10824 : decurlmodule.decurltemperaturesensor * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt

* * * Mail format Meaning Warning Message Reason1 Cure1 Troubleshooting standard Decurl temperature sensor S17 is not connected or malfunctioning Decurl module not working Connection problem Check connector XS6: if not OK , reconnect or replace connector , check connector P19 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S17 to XS6 and from XS6 to MEB1/P19 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring S17 defect Power off printer and replace S17 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Power off printer and replace MEB
Reason2 Cure2 Part Reason3 Cure3 Part
HC10825 : decurlmodule.decurlspeedsensor * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Warning Message Decurl speed sensor fails HC10826 : decurlmodule.decurloverheatingsensor * Type Defect * Meaning Decurl overheatingsensor tripped * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Decurl temperature sensor malfunctioning Cure1 Check connections to S17 decurl temp sensor. power off and fix wiring or replace sensor Part S17 * Reason2 Bad safety sensor SW4 or connection problem Cure2 Check connections to SW4 decurl overheat sensor. power off and check SW4 using a multi meter. fix wiring or replace decurl unit Part SW4 * Reason3 Detection circuit for SW4 is malfunctioning Cure3 Power off and replace MEB Part MEB * Reason4 Decurl heating control circuit is always on Cure4 Check if the temperature is higher than +-80C. power off and replace Power supply Part PS_spare HC10827 : thmodule.thhomepositionsensor * Type Defect * Meaning Thermal printhead home position sensor S1 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S1 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P16 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S1 to MEB1/P16 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S1 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S1 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS111.05E
HC10828 : thmodule.thprintpositionsensor * Type Defect * Meaning Thermal printhead print position sensor S2 is not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to S2 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P16 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from S2 to MEB1/P16 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 S2 defect Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S2 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10829 : thmodule.thvoltagesensor * Type Defect * Meaning Thermal head voltage delivered by the power supply and measured on MEB is out of range * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to P21 and P22 on MEB : if not OK , reconnect or replace connectors, check connector P5 on the Power supply : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from PS1/P5 to MEB1/P21 and MEB1/P22 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10900 : pickupmodule.filmfeedermotor * Type Defect * Meaning Filmfeedermotor M9 not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to M9 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P15 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from M9 to MEB1/P15 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 Defect motor M9 Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part M9 * Reason3 Motor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10901 : pickupmodule.verticalalignclutch * Type Defect * Meaning Vertical align clutch EM1 not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to EM1 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P15 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from EM1 to MEB1/P15 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 Defect clutch EM1 Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part EM1 * Reason3 Clutch functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB
Chapter 3.3 / Appendix page 10 Appendix: Error Catalogue Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)

Troubleshooting
HC10902 : pickupmodule.horizontalalignclutch * Type Defect * Meaning Horizontal align clutch EM2 not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to EM2 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P15 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from EM2 to MEB1/P15 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 Defect clutch EM2 Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part EM2 * Reason3 Clutch functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10903 : drummodule.drummotor * Type Defect * Meaning Print drum motor not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Flat drum belt problem Cure1 Check whether the flat belt that drives the drum is mounted correctly on the pulleys. If not mounted, ruptured or damaged , remount or replace, following service instruction guidelines for correct installation procedure and belt tension. Part drumFlatBelt * Reason2 Toothed drum-motor belt problem Cure2 Check whether the toothed belt that drives the drum is mounted correctly on the pulleys. If not mounted, ruptured or damaged, remount or replace, following service instruction guidelines for correct installation procedure and belt tension. Part drumToothBelt * Reason3 Connection problem Cure3 Check connector P14 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from connector to motor M1 on MEB1/P14 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason4 Defect motor M1 Cure4 Power off printer and replace Part M1 * Reason5 Motor functionality failure on MEB board Cure5 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10904 : mdmmodule.lightpower * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning MDM lamp not connected or malfunctioning or MDM light sensor malfunctioning * Warning Message MDM module down HC10905 : mdmmodule.scanmotor * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting * * * Meaning Warning Message Reason1 Cure1
DD+DIS111.05E
Reason2 Cure2 Part Reason3 Cure3 Part
scan motor M8 of MDM not connected or malfunctioning Calibration module not working Connection problem Check connector M8 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P15 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from M8 to MEB1/P15 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring. Defect motor M8 Power off printer and replace mdmAssy Motor functionality failure on MEB board Power off printer and replace MEB
HC10906 : takeovermodule.takeovermotor * Type Defect * Meaning Take over motor M6 not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to M6 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P15 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from M6 to MEB1/P15 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 Defect motor M6 Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part M6 * Reason3 Motor functionality failure on MEB board Cure4 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10907 : decurlmodule.decurlmotor * Type Defect * Meaning Decurl motor M2 not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connector of M2 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P15 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from M2 to MEB1/P15 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 Defect motor M2 Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part M2 * Reason3 Motor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10908 : decurlmodule.outputrollermotor * Type Defect * Meaning Output roller motor M7 not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Output jam. Remove film in the top cover . * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to M7 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connectors, check connector XS4: if not OK , reconnect or replace connector , check connector P15 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from M7 to XS4 and from XS4 to MEB1/P15 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 Defect motor M7 Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part M7 * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB

Troubleshooting
HC10909 : decurlmodule.decurltemperatureactuator * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning Decurl heater not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Decurl module not working * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to the quartz heater : if not OK , reconnect or replace connectors, check connector XS1: if not OK , reconnect or replace connector , check connector P4 on Power Supply : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from quartz heater to XS1 and from XS1 to PS1/P4 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 Defect quartz heater Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part DecurlHeat * Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10910 : thmodule.thpositionmotor * Type Defect * Meaning Thermal printhead positioning motor M3 not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connector of M3 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P16 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from M3 to MEB1/P16 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 Defect motor M3 Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part TH load motor * Reason3 Motor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10911 : thmodule.thvoltageactuator * Type Defect HC10912 : thmodule.threlays * Type Defect * Meaning Excessive voltage drop over power relays for the thermal printhead on MEB * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 One of the two or both power relays on the MEB board to provide the power to the thermal printhead is or are defective Cure1 Power off printer and replace Part MEB * Reason2 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC10913 : thmodule.thfan * Type * Mail destination Mail escalation Mail attachment Mail format * Meaning
Failure 06 03 infocounters.txt standard Thermal printhead cooling fan F1 not connected or malfunctioning
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting * *
DD+DIS111.05E
Warning Message Printhead problem Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connector of F1 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check connector P16 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from F1 to MEB1/P16 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring Reason2 Defect fan F1 Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part F1 Reason3 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB
HC10914 : th.device.dataconnector * Type Defect * Meaning Thermal printhead data connector or power connector not connected or all thermal printhead resistors are defective * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check flat cable connector on the righthand side of the thermal printhead and power cable on the center of the printhead: if not or badly connected , reconnect , check flat cable connector to P12 on MEB : if not or badly connected , reconnect * Reason2 Flat cable from righthand side of the thermal printhead to P12 on MEB defective Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part THdataCable * Reason3 Thermal printhead defective Cure3 Power off printer and replace with one of the following spareparts: the first partnumber can only be used for Drystar4500 CR/DR printers ,the second one for Drystar4500 CR/DR and Drystar4500 mammo printers and the third (if defined) only for Drystar4700 Mammo high resolution printers Part TH HC10915 : th.device.thermistors * Type Defect * Meaning Thermal printhead thermistors connector is not connected or all thermal printhead thermistors are defective * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check flat cable connector on the lefthand side of the thermal printhead : if not or badly connected , reconnect , check flat cable connector to P6 on MEB : if not or badly connected , reconnect * Reason2 Flat cable from lefthand side of the thermal printhead to P6 on MEB defective Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part THsensCable * Reason3 Thermal printhead defective Cure3 Power off printer and replace with one of the following spareparts: the first partnumber can only be used for Drystar4500 CR/DR printers ,the second one for Drystar4500 CR/DR and Drystar4500 mammo printers and the third (if defined) only for Drystar4700 Mammo high resolution printers Part TH HC10916 : pickupmodule.upperpickupmotor * Type Defect * Meaning Upper pickup motor M4 not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to M4 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connectors, check connector XS2: if not OK , reconnect or replace connector , check connector

Troubleshooting P15 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from M4 to XS2 and from XS2 to MEB1/P15 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring Defect motor M4 Power off printer and replace motor M4 Defect pickup mechanism in display cover Power off printer and replace assembly pickupAssy Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Power off printer and replace MEB
Reason2 Cure2 Part Reason3 Cure3 Part Reason4 Cure4 Part
HC10917 : pickupmodule.lowerpickupmotor * Type Defect * Meaning Lower pickup motor M5 not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connections to M5 : if not OK , reconnect or replace connectors, check connector XS3: if not OK , reconnect or replace connector , check connector P15 on MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace connector, check wiring from M5 to XS3 and from XS3 to MEB1/P15 using a multi-meter : if not OK , fix wiring * Reason2 Defect motor M5 Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part M5 * Reason3 Defect pickup mechanism in guide frame for film input Cure3 Power off printer and replace assembly Part pickupAssy * Reason4 Sensor functionality failure on MEB board Cure4 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC11000 : firewire.connection * Type Defect * Meaning Firewire cable not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connection between front-end CPU board and MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace firewire cable Part FWcable * Reason2 Firewire functionality failure on CPU PCB Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part PROTEUS * Reason3 Firewire functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC11001 : meb.power.actuator * Type Defect * Meaning 24 v power for the actuators is not available on the meb board * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connection between Power supply and MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or check cable on P5 of MEB * Reason2 failure on the powersupply Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part PS_spare * Reason3 failure on MEB board
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting Cure3 Part Power off printer and replace MEB
DD+DIS111.05E
HC11002 : meb.power.sensor * Type Defect HC11003 : meb.power.voltages * Type Defect * Meaning the voltages 24v, 12v, 5v are not ok on meb board * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connection between Power supply and MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or check cables on P4 and P5 of MEB * Reason2 failure on the powersupply Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part PS_spare * Reason3 voltage measuring functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC11004 : keypad.connected * Type Defect HC11005 : dsh.connected * Type * Mail destination Mail escalation Mail attachment Mail format * Meaning * *
Failure 06 03 infocounters.txt standard The DSH board of the densito module is not found to be connected to the MEB board Warning Message Calibration module not working Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check flat flex cable between DSH board and MEB board : if not OK, reconnect Reason2 The DSH board is malfunctioning Cure2 Power off the printer and replace complete densito meter module Part DSH Reason3 DSH connecting functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB
HC11006 : meb.connected.p13 * Type Defect * Meaning The connector P13 is not detected being plugged in on the MEB * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check whether connector P13 is correctly plugged in into MEB board * Reason2 failure on MEB board Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC11007 : meb.connected.p15 * Type Defect * Meaning The connector P15 is not detected being plugged in on the MEB * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check whether connector P15 is correctly plugged in into MEB board * Reason2 failure on MEB board

Cure2 Part Power off printer and replace MEB Troubleshooting
HC11008 : meb.connected.p16 * Type Defect * Meaning The connector P16 is not detected being plugged in on the MEB * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check whether connector P16 is correctly plugged in into MEB board * Reason2 failure on MEB board Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC11009 : psu.connected * Type * Meaning * Warning Message * Reason1 Cure1 * Reason2 Cure2 Part Reason3 Cure3 Part
Defect The power supply has no serial connection to the MEB Call service Connection problem Plug in the connector on the MEB or check the serial cable from MEB/P5 to PSU A321176.x failure on the powersupply Power off printer and replace PS_spare failure on MEB board Power off printer and replace MEB
HC11100 : drummodule.mechanics * Type Defect HC11101 : drummodule.calibrate * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning Drum calibration not OK * Warning Message Image length problem * Reason1 Drum couldn't do a full turn within the provided time Cure1 Check for problems with the drum mechanism. Check the 2 belts driving the drum for running correctly on the pulleys. Remount or replace the Part drumToothBelt Part drumFlatBelt * Reason2 Drum motor M1 or mechanics are malfunctioning Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part drumAssy * Reason3 Drum motor functionality failure on MEB board Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC11102 : th.device.thermistors.mean * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Warning Message Thermal head mean value for thermistors is bad HC11103 : thmodule.mechanics.print
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting * * * * * Type Meaning Warning Message Reason1 Cure1 Reason2 Cure2 Part Defect Thermal head is not reaching 'print' position Call service Obstruction at the drum positioning unit Remove the obstruction Defect TH positioning motor M3 Power off printer and replace M4
DD+DIS111.05E
HC11104 : thmodule.mechanics.home * Type Defect * Meaning Thermal head is not reaching 'home' position * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Obstruction at the drum positioning unit Cure1 Remove the obstruction * Reason2 Defect TH positioning motor M3 Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part M4 HC11105 : thmodule.thvoltage * Type Defect * Meaning Power voltage delivered to MEB for the Thermal Head and measured on the power supply is not OK * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Powersupplymodule is defective Cure1 Power off the printer and replace Part PS_spare HC11106 : thmodule.thcool * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Warning Message Thermal head fan or cooling not OK HC11107 : thmodule.thremeasurement * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Warning Message Thermal head out of range HC11108 : thmodule.thheat * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Warning Message Heating thermal head out of range HC11109 : firewire.noderesponding * Type Defect * Meaning Firewire cable not connected or malfunctioning * Warning Message Call service * Reason1 Connection problem Cure1 Check connection between front-end CPU board and MEB board : if not OK , reconnect or replace firewire cable

* Part Reason2 Cure2 Part Reason3 Cure3 Part FWcable Firewire functionality failure on CPU PCB Power off printer and replace PROTEUS Firewire functionality failure on MEB board Power off printer and replace MEB Troubleshooting
HC11110 : takeover.driveworking * Type Defect HC11111 : mdmmodule.mdmlighthigh * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning Calibration module not working * Warning Message MDM light fail * Reason1 Halogen lamp is not producing enough light intensity,possibly due to aging. Cure1 Power off printer and replace Part DS1 * Reason2 The light detector circuitry on the DSH board is not functioning correctly Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part DSH * Reason3 The light detector circuitry on the DSH board is not receiving all the available light produced by the Halogen lamp due masking or soiling of the light filter Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part DSH HC11112 : mdmmodule.mdmlightlow * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning MDM light detection sensor is detecting too much stray light * Warning Message Calibration module not working * Reason1 MDM detects too much stray light Cure1 Make sure all side,front and rear covers are properly mounted in order to prevent stray light disturbing the MDM measurements HC11113 : mdmmodule.mdmhome * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning MDM has not been detected returning to home position after performing a scan * Warning Message Calibration module not working * Reason1 MDM scan head is physically jammed and unable to return to home position Cure1 Remove obstruction, shut down and restart printer in order to return the MDM scan head back to home position * Reason2 MDM scan head transport mechanism is broken Cure2 Power off the printer and replace Part mdmAssy * Reason3 S7 defect Cure3 Power off the printer and replace
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting Part S7
DD+DIS111.05E
HC11114 : mdmmodule.mdmleavehome * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning MDM has not been detected leaving the home position within the time-out period * Warning Message Calibration module not working * Reason1 MDM scan head is physically jammed and unable to leave the home position Cure1 Remove obstruction * Reason2 MDM scan head transport mechanism is broken Cure2 Power off the printer and replace Part mdmAssy * Reason3 S7 defect Cure3 Power off the printer and replace Part S7 HC11115 : mdmmodule.mdmmeasurement * Type Accidental * Meaning MDM measurement failed due to corrupt or unsuitable measurement input data * Warning Message Calibration module not working * Reason1 During the MDM scan, a shock disturbed the measurement Cure1 Repeat the calibration again * Reason2 Image quality of the calibration image is not OK because of faulty or incorrect Thermal Head installation files Cure2 Install the correct Thermal head data using the correct Thermal Head floppy * Reason3 Image quality of the calibration image is not OK because of incorrect Drum position Cure3 Adjust the Drum position to the correct position * Reason4 Image quality of the calibration image is not OK because Thermal Head needs cleaning Cure4 Clean Thermal head * Reason5 Image quality of the calibration image is not OK because Thermal Head is damaged or defective Cure5 Power off printer and replace with one of the following spareparts: the first partnumber can only be used for Drystar4500 CR/DR printers ,the second one for Drystar4500 CR/DR and Drystar4500 mammo printers and the third (if defined) only for Drystar4700 Mammo high resolution printers Part TH * Reason6 Film position incorrect during film scan Cure6 Repeat the calibration again * Reason7 Marker lines on calibration image not detected during film scan Cure7 Repeat the calibration again * Reason8 Scanning action of the MDM scan head was not smooth Cure8 Power off the printer and replace Part mdmAssy * Reason9 DSH board defective or malfunctioning Cure9 Power off the printer and replace Part mdmAssy * Reason10 Incorrect MDM calibration Cure10 Recalibrate MDM including a registration calibration HC11116 : decurlmodule.heat.cold * Type Failure * Mail destination 06

Mail escalation Mail attachment Mail format 03 infocounters.txt standard Troubleshooting
HC11117 : decurlmodule.heat.hot * Type Defect HC11118 : decurlmodule.mechanics * Type Defect HC11119 : th.device.thermistors.low * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning Heatsink-temperature measurement of thermal printhead too low . Engine is still allowed to print but image quality may decrease * Warning Message Printhead problem * Reason1 Thermal printhead temperature too low because of low ambient temperature Cure1 Make sure ambient temperature is within printer specifications and wait for the printer to become aclimatised to the ambient temperature if neccessary * Reason2 One or more thermistors on thermal printhead defective Cure2 Power off printer and replace with one of the following spareparts: the first partnumber can only be used for Drystar4500 CR/DR printers ,the second one for Drystar4500 CR/DR and Drystar4500 mammo printers and the third (if defined) only for Drystar4700 Mammo high resolution printers Part TH * Reason3 Heatsink-temperature measurement by MEB board not correct Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC11120 : th.device.thermistors.high * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning Heatsink-temperature measurement of thermal head too high . Engine is still allowed to print but image quality may decrease * Warning Message Printhead problem * Reason1 Cooling of thermal head not efficient because of blocked airflow Cure1 Make sure that enough airflow is available for the printhead by insuring that air inlets and outlets are completely free * Reason2 Cooling of thermal head not efficient because of malfunctioning thermal printhead cooling fan Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part F1 * Reason3 One or more thermistors on thermal printhead defective Cure3 Power off printer and replace with one of the following spareparts: the first partnumber can only be used for Drystar4500 CR/DR printers ,the second one for Drystar4500 CR/DR and Drystar4500 mammo printers and the third (if defined) only for Drystar4700 Mammo high resolution printers Part TH * Reason4 Heatsink-temperature measurement by MEB board not correct Cure4 Power off printer and replace Part MEB HC11121 : decurlmodule.control
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting * * Type Mail destination Mail escalation Mail attachment Mail format Meaning
DD+DIS111.05E
* * *
Failure 06 03 infocounters.txt standard The decurl module got an overtemperature or didn't reach its temperature in time Warning Message Decurl module not working Reason1 The decurl temperature sensor needs cleaning Cure1 Open the top cover and wait until the decurl temperature has cooled down enough to clean the decurl temperature sensor Reason2 The decurl temperature sensor is defective Cure2 Power off printer and replace Part S17 Reason3 The decurl heater element is defective Cure3 Power off printer and replace Part DecurlHeat Reason4 Power supply 55V is defective Cure4 Power off printer and replace Part PS_spare
HC11122 : thmodule.drumpos.encoder * Type Defect * Meaning Thermal head positioning failed * Warning Message Head not positioned correctly * Reason1 There was a mechanical obstruction or malfunction while trying to position the thermal head. Cure1 Check for obstructions at the printposition motor and mechanism in the front cover * Reason2 The thermal head positioning mechanism is defective Cure2 Power off the printer and replace motor Part M3 HC11123 : mail.fail * Type * Meaning * Warning Message * Reason1 Cure1 * Reason2 Cure2 * * Reason3 Cure3 Reason4 Cure4 Part
Failure Alarm mail unsuccesfully sent E-mail problem No physical network connection Insert the network cable at the rear side of the printer. Network server or Mailserver down Contact your network administrator and make sure all network servers are operative. Incorrect printer settings for error mail destination Change error mail destination settings Network port on front-end CPU board is defective Power off printer and replace PROTEUS
HC11200 : floppydisk.medium * Type Accidental HC11201 : floppydisk.write * Type Accidental HC11202 : floppydisk.read * Type Accidental HC11203 : pickupmodule.cover * Type Accidental

HC11204 : mdmmodule.calib.sens * Type Accidental HC11205 : mdmmodule.calib.profile * Type Accidental HC11206 : mdmmodule.calib.reg * Type Accidental HC11207 : thmodule.lowtemperature * Type Accidental HC11208 : drummodule.lowtemperature * Type Accidental HC11209 : dmax.calib.failed * Type Accidental HC11210 : pickupmodule.film_drop * Type Accidental * Meaning Film did not succesfully reach the correct preload position after a film pick-up * Warning Message Remove internal jam * Reason1 The film drop is unsuccesful . The film didn't fall down properly on the horizontal alignment, or the preload sensors S10 or S11 didn't detect the film .If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport Cure1 Open the top cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport * Reason2 The upper preload sensor or lower preload sensor S10 or S11 did not get triggered after a film drop because the sensor is badly positioned Cure2 Open the top cover and remove the jammed sheet .Power off printer and reposition the preload sensor S10 or S11 correctly * Reason3 The upper preload sensors S10 or S11 did not get triggered after a film drop because the sensor is mechanically broken Cure3 Open the front cover and remove the sheet . Power off printer and replace Part S10 HC11211 : pickupmodule.upperpickuppassedsensor.hi * Type Accidental * Meaning No sheet has triggered the upper pickup passed sensor S14 within the timeout limit after a film pick-up * Warning Message Remove input jam * Reason1 Upper film pickup is unsuccesful . No film has been picked up or the film is jammed between the upper film tray and the upper pickup passed sensor S14 .If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport Cure1 Open the top cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport * Reason2 The upper pickup passed sensor S14 did not get triggered after a pick-up because the sensor is badly positioned Cure2 Open the top cover and remove the jammed sheet .Power off printer and reposition the pickup passed sensor S14 correctly * Reason3 The upper pickup passed sensor S14 did not get triggered after a pick-up because the sensor is mechanically broken Cure3 Open the front cover and remove the sheet . Power off printer and replace Part S14 HC11212 : pickupmodule.upperpickuppassedsensor.lo * Type Accidental * Meaning The bottom end of the sheet has not passed the upper pickup passed sensor Troubleshooting
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS111.05E
* *
S14 within the time-out limit after the sheet has been detected passing by the upper pickup passed sensor S14 Warning Message Remove input jam Reason The sheet did not fall down after a pick-up and is stuck at the upper pickup passed sensor S14 . If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport Cure Open the top cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport Reason2 The upper pickup passed sensor S14 did not get free after a pick-up because the sensor is badly positioned Cure2 Open the top cover and remove the jammed sheet .Power off printer and reposition the pickup passed sensor S14 correctly Reason3 The upper pickup passed sensor S14 did not get free after a pick-up because the sensor is mechanically broken Cure3 Open the front cover and remove the sheet . Power off printer and replace Part S14
HC11213 : pickupmodule.feederpassedsensor.hi * Type Accidental * Meaning No sheet has triggered the feeder passed sensor S9 within the time-out limit after a film pick-up * Warning Message Remove input jam * Reason1 The sheet did not fall down all the way after a pick-up and is stuck between the input tray and the feederpassedsensor S9 . If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport Cure1 Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport * Reason2 The feederpassedsensor S9 did not get triggered after a pick-up because the sensor is badly positioned Cure2 Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet .Power off printer and reposition the feederpassedsensor S9 correctly * Reason3 The feederpassedsensor S9 did not get triggered after a pick-up because the sensor is mechanically broken Cure3 Open the front cover and remove the sheet . Power off printer and replace Part S9 HC11214 : pickupmodule.feederpassedsensor.lo * Type Accidental * Meaning The bottom end of the sheet has not passed the feederpassedsensor S9 within the time-out limit after the sheet has been detected passing by the feeder passed sensor S9 * Warning Message Remove input jam * Reason The sheet did not fall down all the way after a pick-up and is stuck at the feederpassedsensor S9 . If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport Cure Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport HC11215 : drummodule.drumpassedsensor.hi * Type Accidental * Meaning No sheet has triggered the drum passed sensor S12 within the time-out limit after a film has been printed * Warning Message Remove internal jam * Reason1 Film is jammed around the print drum or has taken a wrong film path Cure1 Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport * Reason2 The drum passed sensor S12 did not get triggered after a film was printed , because the sensor is badly positioned Cure2 Open the front and/or top cover and remove the jammed sheet .Power off

* Reason3 Cure3 Part Troubleshooting printer and reposition the drum passed sensor S12 correctly The drum passed sensor S12 did not get triggered after a film was printed , because the sensor is mechanically broken Open the front and/or top cover and remove the jammed sheet .Power off printer and replace S12
HC11216 : drummodule.drumpassedsensor.lo * Type Accidental * Meaning The bottom end of the sheet has not passed the drum passed sensor S12 within the time-out limit after the sheet has been detected passing by the drum passed sensor S12 * Warning Message Remove internal jam * Reason The sheet did not pass the drum passed sensor S12 after a film print and is stuck at the drum passed sensor S12 . If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport Cure Open the top cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport HC11217 : pickupmodule.coversheetsensor.hi * Type Accidental * Meaning No sheet has triggered the coversheet sensor S18 within the time-out limit after a film pick-up * Warning Message Remove input jam * Reason1 The sheet did not fall down all the way after a pick-up and is stuck between the input tray and the coversheet sensor S18 . If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport Cure1 Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport * Reason2 The coversheet sensor S18 did not get triggered after a pick-up because the sensor is badly positioned Cure2 Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet .Power off printer and reposition the coversheet sensor S18 correctly * Reason3 The coversheet sensor S18 did not get triggered after a pick-up because the sensor is mechanically broken Cure3 Open the front cover and remove the sheet . Power off printer and replace Part S18 HC11218 : pickupmodule.coversheetsensor.lo * Type Accidental * Meaning The bottom end of the sheet has not passed the coversheet sensor S18 within the time-out limit after the sheet has been detected passing by the coversheet sensor S18 * Warning Message Remove input jam * Reason The sheet did not fall down all the way after a pick-up and is stuck at the coversheet sensor S18 . If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport Cure Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport HC11219 : pickupmodule.upperpreloadsensor.hi * Type Accidental * Meaning No sheet has triggered the upper preload sensor S10 within the time-out limit after a film has been picked up * Warning Message Remove internal jam * Reason1 Film is jammed in the input film path between the input cassette and the film preload position Cure1 Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting * Reason2 Cure2 * Reason3 Cure3 Part
DD+DIS111.05E
The upper preload sensor S10 did not get triggered after a film pickup because the sensor is badly positioned Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet .Power off printer and reposition the upper preload sensor S10 correctly The upper preload sensor S10 did not get triggered after a film was picked up , because the sensor is mechanically broken Open the front cover and remove the sheet . Power off printer and replace S10
HC11220 : pickupmodule.upperpreloadsensor.lo * Type Accidental * Meaning The bottom end of the sheet has not left the upper preload sensor S10 within the time-out limit after the sheet has been detected at the upper preload sensor S10 and printing was started . * Warning Message Remove internal jam * Reason The sheet did not leave the upper preload sensor S10 after printing was started and is stuck at the upper preload sensor S10 . If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport Cure Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport HC11221 : pickupmodule.lowerpreloadsensor.hi * Type Accidental * Meaning No sheet has triggered the upper preload sensor S11 within the time-out limit after a film has been picked up * Warning Message Remove internal jam * Reason1 Film is jammed in the input film path between the input cassette and the film preload position Cure1 Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport * Reason2 The lower preload sensor S11 did not get triggered after a film pickup because the sensor is badly positioned Cure2 Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet .Power off printer and reposition the lower preload sensor S11 correctly * Reason3 The lower preload sensor S11 did not get triggered after a film was picked up , because the sensor is mechanically broken Cure3 Open the front cover and remove the sheet . Power off printer and replace Part S11 HC11222 : pickupmodule.lowerpreloadsensor.lo * Type Accidental * Meaning The bottom end of the sheet has not left the lower preload sensor S11 within the time-out limit after the sheet has been detected at the ower preload sensor S11 and printing was started . * Warning Message Remove internal jam * Reason The sheet did not leave the lower preload sensor S11 after printing was started and is stuck at the lower preload sensor S11 . If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport Cure Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport HC11223 : decurlmodule.decurlexitsensor.hi * Type Accidental * Meaning The bottom end of the sheet has not left the decurl exit sensor S15 within the time-out limit after it was detected by this same sensor * Warning Message Remove output jam * Reason The film did not leave the decurl exit sensor S15 after printing was started and is stuck at the decurl exit sensor S15 . If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport

Cure Troubleshooting Open the top cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back, look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport
HC11224 : decurlmodule.decurlexitsensor.lo * Type Accidental * Meaning The top end of the sheet didn't reach decurl exit sensor S15 within the timeout limit after the film reached the decurl drum where the motor got another speed * Warning Message Remove output jam * Reason The sheet did not get to the decurl exit sensor S15 after printing was started and is stuck before the decurl exit sensor S15 . If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport Cure Open the top cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back, look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport HC11225 : takeovermodule.takeoverexitsensor.hi * Type Accidental * Meaning No sheet has triggered the takeover exit sensor S13 within the time-out limit after a film has been printed * Warning Message Remove internal jam * Reason1 Film is jammed between the drum passed sensor S12 and the takeover exit sensor S13 Cure1 Open the front cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport * Reason2 The takeover exit sensor S13 did not get triggered after a film was printed , because the sensor is badly positioned Cure2 Open the front and/or top cover and remove the jammed sheet .Power off printer and reposition the takeover exit sensor S13 correctly * Reason3 The takeover exit sensor S13 did not get triggered after a film was printed , because the sensor is mechanically broken Cure3 Open the front and/or top cover and remove the jammed sheet .Power off printer and replace Part S13 HC11226 : takeovermodule.takeoverexitsensor.lo * Type Accidental * Meaning The bottom end of the sheet has not passed the takeover exit sensor S13 within the time-out limit after the sheet has been detected passing by the takeover exit sensor S13 * Warning Message Remove internal jam * Reason The sheet did not pass the takeover exit sensor S13 after a film print and is stuck at the takeover exit sensor S13 . If this error reoccurs , something is mechanically blocking sheet transport Cure Open the top cover and remove the jammed sheet . If this error keeps on coming back , look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport HC11227 : drummodule.ambienttemperature.low * Type Accidental * Meaning Ambient temperature measurement on MEB board shows that temperature is too low . Engine is still allowed to print but image quality may decrease * Warning Message Amb. temp. low * Reason Ambient temperature too low or printer temperature too low due to a recent stay in a cold environment Cure If the printer has been in the cold and only for a short period of time in a warm environment , it is best to wait until the printer has been warmed up sufficiently. If however the ambient temperature really is too low , it has to be made sure that the ambient temperature is raised above the treshold temperature.
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS111.05E
HC11228 : drummodule.ambienttemperature.high * Type Accidental * Meaning Ambient temperature measurement on MEB board shows that temperature is too high. Engine is still allowed to print but image quality may decrease * Warning Message Amb. temp. high * Reason Ambient temperature too high what could be caused by continuous printing in an already warm environment or the environment temperature is just too high Cure If caused by continuous printing , this can be cured by waiting until temperature comes down ; otherwise it has to be made sure that the environment temperature comes down HC11229 : pickupmodule.protectivefilm.upper_reversed * Type Accidental A protective film has been taken out of the upper input tray and thus the film is * Meaning loaded upside down in the upper input tray * Warning Message Open Thermal Head compartment and remove protective film * Reason Film in upper input tray is loaded upside down Cure Open Thermal Head compartment and remove protective film. Open upper input tray and flip the inserted film pack upside down. Re-insert the protective sheet under the film pack, making sure that the right side hole in the protective sheet is closest to you. Close upper input tray and Thermal Head compartment. HC11230 : pickupmodule.protectivefilm.lower_reversed * Type Accidental * Meaning A protective film has been taken out of the lower input tray and thus the film is loaded upside down in the lower input tray * Warning Message Open Thermal Head compartment and remove protective film * Reason Film in lower input tray is loaded upside down Cure Open Thermal Head compartment and remove protective film. Open lower input tray and flip the inserted film pack upside down. Re-insert the protective sheet under the film pack, making sure that the right side hole in the protective sheet is closest to you. Close lower input tray and Thermal Head compartment. HC11231 : pickupmodule.upperpickuppassedsensor.static * Type Accidental * Meaning Input film jam at the upperpickup passed sensor * Reason A film remained at the location of the upper pickup passed sensor S14 Cure Resolve the film jam, and it keeps on occuring look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport and broken or misfit sensors HC11232 : pickupmodule.feederpassedsensor.static * Type Accidental * Meaning Input film jam at the feeder passed sensor * Reason A film remained at the location of the feeder passed sensor S9 Cure Resolve the film jam, and it keeps on occuring look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport and broken or misfit sensors HC11233 : pickupmodule.coversheetsensor.static * Type Accidental * Meaning Input film jam at the coversheet sensor * Reason A film remained at the location of the coversheet sensor S18 Cure Resolve the film jam, and it keeps on occuring look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport and broken or misfit sensors HC11234 : drummodule.area.static * Type Accidental

* Meaning Film jam near the drum module area Troubleshooting
HC11235 : pickupmodule.upperpreloadsensor.static * Type Accidental * Meaning Film jam at the upperpreload sensor * Reason A film remained at the location of the upperpreload sensor S10 Cure Resolve the film jam, and it keeps on occuring look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport and broken or misfit sensors HC11236 : pickupmodule.lowerpreloadsensor.static * Type Accidental * Meaning Film jam at the lowerpreload sensor * Reason A film remained at the location of the lowerpreload sensor S11 Cure Resolve the film jam, and it keeps on occuring look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport and broken or misfit sensors HC11237 : drummodule.drumpassedsensor.static * Type Accidental * Meaning Film jam at the drumpassed sensor * Reason A film remained at the location of the drumpassed sensor S12 Cure Resolve the film jam, and it keeps on occuring look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport and broken or misfit sensors HC11238 : pickupmodule.takeoverexitsensor.static * Type Accidental * Meaning Film jam at the takeoverexit sensor * Reason A film remained at the location of the takeoverexit sensor S13 Cure Resolve the film jam, and it keeps on occuring look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport and broken or misfit sensors HC11239 : decurlmodule.area.static * Type Accidental * Meaning Film jam at the decurl unit * Reason A film remained at the location of decurl unit Cure Resolve the film jam, and it keeps on occuring look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport and broken or misfit sensors HC11240 : decurlmodule.decurlexitsensor.static * Type Accidental * Meaning Output film jam at the decurlexit sensor * Reason A film remained at the location of the decurlexit sensor S15 Cure Resolve the film jam, and it keeps on occuring look for mechanical blockage of sheet transport and broken or misfit sensors HC11241 : pickupmodule.protectivefilm.upper * Type Accidental HC11242 : pickupmodule.protectivefilm.lower * Type Accidental HC11243 : service.local.timeout * Type Accidental HC11244 : service.remote.timeout * Type Accidental HC11245 : service.serial.timeout * Type Accidental
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS111.05E
HC11300 : file.missing * Type * Mail destination Mail escalation Mail attachment Mail format HC11301 : file.invalid * Type * Mail destination Mail escalation Mail attachment Mail format HC11302 : conf.invalid * Type * Mail destination Mail escalation Mail attachment Mail format
Failure 06 03 infocounters.txt standard
HC11303 : thmodule.thinstall * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning Impaired image quality due to missing or incorrect Thermal Head characterisation files * Warning Message Printhead parameter problem * Reason Thermal head characterisation files are not installed or are incorrect Cure Install the correct thermal head characterisation files using the matching thermal head floppy HC11304 : image.underrun * Type Accidental HC11305 : initialization * Type
Accidental
HC11306 : version.sw-hw-mech * Type Defect HC11307 : system * Type HC11308 : runtime * Type
Defect
Defect
HC11309 : file.sens.image * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning Image cannot be printed because of incompatible image sensitometry file * Warning Message Film parameter problem * Reason The *.FMsen file accompanying the image file, where * is the name of the

Cure Troubleshooting image file without extension , is incompatible with the software release Replace the incompatible image sensitometry file with a correct one or remove the incompatible sensitometry file in order to be able to print the image with the calibrated or default sensitometry
HC11310 : file.sens.film * Type * Meaning * *
Defect Image cannot be printed because of incompatible new.FMsen or default.FMsen film sensitometry file Warning Message Film parameter problem Reason The New.FMsen or Default.FMsen file on the HD , whichever is used to print this image is incompatible with the software release Cure Perform a film calibration from the tray you wish to print from
HC11311 : system.date.frontend * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning System date is incorrect * Warning Message Incorrect date * Reason Printer installation has never been performed or finished correctly Cure Perform a printer installation using the key operator interface and set the date and time to the correct values HC11312 : pickupmodule.format.lower * Type Defect HC11313 : total.printed.high * Type Failure * Mail destination 06 Mail escalation 03 Mail attachment infocounters.txt Mail format standard * Meaning Too many images have been printed before proper printer installation was performed * Warning Message Nr. images high * Reason Printer installation wizard has detected that already a high number of images have been printed prior to actual printer installation Cure No action has to be taken, an alarm mail will be sent to service to confirm this fact

Electrical and mechanical codings, fusetables and LEDs
List of Contents
1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
Codings................................................................................. 1
Jumper Setting Protheus CPU ............................................................ 1 Jumper Setting 9 GB Hard Disk (CM+325998.0) ................................ 1 Jumper Setting 18 GB Hard Disk (CM+326051.0) .............................. 3 Jumper Setting 36 GB Hard Disk (CM+326051.2) .............................. 4
2 3
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7
Fuses..................................................................................... 4 LEDs ...................................................................................... 5

MEB1 / OMF Board ............................................................................... 5 OMF-Board (plugged into the MEB-Board) ........................................ 6 MEB2 Board.......................................................................................... 7 Proteus CPU-Board.............................................................................. 8 Crius CPU-Board................................................................................ 10 Power Supply ..................................................................................... 12 LED on the Front Panel...................................................................... 13
Chapter 3.4 / I

Codings
The following tables show the jumper settings and the corresponding function. Jumpers on... Protheus CPU 9 GB Hard disk 18 GB Hard disk 36 GB Hard disk Refer to 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
1.1
Jumper Setting Protheus CPU

Jumper J1 Default Setting open Function J1 not set: Booting via standard ROM on the CPU. J1 set: Booting via replacement EPROM in the CPU socket U32 (not used) Table 1
1.2
Jumper Setting 9 GB Hard Disk (CM+325998.0)

Jumper 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Default setting open open open open closed open open open open open open open Function ID Bit 3 ID Bit 2 ID Bit 1 ID Bit 0 Enable Auto Spin. Disk will start on device power up S/E (Single Ended) Mode Disable Unit Attn TI Sync Nego Auto Start Delay Delay Start 6/12 Disable Parity LED out Table 2
Chapter 3.4 / 1
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
Jumper A B C D E F 0
Default setting open open open open open open open Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not connected Term Power on Table 3
Function
Example: 9 GB hard disk
A B C D E F 0
Power
HDD Connector
536334BC.CDR
12
Figure 1: Example 9 GB hard disk
Chapter 3.4 / 2

1.3

Jumper 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Default setting open open open open open open open SCSI ID settings SCSI ID settings SCSI ID settings SCSI ID settings Force SE Mode Termination Power LED Pins Table 4 Jumper A B C D E F G Default setting open open open open open open closed Function Not used Disable Unit Attention Enable TI-SDTR Disable SCSI Parity Check Delay Start 6/12 Auto Start Delay Enable Auto Spin: Disk will start on device power up Table 5 Function
Chapter 3.4 / 3
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
1.4

Jumper 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Default setting open open open open open open open SCSI ID settings SCSI ID settings SCSI ID settings SCSI ID settings Force SE Mode Termination Power LED Pins Table 6 Jumper A B C D E F G Default setting open open open open open open closed Function Not used Disable Unit Attention Enable TI-SDTR Disable SCSI Parity Check Delay Start 6/12 Auto Start Delay Enable Auto Spin: Disk will start on device power up Table 7 Function
Fuses
The printer has no fuses which can be replaced. If one of the fuses in the power supply is defective, the whole power supply unit must be replaced.
Chapter 3.4 / 4

LEDs
The following tables show the status of the LED indications and the corresponding function. LED's on... MEB Board OMF Board CPU Board Power supply Front Panel Table 8 Refer to 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.6 3.7
3.1
MEB1 / OMF Board

LED D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Color Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Code + 24V +12V -12V +8V -8V VCC V33 Power on Status Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Function +24V failure +24V supply voltage present +12V failure +12V supply voltage present -12V failure -12V supply voltage present +8V failure +8V supply voltage present -8V failure -8V supply voltage present VCC failure VCC supply voltage present V33 failure V33 supply voltage present
Table 9
Chapter 3.4 / 5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
MEB
D1 D4 D5 D7 D6 D2 D3 +24 +8
OMF (Piggy Back Board)

DDRI DSTR DSLI DCLK DLD DONE D12 D13 D9 D8 D1 D7 D15 TST D16 CNT STR D11 D14 CTRL V33 D17 D10 LD1 VCC D5
yellow
-8 3.3
LDO D18 VCC +12 -12
D4 LIFE
green red
Figure 2
3.2
OMF-Board (plugged into the MEB-Board)

LED D5 D17 D11 D18 D10 D14 Color green green yellow yellow yellow yellow Code VCC 33V STR LD0 LD1 CTRL Power on Function Status off on off on off on off off off on VCC 1 input voltage (+ 5V) failure VCC (+ 5 V) supply voltage present V33 supply voltage (+3,3V) failure 33V supply voltage (+3,3V) present TH_STROBE 2 inactive TH_STROBE active no function no function DSH 3 lamp of the densitometer is powered off lamp of the densitometer is powered on
1 2
VCC = Input Voltage STROBE = Processing Regulating Process of Pixel Data (a high level of STROBE inhibits all heater elements associated) 3 DSH = Density Sensor Head board
Chapter 3.4 / 6

D16 D15 D8 D7 D9 D13 D12
yellow yellow red yellow yellow yellow yellow
CNT TST DONE DLD DCLK DSLI DSTR
off flashing off off on off on off on off on off on
D1
yellow
DDRI
off on
D4
yellow
LIFE
off flashing
DSH reading data off DSH reading data on no function FPGA 4 configuration ok FPGA configuration failure drum encoder channel A low drum encoder channel A high FPGA configuration clock low FPGA configuration clock high FPGA configuration data FPGA configuration data FPGA configuration data STROBE low FPGA configuration data STROBE high FPGA configuration data DRIVER low FPGA configuration data DRIVER high operating system not alive operating system alive
Table 10
3.3
MEB2 Board
LEDs listed in this table indicate activity. LED D1 D12 D15 D8 D7 Color yellow yellow yellow yellow red Code LIF APP STR RDV CFD Power on Function Status flashing off off on flashing on/off off on operating system alive operating system not alive no function no TH strobe TH strobe Optical Encoder running Optical Encoder not running FPGA configuration ok FPGA configuration failure
FPGA = Field Progammable Gate Array
Chapter 3.4 / 7
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
LEDs listed in this table indicate the presence of the following voltages: D14 D13 green green +5 V +3.3V off on off on off on off on off on off on off on VCC (+5V) supply voltage failure VCC (+5V) supply voltage present V33 (+3.3) supply voltage present V33 (+3.3) supply voltage not present +24 V failure +24 V supply voltage present +12 V failure +12 V supply voltage present -12 V failure -12 V supply voltage present +8 V failure +8 V supply voltage present -8V V failure -8 V supply voltage present
D5 D6 D4 D3 D2
green green green green green
+24V +12V -12V +8V -8V
3.4
Proteus CPU-Board
The Proteus CPU is installed in all printers with software release 2.00 or lower. LEDs listed in this table indicate activity. For the location of the LEDs see Figure 3. LED D9 Status On Off LED0 On Off 1 2 3 4 On Off On Off On Off On Off LED5 On Off Table 11 Yellow Software programmable Yellow Software programmable Yellow Software programmable Yellow Software programmable Yellow Software programmable Yellow Color red Function FPGA NOT configured - No operation FPGA configured properly Software programmable
Chapter 3.4 / 8

LEDs listed in this table indicate voltage. For the location of the LEDs see Figure 3. LED D6 D7 D8 D2 Status On Off On Off On Off On Off Table 12 Green Green Green Color Green Function +5V present +5V not present +3.3V present +3.3V not present +12V present +12V not present DS Voltages within range
DONE D9
D2 PWRGOOD D8 +12v D7 +3.3v D6 +5v
LED5
LED0
536334uz.CDR
Figure 3: LEDs at Proteus CPU
Chapter 3.4 / 9
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
3.5
Crius CPU-Board
The Crius CPU is installed in all printers with software release 3.00 or higher
LEDs listed in this table indicate activity. For the location of the LEDs see Figure 4. LED D7 D10 D1 D6 D3 D4 D16 D11 Status On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off Yellow Yellow Crius - MEB FireWire connection available Crius - MEB FireWire connection not available Power PC - PCI bus communication okay Power PC - PCI bus communication not okay Table 13 LEDs listed in this table indicate network activity. For the location of the LEDs see Figure 4. LED D12 D10 Status On Off On Off Table 14 Yellow Color Yellow Function FPGA NOT configured - No operation FPGA configured properly Software programmable Yellow Software programmable Yellow Red FPGA configuration not successful FPGA configuration successful Software programmable Yellow Software programmable Yellow Software programmable Color Yellow Function Software programmable
Chapter 3.4 / 10

LEDs listed in this table indicate voltage. For the location of the LEDs see Figure 3. LED D8 D5 D2 D3 D15 D17 Status On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off Yellow Green Green Green Green Color Green Function +5V present +5V not present +3.3V present +3.3V not present +2.5V present +2.5V not present +1.8V present +1.8V not present +12V present +12V not present Power good signal from power supply present Power good signal from power supply missing Table 15
CS1
D1 LED2 D4
D7 LED0
NGB_60x
CS0 536334vz.CDR
D10 LED1 D11 D3
DONE D6 VCC D8 D13 D14 D12 V33 D5 V25 D2 VCORE D3 +12V D15 PWRGD D17 Link 100M Traffic D16
Figure 4: LEDs at Crius CPU
Chapter 3.4 / 11
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
3.6
Power Supply
Overtemp
+24 V
-12 V
+12 V
+3.3 V
+20 V
+55 V
+5 V
536334ba.cdr
Figure 5 LED Overtemp Status On Color Red Function Temperature inside power supply exceeded permissible limits. Operation not possible*. Temperature inside power supply within permissible limit. +24 V present +24 V not present Green Green Green Green Green Green -12 V present -12 V not present +5 V present +5 V not present +12 V present +12 V not present +3.3 V present +3.3 V not present voltage between +12 V and +21.5 V voltage < +12 V voltage between +5 and +55 V and decurl unit is heating voltage below +5V or decurl unit is not heating
Off +24 V -12 V +5V +12 V + 3.3 V +20 V +55 V On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off Green
Table 16 *when the temperature inside the power supply exceeds the permissible limit, printing can continue for up to 120 seconds. After this delay the power supply switches off the power and checks the temperature every 20 seconds. As soon as the temperature is below the permissible limit, it switches on again.
Chapter 3.4 / 12

3.7
LED on the Front Panel

Color Light Constant Printer Status Ready (stand-by) Startup sequence Receiving jobs Calculating Printing Calibrating Installation Key-operator Service mode Film jam Warning Error status Receive Jobs possible? Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes/No No Yes Yes No Printing possible? Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes/No No No Yes No
Green Blinking
Blinking Red Constant
Table 17
Chapter 3.4 / 13
DD+DIS110.05E
Repair and Service Replacement of Parts
List of Contents
1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3
Covers .......................................................................................... 1
Left hand and right hand side covers ......................................................... 1 Upper front cover ......................................................................................... 3 Lower front cover ......................................................................................... 5 Rear cover .....................................................................................................6 Top cover assembly ..................................................................................... 7
Top Cover .................................................................................................................. 7 Discharge brush in the top cover assembly ............................................................. 12 Gas lifters ................................................................................................................. 13
1.6
Display cover assembly ............................................................................. 14
2
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9
2.9.1 2.9.2 2.9.3
Hardware .................................................................................... 16
KEY4 Board................................................................................................. 16 Membrane keypad ...................................................................................... 18 MEB2 Board ................................................................................................ 21 CPU assembly............................................................................................. 24 Fan for the CPU .......................................................................................... 27 Hard disk ..................................................................................................... 29 Disk drive .................................................................................................... 31 Power supply .............................................................................................. 33 Switches ...................................................................................................... 35
Safety switch, top ..................................................................................................... 35 Safety switch, bottom ............................................................................................... 36 Switch to clear film jam ............................................................................................ 37
3
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6
3.6.1 3.6.2
Film loading assembly .............................................................. 39

Upper film magazine................................................................................... 39 Lower film magazine .................................................................................. 42 Guide rails for the lower film magazine .................................................... 43 Film input assembly ................................................................................... 46 Input feeding roller ..................................................................................... 47 Film pickup assembly ................................................................................ 48
Film pickup assembly in the film input assembly...................................................... 48 Film pickup assembly in the display cover ............................................................... 49
3.7
3.7.1 3.7.2
Motors.......................................................................................................... 50
Motor (M5) in the film input assembly ...................................................................... 50 Motor (M4) in the display cover ................................................................................ 52
3.8
3.8.1 3.8.2
Solenoid ...................................................................................................... 53
Solenoid of vertical alignment assembly) ................................................................. 53 Solenoid (EM1) of horizontal alignment assembly ................................................... 54
3.9
Vertical alignment assembly ..................................................................... 55

Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110) Chapter 3.5 / I
DD+DIS110.05E
3.10
Horizontal alignment assembly................................................................. 56
4
4.1 4.2
Densitometer module................................................................ 57
Densitometer............................................................................................... 57 Halogen lamp in the densitometer ............................................................ 59
5
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7
Drum motor assembly............................................................... 63

Drum motor assembly................................................................................ 63 Drum motor (M1)......................................................................................... 65 Flat belt........................................................................................................ 67 Toothed Belt................................................................................................ 68 Drum ............................................................................................................ 69 Drum Bearings............................................................................................ 75 Discharge brush above the drum.............................................................. 76
6
6.1
6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4
Print head unit ...........................................................................77

Thermal Head.............................................................................................. 77
Printing test images ..................................................................................................78 Thermal head replacement.......................................................................................78 TH data installation ...................................................................................................79 Initial Drum Position adjustment ...............................................................................79
6.2 6.3
Fan for the thermal head............................................................................ 81 Drive motor (M3) for the thermal head...................................................... 82
7
7.1 7.2 7.3
Handover assembly and feeding roller ................................... 83

Upper handover assembly......................................................................... 83 Lower handover assembly......................................................................... 84 Handover feeding roller ............................................................................. 85
8
8.1
8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6
Film output unit ......................................................................... 87

Decurl unit................................................................................................... 87
Infrared temperature sensor .....................................................................................88 Heating element decurl unit ......................................................................................90 Film reversal unit ......................................................................................................91 Drive motor for the Decurl unit (M2) .........................................................................92 Driving mechanism Decurl unit .................................................................................94 Toothed belt for the Decurl unit drive........................................................................95
9
9.1 9.2
Wheels ........................................................................................96
Front wheels ............................................................................................... 96 Rear wheels................................................................................................. 97
Chapter 3.5 / II
DD+DIS110.05E
Press the Stop/Unlock button to initiate the stop sequence before opening or switching off the machine. Prior to the replacement of parts the machine must be switched off and disconnected from the mains.
1
1.1
Covers
Left hand and right hand side covers
Required spare part: CM+326040x Side Cover Left CM+326043x Side Cover Right
536335pa.CDR
Figure 1 Required tools: Screwdriver medium Required time: 3 min
Removal: (1) (2) Press the button (A). Lift up the top cover assembly (B) to its upper resting position.
B 2
A
536335pw.CDR
Figure 2
Chapter 3.5 / 1
DD+DIS110.05E
(3) (4) (5)
Loosen two screws (A) left and right. Lift the two levers (B) and push them out. Lift both side covers (C) up and take them away.
3 2 C A 1 B B B 2 3 1
2 C
C
Figure 3
536335pb.CDR
Re-installation: (1) (2) (3) Align both side covers (A) with pins (B) at the bottom. Snap the levers into place. Tighten screws again. Refer to (A) in Figure 3.
A 2
1 B
536335pc.CDR
Figure 4
Chapter 3.5 / 2
DD+DIS110.05E
1.2
Upper front cover

Required spare part: CM+326038x Upper Front Cover
536335pd.CDR
Figure 5 Required tools: Socket wrench, 7 mm (magnetic) Required time: 10 min Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Remove both screws (A). Tilt the print head unit (B) outward.
(2) (3)
A B 1
A
536335pe.CDR
Figure 6
Chapter 3.5 / 3
DD+DIS110.05E
(4) (5)
Remove the two screws (C). Tilt the print head unit (B) half way upward.
C 2 B C
Figure 7 (6) (7) Pull the upper front cover (B) out, and then lift it up. Close the print head unit softly.
536335pf.CDR
536335pg.CDR
Figure 8 Re-installation: Proceed in reverse order.
Chapter 3.5 / 4
DD+DIS110.05E
1.3
Lower front cover

Required spare part: CM+326039x Lower Front Cover
536335ph.CDR
Figure 9 Required tools: Socket wrench, 7 mm (magnetic) Required time: 4 min Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Remove screws (A). Remove the lower front cover (B).
(2) (3)
B A
536335pi.CDR
Chapter 3.5 / 5
DD+DIS110.05E
1.4
Rear cover
Required spare part: CM+326045x Rear Cover
53
63
35
R CD pj .
Figure 11 Required tools: Screw driver (medium size) Required time: 2 min Removal: (4) (5) (6) Disconnect all cables from the rear of the printer. Insert the screwdriver in slots (B) of the rear cover (A). Push the screwdriver outward to release the snap-lock.
A B
536335pk.CDR
Figure 12
Chapter 3.5 / 6
DD+DIS110.05E
(7) (8)
Lift the lever at bottom of rear cover (A). Pull the rear cover away.
A
53633nh.CDR
1 2
A 2
1
536335pl.CDR
1.5
1.5.1
Top cover assembly

Top Cover
Required spare part: CM+326044x Top cover assembly
536335pn.CDR
Figure 14 Required tools: Screwdriver, small size (magnetic)
Chapter 3.5 / 7
DD+DIS110.05E
Required time: 12 min Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1) Remove the rear cover (see section 1.4). Disconnect plug (A). Remove both upper clips (B) of the pneumatic gas lifters (right and left hand side).
(2) (3) (4)
A
536335po.CDR
Figure 15 (5) While holding the top cover assembly, remove the pneumatic gas lifters (A) from the ball pin on the right and on the left hand side. Carefully close the top cover assembly.
(6)
536335pr.CDR
Figure 16
Chapter 3.5 / 8
DD+DIS110.05E
(7)
Put both upper clips (A) back on pneumatic gas lifters.
A
536335qc.CDR
Figure 17 (8) Remove the retaining ring on the left hand side with a screwdriver (top cover assembly is closed).
536335qb.CDR
Figure 18 (9) Remove bush (E).
(10) Push metal rod (G) through the hole. Take care that the plastic washers (F) do not get lost.
E D
536335qa.CDR
Figure 19
Chapter 3.5 / 9
DD+DIS110.05E
(11) Lift the top cover assembly (A) to about a 90 angle and remove it.
536335pp.CDR
Figure 20 Re-installation: (1) (2) Put the top cover assembly (A) on the back of printer. Close top cover assembly. Make sure the button (B) is fully popped out.
B A
536335qo.CDR
Figure 21 (3) From the rear side of the printer check the correct position of the top cover assembly. It must be seated this way, that the metal rod (G), the washer (F), the bush (E) and the retaining ring (D) can be inserted later.
F D G E
Figure 22 Chapter 3.5 / 10 Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110)
F G E
536335pz.CDR
DD+DIS110.05E
(4) (5) (6)
Insert the metal rod (G). Slightly bend the metal flange of the top cover assembly outward. Place the washer (F) onto the metal rod between the plate and the flange.
536335pq.CDR
Figure 23 (7) (8) Insert the bush (E). Put the retaining ring (D) onto the end of the metal rod.
E D
536335qa.CDR
Figure 24 (9) Reconnect all disconnected wires and cables.
536335pt.CDR
Figure 25
Chapter 3.5 / 11
DD+DIS110.05E
(10) Tilt the top cover assembly up and press both pneumatic gas lifters (A) with the already fixed clips (B) into the ball pins. (11) Close the top cover and check its proper locking.
1 B
536335ps.CDR
Figure 26
1.5.2
Discharge brush in the top cover assembly

Required spare part: CM+326019x Discharge Brush
536335to.CDR
Figure 27 Required tools: Socket wrench, 5.5 mm Required time: 5 min
Chapter 3.5 / 12
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) (2) (3) (4) Open the top cover assembly (see section 1.1). Loosen the ground wire (see Figure 28). Place hand directly under to catch the loose nut. Remove three screws (A). Then the plate on the opposite side is freed. Remove the discharge brush.
(5)
Re-installation: (1) (2) (3) (4) Position the discharge brush with one screw inserted. Press the counter plate from behind against it. Tighten the three screws (A). Close the top cover assembly.
536335un.CDR
Figure 28
1.5.3
Gas lifters
Required spare part: CM+326037x Gas Lifters
536335uo.CDR
Figure 29 Required tools: Open end wrench, 13 mm Required time: 5 min
Chapter 3.5 / 13
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Remove nuts (A, B) on the left and right hand side of the printer. Hold on to the top cover assembly when removing the last nut.
(2)
Re-installation: Proceed in reverse order.
A B
536335up.CDR
Figure 30
1.6
Display cover assembly

Required spare part: CM+326013.x Display cover assembly
536335pu.CDR
Figure 31 Required tools: Socket wrench, 7 mm (magnetic) Required time: 5 min
Chapter 3.5 / 14
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (3) (4) (5) Open the top cover assembly (see section 1.1). Remove two screws (A). Pull the display cover assembly (B) forward and lift it up.
B
536335pv.CDR
Figure 32 (6) (7) (8) (9) Disconnect the ribbon cable (A). Disconnect wire (B). Disconnect wire (C). Take the cable and wires out of the harness.
A B C
536335px.CDR
Figure 33 (10) Push the display cover assembly (A) to the right and take it out.
A 2
536335py.CDR
Chapter 3.5 / 15
DD+DIS110.05E
2
2.1
Hardware
KEY4 Board
Required spare part: CM+326004x KEY4 PCB
536335qn.CDR
Figure 35 Required tools: Phillips screwdriver, small Socket wrench, 7 mm (magnetic) Required time: 7 min When working on printed circuit boards, always consider the anti-static regulations (see chapter 3.1). Otherwise damage on the PCBs may occur upon removal.
Removal: (1) (2) (3) Open the top cover assembly (see section 1.1). Remove two screws (A). Pull the display cover assembly (B) forward and lift it up to its upper resting position.
B
536335pv.CDR
Figure 36
Chapter 3.5 / 16
DD+DIS110.05E
(4)
Mount the anti-static wrist strap (A) and connect it to ground on the printer. Disconnect the two wires (B, C). Remove seven screws (D). Remove KEY4 Board (E).
(5) (6) (7)
B C
536335qm.CDR
Figure 37
(8)
Remove the two plastic caps 'Power' and 'Stop' from the KEY4 Board.
536335qn.CDR
Figure 38
Re-installation: (1) Mount the two plastic caps (Figure 35) on the KEY4 Board: Power on S1 Stop on S2. For the re-assembly proceed in reverse order.
(2)
Chapter 3.5 / 17
DD+DIS110.05E
2.2
Membrane keypad
Required spare part: CM+326005x Membrane Keypad
536335qd.CDR
Figure 39 Required tools: Phillips screwdriver, small Socket wrench, 7 mm (magnetic) Screwdriver, flat head, small Required time: 5 min
Removal: (1) (2) (3) Open the top cover assembly (see section 1.1). Remove two screws (A). Pull the display cover assembly (B) forward and lift it up.
B
536335pv.CDR
Figure 40
Chapter 3.5 / 18
DD+DIS110.05E
(4)
Disconnect the ribbon cable (C) from the KEY4 Board.
536335ra.CDR
Figure 41 (5) (6) Close the display cover assembly again. Open membrane cover (D) by pressing against its bottom left corner.
D
Figure 42 (7) Insert a standard screwdriver and lift the corner of the adhesive membrane keypad.
536335qk.CDR
536335qe.CDR
Figure 43
Chapter 3.5 / 19
DD+DIS110.05E
(8)
Lift it just enough to grasp the corner of the membrane keypad. Peel the membrane keypad off slowly.
(9)
536335qf.CDR
Figure 44 Re-installation: (1) (2) Slide the ribbon cable through the opening in the display cover assembly. Remove the adhesive protection foil from the membrane keypad.
Once the membrane keypad is set into place it must not be removed. (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Place the membrane keypad very carefully into position. Lift the display cover assembly. Reconnect the ribbon cable (C) to the KEY4 board. Refer to Figure 41 Close the display cover assembly. Tighten the two screws (A). Refer to Figure 40. Close the top cover assembly.
Chapter 3.5 / 20
DD+DIS110.05E
2.3
MEB2 Board
Required spare part: CM+326001.x MEB2 PCB
536336rb.CDR
Figure 45 Required tools: Phillips screwdriver, medium Socket wrench, 7 mm, short (if possible with swivel head or swivel extension) Required time: 30 min When working on printed circuit boards, always consider the anti-static regulations (see chapter 3.1). Otherwise damage on the PCBs may occur. Upon removal do not touch the print drum. Removal: (1) (2) Open the print head unit. Lift up the cover plate (A).
2 A 1
536335ql.CDR
Figure 46
Chapter 3.5 / 21
DD+DIS110.05E
(3)
Push it to the right hand side and remove it.
536335sa.CDR
Figure 47 (4) Unplug all cables (A) from the MEB2 Board.
A A A
536335vw.cdr
A A A A B
Figure 48 Take special care not to drop the screws (B) into the printer (see below).
Chapter 3.5 / 22
DD+DIS110.05E
(5)
Remove the two cables (B).
536335rt.CDR
Figure 49 (6) (7) Loosen the four screws (A). Push the MEB2 Board down and take it out.
A A A A B
536335qq.CDR
Figure 50
Chapter 3.5 / 23
DD+DIS110.05E
Re-installation: (1) Remove the MEB2 Board from the antistatic bag.
536336rc.CDR
Figure 51 (2) Insert the MEB2 board. Observe the holes (C) to be aligned with stand offs. Proceed in reverse order.
C
536335qy.CDR
(3)
Figure 52
2.4
CPU assembly
Required spare part: CM+325997x Proteus CPU PCB for printers with SW Rel. < 3.0.0_C1 CM+ 349262x Crius CPU for printers with SW Rel. 3.0.0_C1
536335ru.CDR
Figure 53 Required tools: Socket wrench, 7 mm Required time: 10 min When working on printed circuit boards, always consider the anti-static regulations (see chapter 3.1). Otherwise damage to PCBs may occur.
Chapter 3.5 / 24
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) (2) (3) (4) Disconnect the mains and network cable. Remove left cover. Refer to section 1.1 Remove rear cover. Refer to section 1.4. Remove two screws (A).
A A
536335wh.CDR
Figure 54 (5) (6) Remove the 11 screws (A). Remove the metal cover.
A
Figure 55
536335rh.CDR
Chapter 3.5 / 25
DD+DIS110.05E
Replacement Protues CPU (for Crius CPU see below)

(7) (8) (9) Pull the CPU section out. Disconnect the six cables (A). Remove the six screws (B).
(10) Disconnect the fan wire. (11) Remove the CPU.
B
536335ri.CDR
Figure 56
Replacement Crius CPU (for Proteus CPU see above)

(5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Pull the CPU section out. Disconnect the six cables (A). Remove the two screws (B). Disconnect the fan wire. Remove the CPU.
B
536335se.CDR
Chapter 3.5 / 26
DD+DIS110.05E
2.5
Fan for the CPU

Required spare part: CM+325999x Fan Assembly for CPU
536335qs.CDR
Figure 58 Required tools: Open end wrench, 7 mm Socket wrench, 7 mm Required time: 10 min When working on printed circuit boards, always consider the anti-static regulations (see chapter 3.1). Otherwise damage to PCBs may occur. Removal: (1) (2) (3) Disconnect the mains and network cable. Remove left cover. Refer to section 1.1 Remove rear cover. Refer to section 1.4.
Chapter 3.5 / 27
DD+DIS110.05E
(4)
Remove two screws (A).
A A
536335wh.CDR
A
Figure 60
536335rh.CDR
Chapter 3.5 / 28
DD+DIS110.05E
(7) (8) (9)
Loosen the screws (D). Disconnect the cable (E). Remove the spacer (F).
F
AIR FLOW ROTATION
(10) Remove the fan. Note: Pay attention to the airflow.
D E
536335rj.CDR
2.6
Hard disk
Required spare part: CM+326051x Hard disk XX GB
536335vb.CDR
Figure 62 Required tools: Socket wrench, 7 mm Phillips screwdriver, medium Current software version for the printer
Required time: 60 min
Removal: (1) (2) (3) Disconnect the mains and network cable. Remove left cover. Refer to section 1.1 Remove rear cover. Refer to section 1.4.
Chapter 3.5 / 29
DD+DIS110.05E
(4)
A A
536335wh.CDR
A
Figure 64
536335rh.CDR
Chapter 3.5 / 30
DD+DIS110.05E
(7) (8) (9)
Disconnect two cables (F) at the hard disk (G). Remove four screws (H). Remove the hard disk.
H F 1 F
536335rl.CDR
Figure 65 Re-installation: Proceed in reverse order. When finished, install the latest software on the printer. Refer to chapter 3.2, tools, "Software installation on a virgin hard disk" and note below.
SW Release 3.0._C1 can only be installed on a printer with Crius CPU.
2.7
Disk drive
Required spare part: CM+309789x Floppy-Drive + Data Cable
536335rm.CDR
Figure 66 Required tools: Socket wrench, 7 mm Phillips screwdriver, medium
Chapter 3.5 / 31
DD+DIS110.05E
Required time: 10 min Removal: (1) (2) (3) (4) Disconnect the mains and network cable. Remove left cover. Refer to section 1.1 Remove rear cover. Refer to section 1.4. Remove two screws (A).
A A
536335wh.CDR
A
Figure 68
536335rh.CDR
Chapter 3.5 / 32
DD+DIS110.05E
(7) (8) (9)
Disconnect the wires (D) on the disk drive (E). Remove four screws (F). Remove the disk drive.
F D D
E F
536335rn.CDR
2.8
Power supply
Required spare part: CM+326000x Power Supply
536335se.CDR
Figure 70 Required tools: Socket wrench, 10 mm Socket wrench, 7 mm
Chapter 3.5 / 33
DD+DIS110.05E
Required time: 15 min Removal: (1) (2) (3) Disconnect the mains and network cable. Open top cover assembly. Remove right side cover and rear cover. Refer to section 1.1 and 1.4. Remove 11 screws (A). Remove the metal cover.
A
(4) (5)
536335rh.CDR
Figure 71 (6) (7) Remove nut (B), washers and cable. Remove screw (C).
B
536335ro.CDR
Figure 72
(8)
Disconnect cables (D).
Figure 73
Chapter 3.5 / 34
DD+DIS110.05E
(9)
Remove the power supply.
Figure 74 Re-installation: (1) (2) (3) Push the power supply in. Tighten the screw (C). Mount the ground wire (G) in this sequence: - toothed washer - wire lug - toothed washer - retainer nut. For further assembly proceed in reverse order. Figure 75
(4)
2.9
2.9.1
Switches
Safety switch, top
Required spare part: EB+704266304x Safety Switch
536335sj.CDR
Figure 76 Required tools: No tools required.
Chapter 3.5 / 35
DD+DIS110.05E
Required time: 3 min Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Disconnect the mains and network cable. Press the two latches together, located on the sides of switch. Remove the safety switch (A).
(2) (3) (4)
536335bi.cdr
2.9.2
Safety switch, bottom

Required spare part: EB+704266304x Safety Switch
536335sj.CDR
Figure 78 Required tools: No tools required. Required time: 5 min
Chapter 3.5 / 36
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Disconnect the mains and network cable. Open the print head unit (see section 1.1). Press the two latches together, located on the sides of the safety switch. Remove the safety switch (A).
(2) (3) (4)
(5)
536335bh.cdr
2.9.3
Switch to clear film jam

Required spare part: EB+53580300 Switch
536335sl.CDR
Figure 80 Required tools: No tools required. Required time: 5 min
Chapter 3.5 / 37
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Disconnect the 3 wires. Press the two latches together, located on the sides of the safety switch. Remove switch (A).
(2) (3)
(4)
Chapter 3.5 / 38
DD+DIS110.05E
3
3.1
Film loading assembly

Upper film magazine
Required spare part: CM+326007x Upper Film Loading Assembly
Figure 82 Required tools: Socket wrench, 7 mm Allen key, size 2 Required time: 10 min Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Press the red grip (A) to the front and tilt the film input assembly up.
(2)
Figure 83 (3) (4) (5) Remove two screws (B) on the display cover. Pull the display cover forward and turn it up. Pull the upper and lower film magazines out.
Figure 84
Chapter 3.5 / 39
DD+DIS110.05E
Figure 85 (6) (7) (8) (9) Remove four screws (C) on the side of the middle plate (D). Pull the middle plate (D) towards the front. Pull the upper and lower film magazines further out until the front Allen screws (E) on the rails are visible. Remove the two rear Allen screws (F) on the right and left.
(10) Remove the two front Allen screws (E) on the right and left.
Chapter 3.5 / 40
DD+DIS110.05E
(11) Lift the upper film magazine over the two stops (G) of the middle plate and pull it out to the front.
Figure 86 Re-installation: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Insert the two stops (H) (Figure 86) at the beginning of the guide rails. Take care, that the small hole (I) (Figure 85) corresponds to the thread in the outer plate of the machine. Screw the two rear Allen screws (F) (Figure 85) into the right and left hand side. Screw the two front Allen screws (E) (Figure 85) into the right and left hand side. Screw the four screws (C) (Figure 85) into the middle plate. Insert the upper and lower film magazines. Turn the display cover down and fix with two screws (B) (Figure 84). Turn the film input assembly down. Mount the covers left and right.
(10) Close the top cover assembly.
Chapter 3.5 / 41
DD+DIS110.05E
3.2
Lower film magazine

Required spare part: CM+326009x Lower Film Loading Assembly
536335su.CDR
Figure 87 Required tools Socket wrench, 7 mm Required time: 15 min Removal: (1) (2) (3) Pull out the lower film magazine. Remove three screws (A) at the bottom of the cover. Remove the cover.
Figure 88 (4) Remove two screws (B).
Figure 89 (5) (6) (7) Push the rails (C) back. Pull the film magazine out. Tilt it downwards to remove it.
C
Figure 90
536335vi.CDR
Chapter 3.5 / 42
DD+DIS110.05E
Re-installation: (1) (2) (3) (4) Remove the covers of the spare part. Insert the film magazine from the bottom (vertical to the rail), thereby pressing the guide rail down and behind the two black stops. Tilt the film magazine up. Pull the rails (C) out until the threads (D) are aligned with slot (E). For further assembly proceed in reverse order.
(5)
Figure 91 You may check correct installation of the film magazine by pulling the magazine out. Now the inserted plate must be in a horizontal position, and when you push the magazine home, the plate must be lifted.
3.3
Guide rails for the lower film magazine

Required spare part: CM+326006x Set Guide Rails
Figure 92 Required tools: Socket wrench, 7 mm Allen key, size 2 Required time: 10 min
Chapter 3.5 / 43
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Remove the three screws (A) at the bottom of the cover. Remove the cover.
(2) (3)
Figure 93 (4) Remove the two screws (B).
Figure 94 (5) (6) Push the rails (C) back. Pull the film magazine out, tilt it downwards, and remove it.
C
Figure 95 (7) (8) (9) Pull the rails completely out. Remove the rear Allen screws (D) on the right and left. Remove the front Allen screws (E) on the right and left.
536335vi.CDR
Figure 96
Chapter 3.5 / 44
DD+DIS110.05E
Figure 97 Re-installation: (1) (2) (3) Hold the outer part of the rail (F) to the same height as the outer plate (G). Screw the rear Allen screws (D) and the front Allen screws (E) into both right and left sides. For further assembly proceed in reverse order.
You may check correct installation of the film magazine by pulling the magazine out. Now the inserted plate must be in a horizontal position, and when you push the magazine home, the plate must be lifted.
Chapter 3.5 / 45
DD+DIS110.05E
3.4
Film input assembly

Required spare part: CM+326046x Film Input Assembly
Figure 98 Required tools: Screwdriver, medium size Required time: 10 min Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Disconnect cables (A). Remove the C-clips (B). Push the red grip (C) towards the front, and tilt the film input assembly (D) up. Slide the film input assembly to the side and take it out.
(2) (3) (4)
(5)
Re-installation: (1) Insert the lower rod (E) on the right hand side into the hole of the frame plate. Insert the upper rod (F) on the right hand side into the hole of the frame plate. Insert lower and upper rod on the left hand side. For further assembly proceed in reverse order. Figure 99
(2)
(3) (4)
Chapter 3.5 / 46
DD+DIS110.05E
3.5
Input feeding roller

Required spare part: CM+326034x Input Feeding Roller
Figure 100 Required tools: Screwdriver, medium size Required time: 15 min
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Remove the two screws (A) at the motor. Remove C-clips and bearings (D). Remove the input-feeding roller (E).
(2) (3) (4)
Chapter 3.5 / 47
DD+DIS110.05E
3.6
3.6.1
Film pickup assembly

Film pickup assembly in the film input assembly
Required spare part: CM+326008x Film Pickup Assembly
Figure 102 Required tools: Socket wrench, 5.5 mm Required time: 10 min
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Press the red grip (A) towards the front and tilt the film input assembly up.
(2)
536335sr.CDR
Figure 103 (3) Press motor (B) in and hold it in this position: the plastic holder will release it. Lift the roller unit (C) on the right hand side and then remove it.
(4)
C
Figure 104
536335td.CDR
Chapter 3.5 / 48
DD+DIS110.05E
Re-installation: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Connect the roller unit on the left hand side. Press the motor in and hold it in this position. Connect the roller unit on the right hand side. Thereby the bearing must engage in the plastic holder. Turn the film input assembly back down. Re-install side covers and close top cover assembly.
3.6.2
Film pickup assembly in the display cover

Required spare part: CM+326008.x Film Pickup Assembly
Figure 105 Required tools: Socket wrench, 5.5 mm Required time: 5 min Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Remove two screws (A) on the display cover. Pull the display cover towards the front and lift it up.
(2) (3)
Figure 106
Chapter 3.5 / 49
DD+DIS110.05E
(4)
Press motor (B) in and hold it in this position, which causes the plastic holder to release it. Lift the roller unit (C) on the right hand side and remove it completely.
(5)
C
536335td.CDR
3.7
3.7.1
Motors
Motor (M5) in the film input assembly
Required spare part: CM+309878x Film Pickup Motor
Figure 108 Required tools: Pointed pliers Open end wrench, 5.5 mm Socket wrench, 7 mm Required time: 5 min Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Push the red tab (A) towards the front, and tilt the film input assembly up.
(2)
536335sr.CDR
Figure 109 Chapter 3.5 / 50 Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110) Edition 2, Revision 2 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS110.05E
Figure 110 (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Remove the quick-release lock (B). Remove the gear (C). Remove two screws (D). Remove the motor (E). Disconnect the motor wires (F).
Chapter 3.5 / 51
DD+DIS110.05E
3.7.2
Motor (M4) in the display cover

Required spare part: CM+309878x Film Pickup Motor
Figure 111 Required tools: Pointed pliers Open end wrench, 5.5 mm Required time: 7 min Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Remove two screws (A) on the display cover. Pull the display cover to the front and lift it up. Figure 112 (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Disconnect wire (B). Remove the quick-release lock (C). Remove the gear (D). Remove two screws (E). Remove the motor (F).
(2) (3)
Figure 113 Re-installation: For further assembly proceed in reverse order.
Chapter 3.5 / 52
DD+DIS110.05E
3.8
3.8.1
Solenoid
Solenoid of vertical alignment assembly)
Required spare part: CM+309743x Solenoid
Figure 114 Required tools: Pliers Open end wrench, 17 mm Required time: 10 min Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Disconnect the cable (A). Unhook the spring (B). Compress the cotter pin (C) with pliers. Remove the cotter pin.
(2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 115 (6) (7) Remove the nut (D) of the lifting solenoid. Remove the solenoid.
Figure 116 Re-installation: Proceed in reverse order. Edition 2, Revision 2 Agfa Company Confidential Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110) Chapter 3.5 / 53
DD+DIS110.05E
3.8.2
Solenoid (EM1) of horizontal alignment assembly

Required spare part: CM+309743x Solenoid
536335tk.CDR
Figure 117 Required tools: Socket wrench, 7 mm Required time: 5 min
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1) and rear cover (see section 1.4). Disconnect the wire (A). Remove two screws (B). Remove the holding bracket with solenoid (C).
(2) (3) (4)
Chapter 3.5 / 54
DD+DIS110.05E
3.9
Vertical alignment assembly

Required spare part: CM+326011.x Vertical alignment assembly
Figure 119 Required tools: Screwdriver, medium size Pliers Required time: 10 min
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Disconnect cable (A). Unhook the spring (B). Compress the cotter pin (C) with pliers. Remove cotter pin.
(2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 120 (6) Remove the C-clip (D).
D B
536335qu.CDR
Figure 121
Chapter 3.5 / 55
DD+DIS110.05E
(7) (8)
Remove the C-clip (C) and the bearing (D). Remove the rod (E) from the left hand side.
F E
536335tm.CDR
Figure 122 Re-installation: (1) (2) Mount the rod in such a way that the plastic stops (F) can catch the film. For further assembly proceed in reverse order.
3.10
Horizontal alignment assembly

Required spare part: CM+326012.x Horizontal alignment assembly
536335tk.CDR
Chapter 3.5 / 56
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Disconnect the cable (A). Remove screws (B). Remove the holding bracket with solenoid (C).
(2) (3) (4)
4
4.1
Densitometer module
Densitometer
Required spare part: CM+326003x Densitometer Assembly
Chapter 3.5 / 57
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the right and left side covers (see section 1.1). Disconnect the ribbon cable (A) and take it out of the harness. Disconnect connector (B). Remove 3 screws (C) from the densitometer. Remove the densitometer.
C B
(2) (3) (4) (5)
A C
536335qz.CDR
Figure 126 Re-installation: (1) Slide the densitometer carriage (E) to mid-travel position.
536335rw.CDR
Figure 127 (2) Align the 2 tips (F) of the rod with holes on the opposite of the printer metal side plate.
E
536335sd.CDR
Figure 128
Chapter 3.5 / 58
DD+DIS110.05E
(3) (4) (5)
Install the 3 screws (C) (see Figure 126) in the densitometer. Slide the carriage (E) to the home position. Connect the ribbon cable (A) and connector (B) (see Figure 126).
536335rv.CDR
Figure 129 Adjustment: For MDM calibration instructions refer to chapter 3.6.
Make sure that the cables cannot touch any moving parts.
(6)
Mount the side covers and close the top cover assembly.
4.2
Halogen lamp in the densitometer

Required spare part: CM+309945x Halogen Lamp
Figure 130 Required tools: Socket wrench, 7 mm Phillips screwdriver PH 1x80 Required time: 15 min
Chapter 3.5 / 59
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Disconnect ribbon cable (A) and remove its harness. Disconnect cable (B). Remove three screws (C) on the densitometer. Remove the densitometer.
C B
(2) (3) (4) (5)
A C
536335qz.CDR
Figure 131 (6) Remove two screws (E) that hold the MDM lamp.
536335bl.cdr
Figure 132 (7) Pull the lamp (F) out of the densitometer.
E
536335rx.CDR
Figure 133
Chapter 3.5 / 60
DD+DIS110.05E
Avoid sharp bends in the connection wires. Hold the new halogen lamp only with gloves or a cloth.
Re-installation: (1) Insert the halogen lamp connectors in the holes of the fixture. Insert the lamp (F) into the hole in the densitometer. Tighten the two screws (E). Mount the fixture in the densitometer.
(2) (3) (4)
E
536335rx.CDR
Figure 134 (5) (6) Slide the densitometer carriage (E) to mid travel-position. For further assembly proceed in reverse order.
536335rw.CDR
Figure 135 (7) Align the 2 tips (F) of the rod with holes on the opposite of the printer metal side plate.
E
536335sd.CDR
Figure 136
Chapter 3.5 / 61
DD+DIS110.05E
(8) (9)
Install the 3 screws (C) (see Figure 126) in the densitometer. Slide the carriage (E) to the home position.
(10) Connect the ribbon cable (A) and wires (B) (see Figure 126).
536335rv.CDR
Figure 137 Adjustment: For MDM calibration instructions refer to chapter 3.6.
Make sure that the cables cannot touch any moving parts.
(11) Mount the side covers and close the top cover assembly.
Chapter 3.5 / 62
DD+DIS110.05E
5
5.1
Drum motor assembly

Drum motor assembly
Required spare part: CM+326020.x Drum Motor Assembly
536335ta.cdr
Figure 138 Required tools: Phillips screw driver, 13mm Socket wrench, 7 mm Open end or box wrench, 7 mm. Required time: 30 min. Removal: (1) (2) (3) Open top cover assembly. Remove side covers (see section 1.1). Disconnect the mains and network cable from the rear cover and remove the rear cover (see section 1.4). Disconnect plug (A) (see Figure 139).
(4)
Figure 139
Chapter 3.5 / 63
DD+DIS110.05E
(5) (6)
Remove nut (A) and washer (B). Remove toothed pulley (C) Caution! Do not lose the positioning pin behind the pulley. Remove the toothed belt (D). Remove the cable from the encoder. Pull down the flat belt from the pulley.
(7) (8) (9)
(10) Remove both screws (E). (11) Remove the drum driving assembly.
536335vd.cdr
Figure 140 Re-installation: Proceed in reverse order Adjustment: For adjustments of the flat belt refer to chapter 3.6.
Chapter 3.5 / 64
DD+DIS110.05E
5.2
Drum motor (M1)

Required spare part: CM+326021x Drum Motor
536335tb.cdr
Figure 141 Required tools: Small flathead screwdriver Socket wrench 13 mm Required time: 30 min. Removal: (1) (2) (3) Open top cover assembly. Remove the right side cover (see section 1.1). Disconnect plug (A).
Figure 142
Chapter 3.5 / 65
DD+DIS110.05E
(4) (5)
Remove nut (A) and washer (B). Remove toothed pulley (C) Caution! Do not lose the positioning pin behind the pulley. Remove the toothed belt (D).
(6)
Figure 143 (7) (8) (9) Remove the retaining ring (A) of the belt tensioner. Remove the spring (C). Remove the belt tensioner (B).
(10) Remove the four screws (D) on the motor. (11) Remove motor (E).
536335ve.cdr
Figure 144 Re-installation: Proceed in the reverse order. Caution! The positioning pin at the toothed pulley must be in a horizontal position. Otherwise it will fall off.
Chapter 3.5 / 66
DD+DIS110.05E
5.3
Flat belt
Required spare part: CM+309782x Flat Belt for Drum
536335vx.cdr
Figure 145 Required tools: Phillips screwdriver Socket wrench, 13 mm Pliers Required time: 30 min. Removal: (1) (2) (3) Open top cover assembly. Remove the right side cover (see section 1.1). Disconnect plug (A) for safety reasons.
Figure 146
Chapter 3.5 / 67
DD+DIS110.05E
(4) (5)
Remove nut (A) and washer (B). Remove toothed pulley (C). Caution! Do not lose the positioning pin behind the pulley. Remove the toothed belt (D). Remove the pin (E) with a pair of suitable pliers. Pull off the bearing (F). Remove the flat belt (G).
G F
(6) (7) (8) (9)
536335vy.cdr
Figure 147 Re-installation: Proceed in the reverse order. Caution! The positioning pin at the toothed pulley must be in a horizontal position. Otherwise it will fall off. Adjustment: For adjustments of the flat belt refer to chapter 3.6.
5.4
Toothed Belt
Required spare part: CM+309783x Toothed Belt for Drum
536335vx.cdr
Figure 148 Required tools: Flathead screwdriver Required time: 15 min.
Chapter 3.5 / 68
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Open top cover. Remove the right side cover (see section 1.1). Disconnect plug (A) for safety reasons. Remove spring (B). Pull down toothed belt (C).
536335vw.cdr
Figure 149 Re-installation: Proceed in the reverse order.
5.5
Drum
Required spare part: CM+326017x Drum
536335wa.cdr
Figure 150 To protect the drum from scratches it is advised to wrap it in a film. Required tools: Phillips screwdriver Socket wrench, 13 mm Socket wrench, 7 mm Required time: 30 min.
Chapter 3.5 / 69
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) (2) (3) Open top cover. Remove the side covers (see section 1.1). Disconnect plug (A) for safety reasons.
Figure 151 (4) Remove nut (A) and washer (B) (13 mm ratchet or socket wrench). Remove toothed pulley (C) Caution! Do not lose the positioning pin behind the pulley. Remove the toothed belt (D). Loosen spring (E). Pull off the flat belt (F).
(5)
(6) (7) (8)
536335wb.cdr
Figure 152
Chapter 3.5 / 70
DD+DIS110.05E
(9)
Detach the drum bearing (A) at the right hand side of the printer (3 screws, 7 mm socket wrench).
536335uw.cdr
Figure 153 (10) Remove the two eccentric bearings and take out the drum.
536335vt1.cdr
Figure 154
Chapter 3.5 / 71
DD+DIS110.05E
(11) Remove C-clip (A). (12) Remove pin (B).
536335wd.cdr
Figure 155 Re-installation: (1) Take the new drum out of the package. To avoid dust deposits, it is recommended to either put it down as shown, or wrap it in a film.
536335CJ.CDR
Figure 156 (2) Insert the new drum. Re-mount the drum bearing.
536335CG2.CDR
Figure 157
Chapter 3.5 / 72
DD+DIS110.05E
(3)
Re-insert both pulleys. Caution! The positioning pin (A) at the toothed pulley must be in a horizontal position. Otherwise it will fall out. Fasten both pulleys (2 x washer, 2 x 13 mm nut).
(4)
A
536335CI.CDR
Figure 158 (5) Wind up the flat belt (A) and the toothed belt (B).
B A
536335CA.CDR
Figure 159
Chapter 3.5 / 73
DD+DIS110.05E
(6)
Re-install the eccentric bearings at both sides of the drum.
536335wa.cdr
Figure 160 (7) Perform the 'Adjustment of the print drum position' as described in chapter 3.6. Perform a print head profile calibration as described in chapter 3.6.
9
(8)
536336vt.CDR
Figure 161
Chapter 3.5 / 74
DD+DIS110.05E
5.6
Drum Bearings
Required spare part: CM+326018.x Set Drum Bearings
536335we.cdr
Figure 162 Required tools: 7 mm socket wrench Required time: 15 min.
Removal: (1) (2) (3) (4) Remove all covers (see section 1). Remove all belts and pulleys (see sections 5.3 and 5.4). Remove the drum bearings (A) at both sides of the printer. Remove the eccentric bearings (B).
A B
Figure 163
536335wf.cdr
Re- installation: When putting the drum back in-place, be extra careful that the ball bearings DO NOT FALL OUT INTO THE PRINTER: The rubber washer of the clutch should keep it intact. Important: Re-adjust the value noted under "Final Drum Position" on the sticker of the Thermal Head.
Approved by De code van de THERMAL HEAD ASSY 4X00 , Initial Drum Position : = Final Drum Position : = , Return info: Date of removal: / / Nr. of prints: Printer S/N:
536335wh.cdr
Chapter 3.5 / 75
DD+DIS110.05E
5.7
Discharge brush above the drum

Figure 164 Required tools: Socket wrench, 5.5 mm Required time: 3 min Removal: (1) (2) (3) Open the print head unit (see section 1.2). Remove 3 screws (A). Remove the discharge brush (B).
536335BA.CDR
Figure 165
Chapter 3.5 / 76
DD+DIS110.05E
Print head unit

Do not apply pressure on the IC cover, as pressure may cause damage on the interconnections underneath the IC cover. This has to be considered for both new and old thermal heads.
6.1
Thermal Head
When handling the thermal head observe the anti-static regulations described in chapter 3.1. Required spare part: CM+326016.x Thermal Head
Figure 166 Required tools: Special screwdriver (enclosed). Screwdriver, medium size Thermal Print Head cleaning tissues Required time: 20 min The TH replacement is split up in the following steps:
#
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Step
Print test images Replace the thermal head Install TH data Set the initial drum position Perform a film calibration from the upper tray Print two test images DrumPos4x00_8x10.tif Check for bubbles Perform a print head profile calibration Perform a film calibration from both trays
Refer to
6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 Chapter 3.6 Chapter 3.6 Chapter 3.6 Chapter 3.6 Chapter 3.6
Chapter 3.5 / 77
DD+DIS110.05E
6.1.1
Printing test images

(1) Print the STI testimage and the image DrumPos_4x00_8x10_xxx.tif, mark the image faults on the test images Switch off the printer
(2)
6.1.2
Thermal head replacement

Removal:
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Open the print head unit (see section 1.2). Loosen three screws (A, 1). Disconnect the three sets of wires at the thermal head (B). Remove thermal head (2).
B A
536335re.CDR
Figure 167 (5) If thermal head (B) cannot be removed easily, try it with a screwdriver (1).
Note: Be careful not to damage the heatsink.
536335rz.CDR
Figure 168
Chapter 3.5 / 78
DD+DIS110.05E
Re-installation: (1) (2) (3) Proceed in reverse order. Clean the thermal head with a Thermal Print Head cleaning tissue. Close the print head unit.
6.1.3
TH data installation
(1) Have both, the 'old' and 'new' TH floppy ready. (2) In the Service Menu select '5 Install Data - 3 Printhead data - 1 New Printehead. (3) Follow the instructions on the local display (4) Send both, the test films printed during step 1 and the 'old' TH floppy back to Agfa, LOG-T (as indicated on the return label).
6.1.4
Initial Drum Position adjustment

(1) Open the front cover (2) Set both eccentric bearings on the left and right hand side to the initial drum position (value X at the sticker) and close the front cover. Drum position adjustment is made via eccentric bearings of the print drum. All the adjustments of eccentric bearings must be made on both sides of the print drum. The thermal head carries a sticker with the information "Initial Drum Position" This value specifies the initial position of the print drum. It is between 0.2 and +0.6. Per engage - position two values are written on the eccentric bearings. Only observe the upright characters. The characters upside down can be neglected.
Chapter 3.5 / 79
DD+DIS110.05E
Initial Drum position = 0 +0.5 +0.3 0 +0.1 -0.1 +0.5 -0.1 +0.1
Initial Drum position = +0.3 -0.1 +0.2 0 -0.1

9
+0.5 +0.3 +0.1
+0.5 +0.3 +0.1
Figure 169
Figure 170
Sticker on thermal head
Approved by De code van de THERMAL HEAD ASSY 4X00 Initial Drum Position : = Final Drum Position : = ,
Return info: Date of removal: Nr. of prints: Printer S/N:
Figure 171 For the further proceeding refer to chapter 3.6, adjustments, section "Adjustments after TH replacement"
Chapter 3.5 / 80
+0.5
+0.1
+0.1
+0.6
+0.3
/ /
536336mb.cdr
DD+DIS110.05E
6.2
Fan for the thermal head

Required spare part: CM+326015x Fan for thermal head
Figure 172 Required tools: Ratchet with 5.5 mm socket wrench Required time: 5 min
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Remove the upper front cover. Disconnect wire (A). Remove the screws (B); (two or four screws). Remove the fan (C).
(2) (3) (4) (5)
Chapter 3.5 / 81
DD+DIS110.05E
6.3
Drive motor (M3) for the thermal head

Required spare part: CM+309878x Thermal Head Load Motor
Removal:
(1)
Open the print head unit (see section 1.2). Disconnect wire (A). Remove two screws (B). Remove motor (C).
(2) (3) (4)
Chapter 3.5 / 82
DD+DIS110.05E
7
7.1
Handover assembly and feeding roller

Upper handover assembly
Required spare part: CM+326032x Upper handover assembly
Figure 176 Required tools: Screwdriver, medium size Required time: 15 min Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Remove C-clips and bearings (A). Remove C-clips (B) from the lock rod. Remove the lock rod (C). Remove the upper hand-over assembly (D).
(2) (3) (4) (5)
Figure 177
Chapter 3.5 / 83
DD+DIS110.05E
7.2
Lower handover assembly

Required spare part: CM+326035x Lower handover assembly
Figure 178 Required tools: Screwdriver, medium size
Required time: 15 min
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Disconnect wires (A, B). Remove C-clip and bearing (C). Remove three screws (D) on the motor. Remove the motor together with the lower hand-over assembly. Remove C-clip and bearing from the motor. Separate the lower hand-over assembly from the motor. Figure 179 Re-installation: Proceed in reverse order. Chapter 3.5 / 84 Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110) Edition 2, Revision 2 Agfa Company Confidential
536335ua.CDR
C D A B
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
DD+DIS110.05E
7.3
Handover feeding roller

Required spare part CM+326036x Handover feeding roller
G F
D C E B A
536335uc.CDR
Figure 181
Chapter 3.5 / 85
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) (2) (3) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Remove the toothed belt (A). Remove C-clip (B).
There is a straight pin on the rod, this pin may drop out during removal of the toothed belt pulley. (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Remove the toothed belt pulley (C). Take care that the slit is in the horizontal position! Take the straight pin (D) out horizontally. Pull the C-clip and bearing (E) off. Remove the C-clip and bearing (F). Push the rod (G) fully to the left, and then remove it.
Chapter 3.5 / 86
DD+DIS110.05E
8
8.1
Film output unit

Decurl unit
Required spare part: CM+326024x Decurl Unit
Figure 182 Required tools: No tools required. Required time: 3 min Removal: (1) (2) (3)
(4)
Open the top cover assembly (see section 1.1). Disconnect two wires (A). Remove the safety pin (B). Push the Decurl unit to the right, and then remove it via the groove in the rod.
A
536335ue.CDR
Figure 183
Chapter 3.5 / 87
DD+DIS110.05E
8.1.1
Infrared temperature sensor
Required spare part: CM+326025x IR-temperature sensor, Decurl Unit
Figure 184 Required tools: Socket wrench, 7 mm Required time: 3 min Do not touch the front part of the sensor, the sensor lens, with your fingers.
Removal: (1) (2) (3) Open the top cover assembly (see section 1.1). Open lock. Turn the film reversal unit up as shown.
Figure 185
Chapter 3.5 / 88
DD+DIS110.05E
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
Disconnect wires (C). Take the wire (D) out of its harness. Compress the plastic plug (E) at the inside and then push it out. Lift the wire out of the cable holder, which is open at the top. Loosen two screws (F). Remove the mounting bracket (G) with sensor.
G E F
536335uh.CDR
Figure 186 Re-installation: (1) (2) Insert the sensor. Adjust the distance from the upper edge of the sensor to the drum in the Decurl unit.
Adjustment: For adjustment of the infrared temperature sensor refer to chapter 3.6. For further assembly proceed in reverse order.
The cables must not touch any moving parts.
Chapter 3.5 / 89
DD+DIS110.05E
8.1.2
Heating element decurl unit

Required spare part: CM+326031x Heating Element for Decurl Unit
536335wg.cdr
Figure 187 Required tools: 7 mm socket wrench 7 mm open end wrench Flat pliers Required time: 10 min Removal: (1) (2) (3) Open the top cover assembly (see section 1.1). Remove the Decurl unit as described in section 8.1. Loosen two screws securing the metal bracket at the heating element. Remove the metal bracket.
536335xa.cdr
(4)
Figure 188
(5)
Loosen cautiously two ceramic screws (A) at both sides of the Decurl unit. Remove the ceramic parts. Loosen nut (B) (7 mm open end wrench) and remove washers and wiring (C). Take the heating element out of the Decurl unit.
536335xb.cdr
(6) (7)
C A B
Figure 189
(8)
Re-installation: If you have no silicone for securing the ceramic parts (A), you can use the old ones. Inside the thread is enough silicone to secure the ceramic parts sufficiently. For further assembly proceed in reverse order.
Chapter 3.5 / 90
DD+DIS110.05E
8.1.3
Film reversal unit
Required spare part: CM+326033x Film reversal unit
Figure 190 Required tools: Screwdriver, medium size Required time: 2 min Removal:
(1)
Open the top cover assembly (see section 1.1). Open lock (A). Turn the film reversal unit up (B).
(2) (3)
Figure 191
Chapter 3.5 / 91
DD+DIS110.05E
(4) (5) (6)
Remove the two inner C-clips (C) with a screwdriver. Push the two bearings (D) towards the inside. Remove the film reversal unit (E).
Figure 192
8.1.4
Drive motor for the Decurl unit (M2)

Required spare part: CM+309808x DC Motor for Decurl unit
Chapter 3.5 / 92
DD+DIS110.05E
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Disconnect wire (A).
(2)
Figure 194 (3) Remove three screws (B).
Figure 195
Re-installation: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Guide the motor gear through the opening in the printer frame. Hold the motor with your left hand. Use your right hand to pull the toothed belt across the three gears. Tighten the three screws (B, Figure 195). Connect cable (A, Figure 194). For further assembly proceed in reverse order.
Adjustment: For adjustment of the belt tension of the toothed belt of the Decurl unit refer to chapter 3.6.
Chapter 3.5 / 93
DD+DIS110.05E
8.1.5
Driving mechanism Decurl unit

Required spare part: CM+326022x Driving mechanism for Decurl unit
Figure 196 Required tools: Phillips screwdriver, medium size Screwdriver, medium size Required time: 10 min
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Remove the toothed belt (A). Remove three screws (B) at the bearing. Remove the driving mechanism.
(2) (3) (4)
B
536335vnCDR
Figure 197 Re-installation: Proceed in reverse order. Adjustment: For adjustment of the belt tension of the toothed belt of the Decurl unit refer to chapter 3.6
Chapter 3.5 / 94
DD+DIS110.05E
8.1.6
Toothed belt for the Decurl unit drive
Required spare part: CM+326023x Toothed Belt for Decurl Unit
Removal:
(1)
Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Remove the toothed belt (A).
(2)
Re-installation: (1) (2) (3) (4) Place the toothed belt on the three gears. Loosen three screws (B). Adjust the belt tension, by shifting the motor up or down. Tighten the three screws (B).
B
Adjustment: For adjustment of the belt tension of the toothed belt of the Decurl unit refer to chapter 3.6. Figure 199
536335vnCDR
Chapter 3.5 / 95
DD+DIS110.05E
9
9.1
Wheels
Front wheels
Required spare part: CM+326041x Front Wheels (2x)
Figure 200 Required tools: Open end wrench, 17 mm Required time: 5 min
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Place a jack under the printer to support it during removal of the wheels. Remove nut (A). Remove the front wheel (B). Figure 201
(2)
(3) (4)
Chapter 3.5 / 96
DD+DIS110.05E
9.2
Rear wheels
Required spare part: CM+326042x Rear Wheels (2x) with mounting clips
Removal: (1) Open the top cover assembly and remove the left side cover (see section 1.1). Place a jack under the printer to support it during removal of the wheels. Remove retaining clip (A). Remove the rear wheel (B).
(2)
(3) (4)
Figure 203
Chapter 3.5 / 97
DD+DIS110.05E
Repair and Service Adjustments and calibrations
List of Contents
1 Adjustments .................................................................................... 1
1.1 Drum position adjustment ........................................................................... 2
1.1.1 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 Check for bubbles.................................................................................................. 4 Perform a film calibration from the upper tray........................................................ 6 Check for bubbles.................................................................................................. 6 Perform a print head profile calibration.................................................................. 8 Perform a film calibration from both trays .............................................................. 9
1.2 Adjustments after TH replacement ............................................................. 6
1.3 Vernier Adjustment corresponding to print drum position ...................... 9 1.4 Adjustment of the flat belt of the drum motor assembly ........................ 10
1.4.1 1.4.2 Belt tension adjustment ....................................................................................... 10 Belt transport adjustment..................................................................................... 12
1.5 Adjustment of the toothed belt of the decurl unit.................................... 13 1.6 Adjustment of infrared temperature sensor distance ............................. 14 1.7 Adjustment of the local keypad................................................................. 15
2 Checks ........................................................................................... 16
2.1 Density reproduction check ...................................................................... 16 2.2 Check for dust stripes / Wet cleaning TPH procedure ............................ 19
3 Calibrations ................................................................................... 21
3.1 MDM Calibration ......................................................................................... 22 3.2 Film Calibration .......................................................................................... 24 3.3 Print Head Profile Calibration.................................................................... 25
Chapter 3.6 / I
DD+DIS110.05E
Adjustments
Following adjustments have to be performed at the printer: Adjustment Drum position adjustment To be done in case .... Bubbles are present in the image (not if the bubbles are on the bottom borders) After a thermal print head profile calibration unacceptable line artifacts are still present in a medical image. After a MDM calibration and a film calibration the Dmax value is still not correct Adjustments after TH replacement Adjustment of the flat belt of the drum motor assembly Adjustment of the toothed belt of the decurl unit Adjustment of infrared temperature sensor distance Adjustment of the local keypad (back light and contrast) After replacement of the Thermal Head After replacement of the flat belt After replacement of the complete drum motor assembly After replacement of the toothed belt. After replacement of the motor for decurl unit. After replacement of the infrared temperature sensor in the decurl unit. After replacement of the key4 board 1.6 1.5 1.2 1.4 Details see.... 1.1
1.7
Chapter 3.6 / 1
DD+DIS110.05E
1.1
When?
Drum position adjustment

Bubbles are present in the image (not if the bubbles are on the bottom borders). Refer to page 4. After a thermal print head profile calibration (refer to page 25) unacceptable line artifacts are still present in a medical image. After a MDM calibration and film calibration the Dmax value is still not correct Drum position adjustment is made via eccentric bearings of the print drum. All the adjustments of eccentric bearings must be made on both sides of the print drum. The thermal head carries a sticker with the information "Initial Drum Position" This value specifies the initial position of the print drum. It is between 0.2 and +0.6. Per engage - position two values are written on the eccentric bearings. Only observe the upright characters. The characters upside down can be neglected.
Initial Drum position = 0 +0.5 +0.3 0 +0.1 -0.1 +0.5 -0.1 +0.1 Initial Drum position = +0.3 -0.1 +0.2 0 -0.1
9
+0.5 +0.3 +0.1
+0.5 +0.3 +0.1
Figure 1
Figure 2
Chapter 3.6 / 2
+0.5
+0.1
+0.1
+0.6
+0.3
DD+DIS110.05E
Sticker on thermal head
Approved by De code van de THERMAL HEAD ASSY 4X00 Initial Drum Position : = Final Drum Position : = ,
Return info: Date of removal: Nr. of prints: Printer S/N:
/ /
536336mb.cdr
Figure 3
A permanent marker is required to mark the different test films during this adjustment procedure.
How?
(1) Check if sufficient films are in the upper film magazine. For the drum position adjustment a minimum of 10 films have to be available. (2) Open front cover and check which value is noted as initial drum position on the thermal head. (3) Select in service menu '8 Adjust & Calibrate 1 Adjust Mechanics 1 Drum Position'. (4) Follow display instructions of wizard, which guides through the procedure. (5) When finished, proceed with the 'Check for Bubbles'. Refer to 1.1.1.
Principle of the wizard: In every procedure step two test films are printed at a certain drum position. For evaluation of the test results, however, only the second film is taken, as it takes a few turns of the drum until it is in the adjusted position. The wizard first checks by printing 3 x 2 test films, in which direction (plus or minus towards the initial drum position) the best drum position is located. In case the initial drum position was not the best one, 2 x 2 more test films are printed, to determine the best drum position. This means, altogether a minimum of 6 and a maximum of 10 films are required. At the light box determine which test film shows the highest density and homogeneity - when asked by the wizard. At the end of the procedure write the value of the best drum position as 'final drum position' on the sticker of the thermal head.
Chapter 3.6 / 3
DD+DIS110.05E
1.1.1 How?
Check for bubbles (1a) Take test film with 'final drum position + 0.1' for evaluation or: (1b) Print test film with 'final drum position + 0.1': Select in service menu '8 Adjust & Calibrate 4 Print test image DrumPos4x00_8x10_TM1.tif for CR / DR printers or DrumPos4x00_8x10_TM2.tif (2) Check for presence of bubbles in the image 'final drum position + 0.1'. Presence of bubbles must be evaluated at the lightbox in the Dmax area of the image with a magnifying glass, shielded from ambient light.
536333TA.CDR
for Mammo printers
Figure 4
Evaluation
Result of the test film evaluation: Bubbles are present in test film 'final drum position + 0.1' : (3a) Check, whether the film printed with 'final drum position also shows bubbles: Film printed with 'final drum position' shows bubbles: (4a)Adjust the drum to 'final drum position -0.2' and write the new 'final drum position' on the sticker. or: Film printed with 'final drum position' shows no bubbles (5a)Adjust the drum to 'final drum position -0.1' and write the new 'final drum position' on the sticker. Bubbles are not present in test film 'final drum position + 0.1' : (3b) Leave the final drum position as determined in section 1.1 and marked on the sticker.
Chapter 3.6 / 4
DD+DIS110.05E
Only for for Mammo printers or CR/DR Mechanics 2 version printers: (6) Adjust the vernier to the final drum position. Refer to section 1.3. 'Mechanics 2' version printers can be recognized at the presence of a cam at the vertical alignment. All Mammo printers are 'Mechanics 2 version. For CR/DR printers production changed to 'Mechanics 2 mid of 2003.
Figure 5
Chapter 3.6 / 5
DD+DIS110.05E
1.2
Adjustments after TH replacement

For the TH replacement procedure refer to chapter 3.5, Replacement of Parts.. When? After replacement of the Thermal Head The adjustments and calibrations during TH replacement are split up in the following steps: # 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Step Print test images Uninstall Thermal Head Install Printhead data Set the initial drum position Perform a film calibration from the upper tray Check for bubbles Perform a print head profile calibration Perform a film calibration from both trays Refer to Chapter 3.5 Chapter 3.5 Chapter 3.5 Chapter 3.5 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4
1.2.1
Perform a film calibration from the upper tray Before starting the film calibration, be sure that the initial drum position is set as marked on the TH sticker. (1) In the Service Menu select: 8 Adjust & Calibrate - 3 Calibrate - 1 Film calibration (2) Select 'Upper tray' (the calibration in this case only has to be made with 8x10" films from the upper tray) (3) Follow the further instructions on the local keypad. For more info to film calibration refer to section 3.2 page 24.
1.2.2 How?
Check for bubbles (1) In the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate 4 Print test image DrumPos4x00_8x10_TM1.tif for CR/DR printers or DrumPos4x00_8x10_TM2.tif for Mammo printers. (2) Select upper tray and set 'Number of Copies' to 2.
Chapter 3.6 / 6
DD+DIS110.05E
(3) (4)
Throw the 1st printed test film away. Use the 2nd printed test film for evaluation and mark it as test film 1 with a permanent marker.
536336mc.cdr
Position X 1 2
= Testfilm 1
Figure 6 In every process step two test films have to printed. For evaluation of the test results, however, only the second film is taken. How? (5) (6) (7) Open the front cover Set both eccentric bearings on the left and right hand side at position 'initial drum position + 0.1' and close the front cover. In the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate 4 Print test image DrumPos4x00_8x10_TM1.tif for CR/DR printers or DrumPos4x00_8x10_TM2.tif for Mammo printers. Select upper tray and set 'Number of Copies' to 2. Throw the 1st printed test film away.
536336md.cdr
(8) (9)
Position X + 0.1 1 2
(10) Use the 2nd printed test film for evaluation and mark it as test film 2 with a permanent marker.
= Testfilm 2
Figure 7 (11) Check for presence of bubbles in test image 1 and 2. Presence of bubbles must be evaluated at the lightbox in the Dmax area of the image with a magnifying glass, shielded from ambient light.
536333TA.CDR
Figure 8
Chapter 3.6 / 7
DD+DIS110.05E
Evaluation
Evaluate the two 'bubble check' test films as follows Bubbles visible in test films none of the films test film 2 test film 1 and 2 What to do Adjust drum position to 'initial print drum position' as marked on the sticker Adjust drum position to 'initial print drum position - 0.1' Adjust drum position to 'initial print drum position - 0.2'
(12) Note the final print drum position on the thermal head sticker. Only for Mammo printers or CR/DR Mechanics 2 version printers: (13) Adjust the vernier to the final drum position. Refer to section 1.3. 'Mechanics 2' version printers can be recognized at the presence of a cam at the vertical alignment. All Mammo printers are 'Mechanics 2 version. For CR/DR printers production changed to 'Mechanics 2 mid of 2003.
Figure 9 1.2.3 Perform a print head profile calibration The print head profile calibration is described in section 3.3, page 25.
Chapter 3.6 / 8
DD+DIS110.05E
1.2.4
Perform a film calibration from both trays A film calibration from both trays is also part of the print head profile procedure described in section 3.3, page 25. The film calibration from both trays only has to be performed, in case it was not done yet during print head profile calibration. (1) In the Service Menu select: 8 Adjust & Calibrate - 3 Calibrate - 1 Film calibration (2) Select 'Upper tray' (3) Follow the further instructions on the local keypad. (4) Repeat the film calibration for the lower tray For more info to film calibration refer to section 3.2 page 24.
1.3
Vernier Adjustment corresponding to print drum position

The 'Vernier Adjustment' only can be made at so-called 'Mechanics 2' printers. They can be recognized at the presence of a cam at the vertical alignment. All Mammo printers are 'Mechanics 2 version. For CR/DR printers production will change to 'Mechanics 2 mid of 2003. When? After replacement of the Thermal Head After fine adjustment of the print drum position (1) (2) (3) Open screw A Set vernier B to value of final drum position Close screw A again
B A
+0.6
+0.5
+0.4
+0.3
+0.2
+0.1
0
-0.1
-0 .2
536336ax.cdr
Figure 10
Chapter 3.6 / 9
DD+DIS110.05E
1.4
When?
Adjustment of the flat belt of the drum motor assembly

After replacement of the flat belt After replacement of the complete drum motor assembly
Refer to chapter 3.5 for: - opening the top cover assembly (section 1.5) - removing the left hand and right hand covers (section 1.1) - opening the upper front cover (section 1.2). In this adjustment routine the belt tension and the belt transport in the drum motor assembly must be adjusted. First adjust the belt tension and then the belt transport. As the adjustment of the belt transport may affect the belt tension again, it might be necessary to readjust the belt tension.
1.4.1
Belt tension adjustment Phillips screwdriver, medium size Box wrench, size 7 mm How? (1) In the service menu on the local keypad select '8 Adjust & Calibrate 1 adjust mechanics - 2 drum driving belt'. This triggers the drum motor M1 Check the run of the flat belt on the disk: Flat belt stays in the middle of the pulley: proceed with step (3). Flat belt stays not in the middle of the pully: perform a Belt transport adjustment. Refer to page 12 Check the measuring value on the local display:
(2)
(3)
Adjust drum
driving belt:
Service 8-1-2 ADJUST and CALIB x quit
Drum motor current: Measured: 0.42 A Upper limit: 0.480 A Lower Limit: 0.400 A
536336ay.cdr
Figure 11 Measured value between 0.400 A and 0.480 A: adjustment ok, end Measured value < 0.400 A or > 0.480 A: proceed with step (4).
Chapter 3.6 / 10
DD+DIS110.05E
(4)
Loosen the lock screw (A) a few turns with a Philips screwdriver.
536336aa.cdr
Figure 12 (5) Adjust belt tension with srew (B) Value < 0.4 A turn clockwise Value > 0.48 A turn counter clockwise
Goal is to reach a value between 0.4 and 0.48 A. (6) Leave the drum driving menu by pressing
536336mk.cdr
Figure 13 (7) (8) (9) Fasten the lock screw (A) Again, select menu '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 1 adjust mechanics - 2 drum driving belt' Check the reading on the display: If it is outside the limits (reading must be within 0.4 and 0.48 A) after fastening of the lock screw (A), open it again a few turns and repeat the adjustment at screw (B).
(10) Leave the drum driving menu by pressing (11) Check the belt transport as described on page 12.
Chapter 3.6 / 11
DD+DIS110.05E
1.4.2
Belt transport adjustment Phillips screwdriver, medium size Box wrench, size 7 mm At this adjustment the flat belt has to be adjusted to run in the middle of the flat belt pulley. These tests must be made while the drum motor is running. Upon adjustment of the flat belt pulley the belt tension may be affected. Therefore the tension must be checked again after this adjusting routine (see page 10). How? (1) In the service menu on the local keypad select '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 1 adjust mechanics 2 drum driving belt'. This triggers the drum motor M1 (2) After three minutes (motor running) check the position of the flat belt on the belt pulley. It must run in the middle of the belt pulley. If the flat belt runs in the middle, the adjustment is okay. If it runs off towards the inside or outside, proceed with next step. (3) Stop the motor M1 by pressing (4) If the flat belt runs off towards the inside, loosen screw (C) and turn screw (D) clockwise: Tighten screw (C). If the flat belt runs off towards the outside loosen screw (D) and turn screw (C) clockwise: Tighten screw (D). (5) Repeat steps (1) to (4) until the flat belt runs in the middle for at least 3 minutes. (6) When finished, check the belt tension again. Refer to page 10. Figure 14
536336fg.cdr
536336ao.cdr
Figure 15
Chapter 3.6 / 12
DD+DIS110.05E
1.5
Adjustment of the toothed belt of the decurl unit

Refer to chapter Replacements of Parts, 3.5 for: - opening the top cover assembly (section 1.5), - removing the left and right hand covers (section 1.1), - opening the upper front cover (section 1.2). When? After replacement of the toothed belt. After replacement of the motor for decurl unit.
Socket wrench, size 7 mm How? (1) Loosen screws (A). (2) Shift motor M2 to adjust the tension of the belt. Make sure, a) that the toothed belt tension is not too loose and thus may skip and b) that the toothed belt is not too tight and thus putting excessive strain on the motor bearings. (3) Re-tighten screws (A).
A
536336af.cdr
Figure 16
Chapter 3.6 / 13
DD+DIS110.05E
1.6
Adjustment of infrared temperature sensor distance

Refer to chapter 3.5 for: - opening the top cover assembly (section 1.5), - removing the left hand and right hand covers (section 1.1), - opening the upper front cover (section 1.2). When? After replacement of the infrared temperature sensor in the decurl unit. Open end wrench size 24 mm Adjustment ring (included in the shipment of the spare part) How? (1) Loosen screws (G) one to two turns and remove the sensor plate (2) Loosen nut (B) and (D) a few turns (3) Remove and replace the infrared sensor as described in chapter 3.5 (4) Put the adjustment ring (E) on the sensor and remount the sensor plate by fastening screws (G) again (5) Adjust the distance of the IR sensor from the drum via nut (B) and (D) so that the adjustment ring (E) just touches the decurl drum (6) Again, loosen screws (G) one to two turns and remove the sensor plate (7) Tighten nuts (B) and (D), then remove the adjustment ring (E) (8) Remount the sensor and fasten screws (G) again
E
536336uh.CDR
Figure 17
B C D
536336am.cdr
Figure 18
Chapter 3.6 / 14
DD+DIS110.05E
1.7
Adjustment of the local keypad

This section describes the adjustment of the back light and contrast settings of the local keypad. When? After replacement of the Key4 board none How? (1) Enter the Service Menu (2) Select 8 Adjust & calibrate 2 Adjust display (3) Follow the online instructions (4) Renew backup
Chapter 3.6 / 15
DD+DIS110.05E
Checks
Perform following checks at the printer in the order listed below: Check Density reproduction check To be done At maintenance After upgrade from Software 1.9X to Software 2.0 Whenever measured densities are different from target densities see chapter 3.3 Troubleshooting At maintenance Whenever dust stripes seem to be present 2.2 Details see 2.1
Check for dust stripes (Wet cleaning TPH procedure)
2.1
When?
Density reproduction check

At maintenance After upgrade from Software 1.9X to Software 2.0 Whenever measured densities are different from target densities see chapter 3.3 Troubleshooting
Calibrated densitometer MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite 301, XRite 310 or Gretag D200-2 * *Using another densitometer than MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag D200-2 would require recalculation. Background Information With the density reproduction check the difference for a specific film type between optical density defined in the sensitometric calibration file and the printed optical density, measured with an external densitometer is checked.
This procedure must be carried out with every used film type: How? (1) Perform a film calibration (see section calibrations) (2) Print out test image SMPTE.tif and measure the density of the eleven 100 % 0% squares with a calibrated MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag D200-2 densitometer.
Chapter 3.6 / 16
DD+DIS110.05E
(3) To check linearity fill in measured values in corresponding Excel file: Density reproduction check DT1B.xls or Density reproduction check DT1C.xls (also for TM 1C new) or Density reproduction check Mammo.xls These Excel files can be downloaded from MedNet, download area 'GSO library - Hardcopy - Drystar 4x00 - CSO Freeware'. (4) After the measured values are filled in, the density reproduction is calculated automatically. (5) At the right hand side of the table is shown, whether the Density Reproduction is ok or not. In case it is not ok you are requested to carry out a MDM calibration.
Figure 19
The measured density values have to be entered without decimal point. (e.g. measured value = .23, value to enter = 23)
Chapter 3.6 / 17
DD+DIS110.05E
In the background the following calculation is performed:

Square 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 10% 0% Measured values A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 Target values B1= A1 B2 = B1+ C1* B3 = B2+ C1 B4 = B3+ C1 B5 = B4+ C1 B6 = B5+ C1 B7 = B6+ C1 B8 = B7+ C1 B9 = B8+ C1 B10 = B9+ C1 B11 = Dmax target Difference D1 = A1 - B1 D2 = A2 B2 D3 = A3 B3 D4 = A4 B4 D5 = A5 B5 D6 = A6 B6 D7 = A7 B7 D8 = A8 B8 D9 = A9 B9 D10 = A10 - B10 D11 = A11 - B11
Dmax target:
Clearbase TM1Cnew or DT1C = 295 Bluebase DT1B = 310 Mammo = 370
C1* = (Dmax target -B1) / 10 The difference values D 1 to D11 are compared with the maximum difference allowed according to table below:
ODwant ODmin + 0.05 0.30 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.05 1.20 OD + 0.03 + 0.03 + 0.04 + 0.05 + 0.06 + 0.07 + 0.08 + 0.09 ODwant 1.35 1.50 1.65 1.80 1.95 2.10 2.25 2.40 OD + 0.09 + 0.09 + 0.09 + 0.10 + 0.10 + 0.10 + 0.10 + 0.10 ODwant 2.55 2.70 2.85 3.00 3.15 3.30 3.45 3.60 OD + 0.11 + 0.11 + 0.11 + 0.11 + 0.12 + 0.12 + 0.12 + 0.12
Maximum two of the eleven difference values, from D1 to D11, may differ 0.02 density points from the required value.
Chapter 3.6 / 18
DD+DIS110.05E
2.2
When?
Check for dust stripes / Wet cleaning TPH procedure

At maintenance Whenever dust stripes seem to be present
STI test image
In case the printer is a Drystar 4500 M and Drystar Mammo films (Dmax 3.7) as well as DT1B / TM1 C NEW film (Dmax 3.1) are inserted, the correct STI test image for the inserted film has to be selected: Film in use DT1B / TM1 C NEW (Dmax 3.1) Drystar Mammo (Dmax 3.7) Select test image... STI.....TM1.TIF STI.....TM2.TIF
Chapter 3.6 / 19
DD+DIS110.05E
Check the films for dust stripes as described in the flowchart of Figure 20
TH cleaning procedure
Print STI test image
Dust stripes visible ?
No
okay
Yes or in doubt Clean TH with Isopropyl alcohol (wet cleaning) Print STI test image
additional Dust stripes visible ? No Previous Stripes still visible ? Yes Perform TH profile calibration. Refer to section 3.3 Print STI test image
Yes
No
okay
No Stripes visible ? okay
Yes Yes
Stripes improved ?
No Refer to chapter Troubleshooting, section "Line artifacts in transport direction"

536336ml.cdr
Figure 20 Use small amounts of alcohol. Alcohol can easily damage the thermal head ! The last cleaning movement must be carried out in one way
Chapter 3.6 / 20
DD+DIS110.05E
Calibrations
Perform following calibrations at the printer in the order listed below: Calibration MDM calibration To be done Whenever the internal MDM has to be adapted to an external densitometer (for image quality control) if density reproduction check is not ok After MDM replacement After exchange of the densitometer lamp 3.2 Details see... 3.1
Film calibration
At maintenance To compensate small density variations of the new film, when a new film package is used.
In case of a drift of the maximum density. Print Head Profile calibration At maintenance Unacceptable line artifacts visible in medical service test image After replacement of the thermal head. 3.3
Renew the backup after each successful calibration.
Chapter 3.6 / 21
DD+DIS110.05E
3.1
When?
MDM Calibration
Whenever the internal MDM has to be adapted to an external densitometer (for image quality control) If density reproduction check is not ok After MDM replacement After exchange of the densitometer lamp.
Calibrated densitometer MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite 301, XRite 310 or Gretag D200-2 *
*The reference densitometer for Drystar 4500(M) is the Mac Beth TR924 densitometer. The aperture of the spot is 3mm and a visual filter must be used. In the field the Mac Beth TR924 is not available. Normally, other densitometers can only be used provided that an approved recalculation table or recalculation function for the used densitometer is available. The densitometers X-rite 331 and X-rite 341 with a spot aperture of 2 mm can be used for OD-measurements in the field without recalculation of the measured densities! Recalculation tables are available for X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310 and Gretag D200-2. Refer to MEDNET, GSO library. The densitometers must be calibrated with the calibration wedge of the supplier according to the instructions of the supplier. As of SW Rel. 3.0.0_C1 the density recalculation is made internally. The densitometer is selected during the MDM calibration procedure. Following densitometers can be selected: MacBeth TR924, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310, Xrite 331, X-rite 341 and Gretag D200-2 Be sure that a film calibration has been performed with the films in use.
Purpose
Adjust MDM to another calibrated, external densitometer To compensate for measurement drifts
Chapter 3.6 / 22
DD+DIS110.05E
How?
(1) Select in service menu '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 3 Calibrate - 2 MDM' (2) Select the external densitometer which is used for the measurement (only for SW 3.0.0_C1) (3) A test sheet with different density areas, numbered from 1 to 20, is produced. (4) Measure each density area with the external densitometer. (5) Enter measured density values. (6) Carry out a film calibration. (7) Carry out density reproduction check. (8) Renew backup. Figure 21
536336ar.cdr
Chapter 3.6 / 23
DD+DIS110.05E
3.2
Film Calibration
Film calibration by default is executed whenever a new film package is inserted. It can be activated/deactivated in the key-operator menu "2 Change settings - 5 Image quality - 1 General - select default for film calibration (default = off) However, it can be initiated manually, too. This manual film calibration is explained further on. When? What? How? At maintenance To compensate small density variations of the new film, when a new film package is used. In case of a drift of the maximum density. A film is printed. The printer adapts Dmax to Dmax target. The 52 gray wedge values are stored as sensitometric curve.
(1) Select in service menu '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 3 Calibrate - 1 Film' (2) Follow the instructions on the display.
536336as.cdr
Figure 22 Film calibration has to be made for films in both film magazine.
Chapter 3.6 / 24
DD+DIS110.05E
3.3
Print Head Profile Calibration

Print head profile (Thermal head profile) calibration is executed by default automatically every 5000 films (to be adjusted in service menu '6 Configure 2 Printer Settings - 4 Cycles to calibrate TH'). It can be initiated manually, too. This manual thermal head profile calibration is explained here. When? Purpose What? At maintenance Unacceptable line artifacts visible in medical service test image After replacement of the thermal head After replacement of the print drum To reduce line artifacts, caused by thermal head and drum. Asks to open the TH compartment to clean the TH (only in SW Rel.2.00_C1; not anymore in SW 3.0.0_C1) Prints a registration calibration film to calibrate the movement of the MDM. Prints a flatfield and measures the density irregularities to adapt the printer to these values. (1) (2) (3) Make a backup of the machine specific data Print out a medical service test image and a STI test image. Clean the thermal print head with a cleaning tissue containing alcohol. The last cleaning movement must be carried out in one way. Print again the STI test image. If no additional lines came up go to (6) If additional lines came up go back to (3).
How?
(4) (5) (6)
Figure 23: STI test image Use small amounts of alcohol. Alcohol can easily damage the thermal head !
Chapter 3.6 / 25
DD+DIS110.05E
In case the printer is a Drystar 4500 M and Drystar Mammo films (Dmax 3.7) as well as DT1B / TM1 C NEW film (Dmax 3.1) are inserted, the correct STI test image for the inserted film has to be selected: Film in use DT1B / TM1 C NEW (Dmax 3.1) Drystar Mammo (Dmax 3.7) How? (7) Select in service menu '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 3 Calibrate 3 Print Head Profile'. Choose upper or lower tray: First a registration calibration film will be printed, followed by a flatfield for the printhead profile. Select test image... STI.....TM1.TIF STI.....TM2.TIF
(8)
536336ef.cdr
Figure 24: Registration Calibration test image Note for printers with SW 3.0.0_C1: After the TH profile film is printed and measured, the degree of quality of the previous registration and TH profile calibration is displayed:
Printhead Profile Calibration Completed successfully Registration Compensation 14% TPH Profile Calibration 27% Press v to continue
536366dx.cdr
0 % means no compensation done : registration / TPH profile mechanism OK 100% compensation : registration / TPH profile mechanism has performed maximal correction.
Chapter 3.6 / 26
DD+DIS110.05E
How?
(9)
After printing of the flatfield, check the Printhead Profile test image for dust stripes in the area till 3 cm from the bottom of the film (this is the area where the MDM is measuring the density, to adjust the printhead profile)
Figure 25: Printhead Profile test image (10) If extra lines show up with respect to the first printed STI test image, clean the thermal head with a cleaning tissue soaked in alcohol, reinstall the machine specific data and redo this print head profile calibration procedure again from beginning. No cleaning actions necessary, if no dust stripes or extra lines are shown.
(11) Perform a film calibration from both trays. (12) Print out medical service test image (Service Menu: 8 Adjust & Calibrate - 4 Print Testimage Medical_image.tif).
Figure 26: medical service test image
Chapter 3.6 / 27
DD+DIS110.05E
(13)
Check if there are line artifacts in the medical image: Acceptable or no line artifacts, renew backup and the procedure is finished Still unacceptable artifacts but improved in comparison to first printed STI image and no additional lines visible, start procedure again at step (6) Still unacceptable artifacts but improved in comparison to first printed STI image and additional lines are visible, clean thermal head with the cleaning tissue soaked in alcohol, reinstall thermal head floppy (In the Service Menu select: 5 Install data - 3 Printhead data*) and redo this print head profile calibration procedure again from beginning Still unacceptable artifacts and not improved in comparison to first printed medical image replace TH.
*The number of film passes is lost after reinstallation of the thermal head floppy.
Chapter 3.6 / 28

Software menues, Settings
List of Contents
1 2 3 4
Controls at the local Keypad ....................................................1 Key-Operator and Service Menu via Keypad ..........................2 Key-Operator and Service Command Session Webpages.....3 Service engineer Tools..............................................................4
Chapter 3.7/I

Controls at the local Keypad

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Status indicator LED Power/Reset button Stop/Unlock button Display Keypad cover Film input tray (Upper input tray) Film input tray (Lower input tray - optional)
3 4 5
Emergency key 6 Delete key
To rearrange the print queue: emergency jobs can be placed at the top of the queue to be printed with priority. To delete print jobs. Jobs that are deleted will not be printed.
Key operator To access the advanced functions of the key-operator mode key Service key Escape key Confirm key
To access service-level functions. Reserved for trained service personnel. To quit the current function or exit a menu without saving modifications. (In key-operator mode) To select a menu; To accept an entry in a menu. To move the cursor to the previous entry field. To scroll upwards. To increment the number in a(n) (alpha)numerical entry field. To move the cursor to the next entry field. To scroll downwards. To decrement the number in a(n) (alpha)numerical entry field. To scroll backwards through multiple choices within a field. To move the entry position in a(n) (alpha)numerical entry field from right to left. To toggle between values in a field. To scroll forwards through multiple choices within a field. To move the entry position in a(n) (alpha)numerical entry field from left to right. To toggle between values in a field.
536337ab.cdr
Up key
Down key
Left key
Right key
Chapter 3.7/1
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
Key-Operator and Service Menu via Keypad

Level 1 Key-operator menu Level 2 Level 3
Serial-No: Type: SW-release: Total prints: Next PM: Install Date: Last Repair: ****** Beep on empty tray: Upper input tray Film type: Film format: Film view: Lower input tray Film type: Film format: Film view: AE_Title: Hostname: Domain: Prt IP-addr: SH IP-addr: Netmask: Router: MAC Addr: 1 2 3 4 5 6 General Upper tray Lower tray Network-DICOM ****** Logical Printers Image Quality 1 General 2 HOST PROFILE 1 1 Date and Time 2 Language ****** 3 Beep on empty tray Film type Film view Film type Film format Film view
Level 4
Level 1 Service menu
Level 2
1 Printer info 2 Network info 3 Service Reports
Level 3
1 Short system check 2 Extended system check 3 Image Quality
Level 4
5
1 Explain error
Film calibration on/off
via keypad
via keypad
1 Look-up table 2 Interpolation 3 Maximum Density
1 Quality checks 2 Clear relative counter
1 Explain error
1st printline = 200. 0=15 mm to bottom film A -3 <= 0.15 mm
Password = 3 x
1 Floppy disk 2 Printer Harddisk

L E F T
1.1+0.1 to right film edge C Testimage 8" x 10" A332341 R I G H T
1 2 3 4
General Input tray Network-DICOM Image Quality
1 New Printhead 2 Re-install Printhead 1 2 3 4 Infocounter file Machine specific data Service Reports Session files
248.4 (496 8 pix)
BOTTOM
No alarm 5 times While tray is empty
Modality Modality Modality Modality
daily used name brand type AE_title

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHOW INFO MAINTENANCE SAVE data SHOW error INSTALL data CONFIGURE TEST & DIAGNOSE ADJUST & CALIBRATE
1 Last error code 2 Error hit list
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5
Printer IP-address Printer AE-title Printer hostname Netmask Default router Service host Configuration host Domain name Date and time Site data Cycles to clean TH Cycles to calibrate TH TMML******
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Show settings Change settings Print Image Save configuration Restore Configuration Calibration Installation Quality Control*
1 Film Calibration 2 Default Densitometer SELECT DEFAULT for FILM CALIBRATION off - on - frequency (1..10 film packs)
1 2 3 4 5
Software Machine specific data Printhead data Modality Data HW modification data 1 CPU board 2 Controller board 3 Display board
1 Testimage 2 From floppy
1 Look-up table 2 Interpolation 3 Dmax
1 Network settings 2 Printer settings
1 Film 2 Print head profile 3 Print Head cleaning
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Called AE_title Hostname Domain name IP-address Service Host IP address Netmask Router IP-address Remove Modality Add Modality - Default printer - <logical printer 1> - <logical printer n>
1 Upper input tray 2 Lower input tray
1 Hard disk drive 2 Floppy disk drive
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 Test System Test boards Test disk drives Test communication Diagnose power supply Diagnose mechanics
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
Network Serial port Internal communication Alarm mailing Film input unit Densitometer module Drum assembly Printhead unit Film hand over unit Film output unit
1.1 + 0.1m m to right film edge (D)
1.1 + 0.1m m to right film edge (C) Test image 10" x 12" A332 342 R I G H T
10
1.1 + 0.1m m to right film edge (E) Bottom
11
1 Install data-sets 2 Printer install. wizard
1 General 2 HOST PROFILE XYZ SMPTE_300.TIF * SMPTE.TIF ** SMPTE_ls.TIF *** SMPTE_kan.TIF ****
1 2 3 4
Adjust mechanics Adjust display Calibrate Print test images
1 Drum position 2 Drum driving belt
1 Upper Tray 2 Lower Tray
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
Film calibration Printhead profile Printhead cleaning MDM calibration***** Registration calibr.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
12
INSTALLATION WIZZARD
FILMTYPE IN THE UPPER INPUT TRAY FILMTYPE IN THE LOWER INPUT TRAY FILM SIZE LOWER INPUT TRAY FILM-POSITION ON THE LIGHTBOX PRINTER IP-ADDRESS NETMASK ROUTER IP-ADDRESS CALLED AE_TITLE DAILY USED MODALITY NAME BRAND MODALITY-TYPE CALLING AE_TITLE('modality name') Save configuration
1 Upper input tray 2 Lower input tray 1 Upper input tray 2 Lower input tray Language Date and Time
Based on Software Release 3.00

* ** *** **** ***** ******
SMPTE_300.TIF: Taste LUT linear. Dmin = 0.2 O.D. Dmax = 3.0 O.D. SMPTE.TIF: Taste LUT linear. Dmax = Dmax Printer SMPTE_ls.TIF: Taste LUT linear. Orientation = Landscape SMPTE_kan.TIF: Taste LUT Kanamori. Dmax = Dmax Printer AS of SW 3.0.0_C1 Only available via Drystar 4500 Webpages "Enter Service Command Session" Function not available in SW 2.0X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SMPTE.tif 8x10_align.tif DSI wedge.tif Footprint.tif Medical_image.tif 10x12_align.tif STI_4500_10x12_TM1.tif DrumPos4x00_8x10_TM1 STI_4500_8x10_TM1.tif
13
536337ad.cdr
Chapter 3.7/2

Key-Operator and Service Command Session Webpages

Operator tools Key-operator tools Service engineer tools Specialist tools Security Tools HELP
Operator - Printer Status HOME Id Patient Name Host Created On Sent Status Priority Normal 875 CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Printing XYZ Normal 876 CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Printing XYZ Normal 877 CT_A 16-02-2005 0/46 Printing XYZ 878 CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Calculating Normal XYZ Normal 879 CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Waiting XYZ Delete
Set Emergency
View Status KEY OPERATOR TOOLS Remote sessions Enter key-operator command session Release remote command session
HOME
Please wait while the printer is initializing for Remote Session...
Prompt Enter Password drystar ****** OK Cancel

Prompt Enter Password mega ****** OK Cancel
Please wait while the printer is initializing for Remote Session...
SERVICE TOOLS HOME General information List of errors Infocounters report DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report Software versions Remote sessions Show printer status Enter key-operator command session Enter service command session Release remote command session Reboot Drystar Connectivity tools Scaling Setup DICOM profile editor LPD Profile Editor Network configuration Printqueue editor Controller logging Service - Main 1 SHOW INFO 2 MAINTENANCE 3 SAVE DATA 4 SHOW ERROR 5 INSTALL DATA 6 CONFIGURE 7 TEST & DIAGNOSE 8 ADJUST & CALIBRATE 9 REBOOT PRINTER leave remote session
Based on SW Rel. 3.0
Refer to section 2 Key-Operator Menu via Keypad

5363_100_3701.cdr Page 1
Refer to section 2 Service Menu via Keypad
Chapter 3.7/3
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
Service engineer Tools

Prompt Enter Password mega ******
Operator tools Key-operator tools Service engineer tools Specialist tools
SERVICE TOOLS HOME General information List of errors Infocounters report DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report Remote sessions Show printer status Enter key-operator command session Enter service command session Release remote command session Reboot Drystar Connectivity tools Scaling Setup DICOM profile editor LPD Profile Editor Network configuration Printqueue editor Controller logging
S1 S2 S3 S4
refer to section "Key-Operator Web pages" refer to section "Service command web pages"
OK
Cancel
Security Tools HELP

class com.agfa.med.odin.startup.VersionCollect FPGA Version2.7 OSVersion ### /portex info Versions : Portex=2004.05c Patch vers: 3 Build date: 25-nov-2004 15:47 Boot date : 21-JAN-2005 14:25:01 Net ID : 10.233.66.210 dry90 Ethernet : 08:00:66:80:21:a8 DriverVersionVersion: HW2.00 build: 239 date: ControllerVersion P4D3.03.17 DrystarVersion R3.0.0 C1 BoardVersion2 M16Version52
S4
S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S1 S13 S5
Security Setup HTTP Yes HTTPS No ..............
S3
Network info IP-address 10.233.68.108 Hostname DI45IE2 Netmask 255.255.248.0 ................................... Cable info : 100 Mbit Half-Duplex ........................................... link partner : 100HD 10HD autonegotiation Cable info : 100 Mbit Half-Duplex Output Queue Retry timeout0 ....................................... Dicom input ........................................ LPD Profiles ............................................. Site info City Site Name Site address Country code Department name Phone Modem Comment Installation Date InfoCounters Last error codes ESC ...................................... Errors/Warnings Name Total Relative Date of last ESC1F Local SSL trusted certificate wi...4848Apr-27-2004 15:52:24 ..............................................
INFO COUNTER drystar 4500 1. Site and system info: -----------------------Date: 22-Jan-2005 Time: 13:25:54 1.1 Device info: ---------------Product name: Type-No: Subtype-No: Serial-No: Manufacture date: Installation date:
S2
LIST OF ERRORS HC10000 : crius *Type: Defect *Meaning: CPU PCB is not functioning correctly *Reason: CPU PCB is defective Cure: Power off printer and replace Part: CRIUS HC10001 : crius.batt *Type: Defect *Meaning: Test of CPU battery RAM failed *Reason: CPU Battery RAM is defective Cure: Power off printer and replace CPU board Part: CRIUS HC10002 : crius.memory *Type: Defect *Meaning: Test of CPU RAM failed *Reason: CPU RAM is defective Cure: Power off printer and replace CPU board Part: CRIUS
releaseRemoteSession
drystar 4500 100 2366 12-Jan-2003 12:30:00 02-Feb-2003 09:11:39
S6 S9
S7
S8
1.2 Site info: -------------City: Mnchen Site name: Silberhornstr. Site address: 161 Department name: GSO Phone: 3020 1.3 Hardware info: -----------------Front-end: CPU: 0 - CRIUS 1.1 RAM: 256 Mbyte
S10 S11
refer to next 3 pages

5363_100_3701.cdr Page 2
S4
Current Incidents: Current Warnings: Current Defects:
Chapter 3.7/4

HOME HELP Controller Setup HOME HELP DICOM Input Setup HELP
Host Profile: Name XYZ
Reduction icon on image: yes
S6
Dicom Print SCP Servers Setup Dicom Print SCP Servers Dicom Host Profiles
S8 S7.1
Kernel: when no image scaling is needed for CubicHighRes: Automatically switch to CubicBell: yes Use CubicBell smooth factor: 0.9 OK Changes require reboot HELP Site Defaults ( >= 0.1 and <= 10 )
These are the default settings for all print jobs coming from the host (modality) specified under 'Calling AE title'. The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input. You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the left side. Nick Name: Name XYZ Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': Host AE Use this profile only for local SCP server: all Host Profile type: GENERIC-GENERIC Change Number of Copies: Print Priority: low Polarity: normal Film Orientation: portrait Trim: no Film Size ID: Medium Type: Print even if Film Size ID/Medium type not supported: yes Print even if Application type not supported: no Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes): 100 Edit Custom Kernel: site Magnification: Edit Edit Pixel Size: Perception LUT: kanamori Kanamori Like value: Custom value: Illumination (cd/m2): Reflected Ambient Light (cd/m2): Border Density (OD x100): Empty Image Density (OD x100): Minimum Density (OD x100): site Maximum Density (OD x100): Header Annotation: Contents: none Edit Custom Font: site Edit Custom Footer Annotation: Contents: none Edit Custom Font: site Edit Custom Window (%): Level (%): Image Orientation: r0 Conformance/Status Level: 0 Nevent enabled: off Mammo modality: NO site Association Timeout (s): Image Timeout (s): Allow IMPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: Allow EXPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: Allow EXPLICIT VR BIG ENDIAN: Resolution: 508 Supported SOP classes: Edit LR like: off OK Cancel Show Defaults Show last Input
S7.2
A 'Host Profile' defines the print parameters for a specific host (modality). Available Host Profiles: S7.2 New View/Edit Remove Clone At run-time, profile selection is done based on the incoming 'Calling AE title' and the receiving SCP server. If no profile is found, the default (site) profile will be used. Edit the default (site) profile Input status idle Refresh Update profile database YES -0.7 HOME HELP DICOM Print SCP Setup Select profile database file to upload: Upload new DB Browse ... Validate profiles Auto Dicom Configuration
These are the default print settings for all Dicom input for which no special 'Host Profile' is made. The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input. You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the left side. Only some parameters can be edited. S7.3 Number of Copies: 1 Print Priority: LOW Polarity: normal Film Destination: Film Orientation :portrait Trim: NO Film Size ID: Medium Type: Print even if Film Size ID/Medium type not supported: Print even if Application type not supported: NO Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes): 100 Kernel:Interpolation Type cubicHighRes,smoothFactor: Magnification:Magn: max Pixel Size:ratio: 1.0 / 1.0 Perception LUT: kanamori Kanamori Like value :0 Custom value: Illumination (cd/m2): 2000 Reflected Ambient Light (cd/m2): 10 Border Density (OD x100): BLACK Empty Image Density (OD x100): BLACK Minimum Density (OD x100): Maximum Density (OD x100): 300 Header Annotation: none Contents: Edit Custom Font: Edit Custom Footer Annotation: none Contents: Edit Custom Font: Edit Custom Window (%): Level (%): Image Orientation :r0 Conformance/Status Level: 0 Nevent enabled: OFF Mammo: NO Association Timeout (s): 0 Image Timeout (s) :0 Allow IMPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: true Allow EXPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: true Allow EXPLICIT VR BIG ENDIAN: true 508 Resolution: Supported SOP classes :All enabled LR like: off OK Cancel
5363_100_3701.cdr Page 3
S7.3
Setup one or more Dicom SCP servers on this device: One 'Dicom Print SCP server' is capable of handling multiple Dicom print associations Dicom Print SCP Internal Name: DEFAULT_SCP Called AE title: DS4500 Listen at Port: 104 Max. allowed associations: 10 Secure channel (SSL): Comments:
S7.1
OK
Create new Dicom Print SCP
Cancel
Changes require reboot Manually customized items are show in red The last received input values are show in blue (click 'Show Last Input' button)
Chapter 3.7/5
Repair and Service

HOME HELP LPD Servers LPD Server Setup New View/Edit Remove Clone Layout Preview Validate All Profiles HOME HELP LPD Server Port: 515 Clear it to remove the LPD Server Max allowed associations: 10 Activate at startup: Secure channel: Comments: HOME HELP Basic IP OK Create new LPD Server Cancel Changes require reboot Network Configuration DNS Ethernet Reboot Device Routing LPD Server Setup LPD Setup
DD+DIS110.05E
S9.1 S8
HOME HELP Basic IP
S9.2
S9.3
HOME HELP Basic IP
Network Configuration DNS Ethernet Reboot Device
S8.1 S8.2
Routing
Routing
S9
DNS servers
S9.2
Basic IP settings IP address Host name Domain Subnetmask Obtain IP settings automatically (RARP/BOOTP/DHCP) no OK Changes require reboot
A DNS server translates a given hostname into an IP address.
Remove Add Changes require reboot Test DNS Enter a hostname:
Resolve
S8.1
HOME HELP Output Queue Output Queue contents: Filter on Sort on today Patient Name
S10
Routing Default gateway OK Changes require reboot
Job Patient Name Host Created on Sent Status Priority Medium Dpi XYZ CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Printing Normal bluebased_8x10 508 875
S9.1
Delete Show History via gateway: Input state: Output Queue setup: Ping Retry timeout (seconds) Max retry count Submit range: 31..599 (0 = retry forever) Delete All Clear History Set Emergency Auto-Refresh
HELP
LPD Profile: Name XYZ
These settings can be overruled by the LPD protocol. You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the front.
S8.2
More Routes Reach Device OK Changes require reboot Test Routes Ping a device
Profile Name: Name XYZ Medium Size: _8x10 Medium Type: bluebased Layout: Optimal Row Number of copies: Film Orientation: portrait Region Of Interest: Edit Pixel Size: Edit Polarity: normal Image Orientation: r0 Input LUT: Edit Usertaste Gray: Edit Usertaste Color: Edit Edit Magnification: Edit Kernel: Edit Trim: Edit Background Color: Grayscale Edit Grayscale Empty Color: PostScript Requested page size: Width: Height: PostScript policy: pagesizeDependent Resolution: 508 Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes): LR like: off Header Annotation: Edit Footer Annotation: Edit OK Cancel Factory Defaults Customized items are show in red.
HOME HELP Basic IP Ethernet
5364_100_3701.cdr Page 4
Routing
S9.3
Counters: Total Rx Packets = 2056422 Total Rx ERROR Packets = 0 Total Tx Packets = 196164 Defer Xmission Count =0 Carrier Lost Count =0 Out Of Window Collissions = 0 Collisions Count =0 Excess Collisions Count = 0 Transmit FIFO underrun = 0 Receive FIFO overrun =0
Current line properties: 100 Mbit Full-Duplex Link partner (other side): : 100FD 100HD 10FD 10HD autonegotiation Ethernet (MAC) address: 08:00:66:80:44:09 Setup: Type: UTP MII address: Auto negotiation, capabilities: 10 MBit Half Duplex 10 MBit Full Duplex 100 MBit Half Duplex 100 MBit Full Duplex Fixed (no negotiation) Mbit HALF DUPLEX 10 Warning: changes become active immediately !!! Save settings to file (only enable this after a test)

OK Factory Defaults Clear Counters
Chapter 3.7/6

HOME HELP
Logging
Current Log File Show Log file Set Log Levels
S11

TaskLog Level ERROR DCMPrintToPrintJob ERROR PrintJobHandler PAGE ERROR DCMIBCodec ERROR TiledImage ERROR CMM ERROR LPD ERROR PrintQueueEditor ERROR JobProvider ERROR AuthenticationManager ERROR QueueFactory ERROR Web GUI ERROR PrintQueue_Management ERROR DCMPrintSCP-0 ERROR PFE ERROR PSCodec ERROR MfxPrinterInfoHandler ERROR _dev_e_printQueue ERROR CFG ERROR
DCMPrintToPrintJob converts Dicom Printjob into printqueue job PrintJobHandler is listener for jobavailable events and converts the available jobs in a bitmap for printing. 'Page' calculates the position of imageboxes in a page TiledImage transfers images to/from disk CMM (Color Management Module) converts image data from one colorspace to another and manages colorspace data Line Printer Daemon : A group of hosts requests services from a LPD running on a host. The services provided by the process are related to printing jobs. This is the UI component of the printqueue (browser & keypad) JobProvider is a printqueue consumer that publishes available jobs to the subscribers. Secure Access Management: Authentication Manager for accessing URLs and keypad menus Starts the requested (or available) queue. (Version : 2.01) Version 1.03 : Monitors the printqueue. Arrange communication between printqueue and several protocols. Dicom Print Service Class Provider on port 104 for DS5500 application.Handles incoming Dicom association requests for print services and prepares internal print jobs for them V5300 The Printer Front End receives printjobs from a network (DICOM LPD) or any proprietary interface (MFRI, VSI) and composes a printable bitmap to be printed by the Printer Back End. PSCodec (de)codes postscript/pdf files Mfx is an Agfa communication protocol to interchange printer status messages The printqueue queues and persistently stores printjobs CFG handles configuration issues such as profiles, browser GUI, ...
5364_100_3701.cdr Page 6
Configure the Logger NO Log to Console NO Log to File Max number of log directories to keep Max number of log pages (files) per directory Timestamp in date format YES Add timestamp to console loggings NO Logging to Plog logbox at level Submit Factory Defaults
Chapter 3.7/7
DD+DIS275.05E
Repair and Service Software - Releases, Patches
List of Contents
1
1.1 1.2
Customer Release 1.94 ................................................................. 1

Supported features and improvements compared to SW version 1.90 .... 1 Possible conflicts and known problems ...................................................... 1
2
2.1
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3
Customer Release 1.95_C2_R...................................................... 3

Supported features and improvements compared to SW version 1.94 .... 3
General......................................................................................................................... 3 Userinterface ................................................................................................................ 3 Printer related improvements ....................................................................................... 4
2.2
Possible conflicts and known problems ...................................................... 4
3
3.1 3.2 3.3
Customer Release 1.95_C1_M ..................................................... 6

Supported features......................................................................................... 6 Printer specific settings ................................................................................. 6 Possible conflicts and known problems ...................................................... 6
4
4.1 4.2
Customer Release 2.00_C1 .......................................................... 8

Supported features and improvements compared to SW version 1.95 .... 8 Restrictions, Remarks and known Problems ............................................... 9
5
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6
Customer Release 3.0.0_C1 ....................................................... 11

Supported features and improvements compared to SW version 2.00 .. 11 New Features for the Operator .................................................................... 11 New Features concerning Service .............................................................. 12 New Features concerning Connectivity...................................................... 13 Improvements concerning Reliability ......................................................... 14 Improvements concerning Image Quality .................................................. 15
6
6.1 6.2 6.3
Software Patch 3.0.1_C1............................................................. 16

New features compared to SW version 3.0.0_C1 ....................................... 16 Solved bugs compared to SW version 3.0.0_C1 ........................................ 16 Restrictions and Remarks............................................................................ 16
Chapter 3.8 / I )Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
Customer Release 1.94

Customer release 1.94 was released 12/20012. It is the first released Drystar 4500 software.
1.1
Supported features and improvements compared to SW version 1.90

The use of new TM1 B/C TSI film material, with a rougher back layer, may cause the gear wheels in the lower handover assembly to brake. The problem is solved by adapting the speed of the take-over motor to the decurl motor speed. A power protection has been built in, which prevents breaking of the gear-wheels. Input jams occurred during internal tests on sensor S14. This is improved by refining the retry algorithm. Changes in Service Menu: '6 Configure' \ '2Printer Settings' \ 'Manufacturing Data' is deleted. '7 Test & Diagnose' \ '4 Test communication' \ '2 Serial port' is put on NOT IMPLEMENTED During auto-calibration and while refilling the tray, the queue is set to PAUSED status instead of STOPPED. This prevents problems when ADC VIPS sends a job at that very moment. Creation of session files via service level has been extended. While calibration images are printed, other queued images will not be processed. Auto-calibration can be enabled or disabled via key operator menu After a successful auto-calibration the density result (Dmax) is shown on the display and jobs on hold in the print queue turn to calculate/printing status. The Dmax infoscreen remains on the display until the confirm button is pressed. All printing jobs together with jobs in calculating and waiting are shown on the display.
1.2
Possible conflicts and known problems

This software version is not intended to be used in mammo printers If the Drystar 4500 is not modified with "Modification Kit I" (performed by production) and "Modification Kit II" (order number CM+326049.0), extra warnings and errors may occur (serial numbers till 1142 affected).
Chapter 3.8 / 1 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS275.05E
MDM calibration can fail with a MDM diaphragm of 0.4 mm (serial numbers till 1031 affected). Printers from SN 1032 on have a MDM diaphragm of 0.6 mm. The installation of the software can fail, if the printer is switched off during the installation procedure, specifically during flashing of MEB board, which takes place during installation of the second floppy. After installation of the software a full calibration for upper and lower tray is necessary. If this remains undone, error messages during printing of films are possible. During automatic film calibration the following problems occurred. Dicom printing continues during calibration which causes a jam. The calibration continues although a failed film calibration is shown on the display. Service files (i.e. infocounter file, machine specific data and session files) can be saved on floppy via the service menu. We recommend using one floppy for each zip file. Copying all zip files on one floppy will cause a crash when reading the floppies on your service PC under windows NT. When the printer is started up with an empty tray, and the tray is filled from the moment a message is shown, the automatic calibration will cause the printer to hang. Workaround: wait until the printer is started up completely before loading the film (or until drum calibration stops) Filmtype setting via printer installation wizard does not work. Workaround: set filmtype via Change settings Filmtype should be changed to Bluebased before returning to previous software. If not, the printer hangs at installation of the previous software.
DD+DIS275.05E
Customer Release 1.95_C2_R

Customer release 1.95_C2_R was released 08/2002. This Software Version may only be used for Drystar 4500 type 5363/100.
It is recommended to upgrade the printer to software release 1.95_C2_R only in case of printer start-up problems due to improper network initialization throughput complaints tray 1/tray 2 switch if both have 8" x 10" film format replacement of MEB1 with MEB2
2.1

General Target Dmax for clearbase film has been set to 2.95 in file "default.fmpar" New sensitometry curve for clearbase film in "default.fmsen" Implementation of the new MEB board (version 2) requires a new flash command. Reason: The new board contains a flash eprom from another brand. This brand was not supported in previous software versions. Correction values for MDM calibration were not updated when executing the calibration several times. Changes to guarantee flashing of CPU-boards in case an older Portex-flashed board is introduced in the printer. OEM LUT 011 is properly activated via dicom host profile editor. True size printing bug solved. This attribute (via dicom requested image size) functions properly now for values larger than the film size.
2.1.1
2.1.2
Userinterface Dicom user profiles will be stored by selecting save configuration. After a restore of the configuration from floppy the settings were not activated without a reboot. Therefore a suggestion to reset the printer will be given.
DD+DIS275.05E
Delete print jobs. Modality name is shown on the keypad when entering the delete menu. In the past, modality name was displayed as unknown. Sometimes vertical lines were created after TH-profile calibration. Correcting the pixel mapping has solved this problem. Some functions for remote services were added : DCMPrintSCP and Printjobhandler
2.1.3
Printer related improvements Sensito calibration results are stored even when the calibration fails. Input jams occurred during internal tests. This is solved by refining the retry algorithm. Test image "smpte_kan" has been added. This image is a smpte.tif printed with Kanamori. Remarks: - Line time for the printer is 8.9 ms - Decurl parameters are set to 80C and 20 mm/s - Target for maximum density is 310 - Film calibration is more resilient and error detection has improved - Layouts: the diagnostic areas of a version 1 and 2 printer are equal (version 1 = printer without mechanical adjustments for alignment). The black borders around a CR diagnostic area in a version 2 printer are larger than those of a version 1 printer.
2.2

This software version is not intended to be used in mammo printers If the Drystar 4500 is not modified with "Modification Kit I" (performed by production) and "Modification Kit II" (order number CM+326049.0), extra warnings and errors may occur (serial numbers till 1142 affected). MDM calibration can fail with a MDM diaphragm of 0.4 mm (serial numbers till 1031 affected). Printers as of SN 1032 have a MDM diaphragm of 0.6 mm. In order to avoid input jams, the film pickup of upper tray has been adapted. The installation of the software can fail, if the printer is switched off during the installation procedure, specifically during flashing of MEB board, which takes place during installation of the second floppy. Up to now, downgrading of software is not supported. This can cause a disruption of normal functioning of the printer.
DD+DIS275.05E
Repair and Service Software - Releases, Patches After installation of the software a full calibration for upper and lower tray is necessary. If this remains undone, error messages during printing of films are possible. Back film view printing is not possible for key-operator jobs. Printer hang-up after installing software on an empty disk with a bad floppy. No error is given (problem related to all floppy installations). Sometimes printing continues after pressing Stop. When one tray becomes empty, printing continues till all the jobs for the other tray are printed even if the stop button was pressed. Sometimes when pressing Stop, the message you can power off the printer appears before jobs in printing status were finished. Infocounter file from replaced printhead data has not been saved on TH floppy. Print queue status changes from waiting to pause when entering delete menu. MDM sensor may stop if an error occurs during the scan. The next printed film may touch the scan module, if this is not in home position. From that moment on jobs in the queue cannot be printed without causing a jam. Workaround : restart the printer.
DD+DIS275.05E
Customer Release 1.95_C1_M

Customer release 1.95_C1_M was released 08/2002. This Software Version may only be used for Drystar 4500 M type 5363/110 (Mammo Version). The Drystar 4500 M is primarily used for Mammo applications. Drystar 4500 M is used in combination with Drystar Mammo film material. Supported film formats are 8" x 10" and 10" x 12".
3.1
Supported features
New layouts compared to CR/DR device Clear and black borders are minimized Triangle corners are blank High accuracy in horizontal alignment QC mammo image is implemented (additional testimage in keyoperator) New MEB board (version 2) implemented True size printing possible Chest wall recognition done by means of image recognition Software Mammo specific layouts with triangle corners DCMPrintSCP and Printjobhandler functionalities for remote services
3.2
Printer specific settings

Line time for mammo printer is 7,2 ms Decurl parameters are set to 100 C and 12 mm/s Maximum density target is 370 Film calibration is more resilient and errors are better detected
3.3

This software version may only be used for mammo printers (not for CR/DR printers). MDM calibration can fail if mechanics are not updated (diaphragm from 0,4 mm to 0,6 mm). Printers as of SN 1032 have a MDM diaphragm of 0.6 mm.
DD+DIS275.05E
Repair and Service Software - Releases, Patches We emphasize NOT TO SHUTDOWN the printer during software installation, more specifically during flashing of MEB board, which takes place during installation of second floppy. Due to a changed algorithm, a full calibration for uppertray and lowertray is necessary. Following sequence should be followed: MDM Print Head Profile Film calibration See also chapter 3.6 of Service Documentation Back film view printing is not possible for key-operator jobs Sometimes printing continues after pressing stop. When one tray becomes empty, printing continues until all the jobs for the other tray are printed, even when the stop button was pressed. Sometimes when pressing stop, message You can power off the printer appears before jobs in printing status were finished. Infocounter file from replaced printhead data has not been saved on print head floppy. Print queue status changed from waiting to pause when entering delete menu. MDM scan module blocked after an error during the film calibration. From that moment on jobs in the queue cannot be printed without causing a jam. Workaround: Restart the printer. Pinholes (caused by overheating of the film) will be overcompensated during a film calibration. Result: Higher densities, possible overheating, problems / damage of the thermal head. Multi-copy jobs in combination with an empty tray can cause some problems. Dicomjobs with a wrong link to the image files can cause a printer hang-up. Takeover of film when both trays are configured for 8 x 10 format is not always functioning properly.
DD+DIS275.05E
Customer Release 2.00_C1

Customer release 2.00_C1 was released 07/2003. The software kit can be ordered via spare part number CM+341892.0 Drystar 4500 printers with serial number SN1142 require the installation of the "Modification Kit II" (New Trays), order number CM+3260490 Drystar 4500 Type 5363/100 (CR/DR printers) requires 'DT 1B' or 'TM 1 C NEW' films. Drystar 4500 Type 5363/110 (Mammo printers) requires 'Drystar Mammo', 'DT 1B' or 'TM 1 C NEW' films.
4.1

Improved performance, which means faster access and higher throughput for CR / DR printers (type 5363/100):
Software release: Film format Transmission: Processing: Printing: Access time: Throughput: [inch] [sec.] [sec.] [min.sec.] [min.sec.] films SW-Rel. 1.94 C 8 x 10 3" 30" 1' 47" 2' 20" 66 10 x 12 4" 46" 2' 10" 3' 00" 46 SW-Rel. 2.00 C 8 x 10 2" 11" 1' 26" 1' 39" 86 10 x 12 2" 17" 1' 40" 1' 59" 66
Support of the new film types DT 1B and TM1 C NEW Supports different models and configurations of the Drystar 4500 printers like CR/DR, Mammo, old and new mechanics and Helios protocol. Postscript protocol needs to be installed by a separate dataset (floppy) Support of multiple languages, which can be installed from floppy disk Improved User Interface on the local keypad: o More realistic progress bar o New wizard to add modalities o New wizard for TH calibration, which includes now a new registration calibration o Configuration of modality specific image quality settings like Dmax, interpolation, and look-up table possible o Content of the floppy disks are checked (integrity check) during installation o Additional SMPTE test image SMPTE_LS to print in landscape
DD+DIS275.05E
Improved service functionality like: Remote access fully implemented with new browser pages Service alert mailing now possible New wizard for TH profile calibration and drum position adjustment Installation of new software (from SW-Rel.2.00 on) via browser and integrated ftp program possible o More realistic progress bar o o o o
4.2
Restrictions, Remarks and known Problems Restrictions and remarks

Downgrading of the MEB/Proteus is not fully supported. Integrity of the software when upgrading from Software Rel. 1.9X to 2.00 is not checked for every floppy, only after the last floppy is loaded it is checked. In case non-integrity is detected (because one floppy was corrupted), the previous installed software can still be reactivated by resetting the printer. During software upgrade from release 1.9X to 2.00 the hard disk is formatted. During this formatting the machine specific data are stored in RAM. In case of a power failure during formatting of the hard disk, the machine specific data are lost. During software upgrade from release 1.9X to 2.00 the KEY, MEB, and Proteus boards are flashed (programmed). In case of a power failure during flashing, the board that was flashed during power failure cannot be used anymore and has to be exchanged. During high workload the local display is updated slowly and reaction upon pressing keys may be slow.
Known problems:
Selecting the 'CubicBell' interpolation via the DICOM print message is 299 for the DICOM currently not possible. The value range 200 parameter 'smoothing factor' is not active. Workaround: If CubicBell interpolation is required, a selection via a 'Host Profile' will have to be done (Note: CubicBell interpolation is a parameter in the 'kernel' adjustment of the host profile. To overwrite the setting from the modality, the checkbox before the kernel parameter has to be checked!). Multi-copy print jobs can be disrupted by other print jobs. Not all copies will be printed one by one, but films from other print jobs can disrupt the order. With both trays filled with the 8x10 film type (size and/or media), and the upper tray becomes empty the Drystar 4500(M) uses the lower tray
DD+DIS275.05E
to continue printing. However, if the upper tray is loaded again the Drystar 4500(M) switches immediately to use the film from the upper tray, instead of emptying the lower tray first.
For a Drystar 4500M used in a mixed modality environment and both trays configured for the same 8x10 film type (i.e. both for blue based or both for clear based), the films for the non-Mammo modality are always taken from the upper tray (Reason: At an incoming job, the printer just looks for required Dmax (e.g. Dmax = 3.0) and required film type (e.g. blue based). First at the upper, then the lower tray. At the lower tray it is only looking, if the upper does not fulfill the requirements). In case Drystar Mammo film is used in the upper tray, films in the lower tray are never used, except the upper tray is empty. Workaround: Always use the upper tray for 'non-Mammo' film (Dmax 3.10) and the lower tray for 'Mammo' film (Dmax 3.70).
Currently the range 10.2.3.0 till 10.2.3.255 of IP addresses cannot be used for the printer. At Siemens modalities, which operate on the so-called Syngo platform, the connectivity between the Drystar 4500 and the Siemens modality experiences problems when negotiating the Meta Color Print SOP class: Printer destination becomes unreachable after the first print job sent from the modality. Workaround: To resolve this problem with Siemens (Syngo based) modalities deselect the BASIC_COLOR_PM_META_SOP_CLASS in that DICOM host profile, which was prepared specifically for this Siemens (Syngo based) modality.
DD+DIS275.05E
Customer Release 3.0.0_C1

Customer release 3.0 was released 03/2005. All printers delivered as of April 26, 2005 are equipped with software release 3.0.0_C1 from factory. Related serial numbers: - Drystar 4500 Type 5363/100: SN 1790 - Drystar 4500 M Type 5363/110: SN 1735 plus SN1710, 1711 Drystar 4500 software release 3.00_C1 is an optional upgrade. The software kit can be ordered via spare part number CM+349529.0 Each Drystar 4500 can be upgraded to Software release 3.0.0 independent on the software or hardware status. During upgrade procedure the Proteus CPU is replaced by the Crius IV CPU.
5.1

Summary: Main Improvements o Improved image sharpness due to a new Thermal Model. Marketing name "A#sharp", R&D name TMML (Thermal Model Multi Layer). o Image Quality Control Procedure implemented o Support of additional languages for user messages and key-operator screens: Currently available: English, Italian, Niederlands, Norwegian, Deutsch, Finish, Francais, Polish, Spanish, Chinese simplified o Mixed modality support by supporting to configure logical printers o Support of security features as defined by HIPAA
5.2
New Features for the Operator

Support of additional languages for user messages and keyoperator screens: Currently available: English, Dutch, French, Chinese simplified. Note: For some languages (e.g. Chinese simplified) it was necessary to shorten the user messages, to make them fit on the LCD display. The language can be selected via key-operator menu at the printer or via browser interface. Further language datasets can be uploaded via key-operator menu. Languages different to those mentioned above and already installed at a printer with SW Rel. 3 (e.g. Finnish) are kept during SW upgrade, the new menus for "TMML" and "Beep on empty Tray" are however not translated. QC Procedure implemented: A quality control procedure is implemented now also for CR printers (in SW 2.00_C1 only for Mammo printers), which allows the hospital staff to monitor and document the image quality of the printer. It is based on the MQSA (Mammography Quality Standard Act) guidelines defined by FDA (Food and Drug Administration). For details refer to the Drystar 4500 Reference Manual and the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS265.03E
DD+DIS275.05E
Support of external densitometer characteristic: All density values which are displayed at different calibration and QC measurement actions are displayed in the values of a certain densitometer. This allows to check the values the internal MDM has measured with an external densitometer. Currently supported: MacBeth 924, X-Rite 341, X-Rite 331, X-Rite 310 , Gretag , X-Rite 301. Default: MacBeth 924 Browser interface for operator: Menu Operator Tools allows performing queue management (delete / set emergency) of print jobs currently in the print queue. No password is required. Added date to jobs in Emergency Printing and PrintQueue screens. Before only the time was displayed. Now date and time are displayed. Logical printers are shown in key-operator menu: In key-operator menu "Show settings - 6 Logical printers" it is displayed, whether more than one logical printer is configured. Beep on empty trays: The beep for empty film input tray is configurable in key-op menus (no beep, 5x beep, continuous beep)
5.3
New Features concerning Service

Possibility of remote SW installation on empty HDD: A batch file named remote_emergency_install.bat is supplied now, which allows to install software via network on a printer, which could not start up via harddisk. It can also be used to perform a software upgrade. Only works if SW 2.00_C1 is installed. Film info area on film added: A microtext is printed in small characters (< 1 mm) in the system info area in the black border, thereby improving traceability in case of image quality problems / complaints. It contains e.g. Dmin, Dmax, Interpolation, Taste LUT, printer SN etc. For more details refer to the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS265.03E Batch tools to adjust network parameters: Via commands "setip <IP address>" and "setsubnetmask <subnetmask>" it is possible to adapt the IP address and subnetmask on terminal level. This allows to adapt the IP address of the printer right after switch on. Infocounter about controller settings added: Logically, the printer consists of a print engine and a controller. The infocounter for the Controller is shown in the "DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report page" browser page. Controller settings are e.g. User Profile settings. Information in infocounter extended: The infocounter is extended with info about Startup/Shutdown History (8.0 Startup/Shutdown History). Now each MDM calibration is logged in the infocounter section 3.5 Calibration History.
DD+DIS275.05E
Repair and Service Software - Releases, Patches Support of APIPA: Automatic Private IP Addressing is a new feature of the Drystar 4500 and an already existing feature of Windows-based operating systems (Windows 98, ME, 2000, and XP) that enables a service PC to automatically assign itself an IP address. The default IP address of the printer changed from 0.0.0.0 to 169.254.10.10. The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0. For details refer to chapter 3.2 of the Service Documentation. Decurl parameters for Mammo V2 films introduced: In SW Rel. 2 a SW patch named "rel200_FLM_C1" had to be installed at Mammo printers, to prevent decurl stripes with the new Mammo V2 films. The new film is more sensitive for decurl banding than the previous one. following parameters are changed: - The decurl speed is increased from 12 mm/s to 16 mm/s - The decurl temperature is decreased from 100 C to 90 C
5.4
New Features concerning Connectivity

Mixed modality support: Max. 4 (recommendation!) logical printers (DICOM Print SCP servers) allow to provide alternative behavior (profiles) for print jobs from the same modality. The configuration of logical printers and the creation of new DICOM profiles is possible by service tools, only via browser: Service Engineer Tools - DICOM profile editor - DICOM Print SCP Servers DICOM configuration management: LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) client supports access to a central LDAP server which keeps configuration information of DICOM devices (e.g. modalities, printers) in its database, to facilitate configuration DICOM conformance level behavior implemented: Two printer information levels can be defined via host profile: 0 (default) = No warnings are returned. Only 'Failure' status codes are activate. This means, that the printer either returns 'normal' or 'failure' (e.g. if printer is offline or film magazine is empty) to the modality. 1 = Warnings are returned. Refer to DICOM conformance status of the Drystar 4500 and the host system. If the host system does not support 'status level' 1, set this parameter to default (= 0). Number of OEM LUTs extended: All LUTs named between oem900.txt till oem999.txt which are available in directory C:\oemlut are displayed in the drop down list in the host profile. Before only one "handmade" OEM LUT named oem999.txt could be used.
DD+DIS275.05E
Host profile Parameter 'LR-Like printing' introduced: While comparing images processed with the new thermal model and images printed with the LR5200 it showed, that the images of the LR still looked slightly different, despite the sharpness was comparable. Investigations of the linearity of the Laser Imager showed, that the LR5200 does not behave exactly as linear as a Drystar does: To get at Drystars with the new thermal model the same image impression as on the LR5200, an additional LUT has to be applied, to get the same "Non-linearity" as the Laser Imager. This LUT is applied before the specified taste LUT (Kanamori, Kanamori_like etc.) is applied. Default: off. Possible settings: Off, low, medium. high. Recommended setting to get the same image impression like on LR: low. Consecutive film wait for multiple film boxes in a single print job is set to 15 seconds: A printjob with multiple filmboxes was previously not monitored for new filmsboxes after the first film and image was received. Only when the first film was printed and successfully put into the outputtray, the printjob was checked on new films. So all following films where started after output of the previous one. In the printer, a film-piping mechanisme is implemeted to get the throughput of 100 films per hour. It can handle tree films at the same time. This piping mechanism only works if the available films in a printjob are notified to the piping controller as soon as they are received and not after the previous film is already in the output tray. In the new implementation the printer has a build-in delay of 15 secs. to wait on an open association, to see if there will be more film-boxes. Host profile Parameter 'Print even if application type not supported introduced: This parameter defines, whether a print job should be printed, even if no Mammo film is available. Default: No. This parameter prevents that a Mammo modality sends images to the printer, which only has CR/DR films loaded.
5.5
Improvements concerning Reliability

Alert mailing removed: The alert mailing feature, to send an alert Email for predefined errors is removed because it was not used in the field.
DD+DIS275.05E
5.6
Improvements concerning Image Quality

Improved image sharpness due to a new Thermal Model: The thermal model is a mathematical description of the interaction Film TH. The thermal model uses parameters like film thickness, thermal conductivity of the film, TH temperature; environmental temperature, print speed and resolution of the print head. The new thermal model TMML (Thermal Model Multi Layer; R&D name of the product marketing published it under 'A # Sharp') describes this interaction more accurate, leading to a very precise reproduction of the image. It does not use new parameters for calculating. The image looks much sharper now, and has the image quality of a Laser Imager. For more info refer to the HealthCare Newsletter "Innovation at work: A#sharp" vailable on MEDNET, HealthCare Library. Improved TH profile calibration: Better correction at the edges of the image. In addition, the required compensation during MDM registration calibration and print head profile calibration is displayed. Example:
Print Head Profile Calibration Completed successfully Registration compensation 13% TPH Profile compensation 24% Press to continue
0% No compensation was required 100% Maximum compensation was required This means, that the figures are a sign of the quality ot the MDM registration or print head profile respectively before print head profile calibration. Improved film calibration: Different messages are shown to user depending on the outcome of the calibration: Failed, Success, Retry (when Dmax is not reached yet) and Dmax Reached (when Dmax is not reached yet, but retrying will not improve)
5363_enc_004.cdr
DD+DIS275.05E
Software Patch 3.0.1_C1

Software Patch 3.0.1_C1 was released 07/2005.
6.1
New features compared to SW version 3.0.0_C1

SW patch 3.0.1.C1 does not contain new features.
6.2
Solved bugs compared to SW version 3.0.0_C1

Following software bugs appeared in SW 3.0.0_C1, and are solved with SW patch 3.0.1_C1: Sporadic error message HC10100 (Test of MEB PCB failed). This fault appears only if the MEB board temperature is < 25C (< 77F) and disappears after reboot, when the MEB board has reached a higher temperature and/or Sporadic error message HC11121 (The decurl module got an overtemperature or didn't reach its temperature in time). This fault mainly appears when operating the printer with covers opened during repair. It disappears after a reboot.
and/or Sporadic error message HC11111 (Calibration module not working). This fault is quite unlikely and disappears after a reboot.
These faults only appear at printers with SW 3.0.0_C1.
6.3
Restrictions and Remarks

SW patch 3.0.1_C1 is only available via MedNet, GSO library The SW patch size incl. documentation is approx. 600 kB. It fits on one floppy disk. It is a mandatory software update and has to be installed at the next service intervention at printers with SW 3.0.0_C1 Drystar 4500 M with SN 1817 and Drystar 4500 CR/DR with SN 1827 have SW patch 3.0.1_C1 installed from factory. For more information refer to FSB6

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
List of Contents
1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16
Software........................................................................................... 1
Does the printer use any service software? ...................................................1 Is a service PC required for installation, repair or maintenance? ................1 Which possibilities exist to install software on the printer?.........................1 Is it possible to erase the complete queue?...................................................2 What are the recommended calibrations for clear based films? ..................2 Are the calibrations logged in the infocounter? ............................................2 If a print job can not be printed for any reason, what status will be displayed on the local keypad for this printjob?............................................2 What is the meaning of the different displays in the print queue?...............2 How does the Drystar4500 treat open DICOM associations, which are not automatically closed by the modality? ...........................................................3 If a film jams in the output unit of the Drystar4500, would this film be automatically reprinted? ..................................................................................3 Whenwill a print job be deleted from the printer harddisk?.........................3 Why are on the film sensitometry testfilm 2 grey steps? ..............................3 Why does it sometimes take approx. 1 min until the Key-operator or Service session browser pages are loaded?..................................................3 How are the layouts defined in the Printer? ...................................................3 What is APIPA? .................................................................................................3 Where do I find the menu for the MDM calibration? ......................................4
2
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Keypad menus ................................................................................ 4

What is meant with key-operator menu "select default for film calibration"?......................................................................................................4 What is the purpose of key-operator menu "printing mode" ........................4 What is the printer doing in the service menu "extended system check". Is it the same like the selftest after a reset? .......................................................5 Why is the" Re-install printhead" menu offered in service menu. Why should I install it if it is already installed? ......................................................5
Other topics..................................................................................... 5
Chapter 3.9/I
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5
Where do I find documentation on recycling guidelines?.............................5 What is the difference between film throughput and access time? .............5 What are the TH warranty conditions..............................................................5 Why is there a difference in TH cleaning procedure for Drystar 4500 and Drystar 5500 ......................................................................................................5 Where can I find additional information to image adjustments, image quality and related key-words like TMML, A#sharp, cubic, OEM LUT and logical printers? ................................................................................................6
Section 3.2/II
Drystar 4500 (Type 5363/100)
Edition 1, Revision 2

1
1.1
Software
Does the printer use any service software?
The service software for the printer is "built in". It can be accessed in the service menu of the local keypad.
1.2
Is a service PC required for installation, repair or maintenance?

In general no service PC is required for installation, repair or maintenance. Following exceptions exist: In case the keypad is defective, the printer can be accessed via its homepage from any PC in the network via a browser (Recommended: Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher). As an alternative, a crossed network cable can be used for connection of the service PC. In this case, the service PC needs to have an IP address that belongs to the same network class (e.g. printer IP address = 10.5.6.101, use e.g. 10.5.4.102 for the service PC). In case subnetting is used, and you do not get a connection, try an address that is below the printers IP address (e.g. 10.5.6.100). Note: In software release 1 the drystar 4500 homepage only contains the DICOM profile editor. No other menus (like key-operator or service menu) can be accessed. In case of no keypad display, the presence of the homepage just shows, that the CPU is working properly, and the software started up completely
1.3
Which possibilities exist to install software on the printer?

Re-Installation of the SW From printer hard disk; via local keypad or browser SW Update: Loading a SW patch: Via floppy or via browser SW Upgrade: Upgrade to a higher major SW release (e.g. SW Rel. 2 to 3) Via Floppy or browser SW Installation on an empty, new hard drive: Via floppies or via batch file (network connection) Emergency SW installation Via floppies or via batch file (network connection) Note 1: SW installation via batch only works as of SW Rel. 3.0.0. A SW Upgrade from 2.0X to 3.0.0 can be made via batch file. First a Preinstall floppy has to be loaded however. SW 2.0X cannot be installed via batch file. Note 2: Difference between SW installation on empty HD and Emergency SW installation: At SW installation on an empty HD the machine specific data have to be re-loaded after SW Installation. At Emergency SW installation the machine specific data can be preserved during the SW installation procedure.
Chapter 3.9/1
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
1.4
Is it possible to erase the complete queue?

In general it is possible to format the partition F: of the printer if connected via terminal. To connect to the terminal level however, a password (R&D password !) is required. Via local keypad it is possible to erase single print jobs: Just press the 'delete key' on the local keypad. The 'delete print job' window will open, from where single print jobs can be erased (only those, that are not yet in 'printing' or 'calculating' status).
1.5
What are the recommended calibrations for clear based films?

There is no difference for clear and blue based film: The only required calibration is the "Film calibration". A film calibration is printing a 52 steps grey wedge on a film, measuring the different steps with the internal MDM, adapting the Dmax to 3.0 and storing the 52 grey wedge values as sensitometric curve. By default the film calibration is initiated, whenever the film magazine was empty and a new film package is inserted. The automatic calibration can be switched off in the 'change settings image quality general settings' screen in the key-operator menu.
1.6
Are the calibrations logged in the infocounter?

In the infocounter entry '3.5 calibration history' all calibrations are logged: date, number of films printed and type of calibration (film / MDM / print head profile)
1.7
If a print job can not be printed for any reason, what status will be displayed on the local keypad for this printjob?
If the job in general can be printed, but the correct media size or type is not present, the job will be displayed in the print queue with the desired film type/size in first row (instead of 'printing' or 'calculating' or 'waiting' e.g. 'blue 10x12' will be displayed). This print job will stay in the queue, until the problem (wrong film size or wrong film media) is solved. Jobs that have got the correct film size and media, but cannot be printed out of an unknown reason get a 'waiting' entry and will stay in the queue forever. They can be deleted by pressing the 'delete key'.
1.8
What is the meaning of the different displays in the print queue?

Waiting: The job is in the printer queue, waiting to be further processed Calculating: The image map for this job is calculated (sensitometry is applied; Dmax is adjusted; compensations are applied; image processing as defined in the host profile is applied) Printing: A film for this print job is between film magazine and film output. Blue 10x12 (this is just an example; can also be any other media type and format): The desired film size/type is not available. Stop: The printer has stopped accepting new jobs and is ready printing its current jobs. The printer can be powered off or opened (e.g. to fill tray) now. To initiate this status, the 'stop' button was pressed.
Chapter 3.9/2

1.9
How does the Drystar4500 treat open DICOM associations, which are not automatically closed by the modality?
The association is kept open for 15 minutes if there is no activity and the host profile parameter "association timeout" is left at default = 0. This parameter can be changed from 0 to 86,400 secs and the timeout will change from 15 minutes to a possible 24 hours. This can be useful for modalities that do NOT break the association (i.e. Siemens, Picker/Marconi/Philips, etc...). The modality can have problems re-establishing the connection with the printer if the association timeout as defined in the host profile causes the association to be broken.
1.10
If a film jams in the output unit of the Drystar4500, would this film be automatically reprinted?
Yes, jammed films are always reprinted. A film is only erased from the printer queue, in case no film jam or other error was reported during printing. The image is erased, if following condition is fulfilled: Sensor S15 'decurl exit detection' has detected film and is cleared now. This means: only if the output jam comes behind sensor S15 (what is unlikely to happen), the image is not reprinted.
1.11
Whenwill a print job be deleted from the printer harddisk?

The image to-be-printed is erased, if following conditions are fulfilled: Sensor S15 'decurl exit detection' has detected film and is cleared now No error was reported during printing.
1.12
Why are on the film sensitometry testfilm 2 grey steps?

This is to minimize the effects of print head profile and drum irregularities. The measurement is made at the lower edge of the film.
1.13
Why does it sometimes take approx. 1 min until the Key-operator or Service session browser pages are loaded?
The browser pages for the Key-operator menu and the Service menu have to be generated first after each reboot. This takes approx. 45 secs. When they are generated once, loading of these pages takes less than 1 sec after a reboot they have to be generated again however.
1.14
How are the layouts defined in the Printer?

The newer Drystar's (4500, 5300, 5500, 5302) do not have layouts in the software like the older Drystar's 2000 & 3000 (.idf files).The modality sends the desired layout via DICOM print. Newer Drystar's map it to the printable area on film defined by the pixel matrices per film size. The pixel matrices are shown in chapter 11, Installation Planning and in the appendix of the Hardcopy Application Manual.
1.15
What is APIPA?
Automatic Private IP Addressing (APIPA) is a feature of Windows-based operating systems (Windows 98, ME, 2000, and XP) that enables a computer
Chapter 3.9/3
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
to automatically assign itself an IP address. As of SW Rel. 3.0.0_C1 the printer offers this feature. Consequences of APIPA for Drystar 4500: The default IP address of the printer changed from 0.0.0.0 to 169.254.10.10 The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0 After unpacking and switch-on, it is after approx. 2 min. possible to connect via network hub or crossed network cable to the web pages of the printer. It is not required anymore to wait for the complete printer bootup, before the printer configuration can start. Also at "Emergency Software Installation" without saving of the machine specific data the default IP address is set to 169.254.10.10 to allow a browser connection approx. 2 min. after switch-on.
Consequences of APIPA for Drystar 4500 Installations:
PC Settings for APIPA: Windows 98 / Windows ME / Windows 2000: Select Control Panel Network Properties Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Obtain an IP address automatically". Note: The path may differ for different operating systems. Windows XP: Select Control Panel Network Connections Local Area Connection Properties Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Tab: Alternative Configuration Automatic Private IP address".
1.16
Where do I find the menu for the MDM calibration?

The only place you can find the calibration for the MDM is the service menu session in the browser pages. Reason: As a MDM calibration should be required very seldom, this menu is "hidden" now in the browser pages.
2
2.1
Keypad menus
What is meant with key-operator menu "select default for film calibration"?
In this menu it can be set, whether the automatic film calibration with insertion of a new film package should be switched off or on. Default = on.
2.2
What is the purpose of key-operator menu "printing mode"

In this menu it can be defined, whether the so-called 'back-view printing' should be applied. 'Back-view printing' means, that the film is printed mirrored on the film. In this case, the curl of the film will be towards the lightbox.
Chapter 3.9/4

2.3
What is the printer doing in the service menu "extended system check". Is it the same like the selftest after a reset?
The test is more extended than the selftest after reset or switch-on.
2.4
Why is the" Re-install printhead" menu offered in service menu. Why should I install it if it is already installed?
One possible application: To be able to reload the original TH data when the TH profile was done on a dirty TH and the original TH data needs to be loaded in order to get rid of the gray lines in the images (due to the TH profile being done on a dirty TH).
3
3.1
Other topics
Where do I find documentation on recycling guidelines?
Query on AGFA recycling pass for Drystar 4500 on the Agfa intranet. http://dokx.agfa.be/ehs_ms.html (home page = http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf)
3.2
What is the difference between film throughput and access time?

Throughput is measured in films per hour. This is measured in the factory with a simulated standard configuration, e.g. a modality sends DICOM images in "image mode". Access time is this time between pressing "PRINT" at the modality until the film is in the film tray of the printer. The access time for the first film is always approx. 20 secs. longer than for the following films, as the printer is able to do printing and processing simultaneously for following films.
3.3
What are the TH warranty conditions

If a thermal head fails within a period of 3 years (36 months) or a number of 50.000 prints (whatever comes first) since production date of the thermal head, the NSOs will receive a credit of 100% of the EUR4 price. Following items must be sent back in order to obtain the 100% credit via the standard MA4 return procedure: Defective thermal head with filled in label on the thermal head Original thermal head floppy
3.4
Why is there a difference in TH cleaning procedure for Drystar 4500 and Drystar 5500
At Drystar 5500 the TH cleaning procedure comprises two additional steps (refer to chapter 3.6: Check for dust stripes): A resistor check: The resistor measurement of Drystar 4500 is not accurate enough to be used for the detection of resistor errors. A dry TPH cleaning (with an ink eraser): In case DT2 films used in Drystar 5500 are printed at the wrong side, they make a strong contamination of the thermal head, which only can be removed by dry
Chapter 3.9/5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS110.05E
cleaning. This persistent contamination doesnt show up with DT1 films in Drystar 4500
3.5
Where can I find additional information to image adjustments, image quality and related key-words like TMML, A#sharp, cubic, OEM LUT and logical printers?
These items are described in the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS078.05E. The Hardcopy Application Manual also contains info to Printing principles Film material basics Overview of all printers and related gateways Overview of printer features and related SW Versions Aspects of film viewing Image Quality Adjustment Image Quality Control Tools
Chapter 3.9/6
DD+DIS005.03E
Reference and Overall Circuit Diagrams
List of Contents 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7
Reference Diagrams ..................................................................2

Sensors....................................................................................................... 2 Switches ..................................................................................................... 5 Motors ......................................................................................................... 5 Solenoids.................................................................................................... 5 Fans ............................................................................................................ 5 Boards ........................................................................................................ 6 Thermal Head ............................................................................................. 6
General Circuit Diagrams

Drystar 4500 Safety Circuit Diagram (Diagram 1/4) General Circuit Diagram with MEB1 board (Diagram 2/4) General Circuit Diagram with MEB2 board (Diagram 3/4) Circuit Diagrams Legend (Diagram 4/4)
Chapter 4 / I
DD+DIS005.03E
1
1.1
Componen Name t S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S21 S23 S25 - S28 S29
Reference Diagrams
Sensors
Purpose / Comment Detects home position of the TH Detects print position of the TH Refer to Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 2
TH home position sensor TH print position sensor
Upper film magazine empty detection Detects empty upper magazine Lower film magazine empty detection Detects empty lower magazine Upper magazine closed detection Lower magazine closed detection MDM home detection Gear ratio adjustment sensor Feeding roller passed detection Upper preload detection Lower preload detection Drum passed detection Take over roller passed detection Upper pickup passed detection Decurl exit detection Film take over speed detection Decurl temperature sensor Cover sheet detection Drum speed detection Decurl speed detection Detects correct inserted upper magazine Detects correct inserted lower magazine Detects MDM home position Detects correct speed of drum
Detects filmrun between magazines Figure 2 and TH Detects filmrun before printing (8x10") Detects filmrun before printing (10"x12") Detects filmrun after drum Detects filmrun before decurl unit Detects filmrun after upper magazine Detects filmrun after decurl unit Measures speed of M6 Detects eventual cover sheet Measures speed of drum motor Measures correct speed of decurl drive Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 1 -
Measures temperature of decurl unit Figure 2
TH temperature sensor thermistor (1) TH temperature compensation. to (4) Inside TH. Ambient temperature sensor on MEB-PCB TH temperature compensation. Measures the Td (drum temperature), used for temperature compensation together with the Tth (thermal head temperature; S25 S28). TH temperature compensation. Issues error HC10003 if temperature > 49 C.
S30
Proteus temperature sensor
Chapter 4 / 2
Edition 2, Revison 0 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS0005.03E
S14 S17 M9 SW2 S15 SW4 M2 (S23) SW5 S4 M7 S13 S3 M5 M4 F2 SW1 M1 S21 S1 DSH1* board S2 KEY4* board TH F1 S18 M3 S9
S9 S18
S5 S6
S12
S16 S7 M6
EM1 M8 EM2
Figure 1
S8
S11
S10
MEB1* board
*The figure represents the

Figure 2
initial revision of the board. The revision installed in the printer can be different.
PRO2* board Proteus CPU
Hard disk Floppy drive Power Supply
Figure 3
Edition 2, Revison 0 Agfa Company Confidential Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110) Chapter 4 / 3
DD+DIS0005.03E
S9 S18
S5 S6
S12
S16 S7 M6
EM1 M8 EM2
Figure 1
S8
S11
S10
MEB1* board

Figure 2
Figure 3
Chapter 4 / 4 Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110) Edition 2, Revison 0 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS0005.03E
1.2
Component SW1 SW2 SW4 SW5 Name
Switches
Purpose / Comment Safety: all consumers in TH section switched off Safety: all consumers in upper section switched off Safety: Switches off, if decurl too hot Jam clearing: Switches decurl drive on Refer to Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 2 Safety switch (thermal head) Safety switch (top cover) Decurl overheating protection Decurl jam clearance switch
1.3
Component M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 Name
Motors
Purpose / Comment Drives the drum. Drives the decurl unit Positions the TH for printing or home position Pushes film out of the upper magazine Pushes film out of the lower magazine. Transports film of the upper magazine between magazine output and M9. Drives film between drum and decurl Drives film between decurl and exit Drives the MDM carrier Drives the films of the upper magazine between film magazine and vertical alignment Refer to Figure 2 Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 2 Drum motor Decurl motor TH positioning motor Pickup motor 1 (upper) Pickup motor 2 (lower)
M6 M7 M8 M9
Film take over motor Output roller motor MDM scan motor Pickup take over motor
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 1 Figure 1
1.4
Component EM1 EM2 Name
Solenoids
Purpose / Comment Positions 8x10" film for printing Centers the film before printing Refer to Figure 1 Figure 1 Vertical alignment solenoid Horizontal alignment solenoid
1.5
Component F1 F2 Name
Fans
Purpose / Comment Cools the TH down Cools the CPU down Refer to Figure 2 Figure 1 Thermal Head fan PCI fan
Chapter 4 / 5
DD+DIS0005.03E
1.6
Component DSH1 Floppy drive Hard disk KEY4 MEB1 PRO1 Name
Boards
Purpose / Comment Controls the densitometer Reads 3,5" floppies (1.44 MB) Stores software and images Controls the display and keyboard Controls all motors and sensors CPU Refer to Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Density Sensor Head KEYboard PCB Main Engine Board PROtheus CPU
1.7
Component TH Name
Thermal Head
Purpose / Comment Transfers the image information to the film by heating up the film Refer to Figure 2 Thermal head
Chapter 4 / 6
DD+DIS005.03E
Reference and Overall Circuit
S9 S18
S5 S6
S12
S16 S7 M6
EM1 M8 EM2
Figure 1
S8
S11
S10
MEB1* board

Figure 2
Figure 3
Edition 2, Revison 0 Agfa Company Confidential Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110) Chapter 4 / 7
2
24AWG orange
3
A072 A068
7
.3
8
Quartz Heating
10
11
12
A071
XS1/1 XS1/2
A
SW5 A304605.0 JAM CLEARANCE BUTTON
A000000.0 TESTED KEYx PCB REV.x PTTPKEYx++x
A301039.0 SAFETY SWITCH (top cover)
7 3
8 4
SW2 .4 SW4
XS1/5 XS1/4
ON/OFF A304718.0
t
SWITCH
A074
B
A301039.0
24AWG brown
24AWG orange
A000000.0
18AWG green 24AWG orange 18AWG green
1 2
A068
SAFETY SWITCH (Thermal head)

4 8
A069
DECURL UNIT
SW1
24AWG brown 24AWG gray
1a
1b
A000000.0 TESTED PRO1 PCB REV.x PTTPPRO1++x
A072
A075
A076
24AWG brown
A085
A070
C
24AWG brown
24AWG brown
24AWG gray
A075
A074
D012
A004
A003
A085
A070
P9/20
P9/21
P9/17
P9/16
P9/18
P9/19
P5/01
A071
P9/22
1 2
SW1_1
SW1_2
SW3_2
SW3_1
SW5
SW2
D012
A001
A002
V33
V33
P_24V 24V (0V: safety P3/13 P2/1 P2/2 circuit open)
P4/1
V33
4k7
4k7 4k7 Thermal Head Closed (TH)
.3
4k7 4k7
VTH_REL
P4/2
4k7
4k7 Stacker Closed (STACKER) 330 10k S G D AMD9120 HEATER -
Decurl unit
interlock relay
Power
remote on/off + remote on/off -
Control
logic
Q10
SAFETY_OK
JAM
HEATER +
GND
GND
E
GND GND
GND
GND V33
GND
GND
MAINS
Vth relay K5 Vth relay .3

100..240V 50/60Hz P_24V
4k7
4k7 Jam Clearance (JAM)
(Vth) Thermal head supply voltage

24V
K6
POWER MOTORS
GND +24V P_24V BAS56
60V
xV ca.40kHz
+24V
GND
GND
V33 BAS56
4k7 GND POWER FAILURE DETECTION
K1
330
10k
S G D AMD9120
GND
Q9
Power Supply Drystar 4500

NAGEZIEN
LT
D1006678.4.0
PTTPMEB1++x A000000.0 TESTED MEB1 PCB REV.x
DECURL
GND GND
BAS56
Braamzijde
MATERIAAL
Safety Circuit Diagram

-
Maten zonder tolerantie A000 = Wire number on drawing n D1008475.1.0 WIRE HARNESS ASSY (FRAME) (A321175.0) D000 = Wire number on drawing n D1008501.1.0 WIRE HARNESS ASSY (PS-MEB) (A321176.0)
Section 4, Part 2 Diagram 1/4

Benaming: Tekening nummer: Artikel nummer: Type
DRYSTAR 4500 SAFETY CIRCUIT
Uitvoering volgens lastenboek 4 3 99-10-07 LT
D1006678.4.0
5363 / 100/110
Drystar 4500 / 99-06-08 LT Drystar 4500 M 2 98-11-03 LT

1 98-11-03 LT
Agfa-Gevaert N.V.
R & O Apparatuur MORTSEL.
Project Created:
5363
1994.12.13
Blad:
1/1
ECO
VR
DATUM
NM
STRICTLY PRIVATE
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
D1006851.4.0
A302222.
S15
3 2 1 +5V XS1-06 OUT XS1-07 GND XS1-08
Aleph OS-5101-type H
U T P
Decurl exit detection
ENC
A321177. WIRE HARNESS ASSY DECURL DEVICE A303243.
heater heater 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DC-motor met magn. encoder 12 pulsen/omw.
A
M2 (S23)
A324333. PRO2 REV A with 128Mb

P17
Isolation
serial COM port DB25
XS1
55V PS1/P4-01 55V common PS1/P4-02 sw3-1 sw3-2 +5V OUT GND MEB1/P9-19 MEB1/P9-18 MEB1/P9-03 MEB1/P9-02 MEB1/P9-01
(JAPAN SERVO DME44BM6HF-104) Mates with Cap housing connector AMP EI series 6 pos.
PORT A
Galvanic Isolation IEC601
P9
UTP
Exergen IRt/c01 k-120C (Bekab. IR sensor: A306882.1) A303321.
Mates with receptacle AMP EI 3 pos.
A321594. HDD CABLE
SCSI
IR t/c
SW4
A304718. Decurl overheating protection
Elmwood 2455R-100-76/B203 mates with Size 6.3 x 0.8 FASTON receptacles
S17
+12V_DIODE (fused)
QUARTZ HEATING
MOLEX 5557 series Mini-Fit, Jr. Receptacle 8 pos.
PCI Connector
+12V
XS6
XS1-04
SW4-1 SW4-2 S15-03 S15-02 S15-01
A321175.
MOLEX 5559 series Mini-Fit, Jr. Plug 8 pos. with Mounting Ears
WIRE HARNESS ASSY (FRAME)
MEB1/P15-39 MEB1/P15-40 n.c. MEB1/P13-11 MEB1/P13-07 MEB1/P13-08
1 2 3 4 5 6
motor+ motor+5V OUT S23 GND
M
A304862.
F2
P11
Ethernet
+12V
Decurl temperature sensor

R 270
P
A322808. CABLED IR-TEMP.SENSOR
B
P3 A313332. CABLED FAN
+12V GND 2 1
CPU
Grackle
PCI BUS
CR1 1.25A
P
yellow wire red wire blank wire
1 2 3
TC1+ TC1shielding
MEB1/P19-01 MEB1/P19-02 MEB1/P19-03
CABLED DC-motor 24V +RED. 1/15 A321690. DISCHARGE BRUSH

DC Buehler 1.61.065.446
B
(Bekab.DC-motor red.1/180: A304853) Mates with Cap housing connector
DECURL ASSEMBLY
FireWire
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FW_VP1 FW_GND FW_TPB1FW_TPB1+ FW_TPA1FW_TPA1+ FW_GND FW_GND MEB1/P10-1 MEB1/P10-2 MEB1/P10-3 MEB1/P10-4 MEB1/P10-5 MEB1/P10-6 MEB1/P10-7 MEB1/P10-8
XS1-05
Cap & Receptacle housing connector AMP EI series 3 pos., Cap housing for panel mount
R 268
XS4
MEB1/P15-15 MEB1/P15-15 to frame plate MEB1/P23-31 MEB1/P23-32 MEB1/P23-33 1 2 3 4 5 6 M7-01 M7-02 brush S14-01 S14-02 S14-03
1.25A
DIMM0
DIMM1
AMP EI series 2 pos.
M7
Mot+ 1 Mot- 2
S1
DC Japan Servo DME34B36G-205 Mates with Cap housing connector
A321460. TOP COVER CABLE
BOOTER EPLD USB
(MEB)
nopop R 282
400 Mbit/s
A322062. THERMAL HEAD
1 2 3
+5V GND OUT
MEB1/P16-03 MEB1/P16-01 MEB1/P16-02
M3
Mot+ 1 Mot- 2
XS4-01 XS4-02
P6
Floppy connection
Flash PROBOCO FPGA IEEE 1394
MEB1/P16-08 MEB1/P16-07
Connection between mechanical assemblies Cap & Receptacle housing connector AMP EI series 6 pos., free hanging parts
A304853. Output roller motor
Omron EE-SX4009-P1 Mates with receptacle AMP EI 3 pos.
P14
GND
High Speed serial Data connector female Right Angle 6pos.
A304853. TH positioning motor
C
S14
DIL VCC
(LS120)
P15
A301031. TH home position sensor

KYOCERA type KBT-250-20PAG13-AGF EBM Q2G-030-GC 03-01 Mates with receptacle AMP EI series 2 pos.
P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
V33
Accessory Connector
SRAM
TESTPOINT
XS4-06 XS4-05 XS4-04
+5V 3 OUT 2 GND 1
(DISK)
FIRE WIRE CABLE
Eth. PROM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
F1
Mot+ 1 Mot- 2
DC Buehler 1.61.065.441 Mates with Cap housing connector AMP EI series 2 pos.
Aleph OS-5101-type H Mates with receptacle
LED3 LED4 LED5
P16
S2
1 2 3 +5V MEB1/P16-06 GND MEB1/P16-04 OUT MEB1/P16-05
MEB1/P16-10 MEB1/P16-09
M9
Mot- 1 Mot+ 2
AMP EI 3 pos.
FDD CABLE
RESETSWITCH
A321406.
KEYPAD Connection
Super I0 VCC +12V V33
A321186.
A321180. TH POWER CABLE
ABORTING ABORTINO SCL SDA
DISPLAY CABLE
+12V
VCC
Mates with
1 2 3 4 +12V +5V
IBM DCAS-34330W
P2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 +5V common Remot on/off+ Remot on/offPower fail Power reset Power good Shut down GND
+12V
P7
MOLEX 5566 series Mini-Fit, Jr. vertical header dual row 8 pos.
Socket connector IDC 2x7 pos. (flatcable)
S1-02 S1-03 S1-01 S2-02 S2-03 S2-01 M3-02 M3-01 F1-02 F1-01 n.c. n.c. CON_P16 MEB/P16-14 GND MEB/P16-13
P4
4 Wall boxed header
A321185.
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
GND PORTB_TX PORTB_RX NKEY_CONNECT VCC VCC REMOTE_BRAKED REMOTE_ONOFF NREMOTE_TURNOFF +12V NKEYPAD_RESET GND +12V GND
A318779.
MEB1/P15-22 MEB1/P15-24
A302222. Upper pickup passed detection
WIRE HARNESS ASSY
CABLED CROSS FLOW FAN 24V 100M3/H
TH SENSOR CABLE
(TH-SUSPENSION)
A000000. Pickup take over motor
A321181.
A321179.
TS DATA CABLE
NPower_Shutdown
A301031. TH print position sensor
A321183.
NPower_Reset
NPower_Good
NPower_Fail
Remote_OnOff +
Remote_OnOff -
P2
PRO1/P19-01 PRO1/P19-02 PRO1/P19-03 PRO1/P19-04 PRO1/P19-05 PRO1/P19-06 PRO1/P19-07 PRO1/P19-08 PRO1/P19-09 PRO1/P19-10 PRO1/P19-11 PRO1/P19-12 PRO1/P19-13 PRO1/P19-14
Mates with
GND_SENSE
V33_SENSE
MOLEX 6410 series Straight Square Pin
JST SDN connector .156" pitch board-in
MOLEX 90130 series C-Grid III straight header Dual Row 14 pos.
GND S1 VOS GND S3 VOS M3_2 M3_1 F1_2 F1_1
P19
A321992. Encoder 4096 pulsen/omw.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GND R S T K0 K2 K1 N.C. +5V R S T K0 K2 K1 N.C. MEB1/P13-02 N.C. N.C. N.C. MEB1/P13-03 MEB1/P13-05 MEB1/P13-06 N.C. MEB1/P13-01 N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
Friction Loch Header 3 pos.
P6
DIN 41651 4-wall boxed straight header
P3
1 VTH_OUT+
crimp style 10 pos. (to be soldered.)
P16
VOS
A322065. HARD DISK 9.1GB U2SCSI 68P
VCC
GND RxD TxD /KD_connect +5V +5V remote on/off remote on/off /Turn_on/off +12V /KD_reset GND IO1 spare IO2 spare
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0000000 00000 000
Decurl temp. sensor
ENC
F
M1
1 2 3 4 +5V
TH home position
sensor
TH positioning motor
P12
DIN 41651 4-wall boxed header right angle Dual Row 50 pos.
Thermal Head fan
VTH-RET
TH print position
SONY MPF520-1/131 ALPS DFR723F91A
DSH1 PCB A308461.
+5V (Vcc) +5V (Vcc) +5V common +5V common +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V sense(+) +3.3V sense(-) +3.3V common +3.3V common +12V common
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
TC1+ 1 TC1- 2 S13 3
4 Wall boxed header
PS/P2-3 PS/P2-1 PS/P2-2 PS/P2-4 PS/P2-5 PS/P2-6 PS/P2-7 n.c.
PS/P1-1 PS/P1-9 PS/P1-2 PS/P1-10 PS/P1-3 PS/P1-4 PS/P1-5 PS/P1-8 PS/P1-6 PS/P1-7 PS/P1-12 PS/P1-11
S21
Decurl temp
Dual Row 10 pos.
1 I2C_SDA 2 I2C_SCL 3 Thermistor 4+ 4 Analog GND 5 Thermistor 3+ 6 Analog GND 7 Thermistor 2+ 8 Analog GND 9 Thermistor 1+ 10 Analog GND
R3 4k7
service port CON_P16
P7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RX TX GND
5VGND
A321697. KEY4 PCB PTTPKEY4++C

F
TH POWER OUT
GND GND
A322520. CABLED DC-motor

14,5V Pancake 3000 rpm
StegMann encoder CDD50 Mates with receptacle Berg (Dupont) DUBOX 16 pos.
P10
PRO1/P5-1 PRO1/P5-2 PRO1/P5-3 PRO1/P5-4 PRO1/P5-5 PRO1/P5-6 PRO1/P5-7 PRO1/P5-8
High Speed serial Data connector female
FIRE WIRE
Firewire FW_VP Firewire FW_TPBFirewire FW_TPB+ Firewire FW_TPAFirewire FW_TPA+
LED ------D10 VCC D11 SMP D12 DLD D13 CFD D14 DCL D15 LD1 D16 STR D17 CD2 D18 CD1 D19 LMP D20 TST D21 CNT D22 V33 Status ------off on flashing off on flashing off on off on off on flashing on/off off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on
TH DATA
TH positioning
AMP Sub-D 9 pos. straight header, fem.
VCC
DC Japan Servo DME34B36G-205 Mates with Cap housing connector AMP EI series 2 pos.
M4
red black 1 2
A302850. Floppy Drive 3.5" IDE
P1
1 2
DS1-01 DS1-02
P2
Molex 5557 series Mini-Fit Jr. receptacle housing 2 pos.
G
M8 S7
1 +5V MEB1/P23-12 2 GND MEB1/P23-10 3 OUT MEB1/P23-11
Omron EE-SX4009-P1 Mates with receptacle
FW_VP GND FW_TPBFW_TPB+ FW_TPAFW_TPA+ shield shield
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8VGND
Function -------------------------------------------------------------------selftest failed selftest ok selftest busy decurl temp off decurl temp on, temperature is not within window sampling ADC rocan bus idle rocan bus busy, object received gear ratio sensor S8 not home gear ratio sensor S8 home. Will be activate for at least 5 sec. DSP<->592 communication idle DSP<->592 communication busy. Must flash at least 5 times a sec. Optical encoder running, channel B. Optical encoder not running, channel B. PWM-signal drum motor is 0% STROBE PWM-signal heater decurl unit. 0% PWM-signal heater decurl unit. Led intensity is modulated. +5V failure +5V supply voltage present +8V failure densitometer lamp intensity status. Intensity is modulated. +12V failure TEST LED -12V failure -12V supply voltage present +24V failure +24V supply voltage present no function no function
Right Angle 6pos.
1 2
MEB - DSH CABLE
A321178.
MEB1/P15-11 M8-3 M8-2 MEB1/P15-12 MEB1/P15-09 M8-7 M8-6 MEB1/P15-10

Oriental 264M-E2.0A Mates with receptacle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MEB1/P14-01 MEB1/P14-02
DS1
A308363. DSH WIRING
DSH1/P2-1 DSH1/P2-2
2 3 4
Molex 5559 series Mini-Fit Jr. Plug housing 2 pos.
H
A301031.
AMP EI 3 pos.
A314566. MDM scan motor
Molex 5240 series 8 pos.
MDM home detection
Pickup take over motor spare fan F3 C3 clutch (spare) spare fan F3 C3 clutch (spare) Film take over motor C4 clutch (spare) C5 clutch (spare) C4 clutch (spare) C5 clutch (spare) Vertical alignment solenoid spare fan F2 Vertical alignment solenoid spare fan F2 Decurl motor
DC Buehler 1.61.065.446 Mates with receptacle AMP EI series 2 pos.
D23 LD0
Board to Board connector Z-PACK 5 Row 110 positions
D15 D16
M6
Mot- 1 Mot+ 2
MEB1/P15-30 MEB1/P15-29
M
+8V
A321696. OMF1 PCB PTTPOMF2++B
off on
V33 failure V33 supply voltage present
3 2 1
+5V MEB1/P23-21 OUT MEB1/P23-20 GND MEB1/P23-19

Aleph OS-5101-type H Mates with receptacle AMP EI 3 pos.
1 2 3 4 5 6
off on
VCC failure VCC supply voltage present
S10
M4-01 M4-02 n.c. S3-02 S3-03 S3-01
A308460. DENSITOMETER ASSY
2 TH_CLOCK2 4 TH_DATA12 6 TH_DATA11 8 TH_DATA10 10 TH_DATA9 12 TH_DATA8 14 TH_DATA7 16 TH_DATA6 18 TH_DATA5 20 TH_DATA4 22 TH_DATA3 24 TH_DATA2 26 TH_DATA1 28 TH_BEO 30 TH_CLOCK1 32 TH_LATCH 34 TH_STROBE2 36 TH_STROBE1 42 TH_DATA17 44 TH_DATA16 46 TH_DATA15 48 TH_DATA14 50 TH_DATA13 38, 40 VCC 1, 3, 5, 7 GND 9, 11, 13 GND 15, 17, 19 GND 21, 23, 25 GND 27, 29, 31 GND 33, 35, 37 GND 39, 41, 43 GND 45, 47, 49 GND
R2 4k7
XS2-01 XS2-02
P15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CON_P15 GND I2C_SDA I2C_SCL M4_1 M4_2 M5_1 M5_2 FAZE B+ FAZE BFAZE A+ FAZE AM7_2 C2_2 M7_1 C2_1 F4_2 F5_2 F4_1 F5_1 M8_2 M9_2 M8_1 M9_1 F3_2 C3_2 F3_1 C3_1 M10_1 M10_2 C4_2 C5_2 C4_1 C5_1 C1_2 F2_2 C1_1 F2_1 M2_1 M2_2
C-Grid III straight header Dual Row 40 pos.
CON_P15
black red
P30
P1 DC-motors
Board to Board connector Z-PACK 5 Row 110 positions
GND
Pickup motor 1 (Upper) Pickup motor 2 (Lower)
LED ------D1 D11 D12
Status ------off on off on off on off on off on
Function --------------------------------+24V failure +24V supply voltage present +12V failure +12V supply voltage present -12V failure -12V supply voltage present +8V failure +8V supply voltage present -8V failure -8V supply voltage present
MDM Scan motor
Output roller motor Horizontal alignment solenoid Output roller motor Horizontal alignment solenoid Decurl fan Edge fan Decurl fan Edge fan M9 motor (spare) Pickup take over motor M9 motor (spare)
P31
P2
D13 D14
A321175. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (FRAME) A307287. Film take over motor
DSH/P1-01 DSH/P1-02 DSH/P1-03 DSH/P1-04 DSH/P1-05 DSH/P1-06 DSH/P1-07 DSH/P1-08 DSH/P1-09 DSH/P1-10
A321182. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (PS-PRO)
S16
+8V GND -8V BMSEL A BMSEL B BISEL A BISEL B BL_CTRL COUNT GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DSH connection
A321175.
P11
MEB/P15-2 MEB/P15-1 n.c. n.c. XS2-01 XS2-02 XS3-01 XS3-02 M8-05 M8-08 M8-01 M8-04 XS4-02 EM2-02 XS4-01 EM2-01 n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. M9-02 n.c. M9-01 n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. M6-01 M6-02 n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. EM1-02 n.c. EM1-01 n.c. M2-01 M2-02
A300280. Pickup motor 1
S5
UPPER PICKUP CABLE
A321404.
S3
XS3-06 XS3-04 XS3-05 +5V 1 GND 2 OUT 3
A301031. Upper magazine closed detection
A301031.
XS2
Upper film magazine empty detection
A302222. Upper preload detection
M5
red black 1 2
XS3-01 XS3-02
MOLEX 90130 series
-8V VOS
Berg DUBOX header Right Angle Single Row 10 pos.
Safety & Switches

GND Decurl exit detection
P9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 GND S24 VOS (+5V) GND S25 VOS (+5V) GND S2 VOS (+5V) GND S28 VOS (+5V) GND S27 VOS (+5V) SW1_2 SW1_1 SW3_2 SW3_1 SW5 SW2 24V safety cicuit VCC GND S13 VOS (+5V)
S4
XS1-08 XS1-07 XS1-06 S16-02 S16-03 S16-01 XS2-04 XS2-05 XS2-06 n.c. n.c. n.c. XS5-01 XS5-02 XS5-03 SW1-8 SW1-4 XS1-05 XS1-04 SW5-1a SW2-8 SW2-7 n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. XS3-06 XS3-04 XS3-05 +5V 1 GND 2 OUT 3
J
MOLEX 5569 series Mini-Fit, Jr. dual row, Right angle header 12 pos. Mates with 5557 series receptacles
ATTENTION: (Remarks on board connectors P9,

V33 VCC Film take over speed detection
S6
LOWER PICKUP CABLE
P1 Power & HD
P2 Control P4 Decurl unit

1 2 55V 55V common XS1-01 XS1-02
S13
3 2 1 +5V MEB1/P23-30 OUT MEB1/P23-29 GND MEB1/P23-28
Power fail+ GND

MOLEX 5566 series Mini-Fit, Jr. vertical header Dual Row 12 pos.
POW_FAIL+ VTH_OUT+ -12V S13 sensor (spare)
S11
M5_1 M5-01 M5_2 M5-02 n.c. GND S4-02 OUT S4-03 +5V S4-01
PS/P3-01 PS/P3-02 PS/P3-03 PS/P3-04 PS/P3-05 PS/P3-06 PS/P3-07 PS/P3-08 PS/P3-09 n.c. PS/P3-11 n.c.
+3,3V +3,3V +3,3V common +3,3V common +5V +5V common +12V -12V +12V/-12V common
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
this pcb (MEB1) may be different

+5V
Cover sheet detection Safety circuit Safety circuit Safety circuit Safety circuit Safety circuit Safety circuit
from designations on other parts connected to this pcb.

VCC
P_24V
A301031. Lower magazine closed detection
A321405.
1 2 3 4 5 6
GND SAFETY_OK
Take over roller passed detection

3,3V sense
Encoders POWER MOTORS

VTH_IN+ SW3_1 VCC
P5 Thermal head
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 +20V +20V common +20V +20V common +20V +20V common +20V +20V common MEB1/P21 MEB1/P22 MEB1/P21 MEB1/P22 MEB1/P21 MEB1/P22 MEB1/P21 MEB1/P22
P_24V
P5
A321184. POWER CABLE (PS-TH) A321176. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (PS-MEB)
PS/P3-13 PS/P3-14 PS/P3-15 PS/P3-16 PS/P3-17 n.c. PS/P3-19 PS/P3-20 PS/P3-21 PS/P3-22 24V interlock relay +24V +24V 24V common 24V common RxD+ RxDTxD+ TxDMOLEX 5566 series Mini-Fit, Jr. vertical header
P13 Sensor interface

VOS Decurl speed detection K0 Drum speed detection K2 K1
A302222. Lower preload detection
VTH_REL
Upper magazine closed detection
Lower magazine closed detection
Feeding roller passed detection
Upper pickup passed detection
RXD TXD
Serial
GND
Lower film magazine empty detection
Upper preload detection
Lower preload detection
Drum passed detection
MDM home detection
Gear ratio adjustment
S12
10...23V
VTH_S
PRO1/P2-01 PRO1/P2-03 PRO1/P2-05 PRO1/P2-06 PRO1/P2-07 PRO1/P2-09 PRO1/P2-10 PRO1/P2-08 PRO1/P2-02 PRO1/P2-04 PRO1/P2-12 PRO1/P2-11 +5V +5V common +3,3V +3,3V +3,3V sense (+) +3,3V common +3,3V common +3,3V sense (-) +5V +5V common +12V +12V common 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
HDD/P1-04 HDD/P1-03 HDD/P1-02 HDD/P1-01 FDD/P1-01 FDD/P1-02
PRO1/P7-02 PRO1/P7-03 PRO1/P7-01 PRO1/P7-04 PRO1/P7-05 PRO1/P7-06 PRO1/P7-07
MOLEX 5569 series Mini-Fit, Jr.
dual row, Right angle header 14 pos.
Mates with 5557 series receptacles
P13, P15, P16 and P23.)

Remote on/off + Remote on/off +5V common Power fail Power reset Power good Shut down
A301031. Film take over speed detection
P4
Power logic
+12V
VOS S19 sensor (spare)
+5V (HD) +5V common (HD) +12V common (HD) +12V (HD) +5V (FDD) +5V common (FDD)
A301031. Lower film magazine empty detection
The signal designations used on
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
XS3
A302222.
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VCC
R1
VCC
4k7
BUTT_D
GND
CON_P13
M
+5V
3 2 1

Dual Row 10 pos.
R156 4k7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
+5V GND K0 GND K2 K1 DEC_ENC GND GND IBUTT_D +5V
S21-04 S21-05 S21-01 n.c. S21-03 S21-02 M2-05 M2-06 n.c. n.c. M2-04 n.c. CON_P13 MEB1/P13-14 GND MEB1/P13-13
MOLEX 90130 series C-Grid III
A321690. DISCHARGE BRUSH
Shindengen tubular solenoid M190-30L assy Mates with receptacle AMP EI 2 pos.
EM1
P14
M1-01 M1-02
Mini-Fit, Jr.
Drum motor
1 2
Drum motor
TH POWER IN
VTH_IN+ CON_P23
GND
straight header Dual Row 14 pos.
P3 Power logic
+24V RET
M1_1 M1_2
MEB1/P15-37 MEB1/P15-35
1 2
MOLEX 5566 series
5...60V
XS3-04 XS3-05 XS3-06 S5-02 S5-03 S5-01 S6-02 S6-03 S6-01 S7-02 S7-03 S7-01 S8-02 S8-03 S8-01 XS5-04 XS5-05 XS5-06 S10-01 S10-02 S10-03 S11-01 S11-02 S11-03 S12-01 S12-02 S12-03 S13-01 S13-02 S13-03 XS4-04 XS4-05 XS4-06 n.c.
S8
A323235. GROUNDING WIRE A323236. GROUNDING WIRE
Connector 10 Pin DIP outline 1 screw terminal
P21
VTH_RET
AMP Power Tap
AMP Power Tap
MOLEX 90130 series
VTH_IN+
P22
GND S4 VOS GND S5 VOS GND S6 VOS GND S7 VOS GND S8 VOS GND S9 VOS GND S10 VOS GND S11 VOS GND S12 VOS GND S26 VOS GND S29 VOS CON_P23
+12V
100..240V 50/60Hz
-12V
Mains 100V...230V 2x 15AF

Ph
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+3,3V +3,3V +3,3V common +3,3V common +5V +5V common +12V -12V +12/-12V common Power fail+ 24V interlock relay 24V 24V 24V common 24V common RxD + RxD TxD + TxD -
MEB1/P4-01 MEB1/P4-02 MEB1/P4-03 MEB1/P4-04 MEB1/P4-05 MEB1/P4-06 MEB1/P4-07 MEB1/P4-08 MEB1/P4-09 n.c. MEB1/P4-11 n.c. MEB1/P5-01 MEB1/P5-02 MEB1/P5-03 MEB1/P5-04 MEB1/P5-05 n.c. MEB1/P5-07 MEB1/P5-08 MEB1/P5-09 MEB1/P5-10 n.c. n.c.
A302222. Drum passed detection
A321695. MEB1 PCB

VTH-RET GND
A301406.
vertical header 2 pos.
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P10
PTTPMEB1++C
P23
MEB1/P9-13 MEB1/P9-14 MEB1/P9-15 MEB1/P23-16 MEB1/P23-17 MEB1/P23-18
XS5
1 2 3 4 5 6 S18-01 S18-02 S18-03 S9-01 S9-02 S9-03
Vertical alignment solenoid
S18
A322947. SENSOR CABLE
XS5-03 XS5-02 XS5-01 +5V 3 OUT 2 GND 1
S9
3 2 1 +5V XS5-06 OUT XS5-05 GND XS5-04
PS/P7-1,3,5,7
PS/P7-2,4,6,8
A302222. Cover sheet detection
A321184. A301031. Gear ratio adjustment sensor POWER CABLE (PS-TH) A321175. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (FRAME)
MEB1/P9-22
A302222. Feeding roller passed detection

SW5-1
earth N
SW5
A301039.
SW2-8 SW2-3
3 7
Do not replace this fuses. Replace power supply instead.
POWER FAILURE DETECTION
+24V
EM2
GROUNDING WIRE
SW1-3
A301039. Safety switch

7
A304605. Decurl jam clearance switch

MEB1/P9-20, SW5-1b SW5-1a SW2-7
Mors 106B98N/N+G016B mates with Size 4.8 x 0.8 FASTON receptacles
1a 1 1b
NAGEZIEN
LT
Braamzijde
MATERIAAL
Safety switch (thermal head)
.
General Circuit Diagram Section 4, Part 2 Diagram 2/4 Maten zonder tolerantie Benaming: Uitvoering volgens lastenboek
-
A321596.
MEB1/P15-16 MEB1/P15-14
1 2
SW1
4 8
SW2
4 8
(top cover)
Cherry F82-A-B120
A318661. POWER SUPPLY ASSY
+3,3V
REF 3895701000
GROUNDING WIRE
A323237.
Magnetek
A301406. Horizontal alignment solenoid
MEB1/P9-17 MEB1/P9-16
Cherry F82-A-B120 mates with Size 6.3 x 0.8 FASTON receptacles
WIRING DIAGRAM
SW1-7 MEB1/P9-21
mates with Size 6.3 x 0.8 FASTON receptacles
Tekening nummer: Artikel nummer: 5363/100 Type
D1006851.4.0
4 3
99-11-03
LT
Drystar 4500 LT 99-06-09
2 with MEB1 board 99-04-26 LT

GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ECO VR 98-11-26 DATUM LT NM
Agfa-Gevaert N.V.
R & O Apparatuur MORTSEL.
Project
5363
1994.12.13
Blad:
1/1

1 STRICTLY PRIVATE Created:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
D1012408.1.0
A302222.
S15
3 2 1 +5V XS1-06 OUT XS1-07 GND XS1-08
Aleph OS-5101-type H
U T P
ENC
A321177. WIRE HARNESS ASSY DECURL DEVICE A303243.
heater heater 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DC-motor met magn. encoder 12 pulsen/omw.
A
M2 (S23)
A324333. PRO2 REV A with 128Mb

P17
Isolation
serial COM port DB25

PORT A
Galvanic Isolation IEC601
XS1
55V PS1/P4-01 55V common PS1/P4-02 sw3-1 sw3-2 +5V OUT GND MEB1/P9-19 MEB1/P9-18 MEB1/P9-03 MEB1/P9-02 MEB1/P9-01
(JAPAN SERVO DME44BM6HF-104) Mates with Cap housing connector AMP EI series 6 pos.
P9
UTP
Exergen IRt/c01 k-120C (Bekab. IR sensor: A306882.1) A303321.
Mates with receptacle AMP EI 3 pos.
A321594. HDD CABLE
SCSI
IR t/c
SW4
A304718. Decurl overheating protection
Elmwood 2455R-100-76/B203 mates with Size 6.3 x 0.8 FASTON receptacles
S17
+12V_DIODE (fused)
QUARTZ HEATING
MOLEX 5557 series Mini-Fit, Jr. Receptacle 8 pos.
PCI Connector
+12V
XS6
XS1-04
SW4-1 SW4-2 S15-03 S15-02 S15-01
A321175.
MOLEX 5559 series Mini-Fit, Jr. Plug 8 pos. with Mounting Ears
1 2 3 4 5 6
motor+ motor+5V OUT S23 GND
M
A304862.
F2
P11
Ethernet
+12V
Decurl temperature sensor

R 270
P
A322808. CABLED IR-TEMP.SENSOR
B
P3 A313332. CABLED FAN
+12V GND 2 1
CPU
Grackle
PCI BUS
CR1 1.25A
P
yellow wire red wire blank wire
1 2 3
TC1+ TC1shielding
MEB1/P19-01 MEB1/P19-02 MEB1/P19-03
CABLED DC-motor 24V +RED. 1/15 A321690. DISCHARGE BRUSH

DC Buehler 1.61.065.446
B
(Bekab.DC-motor red.1/180: A304853) Mates with Cap housing connector
DECURL ASSEMBLY
FireWire
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FW_VP1 FW_GND FW_TPB1FW_TPB1+ FW_TPA1FW_TPA1+ FW_GND FW_GND MEB1/P10-1 MEB1/P10-2 MEB1/P10-3 MEB1/P10-4 MEB1/P10-5 MEB1/P10-6 MEB1/P10-7 MEB1/P10-8
XS1-05
Cap & Receptacle housing connector AMP EI series 3 pos., Cap housing for panel mount
R 268
XS4
MEB1/P15-15 MEB1/P15-15 to frame plate MEB1/P23-31 MEB1/P23-32 MEB1/P23-33 1 2 3 4 5 6 M7-01 M7-02 brush S14-01 S14-02 S14-03
1.25A
DIMM0
DIMM1
M7
Mot+ 1 Mot- 2
S1
DC Japan Servo DME34B36G-205 Mates with Cap housing connector
A321460. TOP COVER CABLE
BOOTER EPLD USB
(MEB)
nopop R 282
400 Mbit/s
A322062. THERMAL HEAD
1 2 3
+5V GND OUT
MEB1/P16-03 MEB1/P16-01 MEB1/P16-02
M3
Mot+ 1 Mot- 2
XS4-01 XS4-02
P6
Floppy connection
Flash PROBOCO FPGA IEEE 1394
MEB1/P16-08 MEB1/P16-07
A304853. Output roller motor
P14
GND
High Speed serial Data connector female Right Angle 6pos.
A304853. TH positioning motor
C
S14
DIL VCC
(LS120)
P15
A301031. TH home position sensor

KYOCERA type KBT-250-20PAG13-AGF EBM Q2G-030-GC 03-01 Mates with receptacle AMP EI series 2 pos.
P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
V33
Accessory Connector
SRAM
TESTPOINT
XS4-06 XS4-05 XS4-04
+5V 3 OUT 2 GND 1
(DISK)
FIRE WIRE CABLE
Eth. PROM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
F1
Mot+ 1 Mot- 2
DC Buehler 1.61.065.441 Mates with Cap housing connector AMP EI series 2 pos.
Aleph OS-5101-type H Mates with receptacle
LED3 LED4 LED5
P16
S2
1 2 3 +5V MEB1/P16-06 GND MEB1/P16-04 OUT MEB1/P16-05
MEB1/P16-10 MEB1/P16-09
M9
Mot- 1 Mot+ 2
AMP EI 3 pos.
FDD CABLE
RESETSWITCH
A321406.
KEYPAD Connection
Super I0 VCC +12V V33
A321186.
A321180. TH POWER CABLE
ABORTING ABORTINO SCL SDA
DISPLAY CABLE
+12V
VCC
Mates with
1 2 3 4 +12V +5V
IBM DCAS-34330W
P2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+12V
P7
+5V common Remot on/off+ Remot on/offPower fail Power reset Power good Shut down GND
S1-02 S1-03 S1-01 S2-02 S2-03 S2-01 M3-02 M3-01 F1-02 F1-01 n.c. n.c. CON_P16 MEB/P16-14 GND MEB/P16-13
P4
4 Wall boxed header
A321185.
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
GND PORTB_TX PORTB_RX NKEY_CONNECT VCC VCC REMOTE_BRAKED REMOTE_ONOFF NREMOTE_TURNOFF +12V NKEYPAD_RESET GND +12V GND
A318779.
MEB1/P15-22 MEB1/P15-24
A302222. Upper pickup passed detection
WIRE HARNESS ASSY
CABLED CROSS FLOW FAN 24V 100M3/H
TH SENSOR CABLE
(TH-SUSPENSION)
A000000. Pickup take over motor
A321181.
A321179.
TS DATA CABLE
NPower_Shutdown
A301031. TH print position sensor
A321183.
Remote_OnOff -
Remote_OnOff +
NPower_Reset
NPower_Good
P2
PRO1/P19-01 PRO1/P19-02 PRO1/P19-03 PRO1/P19-04 PRO1/P19-05 PRO1/P19-06 PRO1/P19-07 PRO1/P19-08 PRO1/P19-09 PRO1/P19-10 PRO1/P19-11 PRO1/P19-12 PRO1/P19-13 PRO1/P19-14
Mates with
GND_SENSE
V33_SENSE
NPower_Fail
MOLEX 6410 series Straight Square Pin
JST SDN connector .156" pitch board-in
GND S1 VOS GND S3 VOS M3_2 M3_1 F1_2 F1_1
P19
A321992. Encoder 4096 pulsen/omw.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GND R S T K0 K2 K1 N.C. +5V R S T K0 K2 K1 N.C. MEB1/P13-02 N.C. N.C. N.C. MEB1/P13-03 MEB1/P13-05 MEB1/P13-06 N.C. MEB1/P13-01 N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
Friction Loch Header 3 pos. DIN 41651
P6
DIN 41651 4-wall boxed straight header Dual Row 10 pos. right angle
P2
4-wall boxed header
P3
1 VTH_OUT+
crimp style 10 pos. (to be soldered.)
P16
VOS
A322065. HARD DISK 9.1GB U2SCSI 68P
VCC
GND RxD TxD /KD_connect +5V +5V remote on/off remote on/off /Turn_on/off +12V /KD_reset GND IO1 spare IO2 spare
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0000000 00000 000
Decurl temp. sensor
ENC
F
M1
1 2 3 4 +5V
TH home position
sensor
TH positioning motor
Thermal Head fan
VTH-RET
TH print position
SONY MPF520-1/131 ALPS DFR723F91A
DSH1 PCB A308461.
+5V (Vcc) +5V (Vcc) +5V common +5V common +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V sense(+) +3.3V sense(-) +3.3V common +3.3V common +12V common
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
TC1+ 1 TC1- 2 S13 3
4 Wall boxed header
PS/P2-3 PS/P2-1 PS/P2-2 PS/P2-4 PS/P2-5 PS/P2-6 PS/P2-7 n.c.
PS/P1-1 PS/P1-9 PS/P1-2 PS/P1-10 PS/P1-3 PS/P1-4 PS/P1-5 PS/P1-8 PS/P1-6 PS/P1-7 PS/P1-12 PS/P1-11
S21
Decurl temp
Dual Row 50 pos.
1 I2C_SDA 2 I2C_SCL 3 Thermistor 4+ 4 Analog GND 5 Thermistor 3+ 6 Analog GND 7 Thermistor 2+ 8 Analog GND 9 Thermistor 1+ 10 Analog GND
R3 4k7
service port CON_P16
P7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RX TX GND
5VGND
A321697. KEY4 PCB PTTPKEY4++C

F
TH DATA
2 TH_CLOCK2 4 TH_DATA12 6 TH_DATA11 8 TH_DATA10 10 TH_DATA9 12 TH_DATA8 14 TH_DATA7 16 TH_DATA6 18 TH_DATA5 20 TH_DATA4 22 TH_DATA3 24 TH_DATA2 26 TH_DATA1 28 TH_BEO 30 TH_CLOCK1 32 TH_LATCH 34 TH_STROBE2 36 TH_STROBE1 42 TH_DATA17 44 TH_DATA16 46 TH_DATA15 48 TH_DATA14 50 TH_DATA13 38, 40 VCC 1, 3, 5, 7 GND 9, 11, 13 GND 15, 17, 19 GND 21, 23, 25 GND 27, 29, 31 GND 33, 35, 37 GND 39, 41, 43 GND 45, 47, 49 GND
TH POWER OUT
GND GND
A322520. CABLED DC-motor

14,5V Pancake 3000 rpm
TH positioning
AMP Sub-D 9 pos. straight header, fem.

VCC
StegMann encoder CDD50 Mates with receptacle Berg (Dupont) DUBOX 16 pos.
P110
PRO1/P5-1 PRO1/P5-2 PRO1/P5-3 PRO1/P5-4 PRO1/P5-5 PRO1/P5-6 PRO1/P5-7 PRO1/P5-8
High Speed serial Data connector female
8VGND
FIRE WIRE
Firewire FW_VP Firewire FW_TPBFirewire FW_TPB+ Firewire FW_TPAFirewire FW_TPA+
M4
red black 1 2
A302850. Floppy Drive 3.5" IDE
P1
1 2
DS1-01 DS1-02
P2
Molex 5557 series Mini-Fit Jr. receptacle housing 2 pos.
G
M8 S7
Omron EE-SX4009-P1 Mates with receptacle
FW_VP GND FW_TPBFW_TPB+ FW_TPAFW_TPA+ shield shield
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
R2 4k7
XS2-01 XS2-02
P15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CON_P15 GND I2C_SDA I2C_SCL M4_1 M4_2 M5_1 M5_2 FAZE B+ FAZE BFAZE A+ FAZE AM7_2 C2_2 M7_1 C2_1 F4_2 F5_2 F4_1 F5_1 M8_2 M9_2 M8_1 M9_1 F3_2 C3_2 F3_1 C3_1 M10_1 M10_2 C4_2 C5_2 C4_1 C5_1 C1_2 F2_2 C1_1 F2_1 M2_1 M2_2
C-Grid III
CON_P15
GND
black red
Pickup motor 1 (Upper) Pickup motor 2 (Lower)
Right Angle 6pos.
On board LED status:

( * all green colored LED's) LED ------D1 LIF D12 APP D15 STR D8 DRV D7 CFD color ------yellow yellow yellow yellow red off on flashing on/off off on no TH STROBE TH STROBE Optical encoder running Optical encoder not running FPGA configuration ok FPGA configuration failure D5 * D6 * D4 * D3 * Status ------flashing off Function -------------------------------------operation system alive operation system not alive no function LED ------D14 * D13 * Status ------off on off on off on off on off on off on off on Function -----------------------------------VCC failure VCC (+5V) supply voltage present V33 failure V33 (+3,3V) supply voltage present +24V failure +24V supply voltage present +12V failure +12V supply voltage present -12V failure -12V supply voltage present +8V failure +8V supply voltage present -8V failure -8V supply voltage present
1 2
DC-motors
MEB - DSH CABLE
A321178.
MEB1/P15-11 M8-3 M8-2 MEB1/P15-12 MEB1/P15-09 M8-7 M8-6 MEB1/P15-10

Oriental 264M-E2.0A Mates with receptacle
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MEB1/P14-01 MEB1/P14-02
DS1
A308363. DSH WIRING
DSH1/P2-1 DSH1/P2-2
MDM Scan motor
2 3 4
Output roller motor Horizontal alignment solenoid Output roller motor Horizontal alignment solenoid Decurl fan Edge fan Decurl fan Edge fan M9 motor (spare) Pickup take over motor M9 motor (spare) Pickup take over motor spare fan F3 C3 clutch (spare) spare fan F3 C3 clutch (spare) Film take over motor C4 clutch (spare) C5 clutch (spare) C4 clutch (spare) C5 clutch (spare) Vertical alignment solenoid spare fan F2 Vertical alignment solenoid spare fan F2
Molex 5559 series Mini-Fit Jr. Plug housing 2 pos.
H
A301031.
AMP EI 3 pos.
A314566. MDM scan motor
Molex 5240 series 8 pos.
MDM home detection
DC Buehler 1.61.065.446 Mates with receptacle AMP EI series 2 pos.
S10
M4-01 M4-02 n.c. S3-02 S3-03 S3-01
A308460. DENSITOMETER ASSY

M6
Mot- 1 Mot+ 2
D2 *
MEB1/P15-30 MEB1/P15-29
M
+8V
A321175. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (FRAME) A307287. Film take over motor
DSH/P1-01 DSH/P1-02 DSH/P1-03 DSH/P1-04 DSH/P1-05 DSH/P1-06 DSH/P1-07 DSH/P1-08 DSH/P1-09 DSH/P1-10
A321182. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (PS-PRO)
S16
+8V GND -8V BMSEL A BMSEL B BISEL A BISEL B BL_CTRL COUNT GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DSH connection
Jumper settings for J1: open:
-8V
A321175.
P11
J1
Decurl motor
MEB/P15-2 MEB/P15-1 n.c. n.c. XS2-01 XS2-02 XS3-01 XS3-02 M8-05 M8-08 M8-01 M8-04 XS4-02 EM2-02 XS4-01 EM2-01 n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. M9-02 n.c. M9-01 n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. M6-01 M6-02 n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. EM1-02 n.c. EM1-01 n.c. M2-01 M2-02
S5
UPPER PICKUP CABLE
A321404.
S3
XS3-06 XS3-04 XS3-05 +5V 1 GND 2 OUT 3
A301031. Upper magazine closed detection
A301031.
XS2
1 2 3 4 5 6
A302222. Upper preload detection
M5
red black 1 2
XS3-01 XS3-02
MOLEX 90130 series straight header Dual Row 40 pos.

VOS
boot from on board Flash
closed: boot from external Eeprom
Berg DUBOX header Right Angle Single Row 10 pos.

GND
Safety & Switches

P9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 GND S24 VOS (+5V) GND S25 VOS (+5V) GND S2 VOS (+5V) GND S28 VOS (+5V) GND S27 VOS (+5V) SW1_2 SW1_1 SW3_2 SW3_1 SW5 SW2 24V safety cicuit VCC GND S13 VOS (+5V)
S4
XS1-08 XS1-07 XS1-06 S16-02 S16-03 S16-01 XS2-04 XS2-05 XS2-06 n.c. n.c. n.c. XS5-01 XS5-02 XS5-03 SW1-8 SW1-4 XS1-05 XS1-04 SW5-1a SW2-8 SW2-7 n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. XS3-06 XS3-04 XS3-05 +5V 1 GND 2 OUT 3
J
ATTENTION: (Remarks on board connectors P9,

V33 VCC Film take over speed detection
S6
LOWER PICKUP CABLE
P1 Power & HD
P2 Control P4 Decurl unit

1 2 55V 55V common XS1-01 XS1-02
S13
Power fail+ GND

MOLEX 5566 series Mini-Fit, Jr. vertical header Dual Row 12 pos.
POW_FAIL+ VTH_OUT+ -12V S13 sensor (spare)
S11
M5_1 M5-01 M5_2 M5-02 n.c. GND S4-02 OUT S4-03 +5V S4-01
PS/P3-01 PS/P3-02 PS/P3-03 PS/P3-04 PS/P3-05 PS/P3-06 PS/P3-07 PS/P3-08 PS/P3-09 n.c. PS/P3-11 n.c.
+3,3V +3,3V +3,3V common +3,3V common +5V +5V common +12V -12V +12V/-12V common
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
this pcb (MEB2) may be different

+5V
Cover sheet detection Safety circuit Safety circuit Safety circuit Safety circuit Safety circuit Safety circuit
from designations on other parts connected to this pcb.

VCC
P_24V
A301031. Lower magazine closed detection
A321405.
1 2 3 4 5 6
GND SAFETY_OK

3,3V sense
Encoders POWER MOTORS

VTH_IN+ SW3_1 VCC
P5 Thermal head
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 +20V +20V common +20V +20V common +20V +20V common +20V +20V common MEB1/P21 MEB1/P22 MEB1/P21 MEB1/P22 MEB1/P21 MEB1/P22 MEB1/P21 MEB1/P22
P_24V
P5
A321184. POWER CABLE (PS-TH) A321176. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (PS-MEB)
PS/P3-13 PS/P3-14 PS/P3-15 PS/P3-16 PS/P3-17 n.c. PS/P3-19 PS/P3-20 PS/P3-21 PS/P3-22 24V interlock relay +24V +24V 24V common 24V common RxD+ RxDTxD+ TxDMOLEX 5566 series Mini-Fit, Jr. vertical header
GND
P13 Sensor interface

VOS Decurl speed detection K0 Drum speed detection K2 K1
A302222. Lower preload detection
VTH_REL
Upper magazine closed detection
Lower magazine closed detection
Feeding roller passed detection
Upper pickup passed detection
RXD TXD
Serial
GND
Lower film magazine empty detection
Upper preload detection
Lower preload detection
Drum passed detection
MDM home detection
Gear ratio adjustment
S12
10...23V
VTH_S
PRO1/P2-01 PRO1/P2-03 PRO1/P2-05 PRO1/P2-06 PRO1/P2-07 PRO1/P2-09 PRO1/P2-10 PRO1/P2-08 PRO1/P2-02 PRO1/P2-04 PRO1/P2-12 PRO1/P2-11 +5V +5V common +3,3V +3,3V +3,3V sense (+) +3,3V common +3,3V common +3,3V sense (-) +5V +5V common +12V +12V common 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
HDD/P1-04 HDD/P1-03 HDD/P1-02 HDD/P1-01 FDD/P1-01 FDD/P1-02
PRO1/P7-02 PRO1/P7-03 PRO1/P7-01 PRO1/P7-04 PRO1/P7-05 PRO1/P7-06 PRO1/P7-07
MOLEX 5569 series Mini-Fit, Jr.
dual row, Right angle header 14 pos.
Mates with 5557 series receptacles
P13, P15, P16 and P23.)

Remote on/off + Remote on/off +5V common Power fail Power reset Power good Shut down
A301031. Film take over speed detection
P4
Power logic
+12V
VOS S19 sensor (spare)
+5V (HD) +5V common (HD) +12V common (HD) +12V (HD) +5V (FDD) +5V common (FDD)
A301031. Lower film magazine empty detection
The signal designations used on
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
XS3
A302222.
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VCC
R1
VCC
4k7
BUTT_D
CON_P13
M
+5V
3 2 1

Dual Row 10 pos.
R156 4k7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
+5V GND K0 GND K2 K1 DEC_ENC GND GND IBUTT_D +5V
S21-04 S21-05 S21-01 n.c. S21-03 S21-02 M2-05 M2-06 n.c. n.c. M2-04 n.c. CON_P13 MEB1/P13-14 GND MEB1/P13-13
MOLEX 90130 series C-Grid III
A321690. DISCHARGE BRUSH
EM1
P14
M1-01 M1-02
Mini-Fit, Jr.
Drum motor
1 2
Drum motor
TH POWER IN
VTH_IN+ CON_P23
GND
straight header Dual Row 14 pos.
P3 Power logic
+24V RET
M1_1 M1_2
MEB1/P15-37 MEB1/P15-35
1 2
MOLEX 5566 series
5...60V
XS3-04 XS3-05 XS3-06 S5-02 S5-03 S5-01 S6-02 S6-03 S6-01 S7-02 S7-03 S7-01 S8-02 S8-03 S8-01 XS5-04 XS5-05 XS5-06 S10-01 S10-02 S10-03 S11-01 S11-02 S11-03 S12-01 S12-02 S12-03 S13-01 S13-02 S13-03 XS4-04 XS4-05 XS4-06 n.c.
S8
A323235. GROUNDING WIRE A323236. GROUNDING WIRE
P21
VTH_RET
AMP Power Tap
AMP Power Tap
MOLEX 90130 series
VTH_IN+
P22
GND S4 VOS GND S5 VOS GND S6 VOS GND S7 VOS GND S8 VOS GND S9 VOS GND S10 VOS GND S11 VOS GND S12 VOS GND S26 VOS GND S29 VOS CON_P23
+12V
100..240V 50/60Hz
-12V
Mains 100V...230V 2x 15AF

Ph
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
+3,3V +3,3V +3,3V common +3,3V common +5V +5V common +12V -12V +12/-12V common Power fail+ 24V interlock relay 24V 24V 24V common 24V common RxD + RxD TxD + TxD -
MEB1/P4-01 MEB1/P4-02 MEB1/P4-03 MEB1/P4-04 MEB1/P4-05 MEB1/P4-06 MEB1/P4-07 MEB1/P4-08 MEB1/P4-09 n.c. MEB1/P4-11 n.c. MEB1/P5-01 MEB1/P5-02 MEB1/P5-03 MEB1/P5-04 MEB1/P5-05 n.c. MEB1/P5-07 MEB1/P5-08 MEB1/P5-09 MEB1/P5-10 n.c. n.c.
A301406.
VTH-RET GND
A302222. Drum passed detection
vertical header 2 pos.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
P10
A000000. MEB2 PCB

P23
MEB1/P9-13 MEB1/P9-14 MEB1/P9-15 MEB1/P23-16 MEB1/P23-17 MEB1/P23-18
XS5
1 2 3 4 5 6 S18-01 S18-02 S18-03 S9-01 S9-02 S9-03
Vertical alignment solenoid
S18
A322947. SENSOR CABLE
XS5-03 XS5-02 XS5-01 +5V 3 OUT 2 GND 1
S9
3 2 1 +5V XS5-06 OUT XS5-05 GND XS5-04
PS/P7-1,3,5,7
PS/P7-2,4,6,8
A302222. Cover sheet detection
A321184. A301031. Gear ratio adjustment sensor POWER CABLE (PS-TH) A321175. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (FRAME)
MEB1/P9-22
A302222. Feeding roller passed detection

SW5-1
earth N
SW5
A301039.
SW2-8 SW2-3
3 7
Do not replace this fuses. Replace power supply instead.
POWER FAILURE DETECTION
+24V
EM2
GROUNDING WIRE
SW1-3
A301039. Safety switch

7
A304605. Decurl jam clearance switch

MEB1/P9-20, SW5-1b SW5-1a SW2-7
Mors 106B98N/N+G016B mates with Size 4.8 x 0.8 FASTON receptacles
1a 1 1b
NAGEZIEN
LT
Braamzijde
MATERIAAL
Safety switch (thermal head)
.
General Circuit Diagram Section 4, Part 2 Diagram 3/4 Maten zonder tolerantie Benaming: Uitvoering volgens lastenboek
-
A321596.
MEB1/P15-16 MEB1/P15-14
1 2
SW1
4 8
SW2
4 8
(top cover)
Cherry F82-A-B120
A318661. POWER SUPPLY ASSY
+3,3V
REF 3895701000
GROUNDING WIRE
A323237.
Magnetek
A301406. Horizontal alignment solenoid
MEB1/P9-17 MEB1/P9-16
Cherry F82-A-B120 mates with Size 6.3 x 0.8 FASTON receptacles
WIRING DIAGRAM
SW1-7
mates with Size 6.3 x 0.8 FASTON receptacles
MEB1/P9-21
P
Drystar 4500 / 4500 M with MEB2 board
GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ECO VR 00-08-25 DATUM LT NM
Tekening nummer:
D1012408.1.0
ArtikelType 5363 / 100/110 nummer:
Agfa-Gevaert N.V.
R & O Apparatuur MORTSEL. Project STRICTLY PRIVATE Created:
5363
1994.12.13
Blad:
1/1
Spare Parts List

Document No: DD+DIS281.05M
Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500M

Type 5363/0100/0110
Internal update: 6
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE: Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 2, Revision 5 12-2008 printed in Germany
Document Node ID: 17516126 spare_parts_e_template_v07
Copyright 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V. Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH Tegernseer Landstrae 161 D - 81539 Mnchen Germany Copyright 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V. All rights reserved. Technical modifications reserved. AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING: Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries. INSTRUCTION: (1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document (see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the equipment. (2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on the product.
WARNING: Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation. INSTRUCTION: Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts. Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure. Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com
NOTE: To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the Document Type Order List in the GSO library.
Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500M Type 5363/0100/0110
Chapter 5 / 2
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
Document History
Edition, Revision 2.5 Release Date 12-2008 Changes compared to previous version 2.4 Index of Spare Parts Numbers updated. New Spare Parts assembly CRIUS PCB + RAM (ROHS) added. Refer to: Electronic Section.
Contact
Spare Parts ordering Europe Overseas orderprocessing-europe.matrium@eads.com orderprocessing-overseas.matrium@eads.com
Spare Parts returns Worldwide returns.matrium@eads.com
NOTE: For Recycling Information please refer to: http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf
Chapter 5 / 3
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
Contents
VERKLEIDUNG PANELING REVTEMENT OBERES VERKLEIDUNGSTEIL TOP PANELING PART PIECE DE CAPOT EN HAUT E-EINSCHUB ELECTRONIC SECTION TIROIR LECTRIQUE PRINTMODUL - THERMODRUCKKOPF PRINT MODULE - THERMAL HEAD MODULE DIMPRESSION - TTE THERMIQUE SEITENANSICHT LINKS SIDE VIEW, LHS VUE DE CTE A GAUCHE SEITENANSICHT RECHTS SIDE VIEW, RHS VUE DE CTE A DROITE TROMMEL (SCHREIBWALZE) DRUM TAMBOUR ENTKRMMUNGSEINHEIT DECURL UNIT UNIT DE LISSAGE DENSITOMETER DENSITOMETER DENSITOMETRE FILMMAGAZIN FILM MAGAZINE ASSY CHARGEUR DE FILM ANZEIGEABDECKUNG DISPLAY COVER CACHE CRAN FILMAUSRICHTUNG FILM ALIGNMENT ALIGNEMENT FILM FILMBERGABE FILM TRANSFERT TRANSFERT DE FILM
PAGES 06 - 07
PAGES 08 - 09
PAGES 10 - 13
PAGES 14 - 15
PAGES 16 - 17
PAGES 18 - 19
PAGES 20 - 21
PAGES 22 - 23
PAGES 24 - 25
PAGES 26 - 27
PAGES 28 - 29
PAGES 30 - 31
PAGES 32 - 33
5363_CHAP05_INDEX.CDR
Chapter 5 / 4
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
How to navigate the spare parts list online with the Acrobat Reader
(1) (2) Open Bookmarks Click on "CONTENTS"
(3) (4)
See overview of the modules Click on requested module
(5)
Appropriate page opens
(6)
Click on green arrow to navigate back to the overview of the modules
Chapter 5 / 5
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
01*
04
08* 02*
09 (SW2)
10 (S13)
07* 05 04 06* 05 03*

5363_CHAP05_01.CDR
PANELING
Chapter 5 / 6
DD+DIS281.05M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Item no. Part No. Pos. no. Nr. de Ref.
1 CM+3260444 *
Spare Parts List

Benennung Description Denomination
VERKLEIDUNGSTEIL OBEN TOP COVER ASSY ENSEMBLE CAPOT SUPERIEUR VERKLEIDUNGSTEIL HINTEN REAR COVER CAPOT ARRIERE SEITENVERKLEIDUNG RECHTS SIDE COVER RIGHT CAPOT LATERAL DROIT HINTERRDER (2X) MIT BEFESTIGUNGSKLAMMERN REAR WHEELS (2X) WITH MOUNTING CLIPS ROUE ARRIERE (2X) AVEC CLIPS DE MONTAGE VORDERRDER (2X) FRONT WHEELS (2X) ROUE AVANT (2X) * FRONTABDECKUNG UNTEN LOWER FRONT COVER CAPOT SUPERIEUR INFERIEUR FRONTABDECKUNG OBEN UPPER FRONT COVER CAPOT SUPERIEUR FRONTAL SEITENVERKLEIDUNG LINKS SIDE COVER LEFT CAPOT LATERAL GAUCHE TR, DECKELSCHALTER - (SW2) CASSETTE UNIT SAFETY SWITCH - (SW2) PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE - (SW2) FILMSENSOR (ROHS) - (S13) FILM SENSOR (ROHS) - (S13) DETECTEUR FILM (ROHS) - (S13) DRYSTAR 4500 SOFTWARE REL. 2.00 UPGRADE DRYSTAR 4500 SOFTWARE REL. 2.00 UPGRADE DRYSTAR 4500 SOFTWARE REL. 2.00 UPGRADE TESTADAPTER FR RS232 UND ETHERNET ETHERNET AND RS232 LOOPBACK CONNECTOR ADAPTATEUR POUR TEST POUR RS232 ET ETHERNET SET VON KLEINTEILEN SPARE PARTS SMALL COMPONENTS LOT DE PETITES PIECES
CM+3260450
CM+3260431
CM+3260420
CM+3260410
CM+3260390
CM+3260380
CM+3260401
CM+9042663040
10
CM+3097371
99
CM+3418920
99
CM+3399770
99
CM+3099162
=Assembly D =Standard part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standard parts "DD+DIS011.93M" * =No wearing part.
PANELING
Chapter 5 / 7
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
01*
02
03 (M7) 05 04 (S14)
5363_CHAP05_02.CDR
TOP PANELING PART

Chapter 5 / 8
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3260444 *
Spare Parts List

VERKLEIDUNGSTEIL OBEN TOP COVER ASSY ENSEMBLE CAPOT SUPERIEUR GASDRUCKSTOSSDMPFER, SATZ GAS LIFTERS SET JEU RESSORT PNEUMATIQUE ANTRIEBSMOTOR FILMTRANSPORT - (M7) MOTOR FILM TRANSPORT - (M7) MOTEUR TRANSPORT DU FILM - (M7) FILMSENSOR (ROHS) - (S14) FILM SENSOR (ROHS) - (S14) DETECTEUR FILM (ROHS) - (S14) ENTLADUNGSBRSTE DISCHARGE BRUSH BROSSES DE DECHARGEMENT
CM+3260370
CM+3097540
CM+3097371
CM+3260190
TOP PANELING PART

Chapter 5 / 9
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
01
08
02
03
Proteus board is deliverted from factory TYPE 5363/100 - UP TO SN1794 09 TYPE 5363/110 - UP TO SN1734
05
07
06 (F2)
04 PROTEUS 3 (SW Version 2.XX)
10
To get the A-Sharp Functionality you have to replace PROTEUS 3 PCB for Crius 5 PCB and additional Support Plate Pos. 9 page 12
5363_CHAP05_03.CDR
ELECTRONIC SECTION (SW VERSION 2.XX)

Chapter 5 / 10
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3260291
Spare Parts List

FLACHBANDKABEL FESTPLATTE - CPU (P19) RIBBON CABLE HDD - CPU (P19) CABLE RUBAN DISQUE DUR - CPU (P19) FLACHBANDKABEL DISKETTENLAUFWERK - CPU (P6) RIBBON CABLE FLOPPY - CPU (P6) CABLE RUBAN LECTEUR DISQUETTE - CPU (P6) FLACHBANDKABEL KEY4 BOARD - CPU (P4) RIBBON CABLE KEY4 - CPU (P4) CABLE RUBAN KEY4 - CPU (P4) CPU-BOARD - (PROTEUS 3) CPU PCB - (PROTEUS 3) CI CPU - (PROTEUS 3) KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS) KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS) KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS) LFTER FR CPU (ROHS) - (F2) FAN ASSY FOR CPU (ROHS) - (F2) VENTILATEUR POUR CPU (ROHS) - (F2) FIREWIRE KABEL, 1,83M FIREWIRE CABLE, 1,83M CABLE FIREWIRE, 1,83M FESTPLATTE 73GB (ROHS) HARDDISK 73GB (ROHS) DISQUE DUR 73GB (ROHS) FLOPPY DRIVE + DATA CABLE FLOPPY DRIVE + DATA CABLE FLOPPY DRIVE + DATA CABLE NETZTEIL POWER SUPPLY BLOC SECTEUR
CM+3260280
CM+3260270
CM+3260530
CM+3460393
CM+3259991
CM+3260021
CM+3260513
CM+3613570
10
CM+3260001

Chapter 5 / 11
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
01
10
02
03
Proteus board is deliverted from factory TYPE 5363/100 - AS OF SN1795 TYPE 5363/110 - AS OF SN1735 11
06
09
07
04 CRIUS4 (SW Version 3.XX)
08 (F2)
12
05
04 CRIUS5 (SW Version 3.XX)
5363_CHAP05_04.CDR

Chapter 5 / 12
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3260291
Spare Parts List

FLACHBANDKABEL FESTPLATTE - CPU (P19) RIBBON CABLE HDD - CPU (P19) CABLE RUBAN DISQUE DUR - CPU (P19) FLACHBANDKABEL DISKETTENLAUFWERK - CPU (P6) RIBBON CABLE FLOPPY - CPU (P6) CABLE RUBAN LECTEUR DISQUETTE - CPU (P6) FLACHBANDKABEL KEY4 BOARD - CPU (P4) RIBBON CABLE KEY4 - CPU (P4) CABLE RUBAN KEY4 - CPU (P4) CRIUS5 PCB + RAM (ROHS) CRIUS5 PCB + RAM (ROHS) CRIUS5 PCB + RAM (ROHS) CRIUS4 PCB + RAM CRIUS4 PCB + RAM CRIUS4 PCB + RAM AUSTAUSCHBARE KNOPFZELLEN BATTERIE REPLACEMENT COIN CELL BATTERY PILLE BOUTON CHANGEABLE KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS) KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS) KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS) FIREWIRE KABEL, 1,83M FIREWIRE CABLE, 1,83M CABLE FIREWIRE, 1,83M LFTER FR CPU (ROHS) - (F2) FAN ASSY FOR CPU (ROHS) - (F2) VENTILATEUR POUR CPU (ROHS) - (F2) TRAEGERPLATTE FR CRIUS CPU SUPPORT PLATE FOR CRIUS CPU PLAQUE DE SUPPORT POUR CRIUS CPU FESTPLATTE 73GB (ROHS) HARDDISK 73GB (ROHS) DISQUE DUR 73GB (ROHS) FLOPPY DRIVE + DATA CABLE FLOPPY DRIVE + DATA CABLE FLOPPY DRIVE + DATA CABLE NETZTEIL POWER SUPPLY BLOC SECTEUR
CM+3260280
CM+3260270
CM+3589101
CM+3492621
CM+3632100
CM+3460393
CM+3260021
CM+3259991
CM+3632090
10
CM+3260513
11
CM+3613570
12
CM+3260001

Chapter 5 / 13
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
01 (TH)
05 02 04 03 (MEB2)
06 (M3)
08 (S1, S2)
07 (F1)
5363_CHAP05_05.CDR
PRINT MODULE - THERMAL HEAD

Chapter 5 / 14
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3260500
Spare Parts List

THERMODRUCKKOPF - (TH) THERMAL HEAD - (TH) TETE THERMIQUE - (TH) MEB2 BOARD - (MEB2) MEB2 PCB - (MEB2) MEB2 CI - (MEB2) FIREWIRE KABEL, 1,83M FIREWIRE CABLE, 1,83M CABLE FIREWIRE, 1,83M FLACHBANDKABEL MEB BOARD - TH (P6) RIBBON CABLE TH - MEB (P6) CABLE RUBAN TT. TH. MEB (P6) FLACHBANDKABEL MEB BOARD - TH (P12) RIBBON CABLE TH - MEB (P12) CABLE RUBAN TT. TH. MEB (P12) FILMAUFNAHMEMOTOR - (M3) FILM PICKUP MOTOR - (M3) MOTEUR TRANSFERT DU FILM - (M3) LFTER FR TH - (F1) FAN FOR TH - (F1) VENTILATEUR POUR TH - (F1) LICHTSCHRANKE (ROHS) - (S1, S2) LIGHT BARRIER (ROHS) - (S1, S2) PHOTO CELLULE (ROHS) - (S1, S2) EXT. SPRING SET EXT. SPRING SET EXT. SPRING SET REINIGUNGSTCHER CLEANING TISSUES DES SERVIETTES DESINTOXIQUES
CM+3260019
CM+3260021
CM+3260260
CM+3260300
CM+3098782
CM+3260150
CM+3097911
CM+3632110
99
CM+3099310
PRINT MODULE - THERMAL HEAD

Chapter 5 / 15
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
04 (SW2) 03 (SW5)
05
01 (S5,S6)
02 (S12)
07
06
5363_CHAP05_06.cdr
SIDE VIEW, LHS

Chapter 5 / 16
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3097911
Spare Parts List

LICHTSCHRANKE (ROHS) - (S5, S6) LIGHT BARRIER (ROHS) - (S5, S6) PHOTO CELLULE (ROHS) - (S5, S6) FILMSENSOR (ROHS) - (S12) FILM SENSOR (ROHS) - (S12) DETECTEUR FILM (ROHS) - (S12) SCHALTER - (SW5) SWITCH - (SW5) INTERRUPTEUR - (SW5) TR, DECKELSCHALTER - (SW2) CASSETTE UNIT SAFETY SWITCH - (SW2) PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE - (SW2) LEITBLECH OBEN GUIDE PLATE TOP TOLE DE GUIDAGE EN HAUT DENSITOMETEREINHEIT DENSITOMETER ASSEMBLY ENSEMBLE DENSITOMETRE HALOGENLAMPE (ROHS) HALOGEN LAMP (ROHS) LAMPE HALOGENE (ROHS)
CM+3097371
EB+53580300
CM+9042663040
CM+3260471
CM+3260034
CM+3099451
SIDE VIEW, LHS

Chapter 5 / 17
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
02
03 (M1) 04
06 (S8) 07 (S10, S11)
05*
01
5363_CHAP05_07.CDR
SIDE VIEW, RHS

Chapter 5 / 18
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3097831
Spare Parts List

ZAHNRIEMEN DRUCKWALZE (ROHS) TOOTHED BELT FOR DRUM (ROHS) COURROIE CRANTEE POUR TAMBOUR (ROHS) TROMMELMOTOR DRUM MOTOR ASSEMBLY ENSEMBLE MOTEUR DU TAMBOUR WALZENMOTOR (ROHS) - (M1) DRUM MOTOR (ROHS) - (M1) MOTEUR DU CYLINDRE (ROHS) - (M1) FLACHRIEMEN DRUCKWALZE (440X15MM) (ROHS) FLAT BELT (440X15MM) FOR DRUM (ROHS) COURROIE PLATE POUR TAMBOUR (ROHS) * FLACHRIEMENSCHEIBE DISK TO DRIVE DRUM DISQUE COMMANDE COURROIE PLATE LICHTSCHRANKE (ROHS) - (S8) LIGHT BARRIER (ROHS) - (S8) PHOTO CELLULE (ROHS) - (S8) FILMSENSOR (ROHS) - (S10, S11) FILM SENSOR (ROHS) - (S10, S11) DETECTEUR FILM (ROHS) - (S10, S11)
CM+3260202
CM+3260212
CM+3097821
CM+3097700
CM+3097911
CM+3097371
SIDE VIEW, RHS

Chapter 5 / 19
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
02*
03 02*
01
5363_CHAP05_08.cdr
DRUM
Chapter 5 / 20
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3260170
Spare Parts List

WALZE (SCHREIBWALZE) DRUM CYLINDRE * LAGERSATZ FR TROMMEL SET DRUM BEARINGS JEU DE PALIERS POUR TAMBOUR ENTLADUNGSBRSTE DISCHARGE BRUSH BROSSES DE DECHARGEMENT
CM+3260180
CM+3260190
DRUM
Chapter 5 / 21
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
08
06
07*
01
05 (S15)
04 (S17)
02
03 (M2)
5363_CHAP05_09.cdr
DECURL UNIT
Chapter 5 / 22
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3260247
Spare Parts List

ENTKRMMUNGSEINHEIT DECURL UNIT UNITE DE LISSAGE HEIZSTAB FR ENTKRMMUNG HEATING ELEMENT FOR DECURL UNIT ELEMENT DE CHAUFFAGE POUR UNITE DE LISSAGE GLEICHSTROMMOTOR FR DECURL UNIT (ROHS) - (M2,S23) DC MOTOR FOR DECURL UNIT (ROHS) - (M2,S23) MOTEUR DE L'UNITE DE LISSAGE (ROHS) - (M2,S23) INFRAROT-TEMPERATURSENSOR, ENTKRMMUNG - (S17) IR-TEMP. SENSOR, DECURL UNIT - (S17) THERMORUPTEUR IR - UNITE DE LISSAGE - (S17) FILMSENSOR (ROHS) - (S15) FILM SENSOR (ROHS) - (S15) DETECTEUR FILM (ROHS) - (S15) ZAHNRIEMEN FR ANTRIEB ENTKRMMUNG TOOTHED BELT FOR DECURL UNIT COURROIE CRANTEE POUR UNITE DE LISSAGE * ANTRIEBSMECHANISMUS ENTKRMMUNG DRIVING MECHANISM DECURL UNIT MECANISME DE COMMANDE UNITE DE LISSAGE FILMUMLENKUNG FILM REVERSAL UNIT ENSEMBLE RETOURNEMENT DU FILM
CM+3260310
CM+3098083
CM+3260250
CM+3097371
CM+3260230
CM+3260225
CM+3260333
DECURL UNIT
Chapter 5 / 23
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
01
02 (S7)
03
5363_CHAP05_10.cdr
DENSITOMETER
Chapter 5 / 24
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3260034
Spare Parts List

DENSITOMETEREINHEIT DENSITOMETER ASSEMBLY ENSEMBLE DENSITOMETRE LICHTSCHRANKE (ROHS) - (S7) LIGHT BARRIER (ROHS) - (S7) PHOTO CELLULE (ROHS) - (S7) HALOGENLAMPE (ROHS) HALOGEN LAMP (ROHS) LAMPE HALOGENE (ROHS)
CM+3097911
CM+3099451
DENSITOMETER
Chapter 5 / 25
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
01
02 (S9,S18) 06
04 03
08* 07 (S3,S4) 05 (M5)
09
10*
11
5363_CHAP05_11.CDR
FILM LOADING ASSY

Chapter 5 / 26
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3260480 *
Spare Parts List

ZWISCHENPLATTE VOLLSTNDIG INTERMEDIATE PLATE ASSY PLAQUE D'ECARTEMENT COMPL. FILMSENSOR (ROHS) - (S9, S18) FILM SENSOR (ROHS) - (S9, S18) DETECTEUR FILM (ROHS) - (S9, S18) FILMEINGABE FILM INPUT ASSY ENSEMBLE ENTREE FILM FILMAUFNAHME FILM PICKUP ASSEMBLY ENSEMBLE TRANSFERT FILM FILMAUFNAHMEMOTOR - (M5) FILM PICKUP MOTOR - (M5) MOTEUR TRANSFERT DU FILM - (M5) ANZEIGEABDECKUNG DISPLAY COVER ASSEMBLY ENSEMBLE CAPOT ECRAN LICHTSCHRANKE (ROHS) - (S3, S4) LIGHT BARRIER (ROHS) - (S3, S4) PHOTO CELLULE (ROHS) - (S3, S4) * FILMEINGABE OBEN (MAGAZIN) UPPER FILM LOADING ASSY INTRODUCTION FILM SUPERIEUR LAUFSCHIENENSATZ FR FILMMAGAZIN SET GUIDE RAILS JEU RAILS DE GUIDAGE * FILMEINGABE UNTEN (MAGAZIN) LOWER FILM LOADING ASSY ENSEMBLE CHARGEMENT INFERIEUR DU FILM FILMANSCHLAG FILM FORMAT STOP BUTEE DE FILM
CM+3097371
CM+3260466
CM+3260086
CM+3098782
CM+3260138
CM+3097911
CM+3260075
CM+3260060
10
CM+3260095
11
CM+3260100
FILM LOADING ASSY

Chapter 5 / 27
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
01
05
02 (KEY4)
03 (M4)
04*
5363_CHAP05_12.cdr
DISPLAY COVER
Chapter 5 / 28
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3260138
Spare Parts List

ANZEIGEABDECKUNG DISPLAY COVER ASSEMBLY ENSEMBLE CAPOT ECRAN KEY4-BOARD - (KEY4) KEY4 PCB - (KEY4) TOUCHE 4 CI - (KEY4) FILMAUFNAHMEMOTOR - (M4) FILM PICKUP MOTOR - (M4) MOTEUR TRANSFERT DU FILM - (M4) * FOLIENTASTATUR MEMBRANE KEYPAD CLAVIER TACTILE FILMAUFNAHME FILM PICKUP ASSEMBLY ENSEMBLE TRANSFERT FILM
CM+3260042
CM+3098782
CM+3260051
CM+3260086
DISPLAY COVER
Chapter 5 / 29
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
05
04 (EM2)
02 (M9)
01 (EM1)
03*
5363_CHAP05_13.CDR
FILM ALIGNMENT
Chapter 5 / 30
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3097432
Spare Parts List

ELEKTROMAGNET (ROHS) - (EM1) SOLENOID (ROHS) - (EM1) ELECTROAIMANT (ROHS) - (EM1) BAUGRUPPE ROLLENANTRIEB BERGABE - (M9) TRANSFER ROLLER DRIVE ASSY - (M9) TRANSFER ROLLER DRIVE ASSY - (M9) * VERTIKALE FILMAUSRICHTUNG VERTICAL ALIGNMENT ASSY ENSEMBLE ALIGNEMENT VERTICAL HORIZONTALE FILMAUSRICHTUNG - (EM2) HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT ASSY - (EM2) ENSEMBLE ALIGNEMENT HORIZONTAL - (EM2) FILMEINZUGSWALZEN INPUT FEEDING ROLLER GALET CHARGEMENT ENTREE
CM+3578380
CM+3260112
CM+3260123
CM+3260340
FILM ALIGNMENT
Chapter 5 / 31
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
01
03
02 (M6)
04 (S16)
5363_CHAP05_14.CDR
FILM TRANSFERT
Chapter 5 / 32
DD+DIS281.05M
1 CM+3260321
Spare Parts List

OBERE FILMBERGABE UPPER HANDOVER ASSY ENSEMBLE TRANSFERT FILM SUPERIEUR UNTERE FILMBERGABE - (M6) LOWER HANDOVER ASSY - (M6) ENSEMBLE TRANSFERT FILM INFERIEUR - (M6) FILMTRANSPORTROLLEN HANDOVER FEEDING ROLLER GALET CHARGEMENT TRANSFERT LICHTSCHRANKE (ROHS) - (S16) LIGHT BARRIER (ROHS) - (S16) PHOTO CELLULE (ROHS) - (S16)
CM+3260353
CM+3260360
CM+3097911
FILM TRANSFERT
Chapter 5 / 33
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
Spare Parts Kit Categories

R 'Repair' Parts required to repair a machine Kit `R` should be part of the field service engineers` car stock. Quantity covers requirements for ca. 10 machines. Adapt quantity locally depending on: I 'Installation' number of machines extension of the service area local service structure (centralized / decentralized) stockpiling
Parts required to install a machine Kit `I`should be available as case stock. Includes all parts to perform the installation (does not comprise parts included in the shipment). Quantity covers one single machine installation.
M 'Maintenance'
Parts required to maintain a machine Kit `M` should be available as case stock. Includes all parts required to perform a maintenance according to the maintenance checklist. Quantity covers one single maintenance. Extremely expensive or bulky parts Kit `L` should be part of the local central warehouse. Determine quantity depending on costs and on the installed base.
'Local stock'
Spare Parts Kit Order numbers

Order number CM+053630100731 CM+053630100733 CM+053630100734 Spare Part Kit DRYSTAR 4500 Sortiment R DRYSTAR 4500 Sortiment M DRYSTAR 4500 Sortiment L version 6 5 6
Chapter 5 / 34
DD+DIS281.05M
Spare Parts List
Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s): Device Name
DRYSTAR 5500 DRYSTAR 4500 M
Type No.
5364/0100 5363/0110
Specification
100-240V AC/ 50/60Hz LJ7W3
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available: Accessory
SW-REL. 3.0 FOR DS4500 CR/DR SW-REL. 3.0 FOR DS4500 MAMMO PS POSTSCRIPT KIT
Order number
ERAZK ERA1M EJPY8
Chapter 5 / 35
DD+DIS112.05E
Field Modifications
List of Contents
Edition Revision Order Number 2 2 0 2 DD+DIS185.03E DD+DIS112.05E
Contents Modification instruction 'Drystar 4500 Software Rel. 2.00 Upgrade' Modification instruction 'Drystar 4500 Software Rel. 3.0.0_C1 Upgrade'
Chapter 7
HEALTHCARE
Imaging >
Field Modifications
*1V3OXF1*
1 Piece V3OXF MA1

Type Typ 5363 / 100/110
Drystar 4500 Software Rel. 2.00 Upgrade

This modification instruction is also enclosed to the modification kit.
Following conditions have to be fulfilled to install SW Rel. 2.00: Drystar 4500 printers with serial number SN1142 require the installation of the "Modification Kit II" (New Trays), order number CM+3260490 Drystar 4500 type 5363/100 (CR/DR printers) require 'DT 1B' or 'TM 1 C NEW' films. Drystar 4500 type 5363/110 (Mammo printers) require 'Drystar Mammo', 'DT 1B' or 'TM 1 C NEW' films.
Necessary time: approx. 2 h
Necessary tools: Service PC with RS232 cable Calibrated Densitometer*
*It is required to use a X-Rite 331 or 341 densitometer with the 2 mm diaphragm in front of the sensor installed.
printed in Germany 05 / 2004 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS185.03E
List of Contents 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7
Introduction ............................................................... 3
Main benefits ........................................................................... 3 Scope of Delivery .................................................................... 3 Required time .......................................................................... 5 Printer Software / Hardware precondition............................. 5 Required film ........................................................................... 5 Tool requirements ................................................................... 5 Task Code ................................................................................ 5
2
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
Preparation ................................................................ 6
Print-out of SMPTE test image ............................................... 6 Check of Status of the Printer ................................................ 6 Collection of the Printer Settings........................................... 7 Storage of Host Profile Parameters ....................................... 8 Backup of Machine specific data ........................................... 9
3 4
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
SW Upgrade rel. 1.9X to 2.00.................................. 10 Finalization of the upgrade..................................... 11

Insertion of new films............................................................ 11 Settings Check ...................................................................... 11 Density Reproduction Check ............................................... 11 Prints of connected modalities ............................................ 13 Backup of Machine Specific Data ........................................ 13
5 6
6.1
6.1.1 6.1.2
History of new features, improvements and solved problems since SW release 1.94............................ 14 Appendix:................................................................. 17
Connection to the Web Pages .............................................. 17
Adaptation of the PC IP address .......................................................18 Usage of the web pages at SW Release 1.9X ..................................19
6.2
6.2.1
Emergency SW Rel. 2 Installation Procedure ..................... 20

Setup of the HyperTerminal...............................................................21
Chapter 7 / 2
Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type Typ 5363 / 100/110)
DD+DIS185.03E
Introduction
Drystar 4500 software release 2 is a mandatory upgrade as it contains many improvements, and is even required for the new film types DT 1B and TM1 C NEW. It supports both CR (type 5363/100) and Mammo printers (type 5363/110).
This document describes all required actions for SW upgrade as well as an emergency procedure in case something goes wrong during SW upgrade.
1.1
Main benefits
Improved performance, which means faster access and higher throughput for CR / DR printers (type 5363/100) Support of the new film types DT 1B and TM1 C NEW Supports different models and configurations of the Drystar 4500 printers like CR/DR, Mammo, old and new mechanics and Helios protocol. Postscript protocol needs to be installed by a separate dataset (floppy) Support of multiple languages, which can be installed from floppy disk Improved User Interface on the local keypad Improved service functionality Complete list see section 5
1.2
Scope of Delivery
Part Floppies with SW Rel. 2.0 Recovery Backup Tool Floppy with 3 Excel sheets for Density reproduction check Disk Format Floppy Installation Instructions DD+DIS096.03E Film stickers for the new film types Amount Purpose 12 1 1 Contain application software Patch for SW Rel. 1.9X to guarantee a complete backup. Density reproduction check (to check, whether a MDM calibration is required) Only required for 'SW installation emergency procedure' Instruction Display the installed film type
1 1 2
Chapter 7 / 3
DD+DIS185.03E
EALTH ARE
Imaging >
Enclosure
Drystar 4500 Software Rel. 2.0 Upgrade
TM1 C NEW TM1 C NEW DT 1 B DT 1 B
Drystar 4500 Drystar 4500 MG3000 Drystar 4500 MG3000 Drystar 4500 Release 2.0 MG3000 Drystar 4500 Release 2.0 MG3000 Drystar 4500 Release 2.0 MG3000 Drystar 4500 Release 2.0 MG3000 Floppy 1/12 Drystar 4500 Release 2.0 MG3000 Floppy 1/12 Drystar 4500 Release 2.0 MG3000 Floppy 1/12 Drystar 4500 Release 2.0 MG3000 Floppy 1/12 Drystar 4500 Release 2.0 MG3000 Floppy 1/12 Drystar 4500 Release 2.0 MG3000 Floppy 1/12 Release 2.0 MG3000 Floppy 1/12 Release 2.0 Floppy 1/12 Release 2.0 Floppy 1/12 Floppy 1/12 Floppy 1/12 Floppy 1/12
536307BY.CDR
Drystar 4500 MG3000 Recovery Backup Tool 1/1
Drystar 4500 MG3000 DISK Format Floppy 1/1
Drystar 4500 MG3000 Density Reproduction Check 1/1
Figure 1: Scope of Delivery
Chapter 7 / 4
DD+DIS185.03E
1.3
Required time
approx. 2 h
1.4
Printer Software / Hardware precondition

Drystar 4500 printers with serial number SN1142 require the installation of the "Modification Kit II" (New Trays), order number CM+3260490 The SW upgrade can be performed at any Drystar 4500 SW 1.9X (earlier software versions were not customer released).
1.5
Required film
Drystar 4500: Drystar 4500M: DT 1 B' and /or 'TM 1 C NEW' Drystar Mammo film, also possible 'DT 1 B' and /or 'TM 1 C New' if printer is used in a mixed printing environment (both Mammo and Non-Mammo modalities).
1.6
Tool requirements
Service PC with serial RS232 cable Calibrated Densitometer* *It is required to use an X-Rite 331 or 341 densitometer with the 2 mm diaphragm in front of the sensor installed.
1.7
Task Code
Recommended task code in the repair report: PMV (Preventive Maintenance Visit)
Chapter 7 / 5
DD+DIS185.03E
Preparation
The preparation is split up in following main tasks: # 1 2 3 4 5 Tasks Print-out of SMPTE test image Check of Status of the Printer Collection of the Printer Settings Storage of Host Profile Parameters Backup of Machine specific data Refer to 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
The steps mentioned here as 'Preparation' are just made for safety reasons. At a successful software installation the image quality stays the same and all configuration data are still present.
2.1
How?
Print-out of SMPTE test image

(1) In the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate 4 Print test image 7 SMPTE.tif' to print a SMPTE test image. (2) Keep the image as reference for comparison with an SMPTE test image after the software upgrade.
2.2
Check of Status of the Printer

Check the current status of the printer. Write down following parameters: Parameter How to find Value .................................
Active warnings /errors Display on the local keypad. Refer to note next page. Printer type Printer serial number Mechanical status Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 1 General Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 1 General Modification Kit II installed*
................................. ................................. yes no
*Modification Kit I is a mandatory prerequisite. To check whether Modification Kit II is installed, check the film input tray: If it can be pressed down horizontally, Modification Kit II is installed.
Modification Kit II installed
Modification Kit II not installed
5363enaa.cdr
Chapter 7 / 6
DD+DIS185.03E
In case the printer is not operational due to a software problem (e.g. hangs with display message 'wait self test proceeding') the upgrade can be done nevertheless with the emergency procedure. Refer to the Appendix in section 6.2.
2.3
Collection of the Printer Settings

Collect following printer settings and write them down in the table enclosed: Parameter AE-TITLE HOSTNAME DOMAIN IP-ADDRESS SH IP ADDRESS NETMASK ROUTER How to find Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 3 Network DICOM Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 3 Network DICOM Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 3 Network DICOM Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 3 Network DICOM Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 3 Network DICOM Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 3 Network DICOM Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 3 Network DICOM Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 2 Input tray Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 2 Input tray Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 2 Input tray Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 2 Input tray Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 2 Input tray Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality Value ................................. ................................. ................................. ................................. ................................. ................................. .................................
FILM TYPE upper tray FILM VIEW upper tray FILM TYPE lower tray FILM FORMAT lower tray FILM VIEW lower tray Automatic Calibration on/off
................................. .................................
................................. ................................. .................................
.................................
Chapter 7 / 7
DD+DIS185.03E
(Nick)Name (Modality 1) Look-up table Interpolation Max. density
Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality Key-operator menu - 1 Show settings - 4 Image Quality
................................. ................................. ................................. .................................
................................. ................................. ................................. .................................
................................. ................................. ................................. .................................
2.4
Storage of Host Profile Parameters

(1) Connect to the web pages of the printer. For more information how to connect to the web pages refer to the Appendix, section 6.1. (2) Select 'Connectivity tools (3) Check for availability of host profiles: Select every single host profile and press the 'View/Edit' button. (4) Save the corresponding page on the service PC. (5) Repeat this for every single host profile. In case data go lost during the upgrade, the saved host profile pages can be opened on the service PC and the different parameters can be entered manually.
Chapter 7 / 8
DD+DIS185.03E
2.5
Backup of Machine specific data

(1) Get the Printhead floppy. Refer to Figure 2. (2) Check whether the Printhead floppy is readable on the PC. If yes, make a copy of the data on the service PC for safety reasons.
2 1
5363encc.cdr
Figure 2 (3) Insert the Recovery Backup floppy (4) Switch the printer off/on. (5) The printer boots with the recovery backup floppy and writes a few files to the hard disk (this is a patch to make the following backup complete). At the end following text is displayed:
Recovery MG3000 Backup
BACK-UP RECOVERY: SUCCESSFULLY executed REMOVE floppy, POWER OFF/ON and make new BACK-UP floppy
1/1
5363encd.cdr
(6) Power off/on the printer
Figure 3
(7) In the Service Menu on the local keypad select '3 Save Data - 2 Machine Specific data' and follow the further instructions on the display.
Chapter 7 / 9
DD+DIS185.03E
Logos (i.e. TIF files to be printed on the header or footer of the film) which may be available on the printer hard disk drive C:\ or C:\logos are not part of the backup, but on the other hand they are also not deleted during SW upgrade. Just to be totally sure not to loose the logos during software upgrade, store them on a floppy drive before SW upgrade.
SW Upgrade rel. 1.9X to 2.00

(1) In the Service Menu on the local keypad select '5 Install from Floppy. 1 Software. (2) Follow the further instructions on the keypad. Note: The printer will make several resets during software installation. After all floppies are loaded it takes approx. 15 minutes until the printer is operational again.
During first reboot of the installation procedure (after all floppies are copied to the hard disk), the integrity of the copied data is checked. In case of an irregularity, the display will indicate the first corrupt floppy. If this happens proceed as follows: (1) Switch off/on the printer. The printer will reboot. The previous installed software will be back again. (2) Make a new version of the corrupt floppy (Software is available on MEDNET, GSO library 'Hardcopy - DS4500 - Freeware'. Use a brand new floppy from good quality. In some cases the floppy will have to be made on another PC floppy drive. (3) Retry the software installation. Important remark: DO NOT SHUTDOWN the printer during software installation (flashing of the MEB, KEY, Protheus board!) The actual upgrade from SW release 1.9X to SW rel. 2 can be split up in following steps: # 1 Action Loading of Floppies Comment Integrity check of the software is made after installation of the last floppy. In case data are not complete, the SW installation has to be restarted, preferably with new floppies(s). Machine specific data are stored in RAM during formatting In case of power failure during re-formatting, risk to loose machine specific data
Automatic reformatting of the hard disk
Chapter 7 / 10
DD+DIS185.03E
Automatic conversion Release 2.00 contains different data format than of machine specific release 1.9X. data to R 2.00 format In case of power failure during conversion, risk to loose machine specific data Automatic flashing of In case of power failure during flashing, board is firmware in Protheus unusable. CPU, KEY and MEB board
In case the software upgrade was not successful, e.g. printer is hanging with message 'Wait selftest proceeding, you can retry the software installation with the emergency upgrade procedure. Refer to the Appendix section 6.2.
Finalization of the upgrade

The finalization of the upgrade is split up in following main tasks: # 1 2 3 4 4 Tasks Insert new films 'DT 1B' or 'TM 1 C NEW' (if not already done earlier) Check settings Perform density reproduction check Print films from connected modalities Perform backup of Machine Specific Data Refer to 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
4.1
Insertion of new films

(1) If not already done earlier, insert the new films 'DT 1B' or 'TM 1 C NEW''. (2) In the Key-operator menu '2 Change settings - 2 Upper Tray and/or 3 Lower Tray' adjust the appropriate film type and film format. (3) Put the appropriate film sticker (part of delivery) on the film input tray.
4.2
Settings Check
(1) Compare the collection of printer settings (refer to section 2.3) with the actual values. (2) Correct if required
4.3
Density Reproduction Check

A calibrated densitometer X-Rite 331 or 341* is required
*Other densitometers than X-Rite 331 or 341 would require recalculation With the density reproduction check the difference for a specific film type Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type Typ 5363 / 100/110) Chapter 7 / 11
Background
DD+DIS185.03E
Information
between optical density defined in the sensitometric calibration file and the printed optical density, measured with an external densitometer is checked. This procedure must be carried out with every used film type:
How?
(1) Perform a film calibration (Service menu: 8 Adjust & Calibrate - 3 Calibrate - 1 Film Calibration). (2) Print out test image SMPTE.tif and measure the density of the eleven 100 % 0% squares with a calibrated X-Rite 331 or 341 densitometer. (3) To check linearity fill in measured values in the corresponding Excel file: for film type DT1B use DT1B.xls or for film type DT1C (TM1 C NEW) use DT1C.xls for film type DT1B use Mammo.xls These Excel files are on the 'Density Reproduction Check' floppy. (4) After the measured values are filled in, the density reproduction is calculated automatically. (5) At the right hand side of the table is shown, if the Density Reproduction is ok or not. In case it is not ok you are requested to carry out a MDM calibration. Refer to Technical Documentation chapter 3.6.
Figure 4
Chapter 7 / 12
DD+DIS185.03E
4.4
Prints of connected modalities

(1) Print out a test image from every connected modality (2) Check the image quality regarding contrast and sharpness
4.5
Backup of Machine Specific Data

Chapter 7 / 13
DD+DIS185.03E
History of new features, improvements and solved problems since SW release 1.94
Features and improvements of SW-Rel. 2.00 compared to SW version 1.95
Improved performance, which means faster access and higher throughput for CR / DR printers (type 5363/100):
Software release: Film format Transmission: Processing: Printing: Access time: Throughput: [inch] [sec.] [sec.] [min.sec.] [min.sec.] films SW-Rel. 1.94 C 8 x 10 3" 30" 1' 47" 2' 20" 66 10 x 12 4" 46" 2' 10" 3' 00" 46 SW-Rel. 2.00 C 8 x 10 2" 11" 1' 26" 1' 39" 86 10 x 12 2" 17" 1' 40" 1' 59" 66
Support of the new film types DT 1B and TM1 C NEW Supports different models and configurations of the Drystar 4500 printers like CR/DR, Mammo, old and new mechanics and Helios protocol. Postscript protocol needs to be installed by a separate dataset (floppy) Support of multiple languages, which can be installed from floppy disk Improved User Interface on the local keypad: o More realistic progress bar o New wizard to add modalities o New wizard for TH calibration, which includes now a new registration calibration o Configuration of modality specific image quality settings like Dmax, interpolation, and look-up table possible o Content of the floppy disks are checked (integrity check) during installation o Additional SMPTE test image SMPTE_LS to print in landscape Improved service functionality like: Remote access fully implemented with new browser pages Service alert mailing now possible New wizard for TH profile calibration and drum position adjustment Installation of new software (from SW-Rel.2.00 on) via browser and integrated ftp program possible o More realistic progress bar o o o o
Chapter 7 / 14
DD+DIS185.03E
Restrictions and remarks

Downgrading of the MEB/Proteus is not fully supported. Integrity of the software when upgrading from Software Rel. 1.9X to 2.00 is not checked for every floppy, only after the last floppy is loaded it is checked. In case non-integrity is detected (because one floppy was corrupted), the previous installed software can still be reactivated by resetting the printer. During software upgrade from release 1.9X to 2.00 the hard disk is formatted. During this formatting the machine specific data are stored in RAM. In case of a power failure during formatting of the hard disk, the machine specific data are lost. During software upgrade from release 1.9X to 2.00 the KEY, MEB, and Proteus boards are flashed (programmed). In case of a power failure during flashing, the board that was flashed during power failure cannot be used anymore and has to be exchanged. During high workload the local display is updated slowly and reaction upon pressing keys may be slow.
Chapter 7 / 15
DD+DIS185.03E
Known problems:
Selecting the 'CubicBell' interpolation via the DICOM print message is currently not possible. The value range 200 299 for the DICOM parameter 'smoothing factor' is not active. Workaround: If CubicBell interpolation is required, a selection via a 'Host Profile' will have to be done (Note: CubicBell interpolation is a parameter in the 'kernel' adjustment of the host profile. To overwrite the setting from the modality, the checkbox before the kernel parameter has to be checked!). Multi-copy print jobs can be disrupted by other print jobs. Not all copies will be printed one by one, but films from other print jobs can disrupt the order. With both trays filled with the 8x10 film type (size and/or media), and the upper tray becomes empty the Drystar 4500(M) uses the lower tray to continue printing. However, if the upper tray is loaded again the Drystar 4500(M) switches immediately to use the film from the upper tray, instead of emptying the lower tray first. For a Drystar 4500M used in a mixed modality environment and both trays configured for the same 8x10 film type (i.e. both for blue based or both for clear based), the films for the non-Mammo modality are always taken from the upper tray (Reason: At an incoming job, the printer just looks for required Dmax (e.g. Dmax = 3.0) and required film type (e.g. blue based). First at the upper, then the lower tray. At the lower tray it is only looking, if the upper does not fulfill the requirements). In case Drystar Mammo film is used in the upper tray, films in the lower tray are never used, except the upper tray is empty. Workaround: Always use the upper tray for 'non-Mammo' film (Dmax 3.10) and the lower tray for 'Mammo' film (Dmax 3.70). Currently the range 10.2.3.0 till 10.2.3.255 of IP addresses cannot be used for the printer. At Siemens modalities, which operate on the so-called Syngo platform, the connectivity between the Drystar 4500 and the Siemens modality experiences problems when negotiating the Meta Color Print SOP class: Printer destination becomes unreachable after the first print job sent from the modality. Workaround: To resolve this problem with Siemens (Syngo based) modalities deselect the BASIC_COLOR_PM_META_SOP_CLASS in that DICOM host profile, which was prepared specifically for this Siemens (Syngo based) modality.
Chapter 7 / 16
DD+DIS185.03E
Appendix:
The Appendix contains following additional explanations: Topic How to connect to the Drystar 4500 web pages How to adapt the PC IP address How to use the web pages for SW rel. 1 .9X How to load the software rel. 2 via emergency procedure How to connect to the PC to the printer via via serial cable Refer to 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.2 6.2.1
6.1
USAGE
Connection to the Web Pages

(1) Connect the Service PC to the Printer network (2) Start the browser (Netscape 4.X or Internet Explorer 4) (3) Enter the IP address of the printer in the address window. In case the printer homepage is not displayed, refer to 6.1.1 "Adaptation of the PC IP address" next page.
Service PC
53
DR A.C 1A 631
53
63 32 aa .c
dr
Figure 5 As an alternative, if it is not possible to put the Service PC into the hospital network: (1) use a crossed network UTP cable to connect the network interface of the Service PC directly with the network interface of the printer. (2) Start the browser (Netscape 4.X or Internet Explorer 4 or 5) (3) Enter the IP address of the printer in the address window. In case the printer homepage is not displayed, refer to 6.1.1 "Adaptation of the PC IP address" next page.
Printer Service PC
536311dp.cdr

536332ad.cdr
Figure 6
Chapter 7 / 17
DD+DIS185.03E
6.1.1
Adaptation of the PC IP address To connect the printer and the Service PC via network, usually the IP address of the Service PC has to be adapted. Basic rules: Case 1: The service PC is part of the hospital network. (1) Get the IP address and possibly the subnet mask* for the Service PC from the hospital network administrator. In case the hospital network administrator wants to have the Service PC working only in a subnet, get from him the netmask (also called subnet mask). (2) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 7 to Figure 10. Case 2: The service PC is not part of the hospital network, but connected via crossed UTP network cable to the printer. (1) Look up the printer IP address and subnet mask in the printer key operator menu "show settings - Network". (2) Define an IP address for the Service PC by adding or subtracting "1" to the last digit of the IP address. Example: Printer IP address = 10.6.5.121 Service PC address = 10.6.5.122 or 10.6.5.120 (3) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 7 to Figure 10.
Figure 7 *Default Subnet Masks (set for NO subnetting) Class A B C Chapter 7 / 18 First 3 digits of IP 0......127 128......191 192.......254
Figure 8
subnet mask 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0 Edition 2, Revision 0 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS185.03E
Figure 9 6.1.2 Usage of the web pages at SW Release 1.9X
Figure 10
(1) Enter the IP address of the printer in the address window. In case the printer homepage is not displayed, refer to 6.1.1 "Adaptation of the PC IP address" previous page. (2) Select "Connectivity Tools" (3) Enter user name and password (mega / adonis)
Figure 11
Chapter 7 / 19
DD+DIS185.03E
6.2
Emergency SW Rel. 2 Installation Procedure

The Emergency SW Rel. 2 Installation Procedure only has to be performed, in case the 'normal' software upgrade is out of any reason not possible (e.g. printer hanging in display 'wait selftest proceeding')
Important remark: The emergency upgrade procedure requires a formatting of the hard disk. The printer in this case is only fully operational, if an up-to-date backup is available. Check whether the backup floppy is readable before starting the emergency software rel. 2 installation procedure. In case the backup floppy is lost or not readable, contact your GSC (Global Support Center) for further support. (1) Connect the Service PC to the printer as displayed in Figure 12. Refer to note below. (2) Start the HyperTerminal as displayed in section 6.2.1, Setup of the HyperTerminal. (3) Press <Enter>. Now the Printer login appears. (4) Insert the 'Hard disk format' floppy (part of delivery) in the printer floppy drive and switch off/on the printer (5) Confirm the question about formatting of the hard disk with 'y' (for yes)
Printer Service PC
536311dp.cdr
536332ae.cdr
Figure 12 It is also possible to perform the emergency software rel. 2 installation procedure without connection of the service PC. All required actions of the wizard are also displayed at the local display. The display on the service PC however shows more information what happens internally. (6) When the printer is finished with formatting, insert floppy 1 of the application floppy set and reboot the printer (7) Follow the further instructions on the printer or the PC display respectively. (8) When the software installation is finished, perform a restore of the machine specific data (Service Menu: 5 Install data - 2 machine specific data ) (9) Continue with the steps as described in section 4, Finalization of the upgrade. Chapter 7 / 20 Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type Typ 5363 / 100/110) Edition 2, Revision 0 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS185.03E
6.2.1
Setup of the HyperTerminal The hyper terminal setup as displayed here can be used for all AGFA devices. Instead of the HyperTerminal following other programs can be recommended to connect to terminal level: 1) xt. xt.exe is an AGFA program, which is part of the IMOS package. It can be started in a DOS box by typing "xt" 2) IMOS Start Menu. The IMOS Start Menu software has a terminal built in. Select "tools terminal". Depending on the configuration of IMOS Start, either a DOS box with xt will be opened or a Hyper terminal window will pop-up. (1) To start the setup of the HyperTerminal, go to "Programs - Accessories HyperTerminal - HyperTerminal"
Figure 14
Chapter 7 / 21
DD+DIS185.03E
-
9600 Bps 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit flow control Xon/Xoff
(5) Select "OK"
Figure 16
Chapter 7 / 22
HEALTHCARE
Imaging >
Field Modifications
*1YQ81G1*
1 Piece YQ81G MA1

Type Typ 5363 / 100/110
Drystar 4500 Software Rel. 3.0.0_C1 Upgrade

This modification instruction is also enclosed to the modification kits Drystar 4500 A#Sharp Kit Release 3.0.0_C1 CM+349529.0 Drystar 4500 M A#Sharp Kit Release 3.0.0_C1 CM+350053.0
Necessary time: Approx. 90 minutes for SW Upgrade via floppies Approx. 75 minutes for SW Upgrade via PC (network) Necessary tools: Socket wrench 7 mm Philips screwdriver medium Flathead scredriver medium 17 new floppies of good quality: Only in case of SW upgrade starting from SW 1.9X Service PC: Only required for conversion of backup at SW upgrade from SW 1.9X to 3.0.0_C1. For SW Upgrade 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1 a PC is only required, if fast SW installation via network is desired
printed in Germany 04 / 2005 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS112.05E
List of Contents 1 Introduction........................................................................................... 4 2 Preparation............................................................................................ 5

2.1 Check of currently installed SW version and AE title .......................................... 5 2.2 Check of configured Interpolation Settings.......................................................... 6 2.3 Print-out of Test Images ......................................................................................... 6 2.4 Backup of Machine specific data........................................................................... 6 2.5 Check whether LPD Profiles are present .............................................................. 6
3 SW Upgrade Rel. 1.9X or 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1 ................................... 7

3.1 SW Upgrade Rel. 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1 via Browser.............................................. 8 3.2 SW Upgrade Rel. 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1 via Floppies ............................................. 9 3.3 Emergency SW Upgrade Rel. 1.9X or 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1 via Floppies .......... 11 3.4 Emergency SW Upgrade Rel. 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1 via batch file ...................... 14
4 Proteus CPU Replacement ................................................................ 17 5 Finalization of the upgrade ................................................................ 22

5.1 Check of AE title ................................................................................................ 22 5.2 LPD Profile Restore .............................................................................................. 23 5.3 Film Calibration for both film magazines............................................................ 23 5.4 Comparison of images before and after SW Upgrade ....................................... 23 5.5 Host Profile Adjustment in case of Connection to CR Mammo QS .................. 25 5.6 Mounting of Label "A#Sharp" .............................................................................. 29 5.7 Customer Instruction............................................................................................ 29 5.8 Backup of Machine Specific Data ........................................................................ 29
6 History of new features and improvements since SW release 2.00_C1 ................................................................................................ 30

6.1 New Features for the Operator............................................................................. 30 6.2 New Features concerning Service....................................................................... 31 6.3 New Features concerning Connectivity .............................................................. 32 6.4 Improvements concerning Reliability ................................................................. 33 6.5 Improvements concerning Image Quality........................................................... 34
7 Appendix: ............................................................................................ 35
7.1 Connection to the Web Pages.............................................................................. 35 7.2 Adaptation of the PC IP address.......................................................................... 36 7.3 Setup of the HyperTerminal ................................................................................. 38
Chapter 7 / 2
DD+DIS112.05E
Subject
Drystar 4500 Software 3.0.0_C1 Upgrade

Scope of delivery: 1 Proteus Replacement Kit consisting of - 1 Mounting plate - 1 Crius IV CPU - 8 plastic screws M3 - 2 hexagon head screws M3 1 CD ROM with SW rel. 3.0.0 (Software can be installed from CD ROM or has to be copied on floppies) 1 Installation Instruction 1 User manual (English edition) 1 Reference manual (only available in English) 1 Label "A#Sharp" 1 Label "A#Sharp" mounting instruction
Required tools: Socket wrench 7 mm Philips screwdriver medium Flathead scredriver medium 17 new floppies of good quality: Only in case of SW upgrade starting from SW 1.9X Service PC: Only required for conversion of backup at SW upgrade from SW 1.9X to 3.0.0_C1. For SW Upgrade 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1 a PC is only required, if fast SW installation via network is desired
Required time: Approx. 90 minutes for SW Upgrade via floppies Approx. 75 minutes for SW Upgrade via PC (network) Printer Software precondition: The software upgrade can be performed at any Drystar 4500 equipped with Software 1.9X or 2.0X. Printer Hardware precondition: SW Rel. 3.0.0_C1 requires the installation of the Crius IV CPU (part of delivery).
Chapter 7 / 3
DD+DIS112.05E
Introduction
Drystar 4500 software release 3.0.0_C1 is an optional upgrade. It contains following main improvements (for a complete list refer to section 6 "History of new features and improvements since SW release 2.00_C1)": o Improved image sharpness due to a new Thermal Model. Marketing name "A#sharp", R&D name TMML (Thermal Model Multi Layer). o Image Quality Control Procedure for CR printers implemented o Support of additional languages for user messages and key-operator screens: Currently available: English, Niederlands, Francais, Chinese simplified o Mixed modality support by allowing to configure logical printers o Support of security features as defined by HIPAA
This document describes all required actions for SW upgrade as well as an emergency procedure in case something goes wrong during SW upgrade. The SW Upgrade procedure from SW 2.00_C1 to SW 3.0.0_C1 is split up in the following steps: # 1 2 Step Check currently installed SW version and AE title Print a SMPTE test image and medical test image from the service menu and a (technical) test image from each modality Backup of machine specific data SW Upgrade via browser or SW Upgrade via floppies or Emergency SW Upgrade via floppies * Replace Proteus CPU by Crius IV CPU Check AE title settings and displayed software version Restore LPD Profiles Perform a film calibration from both trays Comparison of images before and after SW Upgrade In case of connection to CR Mammo QS: Adjust host profile Mount the "A#Sharp" label Show the customer the new features Perform backup of Machine Specific Data Refer to section 2.1 2.3
3 4a 4b 4c 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
2.4 3.1 3.2 3.3 4 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8
Chapter 7 / 4
DD+DIS112.05E
* The software upgrade from SW 1.9X_C1 to 3.0.0 can only be made via Emergency SW upgrade using floppies. The Crius IV CPU has to be installed before starting the upgrade procedure. Details are described in section 3.3.
Preparation
The preparation is split up in following main tasks: # 1 2 3 Tasks Check currently installed SW version and AE title Check of configured Interpolation Settings Print a SMPTE test image and medical test image from the service menu and a (technical) test image from each modality Backup of machine specific data Check whether LPD profiles are present Refer to 2.1 2.2 2.3
4 5
2.4 2.5
Step # 1 and step # 4 are just made for safety reasons. At a successful software installation the configuration data are still present. Step # 2 is made for the unlikely event, that the customer wants to have the previous, relatively unsharp image (compared to the images with TMML) back by switching off TMML. In this case the previous interpolation settings have to be adapted manually. Step # 4 is made to be able to show the customer the difference in image quality: Step # 5 is made because LPD profiles are lost during SW upgrade. Difference in Image Quality at Software Upgrade to 3.0.0_C1: The new thermal model TMML describes the interaction Film TH more accurate, leading to a very precise reproduction of the image. The image looks much sharper now and has the image quality of a Laser Imager. The image looks much 'crisper', especially small text is much better visible.
2.1
How?
Check of currently installed SW version and AE title

(1) In the key-operator menu select '2 Show Settings 1 General. (2) Check and write down the currently installed software release. (3) In the key-operator menu select '2 Show Settings 3 Network DICOM. Write down the AE title to compare it with the AE title after the software upgrade: This is a quick check to confirm, that the configuration is still present after the SW upgrade.
Chapter 7 / 5
DD+DIS112.05E
2.2
How?
Check of configured Interpolation Settings

(1) In the key-operator menu select '1 Show Settings 4 Image Quality <Host Profile name> - 2 Interpolation. (2) Check and write down the interpolation setting for each Host Profile.
2.3
How?
Print-out of Test Images

(1) Form the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate 4 Print Testimage print a SMPTE_lin.tif and medical_image.tif test image. (2) Mark the test images with a waterproof pen as internal test image before software upgrade. (3) If possible, print a technical and medical image from each modality. (4) Write the modality name and test image before software upgrade on the printed films. (5) Keep the images as reference for comparison after the software upgrade.
2.4
How?
Backup of Machine specific data

(1) In the key-operator menu select '5 Save Configuration (2) Follow the further instructions on the screen (3) When finished, verify that the backup floppy is readable: Copy the content of the floppy to the hard disk drive of the Service PC and open the ZIP file. In case the ZIP file can be opened, the machine specific data are readable.
2.5
How?
Check whether LPD Profiles are present

(1) Connect to the browser pages of the printer. Refer to 7.1 (2) Go to 'Service Engineer Tools - LPD Host Profiles' (username: mega; password: adonis) (3) Check whether one or more LPD profiles are present. In this case write down the changed parameters (marked red in the LPD host profile screen).
Chapter 7 / 6
DD+DIS112.05E
SW Upgrade Rel. 1.9X or 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1

Software upgrade can be done via floppies, browser or batch file.
Type of SW Upgrade Decision Flowchart
SW Upgrade to Rel. 3.0.0
Printer boots up completely. Service menu accessible ? Yes
No
Perform Emergency SW Upgrade via floppies (refer to 3.3)
Installed SW = 2.00_C1 ?
No
Perform Emergency SW Upgrade via floppies (refer to 3.3) or batch file (refer to 3.4)
5363_enc_001.cdr
Yes Perform SW Upgrade via browser (refer to 3.1) or floppies (refer to 3.2)
Figure 1 # 1 2 3 Type of SW Upgrade Via browser Via floppies Emergency via floppies Emergency via batch file Comment Recommended type of SW Upgrade for SW Upgrade from 2.00_C1. Floppies have to be created first Floppies have to be created first. This is the only possible type of SW Upgrade starting from SW 1.9X Fastest way of emergency SW installation. See also note below. Refer to section 3.1 3.2 3.3
3.4
Chapter 7 / 7
DD+DIS112.05E
Note to 'Emergeny Installation via batch file': Emergency SW installation via batch file is a new feature in software release 3. It does not require a booted up system, and can also be used to load software on a new hard disk. Just the boot software on the CPU needs to be started up. It is also possible to use the 'Emergency SW installation via batch file' to perform a normal SW upgrade. The Emergency SW installation via batch file does not work on printers with SW 1.9X installed. It requires SW 2.00_C1 or higher and the installation of a '2.00 Proteus prepare floppy'.
3.1
SW Upgrade Rel. 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1 via Browser

(1) Connect to the printer web pages. Refer to 7.1 "Connection to the Web Pages". Possibly adapt the IP address of the service PC. Refer to 7.2. (2) Select Service Engineer Tools (3) Enter username mega and password ****** (4) Select Enter Service Command Session (5) Select 5 Install Data 1 Software Browse (6) In directory \remote choose file DS45_SWR_R3.0.0C1.zip (which has to be available on the service PC). (7) Select Proceed (8) Follow the further instructions on the PC display The printer will make several resets during software installation. After the complete ZIP file is uploaded it takes approx. 10 minutes until the printer is operational again. Important remark: DO NOT SHUTDOWN the printer during software installation as the Key and MEB boards are programmed during the software upgrade. In case the software upgrade was not successful, e.g. printer is after 10 minutes still hanging with message 'Wait selftest proceeding or starts up with message ERROR System Failure proceed as follows: (1) Connect the service PC to the printer and open a terminal session. Check the current status of the printer. (2) In case there is an evidence of a failed software installation, retry the software installation with the emergency upgrade procedure. Refer to section 3.4. It is not possible to downgrade from SW 3.0.0 to SW Rel. 1.9X or 2.00 after the upgrade procedure has started.
Chapter 7 / 8
DD+DIS112.05E
3.2
SW Upgrade Rel. 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1 via Floppies
The floppies first have to be created. They have to be copied from CD ROM.
How?
(1) In the Service Menu on the local keypad select '5 Install data - 1 Software. (2) Insert floppy 1 and follow the further instructions on the display.
After each floppy the integrity of the copied data is checked. In case of an irregularity, the display will indicate this fact. In this case proceed as follows: (1) Make a new version of the corrupt floppy. Use a brand new floppy from good quality. In some cases the floppy will have to be made on another PC floppy drive. (2) Retry the installation of the specific floppy. It takes approx. 15 min. until all floppies are loaded. When all floppies are loaded, a screen pops up, which tells you to leave service mode completely and reboot the printer. Refer to Figure 2 Figure 2 After this reboot it takes approx. 10 minutes until the printer is operational again. The printer makes one automatic reboot in between. Figure 3 Important remark: DO NOT SHUTDOWN the printer during software installation as the Key and MEB boards are programmed during the software upgrade.
Chapter 7 / 9
DD+DIS112.05E
In case the software upgrade was not successful, e.g. printer is after 10 minutes still hanging with message 'Wait selftest proceeding or starts up with message ERROR System Failure proceed as follows: (1) Connect the service PC to the printer and open a terminal session. Check the current status of the printer. (2) In case there is an evidence of a failed software installation, retry the software installation with the emergency upgrade procedure. Refer to section 3.3 It is not possible to downgrade from SW 3.0.0 to SW Rel. 1.9X or 2.0X after the upgrade procedure has started.
Chapter 7 / 10
DD+DIS112.05E
3.3
Emergency SW Upgrade Rel. 1.9X or 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1 via Floppies

Important remark: The emergency upgrade procedure starting from SW 1.9X does not allow to preserve the configuration. Only start the upgrade from SW Rel. 1.9X to 3.0.0_C1 in case the backup floppy is readable (Proof: The ZIP file can be opened) the backup conversion tool (also available on CD ROM, which is part of delivery) is installed on the service PC.
The Emergency SW Rel. 3 Upgrade Procedure via floppies only has to be performed ....... o in case the 'normal' software upgrade is out of any reason not possible (e.g. printer hanging in display 'wait selftest proceeding') o in case the printer is still equipped with SW Rel. 1.9X The floppies first have to be created. They have to be copied from CD ROM.
The backup of SW 1.9X is not compatible to SW version 3.0.0_C1. It has to be converted with the Backup Conversion Tool before it can be used in a printer with SW 1.9X. Step 1: Save logos Logos (also named "annotations") are stored as TIF Files in directories C: or c:\logos (preferred location). Except the default annotations 'agfa.tif' and 'agfa-inv.tif' they are lost during SW Emergency SW Upgrade. (1) Connect to the printer via terminal program (username: mega; password: adonis) (2) Check in directory C: and c:\logos for the presence of TIF files (dir *.tif) (3) In case TIF files are available, insert a floppy in the printer floppy drive and copy them on floppy (copy C:\logos\*.tif a:)
Chapter 7 / 11
DD+DIS112.05E
Step 2: Convert Backup To convert the backup only has to be performed in case the software upgrade is started form SW 1.9X. (1) Install the Backup Converter Tool: Execute 'setup.exe' from directory \Backup conversion tool on the SW CD ROM (2) Install the .NET Environment from directory \net_environment: Execute file dotnetfx.exe. In case a message appears, that the .NET environment is already installed, skip the .NET Environment installation (3) Reboot the Service PC (4) Start the backup conversion tool (START - All Programs - Agfa Gevaert N.V. - Dataset Converter - Dataset Converter) (5) Select the Backup ZIP file of the Drystar 4500 with SW version 1.9X Select a directory on the service PC as destination (6) Select "Convert" (7) Copy the new created ZIP file on a new floppy
Figure 4: Backup Conversion Tool
Chapter 7 / 12
DD+DIS112.05E
Step 3: Install Crius CPU (1) Replace the Proteus CPU by the Crius CPU. Refer to section 4. Step 4: Perform Software Upgrade (1) Insert floppy 1 in the printer floppy drive and switch the printer on (2) After approx. 3 minutes the question is displayed 'Are you sure to proceed'? Refer to Figure 5. Confirm the question about formatting of the hard disk by pressing the confirm key. (3) In the next screen the question will be asked: 'Do you want to preserve the printers configuration?' Refer to Figure 6. o In case of SW 1.9X installed: Press the escape key to erase the printer configuration o In case of SW 2.00_C1 installed: Press the confirm key to keep the printer configuration. In this case the printer configuration will be copied to RAM during formatting of the hard disk. (5) Follow the further instructions on the display. Step 5: Only in case of SW Upgrade starting from SW 1.9X: Restore of backup and Logos (1) In case of SW Upgrade starting from SW 1.9X: Restore the backup (2) Restore the logos if available
Figure 5
Figure 6
At SW installation starting from SW 1.9X the integrity of the copied data from the different floppies is only checked after all floppies are loaded. In case of an irregularity, the display will indicate the faulty floppy. In this case proceed as follows: (1) Make a new version of the corrupt floppy. Use a brand new floppy from good quality. In some cases the floppy will have to be made on another PC floppy drive. (2) Retry the installation from the beginning It is also possible to monitor the emergency software Rel. 3 installation procedure with connection of the service PC. All actions of the wizard are also displayed in a terminal window in this case. The display on the service PC shows more information what happens internally compared to the local printer display. Refer to section 7.3 for a description about "Setup of the HyperTerminal"
Chapter 7 / 13
DD+DIS112.05E
After the software upgrade - before Configuration Restore - the printer shows following warning on the display: "Printhead parameter problem HC11303". This warning is shown, as the print head parameters are missing. After Restore of the Configuration this warning disappears. It is not possible to downgrade from SW 3.0.0 to SW Rel. 1.9X or 2.00_C1 after the upgrade procedure is started.
3.4
Emergency SW Upgrade Rel. 2.00_C1 to 3.0.0_C1 via batch file

The execution of the batch file 'remote_emergency_install.bat' requires the Java Virtual Machine (JVM). In case it is not installed an error message 'jvew cannot be found' will be issued. The Java Virtual Machine (msjavx86.exe) can be installed from directory \java on the SW CD ROM. Step 1: Save logos Logos (also named "annotations") are stored as TIF Files in directories C: or c:\logos (preferred location). Except the default annotations 'agfa.tif' and 'agfa-inv.tif' they are lost during SW Emergency SW Upgrade. (1) Connect to the printer via terminal program (username: mega; password: adonis) (2) Check in directory C: and c:\logos for the presence of TIF files (dir *.tif) (3) In case TIF files are available, insert a floppy in the printer floppy drive and copy them on floppy (copy C:\logos\*.tif a:)
How?
Step 2: Perform SW Upgrade (1) Copy the contents of directory '2.00 Proteus prepare floppy' to a floppy. (2) Boot the printer from this floppy: The Proteus will be re-flashed. (3) Remove the floppy and reboot the printer. (4) Make a network connection from service PC to the printer. (5) In the Windows explorer doubleclick on file \remote\remote_emergency_install.bat'. (6) In the window that opens (refer to Figure 7) enter the IP address of the printer and select install (7) Follow the further instructions on the screen Step 3: Restore logos if available
Chapter 7 / 14
DD+DIS112.05E
Figure 7 Important remark: DO NOT SHUTDOWN the printer during software installation as the Key, MEC, Themis and Crius boards are programmed during the software upgrade. Important remark: The emergency upgrade procedure via batch file can be done with and without saving of the configuration data. Refer to Figure 7. Only select not to backup configuration files in case a backup of the configuration data is available on floppy or service PC. First check, that the floppy is readable. During SW upgrade via batch file following steps are executed internally: A backup of the printer specific data is created and copied to RAM The software is sent from the PC to the printer via FTP and inflated The boards are programmed The backup is restored from RAM
Chapter 7 / 15
DD+DIS112.05E
In case the software upgrade was not successful, e.g. printer is 10 minutes after the last reboot still hanging with message 'Wait selftest proceeding or starts up with message ERROR System Failure proceed as follows: (1) Connect the service PC to the printer and open a terminal session. Check the current status of the printer. (2) In case there is an evidence of a failed software installation, retry the software installation with the batch file. It is not possible to downgrade from SW 3.0.0 to SW Rel. 1.9X or 2.00_C1 after the upgrade procedure has started.
Chapter 7 / 16
DD+DIS112.05E
Proteus CPU Replacement

When working on printed circuit boards, always consider the anti-static regulations. Otherwise damage to PCBs may occur. (1) (2) Disconnect all cables from the rear of the printer. Press button and lift top cover assembly.
536335pw.CDR
Figure 8 (3) (4) (5) Loosen screw A. Lift lever (B) and push it out. Lift cover (C) and take it away.
3 2 C A 1 B 1
C
Figure 9
536335wk.CDR
Chapter 7 / 17
DD+DIS112.05E
(6)
A A
536335wh.CDR
Figure 10 (7) (8) Insert the screwdriver in slots (B) of the rear cover (A). Push the screwdriver outward to release the snap-lock.
A B
536335wl.CDR
Figure 11
Chapter 7 / 18
DD+DIS112.05E
(9)
Lift the lever at bottom of rear cover (A).
(10) Pull the rear cover away.

A
53633nh.CDR
1 2
A 2
1
536335pl.CDR
Figure 12 (11) Remove the 11 screws (A). (12) Remove the metal cover.
A
5363_enc_003.cdr
Figure 13
Chapter 7 / 19
DD+DIS112.05E
(13) Pull the CPU section out. (14) Disconnect the six cables (A). (15) Disconnect the power cables for hard disk and floppy drive (16) Take out the CPU assembly and put it on a table.
536335wm.cdr
Figure 14 (17) Loosen the screws (D). (18) Disconnect the cable (E). (19) Remove the spacer (F). (20) Remove the fan. Note: Pay attention to the airflow when remounting the fan.
AIR FLOW ROTATION
F D E
536335wn.CDR
Figure 15
Chapter 7 / 20
DD+DIS112.05E
(21) Disconnect cables (F) at the hard disk and floppy drive (22) Remove eight screws (H). (23) Remove the hard disk. (24) Remove the floppy disk drive.
H H F F
H H
536335wo.CDR
Figure 16 When disconnecting the SCSI cables at floppy drive, hard disk drive and CPU take care not to damage the connector pins.
Re-mounting of the new CPU assembly: (25) Mount the 7 plastic screws on the new mounting plate (26) Re-mount floppy disk drive (27) Re-mount hard disk drive (28) Re-mount the fan
5363_enc_002.cdr
(29) Mount the Crius IV CPU (30) Fix it with 2 hexagon head screws. (31) Insert the CPU assembly (32) Connect the cables (33) Mount the covers (34) Connect the power and network cables (35) Switch the printer on Figure 17
Chapter 7 / 21
DD+DIS112.05E
Finalization of the upgrade

The finalization of the upgrade is split up in following main tasks: # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Tasks Check AE title settings and displayed software version Restore of LPD profile(s) in case it (they) were present before SW upgrade Perform film calibration for both magazines Print a SMPTE test image and a (technical) test image from each modality Mount the "A#Sharp" label Show the customer the new features Perform backup of Machine Specific Data Refer to 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.6 5.7 5.8
5.1
How?
Check of AE title
(1) In the key-operator menu select '2 Show Settings 1 General. (2) Check the installed software release. It has to show R3.0.0 C1 (3) In the key-operator menu select '2 Show Settings 3 Network DICOM. and check the AE title. (4) Compare the AE title with the previous AE title before SW upgrade to confirm, that the configuration is still present
Chapter 7 / 22
DD+DIS112.05E
5.2
LPD Profile Restore

This step is only required in case LPD profiles were present before SW upgrade. Refer to 2.5. How? (1) Connect to the browser pages of the printer. Refer to 7.1 (2) Go to 'Service Engineer Tools - LPD Host Profiles' (username: mega; password: adonis) (3) Configure the LPD profile(s) as written down before the SW upgrade.
5.3
How?
Film Calibration for both film magazines

(1) Perform a film calibration by selecting in the key-operator menu '2 Calibration 1 Film Upper Input Tray. (2) Repeat the film calibration for the Lower Input Tray
5.4
How?
Comparison of images before and after SW Upgrade

(1) In the service menu select '8 Adjust & Calibrate 4 Print Testimage 2 SMPTE_lin.TIF (2) Mark the test image with a waterproof pen as internal test image after software upgrade. (3) If possible, print a technical and medical image of each modality. (4) Write the modality name and test image after software upgrade on the printed films. (5) At the light box compare the images you made before the software upgrade with the images after the software upgrade. For evaluation refer to table below.
Chapter 7 / 23
DD+DIS112.05E
Result of comparison Internal SMPTE test image shows different contrast
Possible reason Automatic calibration after each film pack switched off
What to do Check the setting for film calibration on/off (Key-operator menu: 2. Show settings 5 Image Quality 1 General). In case it is set to off try to convince the customer to switch it on. For further troubleshooting refer to chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting in the service documentation.
Internal SMPTE test image shows stripes in vertical or horizontal direction to print direction. Image of a modality shows different contrast
Dirt on the TH or defective TH resistor (vertical stripes). Mechanical problem (horizontal stripes). In case the internal SMPTE test image also shows a different contrast, the reason might be a switched off automatic calibration. New TMML
Check the setting for film calibration on/off (Key-operator menu: 2. Show settings 5 Image Quality 1 General). In case it is set to off try to convince the customer to switch it on. The sharpness setting should not need any adjustment. The sharpness setting is automatically adapted to the new TMML. With TMML the image looks sharper. See also info boxes below.
Image shows better sharpness
Table 1: Comparison of images before and after SW Upgrade Before the pixel data are adapted by the Thermal Model, a preprocessing takes place, where the interpolation algorithm as defined during configuration (e.g. High res cubic oder Cubic Bell) is applied:
Image Data Preprocessing (Interpolation) Thermal Model TMML to TH
The interpolation settings are adapted to the new thermal model. The interpolation settings are automatically adjusted during SW upgrade to the default TMML values. No matter which smooth factor was adjusted in the Scaling Setup web page or any User Profile, the smooth factor is adjusted to the default smoothfactor in TMML. Interpolation Type Default smoothfactor Default smoothfactor Thermal Model V 1 TMML Cubic High Res -2.5 -0.7 Cubic Bell 0.35 0.9
Chapter 7 / 24
DD+DIS112.05E
Some more details to interpolation types and values: 'Cubic High res -0.5' and 'Cubic Bell 1.0' means: The image is not sharpened at all. The default of 'Cubic High res -0.7' and 'Cubic Bell 0.9' with the new TMML shows, that nearly no interpolation is required, to have a very sharp image. In case the 'old' values would be kept during an upgrade to the new TMML, the image would be sharpened much to much: It gets very noisy and even image artifacts like black dots would be visible. Interpolation type 'Cubic high res' is only effective (i.e. sharpening the image) in case the modality sends in image mode. In case the modality sends in page mode, only the interpolation type 'Cubic Bell' is capable to sharpen the image. Note: In the 'Scaling Setup' window of the service engineer tools it can be adjusted, that the printer automatically switches to Cubic Bell, in case a modality sends in page mode. A high signal to noise ratio of the image to be printed (i.e. only little noise in the image) means, that it can be sharpened a lot, before noise in the image gets disturbing. Rule of thumb: 1. DR images are less noisy than CR images. 2. As higher the dose as less noisy the image
5.5
Host Profile Adjustment in case of Connection to CR Mammo QS

CR Mammo QS requires special interpolation and LUT settings. Different interpolation settings are required for printers with TMML switched on (= default for printers from factory with SW Rel. 3.0.0_C1 or upgraded printers) or printers with TMML switched off. Proceeding: (1) (2) (3) In the Drystar 4500 M homepage select "Service Engineer Tools" Select "DICOM Profile Editor" Select "New" to create a new profile for the CR Mammo QS or select the existing profile for CR Mammo QS Station and press on the "View/Edit" button. Perform the required adjustments as described in Table 2:
(4)
Chapter 7 / 25
DD+DIS112.05E
TMML switched on: Adjust Host Profiles as follows (refer to Figure 19): Host Profile Parameter Kernel Perception LUT Mammo Modality LR Like Default Cubic Bell 1.0 Kanamori_like 200 (linear) yes OFF Allowed range Cubic Bell 0.9 - 1.0* Kanamori_like 180 200 yes** "OFF" or "Low"
*1.0 means: no additional sharpening of the image. 0.9 means: slight sharpening of the image ** Mammo Modality "yes" means D max = 3.7 + Mammo functionality
(5) (6) (7)
Table 2 Check, that the checkboxes before parameters "Kernel" and "Perception LUT" are ticked. Reset the printer Print an image from the CR Mammo QS Station and check image quality together with the radiologist.
In case the customer is not satisfied with the improved sharpness of the new TMML it can be switched off. Refer to Figure 18. In this case the settings as described in Table 3 have to be applied: TMML switched off: Adjust Host Profiles as follows (refer to Figure 19): Host Profile Parameter Kernel LR Like Perception LUT Mammo Modality Default Cubic Bell 0.35 OFF Kanamori_like 200 (linear) yes Table 3 Allowed range Cubic Bell 0.35 OFF Kanamori_like 180 200 yes**
** Mammo Modality "yes" means D max = 3.7 + Mammo functionality
Chapter 7 / 26
DD+DIS112.05E
Drystar 4500 (M) Homepage Service Engineer Tools (username: mega / password: adonis) Enter Service Command Session 6 Configure 2 Printer Settings 6 TMML
Service - CONFIGURE SELECT DEFAULT for TMML Remote sessions on off Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
536310ce.cdr
Figure 18: Drystar 4500 M SW Rel. 3 TMML switch on/off menu
TMML is switched on or off for the printer, not per host modality.
Chapter 7 / 27
DD+DIS112.05E
HELP
Host Profile: QS_Mammo
These are the default settings for all print jobs coming from the host (modality) specified under 'Calling AE title'. The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input. You can prevent HOME checking the checkboxes at the left side. this by HELP Kernel Edit MQS Nick Name: Kernel specifies the interpolation method when for incoming to be scaled.: Use this profile onlyimages need'Calling AE title': QS_MAMMO Use this profile only for local SCP server: all Host Profile type: GENERIC-GENERIC Change Magnification Type: cubic Bell Number of Copies: 1 Print Priority: SmoothFactor: low 1.0 (only cubicHighRes or cubicBell) Polarity: normal Film Orientation: portrait Trim: no OK Cancel Film Size ID: Medium Type: Print even if Film Size ID/Medium type not supported: yes Print even if Application type not supported: no Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes): 100 Edit Custom Kernel: custom Magnification: Edit Edit Pixel Size: Perception LUT: kanamori_like 200 Kanamori Like value: Custom value: Illumination (cd/m2): Reflected Ambient Light (cd/m2): Border Density (OD x100): Empty Image Density (OD x100): Minimum Density (OD x100): site Maximum Density (OD x100): Header Annotation: Contents: none Edit Custom Font: site Edit Custom Footer Annotation: Contents: none Edit Custom Font: site Edit Custom Window (%): Level (%): Image Orientation: r0 Conformance/Status Level: 0 Nevent enabled: off Mammo modality: Yes Association Timeout (s): Image Timeout (s): Allow IMPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: Allow EXPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: Allow EXPLICIT VR BIG ENDIAN: Resolution: 508 Supported SOP classes: Edit LR like: off OK Cancel Show Defaults Show last Input
Manually customized items are show in red The last received input values are show in blue (click 'Show Last Input' button)
536310cd.cdr
Figure 19: Drystar 4500 M SW Rel. 3 Host Profile for CR Mammo QS
Chapter 7 / 28
DD+DIS112.05E
5.6
Mounting of Label "A#Sharp"

(1) Mount the Label "A#sharp"
Figure 20
5.7
Customer Instruction
(1) Inform the customer about the new features for the operator (refer to 6.1) and improvements regarding image quality (refer to 6.5)
In case the customer should not be satisfied with the improved sharpness of the new TMML, this can be switched off in the Service Menu: "6 Configure - 2 Printer Settings - 6 TMML". Note: In this unlikely event, that the customer wants to have the previous, unsharp image back, the smooth factors are set back to the non TMML default smooth factors (cubic highres: -2.5 / cubic bell: 0.35). The previously adjusted smooth factors are lost and have to be adjusted manually. In this case use the values collected during step '2.2, Check of configured Interpolation Settings'.
5.8
Backup of Machine Specific Data

Chapter 7 / 29
DD+DIS112.05E
History of new features and improvements since SW release 2.00_C1

Summary: Main Improvements o Improved image sharpness due to a new Thermal Model. Marketing name "A#sharp", R&D name TMML (Thermal Model Multi Layer). o Image Quality Control Procedure implemented o Support of additional languages for user messages and key-operator screens: Currently available: English, Niederlands, Francais, Chinese simplified. o Mixed modality support by supporting to configure logical printers o Support of security features as defined by HIPAA
6.1
New Features for the Operator

Support of additional languages for user messages and keyoperator screens: Currently available: English, Niederlands, Francais, Chinese simplified. Note: For some languages (e.g. Chinese simplified) it was necessary to shorten the user messages, to make them fit on the LCD display. The language can be selected via key-operator menu at the printer or via browser interface. Further language datasets can be uploaded via key-operator menu. Languages different to those mentioned above and already installed at a printer with SW Rel. 3 (e.g. Finnish) are kept during SW upgrade, the new menus for "TMML" and "Beep on empty Tray" are however not translated. QC Procedure implemented: A quality control procedure is implemented now also for CR printers (in SW 2.00_C1 only for Mammo printers), which allows the hospital staff to monitor and document the image quality of the printer. It is based on the MQSA (Mammography Quality Standard Act) guidelines defined by FDA (Food and Drug Administration). For details refer to the Drystar 4500 Reference Manual and the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS265.03E Support of external densitometer characteristic: All density values which are displayed at different calibration and QC measurement actions are displayed in the values of a certain densitometer. This allows to check the values the internal MDM has measured with an external densitometer. Currently supported: MacBeth 924, X-Rite 341, X-Rite 331, X-Rite 310 , Gretag , X-Rite 301. Default: MacBeth 924 Browser interface for operator: Menu Operator Tools allows performing queue management (delete / set emergency) of print jobs currently in the print queue. No password is required.
Chapter 7 / 30
DD+DIS112.05E
Added date to jobs in Emergency Printing and PrintQueue screens. Before only the time was displayed. Now date and time are displayed. Logical printers are shown in key-operator menu: In key-operator menu "Show settings - 6 Logical printers" it is displayed, whether more than one logical printer is configured. Beep on empty trays: The beep for empty film input tray is configurable in key-op menus (no beep, 5x beep, continuous beep)
6.2
New Features concerning Service

Possibility of remote SW installation on empty HDD: A batch file named remote_emergency_install.bat is supplied now, which allows to install software via network on a printer, which could not start up via harddisk. It can also be used to perform a software upgrade. Only works if SW 2.00_C1 is installed. Film info area on film added: A microtext is printed in small characters (< 1 mm) in the system info area in the black border, thereby improving traceability in case of image quality problems / complaints. It contains e.g. Dmin, Dmax, Interpolation, Taste LUT, printer SN etc. For more details refer to the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS265.03E Batch tools to adjust network parameters: Via commands "setip <IP address>" and "setsubnetmask <subnetmask>" it is possible to adapt the IP address and subnetmask on terminal level. This allows to adapt the IP address of the printer right after switch on. Infocounter about controller settings added: Logically, the printer consists of a print engine and a controller. The infocounter for the Controller is shown in the "DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report page" browser page. Controller settings are e.g. User Profile settings. Information in infocounter extended: The infocounter is extended with info about Startup/Shutdown History (8.0 Startup/Shutdown History). Now each MDM calibration is logged in the infocounter section 3.5 Calibration History. Support of APIPA: Automatic Private IP Addressing is a new feature of the Drystar 4500 and an already existing feature of Windows-based
Chapter 7 / 31
DD+DIS112.05E
operating systems (Windows 98, ME, 2000, and XP) that enables a service PC to automatically assign itself an IP address. The default IP address of the printer changed from 0.0.0.0 to 169.254.10.10. The default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0. For details refer to chapter 1 of the Service Documentation. Decurl parameters for Mammo V2 films introduced: In SW Rel. 2 a SW patch named "rel200_FLM_C1" had to be installed at Mammo printers, to prevent decurl stripes with the new Mammo V2 films. The new film is more sensitive for decurl banding than the previous one. following parameters are changed: - The decurl speed is increased from 12 mm/s to 16 mm/s - The decurl temperature is decreased from 100 C to 90 C
6.3
New Features concerning Connectivity

Mixed modality support: Max. 4 (recommendation!) logical printers (DICOM Print SCP servers) allow to provide alternative behavior (profiles) for print jobs from the same modality. The configuration of logical printers and the creation of new DICOM profiles is possible by service tools, only via browser: Service Engineer Tools - DICOM profile editor - DICOM Print SCP Servers DICOM configuration management: LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) client supports access to a central LDAP server which keeps configuration information of DICOM devices (e.g. modalities, printers) in its database, to facilitate configuration DICOM conformance level behavior implemented: Two printer information levels can be defined via host profile: 0 (default) = No warnings are returned. Only 'Failure' status codes are activate. This means, that the printer either returns 'normal' or 'failure' (e.g. if printer is offline or film magazine is empty) to the modality. 1 = Warnings are returned. Refer to DICOM conformance status of the Drystar 4500 and the host system. If the host system does not support 'status level' 1, set this parameter to default (= 0). Number of OEM LUTs extended: All LUTs named between oem901.txt till oem999.txt which are available in directory C:\oemlut are displayed in the drop down list in the host profile. Before only one "handmade" OEM LUT named oem999.txt could be used. Host profile Parameter 'LR-Like printing' introduced: While comparing images processed with the new thermal model and images
Chapter 7 / 32
DD+DIS112.05E
printed with the LR5200 it showed, that the images of the LR still looked slightly different, despite the sharpness was comparable. Investigations of the linearity of the Laser Imager showed, that the LR5200 does not behave exactly as linear as a Drystar does: To get at Drystars with the new thermal model the same image impression as on the LR5200, an additional LUT has to be applied, to get the same "Non-linearity" as the Laser Imager. This LUT is applied before the specified taste LUT (Kanamori, Kanamori_like etc.) is applied. Default: off. Possible settings: Off, low, medium. high. Recommended setting to get the same image impression like on LR: low. Consecutive film wait for multiple film boxes in a single print job is set to 15 seconds: A printjob with multiple filmboxes was previously not monitored for new filmsboxes after the first film and image was received. Only when the first film was printed and successfully put into the outputtray, the printjob was checked on new films. So all following films where started after output of the previous one. In the printer, a film-piping mechanisme is implemeted to get the throughput of 100 films per hour. It can handle tree films at the same time. This piping mechanism only works if the available films in a printjob are notified to the piping controller as soon as they are received and not after the previous film is already in the output tray. In the new implementation the printer has a build-in delay of 15 secs. to wait on an open association, to see if there will be more film-boxes. Host profile Parameter 'Print even if application type not supported introduced: This parameter defines, whether a print job should be printed, even if no Mammo film is available. Default: No. This parameter prevents that a Mammo modality sends images to the printer, which only has CR/DR films loaded.
6.4
Improvements concerning Reliability

Alert mailing removed: The alert mailing feature, to send an alert Email for predefined errors is removed because it was not used in the field.
Chapter 7 / 33
DD+DIS112.05E
6.5
Improvements concerning Image Quality

Improved image sharpness due to a new Thermal Model: The thermal model is a mathematical description of the interaction Film TH. The thermal model uses parameters like film thickness, thermal conductivity of the film, TH temperature; environmental temperature, print speed and resolution of the print head. The new thermal model TMML (Thermal Model Multi Layer; R&D marketing published it under 'A # Sharp') name of the product describes this interaction more accurate, leading to a very precise reproduction of the image. It does not use new parameters for calculating. The image looks much sharper now, and has the image quality of a Laser Imager. For more info refer to the HealthCare Newsletter "Innovation at work: A#sharp" vailable on MEDNET, HealthCare Library. Improved TH profile calibration: Better correction at the edges of the image. In addition, the required compensation during MDM registration calibration and print head profile calibration is displayed. Example:
Print Head Profile Calibration Completed successfully Registration compensation 13% TPH Profile compensation 24% Press to continue
5363_enc_004.cdr
0% No compensation was required 100% Maximum compensation was required This means, that the figures are a sign of the quality ot the MDM registration or print head profile respectively before print head profile calibration. Improved film calibration: Different messages are shown to user depending on the outcome of the calibration: Failed, Success, Retry (when Dmax is not reached yet) and Dmax Reached (when Dmax is not reached yet, but retrying will not improve)
Chapter 7 / 34
DD+DIS112.05E
Appendix:
The Appendix contains following additional explanations: Topic How to connect to the Drystar 4500 web pages How to adapt the PC IP address How to connect to the PC to the printer via serial cable Refer to 7.1 7.2 7.3
7.1
USAGE
Connection to the Web Pages

(1) Connect the Service PC to the Printer network (2) Start the browser (Netscape 4.X or Internet Explorer 4) (3) Enter the IP address of the printer in the address window. In case the printer homepage is not displayed, refer to 7.2 "Adaptation of the PC IP address" next page.
Service PC
53
DR A.C 1A 631
53
63 32 aa .c
dr
Figure 21 As an alternative, if it is not possible to put the Service PC into the hospital network: (1) Use a crossed network UTP cable to connect the network interface of the Service PC directly with the network interface of the printer. (2) Start the browser (Netscape 4.X or Internet Explorer 4 or 5) (3) Enter the IP address of the printer in the address window. In case the printer homepage is not displayed, refer to 7.2 "Adaptation of the PC IP address" next page.
Printer Service PC
536311dp.cdr

536332ad.cdr
Figure 22
Chapter 7 / 35
DD+DIS112.05E
7.2
Adaptation of the PC IP address

To connect the printer and the Service PC via network, usually the IP address of the Service PC has to be adapted. Basic rules: Case 1: The service PC is part of the hospital network. (1) Get the IP address and possibly the subnet mask* for the Service PC from the hospital network administrator. In case the hospital network administrator wants to have the Service PC working only in a subnet, get from him the netmask (also called subnet mask). (2) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 23 to Figure 26. Case 2: The service PC is not part of the hospital network, but connected via crossed UTP network cable to the printer. (1) Look up the printer IP address and subnet mask in the printer key operator menu "show settings - Network". (2) Define an IP address for the Service PC by adding or subtracting "1" to the last digit of the IP address. Example: Printer IP address = 10.6.5.121 Service PC address = 10.6.5.122 or 10.6.5.120 (3) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 23 to Figure 26.
Figure 23
Figure 24
Chapter 7 / 36
DD+DIS112.05E
*Default Subnet Masks (set for NO sub netting) Class A B C First 3 digits of IP 0...127 128...191 192...223 Subnet mask 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0
Figure 25
Figure 26
Chapter 7 / 37
DD+DIS112.05E
7.3
Setup of the HyperTerminal

The Hyper Terminal setup as displayed here can be used for all AGFA devices. Instead of the HyperTerminal following other programs can be recommended to connect to terminal level: 1) xt. xt.exe is an AGFA program, which is part of the IMOS package. It can be started in a DOS box by typing "xt" 2) IMOS Start Menu. The IMOS Start Menu software has a terminal built in. Select "tools terminal". Depending on the configuration of IMOS Start, either a DOS box with xt will be opened or a Hyper Terminal window will pop-up. (1) To start the setup of the HyperTerminal, go to "Programs - Accessories HyperTerminal - HyperTerminal"
Figure 28
Chapter 7 / 38
DD+DIS112.05E
-
9600 Bps 8 data bits No parity 1 stop bit Flow control Xon/Xoff
(5) Select "OK"
Figure 30
Chapter 7 / 39
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services
Document No: DD+DIS005.03E
Chapter 8
Manufacturing Standard Modifications DRYSTAR 4500 / DRYSTAR 4500 M

Type 5363 / 100/110
Purpose of this Document

This document provides an overview of all product modifications which may be of importance for Service. They are listed in chronological sequence.
Document History
Edition. Revision Release Date Changes compared to previous Version 2.0:
2.1
05-2008
Adapted document to latest template Added sections 21 to 40.
Document Title
n.a.
n.a.
Document Node ID: 13940337 eq_08_modifications_e_template_v07
DD+DIS005.03E
Manufacturing Standard Modifications
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V. Publisher Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH Tegernseer Landstrae 161 D - 81539 Mnchen Germany Copyright 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V. All rights reserved. Technical modifications reserved. AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING: Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries. INSTRUCTION: (1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document (see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the equipment. Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on the product.
(2)
NOTE: To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the Document Type Order List in the GSO library.
DRYSTAR 4500 / DRYSTAR 4500 M Type 5363 / 100/110
Chapter 8 / 2
DD+DIS005.03E
OVERVIEW OF MODIFICATIONS:
Timeline 2008
Modification
April Changed Crius IV CPU CM+349262.1 / Release of Software 3.1.0_C1 2007 July Changed Densitometer Assembly CM+326003.3 June Changed Key4 PCB CM+326004.2 2006 November Added Spare Part Transfer Roller Drive Assembly CM+357838.0 November Changed Postscript Kit 3.0.1_C1 October Heatsink Replacement Kit CM+346059.1 available July Changed MEB2 PCB CM+326001.8 July Introduction of Software Patch 3.0.1_C1 June Release of Software 3.0.0_C1 May Changed Motor for Decurl Unit CM+309808.1 2005 November Changed Crius IV CPU CM+349262.0 October Changed Film Reversal Unit CM+326033.2 September Modified Hard Disk with 73 GB as Successor of Hard Disk CM+326051.1 July Modified MEB Board CM+326001.6 June Changed Driving Mechanism for Decurl Unit CM+326022.4 March Modified cabled DC Motor CM+326021.0 and Drum Motor Assembly CM+326020.1
SB11, DD+SIS070.08E
None None
None None SB9, DD+DIS331.06E SB10, DD+DIS332.06E SB06, DD+DIS220.05E SB05, DD+DIS153.05E None
SB09, DD+DIS331.06E None None None None None
Chapter 8 / 3
DD+DIS005.03E
Timeline
Modification
Referenced Documents None None
March Modified Floppy Drive & Data Cable CM+309789.1 February Modified Driving Mechanism for Decurl Unit CM+326022.2 2004 October Thermal Head CM+326050.0 delivered with Return Label Timeline 2003 December Modified Hard Disk with 36 GB as Successor of Hard Disk CM+326051.0 April Modified Protheus CPU CM+325997.5 2002 December Modified Decurl Unit CM+326024.6 December Cleaning tissues CM+309931.0 introduced November Loopback Connectors CM+339977.0 introduced July Modified Decurl Unit CM+326024.4 March Modified Densitometer Assembly CM+326003.1 March Hard Disk with 18.3 GB as Successor of Hard Disk CM+325998.0 March Modified Upper Film Loading Assembly CM+326007.3 March Modified Lower Film Loading Assembly CM+326009.3 February Introduction Thermal Heads with 'long gaps' for Mammo Printers February Modified Top Cover Assembly CM+326044.3 January Modified Film Pickup Assembly CM+326008.4 January Modified Display Cover Assembly CM+326013.6 January Modified Film Pickup Assembly CM+326008.4 Modification
None Referenced Documents
None None
None None None None None None None None None None None None None
Chapter 8 / 4
DD+DIS005.03E
Timeline 2001
Modification
December Modified Display Cover Assembly CM+326013.5 December Modified Decurl Unit CM+326024.3 October Modified Upper Film Loading Assembly CM+326007.0 October Modified Lower Film Loading Assembly CM+326009.0 October Modified Densitometer Assembly CM+326003.0 February Modified Driving Mechanism Decurl Unit CM+326022.1
None None None None None None
Chapter 8 / 5
DD+DIS005.03E
Hard Disk with 18.3 GB as Successor of Hard Disk CM+325998.0

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Logistical reasons: The 9 GB hard disk was not available anymore. Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN > 1392 / March 2002 SN > 1052 / March 2002
Hard disk 18.3 GB CM+326051.0 None
Modified Upper Film Loading Assembly CM+326007.0

Reason In the upper film loading assembly CM+326007.0 several modifications were introduced. The main modification was to change the plate that presses the film towards the rollers of the film pick-up unit: Before the plate was pushed up at the rear side only, now it is pushed up parallel to the bottom of the magazine. This modification was required to get high reliability at film pick-up of the new TM1 B/C TSI Film. Type 5363/100 SN1123, SN1124, SN1127, SN1131,SN1133, SN1135 1137, SN1140 1145, > SN1151 / October 2001 SN > 1020 / October 2001
Product(s) & Serial Number(s)
Type 5363/110 Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s)
Upper film loading assembly CM+326007.3 None
Chapter 8 / 6
DD+DIS005.03E
Modified Upper Film Loading Assembly CM+326007.3

Reason In the upper film loading assembly CM+326007.3 the mounting of the plate that presses the film towards the rollers of the film pick-up unit was modified Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN > 1245 / March 2002 SN > 1031 / March 2002
Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s)
Upper film loading assembly CM+326007.4 None
Modified Lower Film Loading Assembly CM+326009.0

Reason In the lower film loading assembly CM+326009.0 several modifications were introduced. The main modification was to change the plate that presses the film towards the rollers of the film pick-up unit: Before the plate was pushed up at the rear side only, now it is pushed up parallel to the bottom of the magazine. This modification was required to get high reliability at film pick-up of the new TM1 B/C TSI Film. Type 5363/100 SN1123, SN1124, SN1127, SN1131,SN1133, SN1135 1137, SN1140 1145, > SN1151 / October 2001 SN > 1020 / October 2001
Product(s) & Serial Number(s)
Lower film loading assembly CM+326009.3 None
Chapter 8 / 7
DD+DIS005.03E
Modified Lower Film Loading Assembly CM+326009.3

Reason In the lower film loading assembly CM+326009.3 the mounting of the plate that presses the film towards the rollers of the film pick-up unit was modified Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN >1245 / March 2002 SN > 1031/ March 2002
Lower film loading assembly CM+326009.4 None
Modified Driving Mechanism Decurl Unit CM+326022.1

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) To reduce the wear of the gearwheels a different plastic was introduced Type 5363/100 SN 1113; SN 1121; SN 1123; SN 1124; SN 1127; SN 1131; SN 1133; SN 1135-1137; SN 1140-1145 and SN > 1150 / February 2001 SN 1018 and SN > 1019 / February 2001
Driving mechanism decurl unit CM+326022.2 None
Chapter 8 / 8
DD+DIS005.03E
Introduction Thermal Heads with 'long gaps' for Mammo Printers

Reason To improve the image quality a different Thermal Head was introduced. After end of stock of the 'old' Thermal Head CM+326016.0 it will be replaced by this new Thermal Head CM+326050.0. Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN > 1536 / February 2002 SN > 1118 / February 2002
Thermal Head for Mammo Printers CM+326050.0 None
Modified Decurl Unit CM+326024.3

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) To reduce the wear of two gearwheels a different plastic was introduced Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN > 1186 / December 2001 SN > 1031 / December 2001
Decurl unit CM+326024.4 None
Chapter 8 / 9
DD+DIS005.03E
Modified Film Pickup Assembly CM+326008.4

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) The curve of the cam in the Film Pickup Assembly was changed to improve the reliability of the empty tray detection. Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not registered / January 2002 SN not registered / January 2002
Film Pickup assembly CM+326008.5 None
10
Modified Densitometer Assembly CM+326003.0

Reason Due to problems with mounting of the cable at the halogen lamp a new plastic cover was developed to keep the cable at the lamp without use of glue. Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN > 1179 / October 2001 SN > 1031/ October 2001
Chapter 8 / 10
DD+DIS005.03E
11

Reason When this decurl unit is delivered as spare part, it contains also a gear wheel for the driving mechanism decurl unit, to be exchanged, too. Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not registered / July 2002 SN not registered / July 2002
12
Modified Top Cover Assembly CM+326044.3

Reason Modified film transport rollers and film transport rollers pressure springs. Modified locking mechanism for the top cover. Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN > 1245 / February 2002 SN > 1031 / February 2002
Top Cover Assembly CM+326044.4 None
Chapter 8 / 11
DD+DIS005.03E
13
Modified Display Cover Assembly CM+326013.5

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) To improve the empty detection for the upper film magazine, the bracket for sensor S3 is modified. Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN > 1155 / December 2001 SN > 1019 / December 2001
Display Cover Assembly CM+326013.6 None
14
Modified Display Cover Assembly CM+326013.6

Reason The curve of the cam in the Film Pickup Assembly (which is part of the Display Cover Assembly) was changed to improve the reliability of the empty tray detection. Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not registered / January 2002 SN not registered / January 2002
Display Cover Assembly CM+326013.7 None
Chapter 8 / 12
DD+DIS005.03E
15
Modified Film Pickup Assembly CM+326008.4

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) The curve of the cam in the Film Pickup Assembly was changed to improve the reliability of the empty tray detection. Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not registered / January 2002 SN not registered / January 2002
Film Pickup assembly CM+326008.5 None
16
Modified Densitometer Assembly CM+326003.1

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) The diameter of the MDM diaphragma was changed from 0.4 to 0.6 mm to reduce unwanted interferences. Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN > 1032 / March 2002 SN > 1000 / March 2002
Chapter 8 / 13
DD+DIS005.03E
17
Cleaning tissues CM+309931.0 introduced

Reason For proper cleaning of the Thermal Head heater line cleaning tissues are introduced. These tissues are already prepared with a cleaning fluid and come packed in an Aluminum coated paper bag. Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not registered / December 2002 SN not registered / December 2002
Cleaning tissues CM+309931.0 None
18
Loopback Connectors CM+339977.0 introduced

Reason Loopback connectors for serial interface and Ethernet TP connection test introduced. Test can be initiated via service menu: '7 Test and Diagnose - 4 Test Communication - 3 Internal Communication' Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not registered / November 2002 SN not registered / November 2002
Loopback Connectors CM+339977.0 None
Chapter 8 / 14
DD+DIS005.03E
19

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) To make gear wheels running smoother, extra grease is added Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not registered / December 2002 SN not registered / December 2002
20
Modified Protheus CPU CM+325997.5

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Because the processor '740' of the Protheus CPU is not delivered anymore, it is changed to a new processor type '755' Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not registered / April 2003 SN not registered / April 2003
Protheus CPU CM+326053.0 None
Chapter 8 / 15
DD+DIS005.03E
21
Modified Hard Disk with 36 GB as Successor of Hard Disk CM+326051.0

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Logistical reasons: The 18 GB hard disk was not available anymore. Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not registered / December 2003 SN not registered / December 2003
Hard Disk CM+326051.1 None
22
Modified Hard Disk with 73 GB as Successor of Hard Disk CM+326051.1

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Logistical reasons: The 36 GB hard disk was not available anymore. Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN 1861 / September 2005 SN 1926 plus 1913, 1914, 1915, 1920, 1922, 1924/ September 2005
Hard Disk CM+326051.2 None
Chapter 8 / 16
DD+DIS005.03E
23
Thermal Head CM+326050.0 delivered with Return Label

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Logistical reasons to improve refund procedure Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not required change in spare part only / October 2004 SN not required change in spare part only / October 2004
Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s)
Thermal Head CM+326050.0 None
24
Modified cabled DC Motor CM+326021.0 and Drum Motor Assembly CM+326020.1

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Improvement of production process Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN 1762 / March 2005 SN 1585 / March 2005
Cabled DC Motor CM+326021.1 Drum Motor Assembly CM+326020.2 None
Chapter 8 / 17
DD+DIS005.03E
25
Modified Floppy Drive & Data Cable CM+309789.1

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Improvement of production process Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN 1783 / April 2005 SN 1723 / March 2005
Floppy Drive & Data Cable CM+309789.2 None
26
Modified Driving Mechanism for Decurl Unit CM+326022.2

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Improvement of production process Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not registered / February 2005 SN not registered / February 2005
Driving Mechanism for Decurl Unit CM+309789.4 None
Chapter 8 / 18
DD+DIS005.03E
27
Modified MEB Board CM+326001.6

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Improvement of production process Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN 1839 plus 1830, 1835, 1832, 1836, 1833, 1837, 1834 / July 2005 SN 1895 plus 1820, 1823, 1824, 1837, 1839, 1840, 1859 to 1864, 1888, 1889, 1826, 1827, 1829, 1842,1845, 1846, 1866 to 1873, 1891 to 1893, 1830, 1832, 1847, 1851, 1852, 1876 to 1881, 1833 to 1835, 1853,1855 to 1857, 1883 to 1885 / August 2005
MEB Board CM+326001.7 None
28
Release of Software 3.0.0_C1

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) New features Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN 1790 / June 2006 SN 1735 plus 1710, 1711 / June 2006
Drystar 4500 (M) A#sharp kit CR/DR CM+349529.0 Drystar 4500 (M) A#sharp kit Mammo CM+350053.0 SB05, DD+DIS153.05E
Chapter 8 / 19
DD+DIS005.03E
29
Changed Crius IV CPU CM+349262.0

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Improved heat sink holder Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN 1877 / November 2005 SN 1970, plus 1965, 1967 / November 2005
Crius IV CPU CM+349262.0 SB09, DD+DIS331.06E
30
Introduction of Software Patch 3.0.1_C1

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Bugfixing for software 3.0.0_C1 Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN 1827 / July 2005 SN 1817 plus 1810 / July 2005
No part number available distribution via MEDNET only. SB06, DD+DIS220.05E
Chapter 8 / 20
DD+DIS005.03E
31
Changed Driving Mechanism for Decurl Unit CM+326022.4

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Improvement of production process Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not required / June 2005 SN not required / June 2005
Driving Mechanism for Decurl Unit CM+326022.5 None
32
Changed Film Reversal Unit CM+326033.2

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Improvement of gear of film reversal unit. Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN 1871 / October 2005 SN 1947 / October 2005
Film Reversal Unit CM+326033.3 None
Chapter 8 / 21
DD+DIS005.03E
33
Changed MEB2 PCB CM+326001.8

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Wrong Portex version in previous MEB board, leading to sporadic Error System failure message Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN 1790 / July 2006 SN 1734 / July 2006
MEB2 PCB CM+326001.9 SB10, DD+DIS332.06E
34
Changed Motor for Decurl Unit CM+309808.1

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Added additional gear to spare part Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not required change in sales part only / May 2006 SN not required change in sales part only / May 2006
Motor for Decurl Unit CM+309808.2 None
Chapter 8 / 22
DD+DIS005.03E
35
Changed Postscript Kit 3.0.1_C1

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Updated Postscript Kit 3.0.1_C1 (ABC-Code EJPY8) to make it compatible to software 3.0.0_C1 Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 ABC-Code EJPY8 Installation Planning DD+DIS125.03E SN not required change in sales part only / November 2006 SN not required change in sales part only / November 2006
36
Changed Key4 PCB CM+326004.2

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Improvement of production process Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 At time of change printer was not produced anymore. SN not registered / June 2007
Key4 PCB CM+326004.3 None
Chapter 8 / 23
DD+DIS005.03E
37
Heatsink Replacement Kit CM+346059.1 available

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) New spare part: Replacement for defective heat sink on Crius CPU Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not required change in spare parts only / October 2006 SN not required change in spare parts only / October 2006
Heatsink Replacement Kit, CM+346059.1 SB9, DD+DIS331.06E
38
Added Spare Part Transfer Roller Drive Assembly CM+357838.0

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) New spare part: Motor M9 mounted on plate together with gear wheel. Replaces Motor film transport M9 CM+3097540. Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 SN not required change in spare parts only / November 2006 SN not required change in spare parts only / November 2006
Transfer Roller Drive Assembly CM+357838.0 None
Chapter 8 / 24
DD+DIS005.03E
39
Changed Densitometer Assembly CM+326003.3

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) Improvement of production process Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 At time of change printer was not produced anymore. SN 2399 / July 2007
Densitometer Assembly CM+326003.4 None
40
Changed Crius IV CPU CM+349262.1 / Release of Software 3.1.0_C1

Reason Product(s) & Serial Number(s) Part Number(s) Referenced Document(s) SW 3.1.0_C1 supports Crius V, which is RoHS compliant (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) Type 5363/100 Type 5363/110 At time of change printer was not produced anymore. SN 2573 plus 2541 to 2569 / February 2008
Crius V CPU CM+358910.0 SB11, DD+SIS070.08E
Chapter 8 / 25
Maintenance
DD+DISDIS319.03E
*1WXZT51*
1 Piece WJK1Z MA1

Type 5363 / 100/110
Internal Version: 3
This documentation is separately available. Order No.: DD+DIS319.03E
Note: Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician. Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician. CE Declaration: The CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
We reserve the right to technical changes
DD+DIS319.03E
Maintenance Instructions
List of Contents
1 2
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
Safety ...............................................................1 Introduction .....................................................3

Maintenance Frequency.......................................................... 3 Required Time.......................................................................... 3 Required Tools ........................................................................ 3 Required cleaning and lubricating material .......................... 3 Required spare parts............................................................... 4
3
3.1 3.2
3.2.1
Diagnostics......................................................5
Questioning of the customer.................................................. 5 Infocounter Analysis ............................................................... 5
How to evaluate the Infocounter ......................................................... 6
3.3
Extended System Check ......................................................... 7
4
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8
4.8.1
Maintenance points - Power off.....................8

Check of General Condition ................................................... 8 Replacement of Film Pickup Assembly................................. 9 Cleaning of Transport Rollers in upper and lower Film Pickup Assembly..................................................................... 9 Greasing of Film Reversal Unit gear wheels ....................... 10 Check of condition of belts and gears of decurl unit ......... 11 Check of condition of belts and gears of main drive ......... 12 Check of condition of discharge brushes ........................... 13 Check of the decurl unit........................................................ 14
Cleaning of the decurl infrared temperature sensor.......................... 14
4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12
Check of the electronic rack................................................. 15 Visual check of the cables .................................................... 17 Electrical check ..................................................................... 18 Visual check of condition of the print drum. Cleaning of the rollers and drum .................................................................... 19
5
5.1
Maintenance points - Power on ...................20

Check of flat belt tension ...................................................... 20
Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Typ 5363 / 100/110) Chapter 9 / I
DD+DIS319.03E
5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7
Cleaning of the thermal print head ...................................... 20 Density Reproduction Check ............................................... 22 Print Head Profile Calibration............................................... 23 Film Calibration ..................................................................... 25 Image quality evaluation....................................................... 25 Host System Image Quality Evaluation ............................... 25
6
6.1 6.2 6.3
Completion of the maintenance.................. 26

Reset of the relative counters in the infocounter ............... 26 Backup of machine specific parameters ............................. 26 Customer Conversation........................................................ 26
Maintenance - Checklist
Chapter 9 / II
DD+DIS319.03E
Safety
The Drystar 4500 is suitable for continuous operation. The Drystar 4500 enables or aids in the diagnosis of a patient. When operating or maintaining the Drystar 4500 always observe the following safety guidelines: Have electrical or mechanical defects repaired by skilled personnel only! Do not override or disconnect the integrated safety features. Ventilation openings may not be covered. Always switch off the Drystar 4500 and disconnect the power cord from the outlet before carrying out any maintenance work. Always take into account the markings provided on the inside and outside of the printer. A brief overview of these markings and their meaning is given below: Safety warning, indicating that the Drystar 4500 User and Reference Manuals should be consulted before making any connections to other equipment. The use of accessory equipment not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this printer may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting system. Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include: Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity. Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 601-1 and IEC 601-1-1 harmonized national standard. In addition, all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system configurator and is responsible for complying with the systems' standard. If required contact your Agfa Service Organization. In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any covers. Caution hot: Keep hands clear from the decurl unit. Type B equipment: Indicates that the Drystar 4500 complies with the limits for type B equipment.
Chapter 9 / 1
DD+DIS319.03E
Supplementary protective earth connector: Provides a connection between the Drystar 4500 and the potential equalization bus bar of the electrical system as found in medical environments. This plug should never be unplugged before the power is turned off and the power plug has been removed. Intergrounding connector: Provides a connection between the printer and other equipment which might exhibit minor ground potential differences. These differences may degrade the quality of communication between different equipment. Never remove connections to this terminal. Protective earth (ground) Provides a connection between the printer and the protective earth of the mains. Do not remove this connection, because this will have a negative influence on the leakage current. Power/Reset Button (Stand-by switch) Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall outlet in order to disconnect the unit entirely from the mains. Precautions for use in USA only: Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the printer is connected to a 240 V/60 Hz source instead of a 120 V/60 Hz source. Transport after installation The user has to be very cautious concerning stability, when moving the printer. When doing this, he has to take into account the condition and the structure of the subsoil, obstructions and slopes. The appliance can only be transported with all covers closed. The brakes have to be loose. The appliance may not be transported continuously from one location to the other. Waste disposal and environmental regulations In most countries Drystar film is considered industrial waste and consequently it is not allowed to dispose of it as household waste. Please consult your local waste disposal regulations. Agfa recommends to have waste Drystar film hauled away by a licensed company. After its life span, do not dispose of the Drystar 4500 without consideration of local waste disposal regulations. Please consult your local service organization.
Chapter 9 / 2
DD+DIS319.03E
Introduction
The maintenance steps described in this document are based on the technically required measures to guarantee the proper operation of the printer. Additional maintenance steps can be required according to national regulations.
2.1
Maintenance Frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out: every 30.000 printed films or every 12 months, whatever comes first
2.2
Required Time
approximately 2 h
2.3
Required Tools
Calibrated densitometer (X-Rite 331 or X-Rite 341, for other densitometers refer to MS EXCEL files for Density reproduction check)
Service PC with MS Excel installed
Density reproduction check files for Drystar 4500 (refer to MEDNET, GSO Library)
Magnifying glass (CM+9.9579.9904.0)
Waterproof pen
2.4
Required cleaning and lubricating material

Cleaning / lubricating material Vacuum cleaner Order number CM+9.9999.0895.0 (220/240 V) CM+9.9999.0896.0 (110/115 V) Lint free cloth Isopropyl alcohol Grease Klubersy. Li 44-22 50 gr. commercially available commercially available CM+3399780 (part of the Maintenance Kit)
Chapter 9 / 3
DD+DIS319.03E
2.5
Required spare parts

The following table lists in the left column all spare parts which are mentioned in the Maintenance Instructions. The right columns shows, in which cases the parts have to be replaced. Spare part Flat belt for drum Toothed belt for drum Halogen lamp for densitometer Film pickup assembly Discharge brush Toothed belt for decurl unit Exchange as required as required as required after 50.000 passes as required as required
The following table lists the Maintenance-assortment kit CM+53630100733 (Status 12/03). Spare part Order number 1 x Flat belt for drum 1 x Toothed belt for drum 1 x Spare parts small components 1 x Thermal Head cleaning tissues (box of 50 pieces)* 1 x Halogen lamp for densitometer 1 x Film pickup assembly 2 x Discharge brush 1 x Toothed belt for decurl unit 1 x Grease Klubersy. Li 44-22 50 gr. CM+3097820 CM+3097830 CM+3099162 CM+3099310 CM+3099450 CM+3260085 CM+3260190 CM+3260230 CM+3399780
* The Thermal Head cleaning tissues are currently not available. Instead of the cleaning tissues we recommend to use a lint free cloth soaked with Isopropylalcohol.
Chapter 9 / 4
DD+DIS319.03E
Diagnostics
The diagnostics before the maintenance comprises following tasks: Task Questioning of the customer Infocounter Analysis Extended System Check Details see.. 3.1 3.2 3.3
3.1
Questioning of the customer

Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last maintenance
3.2
Infocounter Analysis
Required Tool: Service PC; required to analyze the infocounter (1) Insert an empty floppy in the printer floppy drive. Refer to Figure 1. (2) In the service menu select "Save on floppy" with the key and press (3) Select "Infocounter file" and (4) (5) press Wait until the file is copied to MG3000 Infocounter floppy disk. 27.4.2001 Remove the floppy from the printer floppy drive and insert it in Figure 1 the Service PC Unzip the file "di45_xxxx_icn.zip" (xxxx stands for the serial number) Start an editor (e.g. notepad or wordpad). Open the file infocounters.txt Analyze the infocounter file as described in section 3.2.1, How to evaluate the Infocounter
536332bb.cdr
(6)
(7) (8) (9)
The infocounter can also be checked with the browser: In the homepage select 'Enter service command session' - 'Infocounters Report'. For an explanation how to get access to the browser pages refer to chapter 3.2, Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary equipment.
Chapter 9 / 5
DD+DIS319.03E
3.2.1
How to evaluate the Infocounter Evaluation of infocounters.txt What to check in the infocounter 1.1 Serial number and Installation date Comment Compare device serial number to chapter 8 Manufacturing Standard Modification to determine whether the device is modified or possibly requires a modification. Note: Refer to 3.3 (infocounter.txt), HW Modification History, too. 1.4 Software Info It is recommended to have the latest software installed. Each SW-Version has its inherent characteristics. Refer to chapter 7 Field Modifications to see what is the latest released software. Refer to chapter 10, Field Service Bulletins, to be informed of software specific faults. 2.2 Throughput For throughput most important are the cycles per day. They usually count between 50 and 200 (1 cycle = 1 print). Potential foreseeable problems exist due to drastic reduction or increase in the throughput of the printer. Refer to 2.3 Reliability in infocounters.txt. Should normally not be higher than 0.05. Higher fault rates need a thorough investigation. By comparing the status of the device with the available modifications (refer to chapter 7) the exact hardware status can be determined. By checking the software modification history it can be determined, whether a recent software upgrade solved a problem, that occurred quite often in the error list in the past (refer to 2.4, Cycles between failures in infocounters.txt). Check the upper tray cycles and lower tray cycles. A film pickup assembly with more than 50.000 cycles has to be replaced. In case it was replaced already, refer to the number of cycles of the last replacement written on the cover of the currently built in film pickup assembly.
2.3 Reliability 3.3 Hardware Modification History 3.4 Software modification history
4.1 Film print statistics
Chapter 9 / 6
DD+DIS319.03E
Evaluation of Infocounters.txt What to check in the infocounter 5.3 Retries Comment Many retries (> 1%, based on relative prints) have to be investigated: They usually lead to less throughput of the device. Retries film feeding unit: Check rollers / check mechanics Retries communication MEB: Check cabling between MEB board and CPU-Board. Eventually replace MEB or CPU. Retries communication ETH (Ethernet): Check network cabling, hub. 5.7 Error History Check which errors occurred in the past, how often they appeared as well as the CBF (cycles between failures) of these errors. This gives an overview of the current status of the machine. Troubleshoot these errors with the help of the technical documentation, chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting.
5.8 Error list (sorted by relative) and 5.9 Error list (sorted by total)
3.3
Extended System Check

(1) Select in service menu "2 Maintenance 1 Quality Checks 2 Extended system check and confirm with . (2) Follow the instructions on the local display.
Chapter 9 / 7
DD+DIS319.03E
Maintenance points - Power off

The maintenance with powered-off machine comprises following tasks: Task Check of general condition Replacement of Film Pickup Assembly in case number of pickup cycles > 50.000 Cleaning of Transport Rollers in upper and lower Film Pickup Assembly Greasing of reversal unit gear wheels Check of condition of belts and gears of decurl unit Check of condition of belts and gears of main drive Check of condition of discharge brushes Check of the decurl unit Check of the electronic rack Visual check of the cables Electrical check Visual check of condition of the print drum. Cleaning of the rollers and drum Details see.. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12
4.1
Check of General Condition

(1) Perform a visual check of the condition of the power and network cable. (2) Perform a visual check of the covers (3) Perform a visual check of the upper and lower film magazine
Chapter 9 / 8
DD+DIS319.03E
4.2
Replacement of Film Pickup Assembly

The replacement of one or both film pickup assemblies is only required in case a film pickup assembly has reached more than 50.000 film pickup cycles. Required spare part: CM+326008x Film Pickup Assembly
Figure 2 Required tools: Socket wrench, 5.5 mm
(1) Check number of film pickup cycles in the infocounter (4.1 Film print statistics: upper tray cycles / lower tray cycles). (2) If a film pickup assembly has reached more than 50.000 film pickup cycles, replace it. For replacement instructions refer to chapter 3.5, Replacements of Parts. (3) With a waterproof pen write the number of film cycles at replacement inside the display cover or the top cover assembly respectively.
4.3
Cleaning of Transport Rollers in upper and lower Film Pickup Assembly

Required tools: Isopropyl alcohol Lint free cloth
A
(1) Open the top cover. (2) Push the red lock (A) to the front, and tilt the film input assembly up. (3) Clean the rollers with a lint free cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl alcohol.
536353bb.cdr
Figure 3
Chapter 9 / 9
DD+DIS319.03E
(4) Close the film input assembly. (5) Loosen two screws (B) on the display cover. (6) Pull the display cover to the front and tilt it up. (7) Clean the rollers with a lint free cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl alcohol. (8) Close the display cover and remount the two screws (B)
A B
536335bt.cdr
Figure 4
4.4
Greasing of Film Reversal Unit gear wheels

Required tools: (1) (2) (3) Grease Klubersy. Li 44-22 CM+339978x Open the top cover. Open lock (A). Turn the film reversal unit up (B).
Figure 5 (4) Apply a small amount of grease on gear wheels, see arrow, with a spatula or a small brush. Turn back the reversal unit.
(5)
9u 30 36
d j.c
Figure 6
Chapter 9 / 10
DD+DIS319.03E
4.5
Check of condition of belts and gears of decurl unit

Required spare part: CM+3260230 Toothed belt for decurl unit
Figure 7
The replacement of the belt of the decurl unit is only required in case of visible wear. (1) Remove the left hand side cover. (2) Perform a visual check of the condition of the gears and belt of the decurl unit (1 - 3). (3) Replace the toothed belt in case of visible wear.
1
For replacement instructions refer to chapter 3.5, Replacements of Parts. For adjustment of the belt tension refer to chapter 3.6, Adjustments.
2 3
536309aa.CDR
Figure 8
Chapter 9 / 11
DD+DIS319.03E
4.6
Check of condition of belts and gears of main drive

Required spare part: CM+309782x Flat Belt for Drum
536335vx.cdr
Figure 9
Required spare part: CM+309783x Toothed Belt for Drum
Figure 10
The replacement of one or both drive belts is only required in case of visible wear. (1) Remove the right hand side cover. (2) Perform a visual check of the condition of the gears and belts of the main drive (refer to Figure 11 positions 1 5). (3) In case one (or both) of the belts shows visible wear, replace it. For replacement instructions refer to chapter 3.5, Replacements of Parts. For adjustments of the flat belt refer to chapter 3.6, Adjustments. (4) Check the position of the flat belt (1): It must be centered on the flat 5 belt pulley. In case it is not centered refer to Chapter 3.6, Adjustments.
2 1 3
4
536309ab.CDR
Figure 11
Chapter 9 / 12
DD+DIS319.03E
4.7
Check of condition of discharge brushes

Figure 12
(1) Perform a visual check of both discharge brushes (A) above the drum and (B) at top cover assembly. (2) If there is persistent dirt or a brush is frayed, replace it.
A
536309ba.cdr
.cdr 09un 5363
Figure 13
Figure 14
Chapter 9 / 13
DD+DIS319.03E
4.8
Check of the decurl unit

(1) Perform a visual check of the decurl unit for any contamination. (2) If particles of dust are visible, vacuum clean the decurl unit. (3) Check the 'central drum' of the decurl unit for damages. (4) Clean the temperature sensor of the decurl unit (see next section). Figure 15
In case of persistent contamination of the decurl unit or damaged surface of the rubber rollers, replace it at the next possible occasion.
536309ue.CDR
4.8.1
Cleaning of the decurl infrared temperature sensor Required Tools Socket wrench, 7 mm Lint free cloth Isopropyl alcohol (1) Open the Upper front cover. (2) Open lock (A). (3) Fold the film reversal unit (B) up.
A
536335bp.cdr
Figure 16
Chapter 9 / 14
DD+DIS319.03E
(4) Loosen two screws (C). (5) Take the mounting bracket (D) with the sensor out. (6) Clean the sensor with a piece of lint free cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl alcohol. (7) Remount the sensor. Refer to note below.
D C
536309ad.CDR
Figure 17 Do not touch the front part of the sensor, the sensor lens, with your fingers.
4.9
Check of the electronic rack

Required tool: Vacuum cleaner
A
(1) Disconnect the mains and network cable. (2) Open top cover assembly. (3) Remove right side cover and rear cover. (4) Remove 11 screws (A). (5) Remove the metal cover.
536335rh.CDR
Figure 18
Chapter 9 / 15
DD+DIS319.03E
(6) (7)
Remove nut (B), washers and cable. Remove screw (C).

B
536335ro.CDR
Figure 19 (8) Disconnect cables (D).
Figure 20 (9) Pull the CPU section out. (10) Check the CPU section for dust. (11) Clean it with a vacuum cleaner if required. (12) Push the CPU section back.
536335cw.CDR
Figure 21
Chapter 9 / 16
DD+DIS319.03E
(13) (14) (15) (16)
Pull the power supply out. Check the power supply for dust. Clean it with a vacuum cleaner if required. Remount both, the power supply and CPU section.
Figure 22
4.10
Visual check of the cables

(1) Check the power cord and the cables inside the machine for any signs of damage. (2) Make sure that the ventilation slots before thermal head and power supply are free and that the thermal head and power supply ventilation is working properly. (3) Make sure, that no hindrances can cause stumbling (e.g. cables) and that no defective covers, sharp edges or sticking out parts in the vicinity of the machine can cause injuries. (4) Make sure, that no smoldering spots or wrong cabling is visible. (5) Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers are present.
Chapter 9 / 17
DD+DIS319.03E
4.11
Electrical check
As the power supply has been dismounted for cleaning, the protective earth resistance has to be checked according to the national regulations.
Example
Germany (according to Standard VDE 0701 part 1): 1. Internal circuit of the machine to be tested. 2. Gauge to measure the grounding resistance. 3. Connection between the gauge and the machine ground 4. Connection between the gauge and conductive, touchable parts in the machine.
Figure 23 Practical example for Drystar 4500: (1) Use a multi-meter that is capable to measure a resistance < 1 Ohm (2) Put one probe at the ground connector of the mains input (3) Put the other probe at a few metallic parts, the customer could touch (in the example in Figure 24 the frame below the rear cover). Check: The electrical resistance has to be 0.3 Ohm Figure 24 In case the electrical resistance of one measurement is > 0.3 Ohm check the printer for loose grounding connections!
< 300 m
1
536331dp.cdr
Chapter 9 / 18
DD+DIS319.03E
4.12
Visual check of condition of the print drum. Cleaning of the rollers and drum
Required tools: Isopropyl alcohol Lint free cloth (1) Open the print head unit (2) Disconnect the main drive (see position 1 in Figure 25) (3) Perform a visual check of the condition of the print drum (see position 3 in Figure 25). It may not have any scratches or other uneven places. (4) To check the complete drum, turn at the pulley of the drum drive to rotate the drum (see position 2 in Figure 25). Refer to note below! (5) Clean the rubber of the transport rollers and the drum with a lint free cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl alcohol. (6) Connect the main drive again.
2 1
536309vt.CDR
Figure 25 When the pulley is turned in order to rotate the drum, the motor reacts like a generator. Therefore the main drive motor must be disconnected.
Chapter 9 / 19
DD+DIS319.03E
Maintenance points - Power on

The maintenance with powered-on machine comprises following tasks: Task Check flat belt tension Cleaning of the thermal print head Density Reproduction Check Print Head Profile Calibration Film Calibration Image quality evaluation Host System Image Quality Evaluation Details see.. 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7
5.1
How?
Check of flat belt tension

(1) In the service menu on the local keypad select '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 1 adjust mechanics - 2 drum driving belt'. This triggers the drum motor M1 (2) Check the run of the flat belt on the disk: (3) Check the measuring value on the local display: It must be between 0.400 and 0.480 A
Adjust drum driving belt: Service 8-1-2 ADJUST and CALIB x quit Drum motor current: Measured: 0.42 A Upper limit: 0.480 A Lower Limit: 0.400 A
536336ay.cdr
Figure 26
5.2
Cleaning of the thermal print head

Required tools: Isopropyl alcohol Lint free cloth
Carry out a wet cleaning thermal print head procedure only in case of dust stripes or doubt, and do not follow automatically the display request to clean. Carry out cleaning of thermal print head very cautiously, because too high pressure can damage the unit! Use small amounts of alcohol. Alcohol can easily damage the thermal head. Clean the Drystar 4500 thermal print head never with an ink eraser. Take care not to remove the tape on thermal print head during cleaning! It may happen that ends of the tape are peeling off, but anyway never lift ends up! Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M (Type 5363 / 100/110) Edition 2, Revision 1
Chapter 9 / 20
DD+DIS319.03E
(1) Print out STI.tif test image. Refer to note below. (2) Check STI.tif test image for dust stripes. If no dust stripes are found, there is no further action necessary. If dust stripes are found or in case of doubt, clean the thermal print head with a lint free cloth lightly soaked in Isopropyl alcohol. The last cleaning movement must be carried out in one way. (3) Print out another STI.tif test image.
536309ac.CDR
Figure 27
(4) Check STI.tif test image for dust stripes. If the lines disappeared, the dust particles are removed. Go to step (5). If the line artifacts stay the same, follow the image troubleshooting procedures as described in chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting. If additional lines came up, clean the thermal print head again and go back to (3). (5) Check tape on the older version of the thermal print head.
To avoid bubbles the older version of the thermal print head is equipped with a tape next to the heating area.
If Drystar 4500 M uses Drystar Mammo films (Dmax 3.7) as well as DT1B / DT1C film (Dmax 3.1): Film in use DT1B / TM1 C NEW (Dmax 3.1) Drystar Mammo (Dmax 3.7) Select test image... STI.....TM1.TIF STI.....TM2.TIF
Chapter 9 / 21
DD+DIS319.03E
5.3
Density Reproduction Check

Required tools: Calibrated densitometer (X-Rite 331 or X-Rite 341, for other densitometers refer to MS EXCEL files for Density reproduction check) Service PC with MS Excel installed Density reproduction check files for Drystar 4500
With the density reproduction check the difference for a specific film type between optical density defined in the sensitometric calibration file and the printed optical density, measured with an external densitometer is checked. In case this difference is above or below the limits the MDM needs to be calibrated. This procedure must be carried out with every used film type: How? (1) Perform a film calibration (see section 5.5) (2) Print out test image SMPTE.tif and measure the density of the eleven 100 % 0% squares with a calibrated densitometer. (3) To check linearity fill in measured values in corresponding Excel file: for film type DT1B use DT1B.xls or for film type DT1C (TM1 C NEW) use DT1C.xls for film type Mammo use Mammo.xls These Excel files can be downloaded from MedNet, GSO library (4) After the measured values are filled in, density reproduction is calculated automatically. (5) The text box at the right hand side of the table indicates, if a MDM calibration needs to be done.
Chapter 9 / 22
DD+DIS319.03E
Figure 28: Density Reproduction Check
5.4
How?
Print Head Profile Calibration

(1) (2) Print out a STI test image. Check STI.tif test image for dust stripes: If no dust stripes are found, go to (5). If dust stripes are found or in case of doubt, clean the thermal print head with a lint free cloth soaked in alcohol. The last cleaning movement must be carried out in one way. Print again the STI test image. If no dust stripes are visible go to (5). If additional lines came up go back to (1) Figure 29: STI test image
(3) (4)
Chapter 9 / 23
DD+DIS319.03E
If Drystar 4500 M uses Drystar Mammo films (Dmax 3.7) as well as DT1B / DT1C film (Dmax 3.1): Film in use DT1B / TM1 C NEW (Dmax 3.1) Drystar Mammo (Dmax 3.7) Select test image... STI.....TM1.TIF STI.....TM2.TIF
Use small amounts of alcohol. Alcohol can easily damage the thermal head ! How? (5) Select in service menu '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 3 Calibrate - 3 Print Head Profile'. (6) Follow the display instructions, but do not clean the thermal head again if you are asked for. Only open the front door a few cm and close it again. (7) Choose upper or lower tray: First a registration calibration film will be printed, followed by a flatfield for the printhead profile.
536336ef.cdr
Figure 30: Registration Calibration test image How? (8) After printing of the flatfield, check the Printhead Profile test image for dust stripes in the area till 3 cm from the bottom of the film (this is the area where the MDM is measuring the density, to adjust the printhead profile)
Figure 31: Printhead Profile test image
Chapter 9 / 24
DD+DIS319.03E
(9)
If extra lines show up with respect to the first printed STI test image, clean thermal head with a lint free cloth lightly soaked in alcohol, reinstall thermal head floppy (Service Menu: 5 Install data - 3 Printhead data) and redo this print head profile calibration procedure again from beginning. If no dust stripes or extra lines are shown the printhead profile calibration is completed.
*The number of film passes is lost after reinstallation of the thermal head floppy.
5.5
How?
Film Calibration
(1) Select in Service Menu '8 Adjust & Calibrate - 3 Calibrate - 1 Film Calibration (2) Follow the instructions on the display
Film calibration has to be made for every film magazine.
5.6
Image quality evaluation

Required tool: Magnifying glass (CM+9.9579.9904.0) (1) Print medical service test image Medical_image.tif (2) Check the medical service test image for any image artefacts: If any image artifacts can be found, follow the troubleshooting procedures in chapter 3.3.
5.7
Host System Image Quality Evaluation

Required tool: Magnifying glass (CM+9.9579.9904.0) (1) Print a diagnostic image from every host system (2) Check the diagnostic image for image artefacts: If image artifacts can be found, follow the troubleshooting procedures in chapter 3.3
Chapter 9 / 25
DD+DIS319.03E
Completion of the maintenance

The Completion of the maintenance comprises following tasks: Task Reset of the relative counters in the infocounter Backup of machine specific parameters Customer Conversation Details see.. 6.1 6.2 6.3
6.1
Reset of the relative counters in the infocounter

(1) In the service menu select "2 Maintenance" with the (2) Select "2 Clear relative counter" and press key and press
6.2
Backup of machine specific parameters

(1) (2) (3) (4) In the service menu select "3 Save data " with the key and press Select "2 Machine specific data " and press . Follow the instructions on the keypad. When leaving the service menu select "preventive maintenance" as service action. .
6.3
Customer Conversation
(1) Fill out the maintenance checklist (see next pages) and hand it out to the customer. (2) Explain the results of the maintenance to the customer. A notification can be activated at the printer to request preventive maintenance actions by the customer. Actions are explained in Reference Manual Preventive maintenance schedule. If notification is activated: After 1000 print passes (default value at installation) a warning message to clean the thermal head resistor line is displayed. After 5000 print passes (default value at installation) a warning message to carry out automatic thermal head profile calibration is displayed.
Chapter 9 / 26
Maintenance Checklist
Order-No.: DD+DIS319.03E

Type 5363 / 100/110 Work Instruction for order no. SN Film cycles
Film cycles upper tray
Film cycles lower tray
The maintenance has to be carried out: every 30.000 printed films or every 12 month
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions, see chapter 9 of your Service Documentation.
The maintenance steps described in this document are based on the technically required measures to guarantee the proper operation of the printer. Additional maintenance steps can be required according to national regulations.
Diagnostics
Checked and OK Conversation with the customer about problems with the printer
Checked and not OK
1.
Questioning of the customer
2. 3.
Infocounter analysis Extended system check
Infocounter read-out and analysis Execution of service menu Extended system check
DD+DIS319.03E
Maintenance Step by Step Power off
Checked and OK
Checked and not OK
4.
Check of General condition
Visual check of power and network cable Visual check of covers and film magazines Replacement of Film Pickup Assembly in case number of cycles > 50.000
5.
Replacement of Film Pickup Assembly
6.
Cleaning of Transport Rollers
Cleaning of Transport Rollers in upper and lower film pickup assembly
7.
Greasing of gear wheels
Greasing of reversal unit gear wheels
8.
Check of belts and gears decurl unit Check of belts and gears main drive
Visual check of condition of gears and belts of decurl unit
9.
Visual check of condition of gears and belts of main drive
10. Check of discharge brushes
Visual check of condition of discharge brushes above drum and top cover assembly Visual check of decurl unit and cleaning if necessary
11. Check of decurl unit
12. Check of electronic rack 13. Visual check of the cables 14. Electrical check
Check of electronic rack for dust and cleaning if necessary Check of electronic rack for dust and cleaning if necessary Check of electronic rack for dust and cleaning if necessary Visual check of condition of print drum Cleaning rollers and drum
15. Check of print drum
Maintenence Checklist Page 2
DD+DIS319.03E
Maintenance Step by Step Power on
Checked and OK
Checked and not OK
16. Check of belt tension and position
Check of belt tension of flat belt
17. Cleaning of thermal print head 18. Density Reproduction Check 19. Print head profile calibration 20. Film calibration 21. Image quality evaluation 22. Host System Image Quality Evaluation Completion
Printing of a STI test image and cleaning of thermal print head if necessary. Density reproduction check to confirm proper operating MDM Print head profile calibration Film calibration for every film magazine Check for artifacts on the film Printing diagnostic image from every host system
Checked and OK Clearing of relative infocounter
Checked and not OK
23. Reset of relavtive counters in infocounter
24. Backup 25. Customer Conversation
Backup of machine specific parameters Handing over this checklist to the customer and explanation of the results of this maintenance.
DD+DIS319.03E
Replaced Part
Part number
Remarks: ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician
...................................................................
Customer
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services
Chapter 10
Service Bulletins DRYSTAR 4500 / DRYSTAR 4500 M

Type 5363 / 100/110
Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download. Please download the Service Bulletins from the GSO Library: MEDNET GSO Service Bulletin Hardcopy Dry Imagers Drystar 4500/Drystar 4500M
Document Node ID: 22738363 service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v01
DD+DIS005.03E
Service Bulletins
intentionally left blank
Chapter 10 / 2
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services
Chapter 11
Installation Planning DRYSTAR 4500 / DRYSTAR 4500 M

Type 5363 / 100/110
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS125.03E.

CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE: Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful. DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 2, Revision 1 01-2008 printed in Germany Agfa Company Confidential

1
Document Node ID: 20893979 eq_11_install-planning_e_template_v05
DD+DIS125.03E
Installation Planning
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V. Tegernseer Landstrae 161 D - 81539 Mnchen Germany Copyright 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V. All rights reserved. Technical modifications reserved. AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING: Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries. INSTRUCTION: (1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document (see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the equipment. Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on the product.
(2)
NOTE: Release Date, Edition and Revision are displayed in the footer of each own new released document. So please refer to the GSO Library doc type Order list and Front page to verify the volume and revision status of a Service Manual.
DRYSTAR 4500 / DRYSTAR 4500 M 5363 / 100/110
DD+DIS125.03E
Purpose of this document

This document contains all planning data including the required measures to be carried out on site prior to the machine delivery. This chapter is divided into: construction planning data technical connection and performance data safety instructions, listing of certificates
Document History
Edition. Revision Release Date Changes compared to previous Version 2.0:
2.1
01-2008
Adapted scope of delivery (only 2 x 25 film sheets are part of delivery). See section 3.1 Added detailed specifications for power cables which are part of delivery. See section 3.1 Corrected wrong outlet and cable specification for US: Wrong: NEMA 6-15p outlet/cable Correct: NEMA 5-15p outlet/cable. See section 8.
Document Title
n.a.
n.a.
DD+DIS125.03E
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 2 3
INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLIST................................................................................6 SYSTEM OVERVIEW...............................................................................................................7 SCOPE OF DELIVERY AND ACCESSORIES.........................................................................8

3.1 3.2 Scope of delivery ......................................................................................................................8 Options......................................................................................................................................9
4 5 6
MACHINE DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................................10 MINIMUM FREE SPACE FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE .....................................11 SYSTEM INTEGRATION .......................................................................................................12
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.4 6.5 Network Integration Parameters .............................................................................................12 Modality Setup Parameters.....................................................................................................14 Setup of Security and Privacy (optional).................................................................................16 List of Key-operator, Service People and Specialists with Access Rights .............................16 Audit Logging Server and NTP Server Parameters................................................................18 Availability of Certificates ........................................................................................................18 Service Host Parameters ........................................................................................................18 Example for System Integration..............................................................................................19
AMBIENT CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................20

7.1 7.2 During operation .....................................................................................................................20 During Transport and Storage ................................................................................................20
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................21

8.1 Electrical Connections at the Printer.......................................................................................22
SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................23
9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 Type overview .........................................................................................................................23 Functional data .......................................................................................................................23 Pixel Matrices..........................................................................................................................24 Electrical data..........................................................................................................................24 Climatic data ...........................................................................................................................24 Sound emission data ..............................................................................................................24 Interface data ..........................................................................................................................25
DD+DIS125.03E
9.7 9.8 9.8.1 9.8.2 9.8.3 9.8.4
Service data ............................................................................................................................25 Dimensions and weight...........................................................................................................25 Dimensions, packed machine .................................................................................................25 Dimensions, closed machine ..................................................................................................25 Dimensions, opened machine.................................................................................................25 Weight .....................................................................................................................................25
10
SAFETY STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS .......................................................................26
Appendix: Installation Site Readiness Checklist
DD+DIS125.03E
1
# 1. 2. Step
Installation Planning Checklist

Goal To see in which surrounding the printer will be installed Basic information, to see whether additional, site specific material for installation might be required To be able to order required accessories before the installation To be able to check, whether the printer fits in the desired installation place To see whether enough free space for operation, repair and maintenance is available. To have all parameters in advance, to prevent a delay during installation To be prepared for modality specific adjustments at the printer See Okay section 2 3.1
Make yourself familiar with the System Overview Make yourself familiar with the scope of delivery Make yourself familiar with the available accessories Have a look at the machine dimensions Check the required free space around the printer. Organize the required network parameters to hook up the printer in the existing network. Get up-to-date Connectivity Release Documents for the modalities which shall print on the printer Compare the required ambient and climatic conditions with the condition at the installation place. Check the required electrical connection
3. 4. 5.
3.2 4 5
6.
7.
6.2
8.
To prevent installation of the printer in an inappropriate environment, leading to functional faults. To be able to initiate all required prerequisites in advance to allow proper electrical connections To have all printer parameters available which might be required for people who are in involved in installation and operation of the printer. To have the safety standards and regulations for which the printer is tested available in case they are requested by the hospital administration. To be sure that all required preinstallation conditions are fulfilled.
9.
10. Make yourself familiar with the printer specifications
11. Have a look at the printer safety standards and regulations
10
12. Confirm the installation readiness
Last Page
DD+DIS125.03E
System Overview
536311JK.CDR
Figure 1
Device Modality
Comment The modality has to support the DICOM print protocol
DRYSTAR 4500 / 4500 M Dry printer for 10x12" and 8x10" Drystar DT 1 B/C or Drystar Mammo films
NOTE: Remark to an installation in a 'HIPAA conform environment': In Figure 1 two additional, optional modules are not listed: 1) Audit logging server: This is a computer in the networking allowing to store all communication between the different devices in the network. 2) NTP (Network Time Protocol) Server: This is a computer providing time synchronization. It is useful for audit logging, so that all messages of all devices have the same time reference. Both devices are only required in a 'HIPAA' environment, where high data security is required. For more information refer to section 6.3.
DD+DIS125.03E
3
3.1
Scope of Delivery and Accessories

Scope of delivery
NOTE: In general this installation planning document describes both printers, the Drystar 4500 and Drystar 4500 M. As production for the Drystar 4500 printer stopped in year 2006, the scope of delivery for Drystar 4500 is not listed. Device name: Type: ABC Code DRYSTAR 4500 M 5363/110 LJ7W3
Scope of delivery 1 Basic DRYSTAR 4500M including: - 1 film magazine for 8x10" films - 1 film magazine for 8x10" or 10x12" films 1 floppdy disk (stored in backup floppy disk holder inside printer) 2 power cables, 3 m long (Europe / US) 1 UTP network cable, 5 m long (2 x RJ45 connection) incl. extension piece 1 Reference manual (English) 1 User Manual (English) 1 CD with all user manuals and Plug&Play installation manuals in all languages* 1 packing list 1 Plug and Play Installation manual (English) 1 pozidriv screwdriver 25 films 10x12 Drystar Mammo for test purposes 25 films 8x10" Drystar Mammo for test purposes 2 sets film type labels 1 Chinese warning sticker 1 CE declaration of conformity 1 China ROHS declaration 1 Installation Report *available languages: Chinese simplified, Chinese traditional, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Estonian, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Latvian, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Slovakian, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Vietnamese
DD+DIS125.03E
IMPORTANT: The printer is delivered with two 3 m power cables. See Figure 7. For US: NEMA 5-15P with IEC C13 plug (female) For Europe: CEE7/7 with IEC C13 plug (female) Organize a power cable for your country locally. See section 8 for Mains connection in the installation room specifications.
3.2
Options
NOTE: REMOTE SERVICE: In general it is possible to diagnose and repair the printer to a certain extent remotely. To enable remote service of the printer remote access has first to be organized. Remote Access is established via the Agfa own Secure Remote Service System (SRSS). For more information to the SRSS refer to MEDNET GSO Library - Technical Services - Service Delivery - SRSS A#sharp kit. Details see service bulletin # 5 (Access via Intranet / Extranet) DS4500 Postscript Kit, ABC Code EJPY8
DD+DIS125.03E
Machine Dimensions
Machine closed: Dimensions in cm (inch).
93,5 (37)
536311dn.cdr
57,5 (23)
75 (29,5)
Figure 2
Machine opened:
128 (50)
1011663_2.cdr
16 (6) 101 (40)
Figure 3
DD+DIS125.03E
Minimum free Space for Operation and Maintenance

Dimensions in cm (inch).
57,5 (23)
128 (50)
536311do.cdr
60 (24)
75 (29,5) 155 (61)
20 (8)
Figure 4 NOTE: Not enough free space may result in longer repair times.
DD+DIS125.03E
System Integration
The system integration comprises the following tasks:
Task Network integration of the printer Modality setup Setup of security and privacy (optional) Setup of the Agfatek Link Service Host
Refer to 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
For each of these steps various parameters are required in advance. They can be entered in the following tables:
6.1
Network Integration Parameters

To connect the printer to the hospital network, the following parameters are required by the hospital network administrator: Parameter Printer IP address Hostname Subnet mask Router IP address Printer AE title* Domain name Default 169.254.10.10 ds4500 255.255.0.0 DS4500 Value ............................................. ............................................. ............................................. ............................................. ............................................. .............................................
The Hospital Network Administrator needs the following information about the printer: Network connection Transmission protocol Image formats RJ45 UTP, 100BaseT acc. to IEC601 DICOM Version 3.0; FTP, Telnet, HTTP, SNMP, SMTP, LPD DICOM
DD+DIS125.03E
*NOTE: It is possible to define more than one AE title at the printer this means it's possible to have two or more logical DRYSTAR 4500 printers. To configure logical SCP printers can be necessary, in case for example printing is initiated at a PACS system, which has several modalities as input. Example: The PACS system collects CR and CT images. CR images shall be printed with taste LUT Kanamori CT images shall be printed with linear taste LUT.
Problem: The workstation at the PACS system has one AE title only. The DRYSTAR 4500 does not recognize, for which type of modality (CR or CT) the user wants to print. Solution: Create one logical printer 'DRYSTAR4500_CR' and one 'DRYSTAR4500_CT'. Create two different host profiles for the two logical printers, one with Kanamori LUT, the other with linear taste LUT. In the workstation setup both printers: The user has to select the proper logical printer, depending on the application.
The number of logical SCP printers is limited. As each configured SCP server consumes resources of the printer, use as little SCP servers as possible. Rule of thumb: Define max. 4 logical printers.
DD+DIS125.03E
6.2
Modality Setup Parameters

To connect the printer to the DICOM modality, the following parameters are required by the hospital network administrator:
Modality 1: ................................................... (nickname* of the modality; max. 8 characters (letters/figures)) Parameter Modality brand Modality type Modality AE_title Value ........................................................................... ........................................................................... ...........................................................................
DD+DIS125.03E
NOTE: *Nickname: The name of the modality which is used by the personnel. Example: The workstation "Siemens Icon Power PC" could be named "Icon" in the daily use. At the printer configuration this name is entered as "nickname". IMPORTANT: For printer connectivity have the up-to-date Interface Status Report and corresponding Connectivity Release Document available: Interface Status Report: The up-to-date interface status report lists all modalities, for which the connectivity to the DRYSTAR 4500 is tested and released. The ISR (Interface Status Report) is available on MEDNET - HealthCare Library General Info - Connectivity & Application - Interface Status Report - Application Info (only via Intranet not via Internet). The ISR also lists the Connectivity Release Document numbers. Example see Figure 5
PHILIPS, CR EASYVISION RAD 4.2
DRYSTAR 4500(M)/5500/5300
ETHERNET II DICOM 3.0 Control : ETHERNET II DICOM PRINT MANAGEMENT SCU Status : Released for installation Document : 000874 Remarks :
5365_reg11_006_e.cdr
Image :
Connectivity Release Document Number
Figure 5 Connectivity Release Documents: Specific connectivity information for the DRYSTAR 4500 can be found in the Connectivity Release Documents. The Connectivity Release Documents are available on MEDNET (Intranet and Internet), Imaging Library - General Info - Connectivity & Application
DD+DIS125.03E
6.3
Setup of Security and Privacy (optional)

In case HIPAA compliance is required, following items have to be checked in advance: Item Users and service people who may have access Audit Logging Server and NTP Server parameters Availability of certificates Refer to 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3
NOTE: The parameters for 'Security and Privacy' have to be determined and entered by the 'hospital security responsible person'. Please hand out the pages of this subsection (6.3) to the 'hospital security responsible person'.
6.3.1
List of Key-operator, Service People and Specialists with Access Rights The list of Key-operators is limited to 50. The Key-Operator has access to the KeyOperator webpages of the printer. Following conventions are valid: Username: min. 4 characters, max 20 characters Network password: min. 4 characters, max 10 characters # 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. User name Password
DD+DIS125.03E
The list of service people is limited to 8. The service people have access to the service web pages. Following conventions are valid: Username: min. 4 characters, max 20 characters Network password: min. 4 characters, max 10 characters # 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Service person name Password
The list of Specialists is limited to 1. The Specialist has access to the specialist web pages. Following conventions are valid: Username: min. 4 characters, max 20 characters Network password: min. 4 characters, max 10 characters # 1. Specialist name Password
DD+DIS125.03E
6.3.2
Audit Logging Server and NTP Server Parameters To setup the Audit Logging and NTP server in the printer, request the following parameters from the hospital network administrator:
Parameter Audit Logging IP address Audit Logging port number NTP server IP address NTP server port number
Value ................................................................ ................................................................ ............................................................... ...............................................................
6.3.3
Availability of Certificates Check with the hospital network administrator, that certificates are available for all devices, which shall be HIPAA compliant. NOTE: Agfa devices which are according to the HIPAA specifications have Agfa certificates already loaded. All certificates issued by Agfa have a validity period of 10 years
6.4
Service Host Parameters

NOTE: The AGFATEK LINK Service Host is optional in the network. It is an optional part of the SRSS (Secure Remote Service System). For more information to the SRSS refer to MEDNET GSO Library - Technical Services - Service Delivery - SRSS
Parameter Service Host IP address Phone Number
Default 192.9.200.155 --
Value ............................................. .............................................
DD+DIS125.03E
6.5
Example for System Integration
IP Address:192.9.200.155 Service Host
Digitizer: ADC Compact +
ADC QS
Ultrasound
Nickname: Digitizer Modality Brand: AGFA Modality Type: ADC Compact Calling AE-Title: ADC_QS Nickname: Modality Brand: Modality Type: Calling AE-Title: Ultrasound ACUSON ASPEN US_ASPEN
Printer
53
63
11 a
a .c
dr
192.9.200.201 IP address: ds4500 Hostname: 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask: Router IP address: Printer AE Title: DS4500 Domain name:
Figure 6
DD+DIS125.03E
7
7.1
Ambient Conditions
During operation
Ambient temperature: min.: max.: min.: max.: +15C (59F) +30C (86F) 20% 75%
Relative humidity: (non condensing)
7.2
During Transport and Storage

NOTE: Climate conditions for storage must be in accordance with EN60721-3-1-class 1K4 Climate conditions for transport must be in accordance with EN60721-3-2(1993)-class 2K4 min.: max.: min.: max.: - 25C (-13F) + 55C (131F) 10% 95%
Ambient temperature during storage: Relative humidity during storage: Absolute humidity during storage: Rate of temperature change during storage Air pressure during storage Ambient temperature during transport:
min.: max.:
0.1 g/m 35 g/m
max.:
1 C/min.
Min. max.: min.: max.: min.: max.:
70 kPa 106 kPa - 40C (-40F) + 70C (158F) 10% 95%
Relative humidity during transport:
DD+DIS125.03E
Electrical Connections
Installation guidelines Electrical installations have to be done in accordance with national regulations. Examples: VDE (Germany) Electrical installations in the installation room must be in compliance with the regulations IEC 364, VDE 0100, and VDE 0107. (US) Electrical installations in the installation room must be in compliance with the regulations: National Electrical Code" (NEC) (NFPA70).
UL
IMPORTANT: A ground fault interrupter (GFI) (IN = 30 mA) must be installed at a suitable point in the circuit (in compliance with VDE 664).
Mains connection in the installation room
VDE UL
Double earthed pin outlet in compliance with DIN 49441 and with CEE 7 standard cover V II. Earthed contact outlet for the NEMA 5-15 P plug CEE7/7 - H05VV - F3G - 3 x 2.5 mm with IEC C13 plug (female); cable length 3 m NEMA 5-15P - SJT, 3 x AWG 18 with IEC C13 plug (female); Cable length 3 m
Mains cable (part of the delivery)
EuroVersion: US/CANVersion:
US
Europe
IEC C13 NEMA 5-15P IEC C13
CEE7/7
5366_chap11_001.cdr
Figure 7 Network cable (part of the delivery) Main switch UTP; AWG24; Length: 5 m
Upon machine installation, it must be ensured that either the mains connector or an all-pole circuit breaker for the installation on site is located close to the machine and easily accessible.
DD+DIS125.03E
8.1
Electrical Connections at the Printer
2 3
4 5
536311dp.cdr
Figure 8
1 2 3 4 5
Service Interface. RS232 Interface female DTE 25 pins sub D Network connection. RJ45 UTP for 100BaseT network, according to IEC601. 100 - 240 V AC power supply Supplementary protective earth connector Intergrounding connector: Potential equalization connection to the host. 6 mm metric thread, (not used).
DD+DIS125.03E
9
9.1
Specifications
Type overview
Printer Drystar 4500 Drystar 4500 M Type 5363 / 100 5363 / 110
9.2
Functional data
Film sizes Throughput (films/hour) Access timeapprox. (seconds) Resolution(DPI) Bits per pixel / number of grey steps Daylight film loading Size of film magazine Image recording type Densitometer built in Automatic density control Hard disk drive capacity RAM Memory 8x10" 80 100 508 12 / 4096 yes 100 films each Direct thermography yes yes 4 GB 128 MB 10x12" 60 125
DD+DIS125.03E
9.2.1
Pixel Matrices CR Layout 10 x 8 10 x 12 252.0 x 201.6 252.0 x 303.2 transparent transparent 84 (4.2) 78 (3.9) 84 (4.2) 78 (3.9) 74 (3.7) 84 (4.2) 70 (3.5) 84 (4.2) 4872 x 3888 4872 x 5900 black black 100 (5.0) 70 (3.5) 100 (5.0) 70 (3.5) 78 (3.7) 100 (5.0) 82 (3.5) 100 (5.0) 4672 x 3728 4672 x 5760 Mammo Layout 10 x 8 10 x 12 252.0 x 201.1 252.0 x 302.5 transparent transparent 22 (1.1) 70 (3.5) 50 (2.5) 70 (3.5) 70 (3.5) 22 (1.1) 70 (3.5) 50 (2.5) 4968 x 3882 4968 x 5910 black black 160 (8) 75 (3.75) 136 (6.8) 75 (3.75) 77 (3.85) 160 (8) 77 (3.85) 136 (6.8) 4672 x 3728 4672 x 5760
film format (inch) film size (mm) borders top pixels (mm) bottom pixels (mm) left pixels (mm) right pixels (mm) printable area none diagnostic band top pixels (mm) bottom pixels (mm) left pixels (mm) right pixels (mm) final diagnostic area
9.3
Electrical data
Rated voltage [~V] Frequency [Hz] Power consumption [W] 100-240 AC (autosensing) 50/60 100 standby 300 average 530 maximum
9.4
Climatic data
Heat emission [kJ/h] 360 standby 1080 average 1908 maximum
9.5
Sound emission data

Noise level: in standby: in operation: 45 dB(A) maximum 55 dB(A) maximum
DD+DIS125.03E
9.6
Interface data
Image / control data interface Maximum number of simultaneous DICOM associations DICOM 3.0 Print SCP optional Postscript 10
9.7
Service data
InfoCounter Error diagnostics built in Module exchange concept Remote/preventive service capable yes yes yes yes
9.8
9.8.1
Dimensions and weight

Dimensions, packed machine Length / depth (cm / inch) Width (cm / inch) Height (cm / inch) 89.3 / 35.2 72.4 / 28.5 120 / 47.2
9.8.2
Dimensions, closed machine Length / depth (cm / inch) Width (cm / inch) Height (cm / inch) 75 / 29.5 57.5 / 22.6 93.5 / 36.8
9.8.3
Dimensions, opened machine Length / depth (cm / inch) Width (cm / inch) Height (cm / inch) 101 / 49.7 57.5 / 22.6 128 / 50.4
9.8.4
Weight Printer alone (kg / lb) Printer with packing incl. palette (kg / lb) 95 / 210 130 / 287
DD+DIS125.03E
10
Safety Standards and Regulations
The printer has been tested and found to comply with the following international standards and regulations:
Safety standards: EN60601-1 IEC 601-1. IEC 601-1-1. UL 2601-1, 2nd edition CAN/CSA 22.2 No. 601.1-M90
Radio-interference regulations (interference suppression): FCC Rules 47 CFR-part 15-subpart B, class A. EN 60601-1-2 (1993) EN 61000-4-2: 1995 ESD 3kV contact; 8 kV air EN 61000-4-3: 1996 Radiated field immunity: 3V/m, 80MHz...1GHz ENV 50204: 1995 Radiated field immunity from digital radio telephones: 3V/m EN 61000-4-6 1996 Conducted Immunity: 3Vrms, 0.15MHz...80MHz EN 61000-4-4: 1995 Burst: 1kV mains; 0,5kV data EN 61000-4-5: 1995 Surge: 1kV differential; 2kV common EN 61000-4-11:1994 Voltage dips EN 61000-3-2: 1995 Harmonics Class A EN 61000-3-3: 1995 Flicker EN 55011: 1998 Radiated Emissions: class A
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services
INSTALLATION SITE READINESS CHECKLIST
Name of Field Service Engineer: Client name: Client address:
_________________ Checking date:____________
___________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________
Contact person, name and title: ___________________________________________________________ Client phone number: Device: Drystar 4500 M ________________________ Extension:_________________ Order /OGT number: _____________________
# 1 3 4 5 6 7 8
Item All parts, which are required additionally to the "scope of delivery" are available at the installation site The planned installation place has enough space for installation, operation and repair The required system integration parameters are available The required connectivity Release Documents are available The Host System is installed and the Host System Service Engineer is scheduled to setup the printer at the host system. The ambient conditions are within the given limits The electrical connection is available as specified
Refer to 3.1 4 and 5 6 6.2 -7 8
okay
Remarks:______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________
Signature of the FSE or Product Specialist:
DD+DIS005.03E
Glossary and Key Word Index
List of Contents
1 2
Glossary......................................................................................1 Key Word Index........................................................................10
Chapter 12 / I
DD+DIS005.03E
Glossary
2-Propanol (Isopropyl alcohol) Alcohol to clean the thermal print head.
A ADC Agfa Diagnostic Center. A device developed by AGFA to scan x-ray exposed phosphor plates. Analog to Digital Converter. Application Entity Title. Via IP address, hostname and the AE-Title a DICOM capable device in the network is unambiguously identified. Drystar 4500 has the AE-Title "DS4500" by default. The AE-Title for the Drystar 4500 in the DICOM Host must be identical with the AE-Title in the Drystar 4500 itself. The AE-Title is adapted during installation. To make a clear distinction between AE title and IP address, it is recommended to use only lower case characters for the hostname. Preferably use the same name like for the AE title, but in lowercase. AGFATEK LINK Device out of the AGFATEK product spectrum for remote service. Enables to make a dial-up-networking connection between local PC and an AGFA network. Wrist strap made of synthetic material with integrated thread-like metal. Used to earth the service engineer during service at printed circuit boards. Prevents electronic components from being destroyed by static discharge. Agfa Picture Archiving Protocol. AGFA network protocol for communication between medical devices. More and more DICOM supersedes APIP..
AD Converter AE-Title
Anti-static wrist strap
APIP
Chapter 12 / 1
DD+DIS005.03E
B B/W Battery RAM Blue Based Film Black and White. A RAM component, which contents is being stored by the tension of a battery. Film with a blue colored support layer. The foglevel of this film is approx. 0.2 O.D. See also "Clear based Film" PC Program used for reading of Internet pages. The commonly used browsers are Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator.
Browser
C Calibration Clear Based Film Process which determines a reproducible correlation between input and output values. Film with a transparent support layer. The foglevel of this film is approx. 0.15 O.D. See also "Blue based Film" Names for the first two serial interfaces of a computer
COM1, COM2
D DA Converter DCE Digital Analog Converter. Data Communications Equipment. Term out of the RS232 specification. DCE equipment sends on pin 3 and receives on pin 2. The RS232 interface from modems or PC's is almost always DCE. To connect a DCE with a DTE device, a standard RS232 cable is required. To establish a DCE - DCE connection respectively a DTE - DTE connection a null- modem cable is required. See also DTE. Assembly in the printer, which is responsible for de-curling the films before they leave the printer. Device used for measuring the optical density of the film.
Decurl Unit
Densitometer
Chapter 12 / 2
DD+DIS005.03E DICOM
Glossary and Key Word Index Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine. Digital image processing and communication in medicine. A network protocol, which is wide spread in the medical world, used to interchange text and images. DICOM Print Management Service. A device which provides DICOM PMS (= provider) makes it possible to print DICOM images. A device which uses DICOM PMS (= user) is able to control a DICOM printer. The Drystar 4500 is a DICOM PMS Provider. Minimal / maximal optical density on the film. The Domain Name is the name for a device in the network. It provides for a more comfortable contact to a network node by calling it via name instead of the IP address. In the internet for example the IP address 19.5.6.121 can be contacted by the name 'johnson.com'. To identify a device in the network via a name it has to be registered in a DNS server (Domain Name System). The DNS server builds up the connection between IP address and domain name. The network system administrator determines the domain name for Drystar 4500. Dots per Inch. Pixels per Inch (1 inch = 2,54 cm) Direct Remote Access. Remote service Density Sensor Head board. Part of the MDM (macrodensitometer). "1" stands for the version of the board. Data Terminal Equipment. Term out of the RS232 Specification. DTE equipment sends on pin 2 and receives on pin 3. See also DCE.
DICOM PMS
Dmin / Dmax Domain Name
DPI DRA DSH1
DTE
Chapter 12 / 3
DD+DIS005.03E
E EEPROM Electrically Erasable, Programmable Read Only Memory. Memory chip that can be electronically erased and programmed again. Electromagnetic Compatibility: Electromagnetic Interference. Erasable, Programmable Read Only Memory. Memory chip that can be erased by ultraviolet light and be programmed again. Network technology for LANs (Local Area Networks)
EMC EMI EPROM
Ethernet
F FIFO First in, first out. Principle of Way of storing data that first selects the data that have been entered at first; is mainly used in queues. Number printed on the film packet, which changes with every new film emulsion. Only those films with the same film batch do have exactly the same characteristics. Assembly in the printer that takes in 100 films and provides for the transport of a film out of the film magazine. Assembly in the printer which turns the film approx. 270 around the decurl unit. Calibration of the film. By calibrating the printer gets a table with certain density values for certain control values. Film of a certain producer or a similar producer but with different characteristics (sensitivity, contrast). Serial bus standard also known as IEEE1394. Data rate 200 Mb/s. An EPROM at which data have to be deleted in fixed blocks instead of separate bytes. Lowest optical density, which can be measured on the film. Field Programmable Gate Array. A logic chip, which can be programmed. A FPGA can be programmed after its production. Field Service Engineer. Service technician.
Filmbatch
Film Loading Assembly
Film Reversal Unit Film Sensitometry
Film type
Firewire Flash EPROM Foglevel FPGA
FSE
Chapter 12 / 4
DD+DIS005.03E FTP
Glossary and Key Word Index File Transfer Protocol. A network protocol required for the file transfer within the network.
H Heat sink Assembly to absorb and dissipate heat. It is used at the thermal head to dissipate it's surplus heat energy. Hypertext Transmission Protocol. Protocol (collection of rules) which determines the data format and the way of transmission of HTMLpages in the World Wide Web (WWW). In the computer world a host computer is a device, which provides services and settings for other computers. Especially in the world of medical devices a host system is the device at which the printer is going to be connected to. Hyper Terminal A Windows program for serial data communication between two computers.
HTTP
Host
I ICM Image Composition Map. Complete image data for a complete film. These image data correspond to the several pixels on the film, which is going to be printed. International Electro technical Commission File in the printer, which logs lots of information and events. The infocounter contains for example the date of the installation, the SW version and the complete errors, which occurred already. Infrared-temperature sensor in Decurl Unit Internet Protocol Address. A 32 Bit address, which is assigned to each TCP/IP host. Example: 192.9.200.201.
IEC Infocounter
IR Sensor IP Address
Chapter 12 / 5
Glossary and Key Word Index ISDN
DD+DIS005.03E Integrated Services Digital Network. Telecommunication network which unites digital technique of connection and transmission. It allows, that different ways of communication (language, text, data, images) can be transferred in one united public net.
J Java An object oriented programming language developed by the American company Sun Microsystems. It is independent of the used computer system. Java is mainly used for browsers in the WWW.
K KEY4 Printed circuit board to control the printerkeypad.
L LCD-Display Liquid Crystal Display. By supplying a voltage the liquid crystals are arranged this way that a contrast is visible. Light Emitting Diode. Diode, which emits green, yellow or red light. Look-up table, contrast reference curve, e.g. Kanamori LUT.
LED LUT
M MEB Board Main Engine Board. Printed circuit board that controls the printing process. It has following main functions: Reading the sensors; control of the motors; serial interface to the power supply; control of the thermal head. The MEB1 version has the OMF board as a plugin board. In the MEB2 board the OMF board is integrated. HTTP protocol based web server from HE GSO. Can be reached via Agfa Intranet and also via Internet. Internet address: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/medne tcso.nsf
MEDNET
Chapter 12 / 6
DD+DIS005.03E
N Netmask Also called subnet mask. A 32 bit mask that displays which bits are in use for the subnet address. Subnets are used in a network to keep it well-structured. A RS232 cable where all the wires are crossed over. This way for example the receive wire at the one side is connected with the transmit side of the other side.
Null Modem Cable
O O.D. OMF Board Optical Density Board on the MEB1 Board. Contains among other things the power PC processor and the fire wire interface to the Proteus CPU.
P PACS PCB Pixel Picture Archiving and Communication System Printed Circuit Board. One of the individual dots that make up an image on the film. E.g. a 10x12" film contains 4968 x 5900 pixels. DICOM Print Management Service. A device that provides DICOM PMS (= provider), makes printing of DICOM images possible. A device using DICOM PMS (= user) can control a DICOM printer. Drystar 4500 is a DICOM PMS provider. AGFA own operating system for medical devices. Imperative programming language for the device independent description of print pages which brings the complete data (text, images, graphics) and their positions to a standardized data structure. PostScript was developed in 1982 by the American company Adobe Systems and evolved in the meantime to a quasi-standard. A further development is PostScript Level 2, which has got among others things an optimized data compression. A rubber drum in the printer that guides the film along the thermal head.
PMS
Portex Postscript
Print drum
Chapter 12 / 7
Glossary and Key Word Index Prompt Proteus Board
DD+DIS005.03E A symbol that appears on a computer terminal screen. Example: C:\> Printed circuit board to control the main functions of the printer, CPU. Out of the Greek mythology: Proteus is an omniscient, prophesying old man living in the sea. To escape from questions he changed to many different figures.
R RAM Random Access Memory / Free accessible memory. The RAM-board is used to store intermediate data. Recommended Jack 45. A connector specification used with UTP cables. The connectors are 8 pole flat connectors. A device in the network to connect two or more networks. It routes incoming data packages to the corresponding network. The network system administrator defines the IP address of the router for the printer. Only if the router IP address is known by the printer it is possible for the printer to send information via the network back to devices which are located in another segment of the network. Computer interface to convert computer internal parallel data into serial data and vice versa. The interface is defined via RS232 (Recommended Standard). Cable following the RS232 standard (Recommended Standard) to connect two RS232 interfaces (for example connection between modem and PC).
RJ45
Router
RS232 Interface
RS232 cable
S SCSI Service Interface Service key Small Computer Systems Interface. RS232 Interface at the printer. Service tool. Used to bridge safety switches to make it possible to control all the consumers despite the device is opened. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers. The printer is able to print out the black/white test image named after the SMPTE for test purposes.
SMPTE
Chapter 12 / 8
DD+DIS005.03E SMTP
Glossary and Key Word Index Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocol to send e-mails between computers in the internet. Service Quality Management.
SQM
T TCP/IP Telnet TIF Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol. Widespread network protocol. A network protocol that provides for logging in to a network computer system. Tagged Image Format. A standard format to store pixel oriented images. GIF and JPG are more and more superseding TIF. Abbreviation of Thermal Head. Resistor line that transfers the image to the film.
TH Thermal Head
U UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair. A network cable where the wires are twisted and without additional shielding.
V VDE Association of German Electro Technicians (Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker)
X XT X-Terminal. An Agfa program for serial data communication between two computers.
Chapter 12 / 9
DD+DIS005.03E
Key Word Index
Chapter 12 / 10
DRYSTAR 4500 / DRYSTAR 4500 M

Type 5363 / 100/110
Order no.: DD+DIS005.03E
2nd Edition
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services
ReadMeFirst
How to print and add Comments

1 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT: This PDF manual is screen optimized nevertheless it is possible to print single pages, single chapters or the complete manual on paper size DIN A4 or Letter. Some pages especially circuit diagrams for equipment have been created on paper size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in reduced legibility. Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3/ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if available.
1.1
Printing single Pages or Chapters

To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter Write down or remember the shown page number Go the end of the section or desired range of pages Select "Print" Select the page range Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center". Select OK
NOTE: Reduce to printer margins may be named on other Adobe Reader versions shrink to printable area or shrink oversized pages to paper size
2007-05-31 printed in Germany Agfa Company Confidential

Document Node ID: 16099429
Copyright 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
ReadMeFirst
1.2
Printing the complete Service Manual

To print the complete service manual proceed as follows: (1) (2) (3) (4) Select "Print" Select All Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center". (see NOTE previous page) Select OK
Adding Comments
If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version 7, the comment toolbar will show-up. This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text manipulations.
2.1
How to export your Comments

(1) In the drop down menu Comment & Markup select "Show comments List"
(2)
Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
Revision 1 2007-05-31
Page 2 of 3 Agfa Company Confidential
ReadMeFirst
(3) (4)
Select Options - Export Selected Comments Save the file with any name
2.2
How to import Comments

(1) (2) (3) NOTE: The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the comments have been imported has a different number of pages. In the drop down menu Comment & Markup select "Show comments List" Select Options - Import Comments Browse for the comments file and press select
Revision 1 2007-05-31
Page 3 of 3 Agfa Company Confidential

AGFA Drystar 4500 Film Printer Service Manual - Revision 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AGFA Drystar 4500 Film Printer Service Manual - Revision 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HEALTHCARE

Order No.: DD+DIS005.03E

printed in Germany 07 / 2003

Technical Documentation Drystar 4500 / Drystar 4500 M

To order spare parts and spare part assortments:

xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 3760 xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 7388

printed in Germany 07 / 2003

Pictograms and Conventionen for this Documentation

Meaning of the Pictograms

Service Menu Accessories Field Modifications Manufacturing Standard Modifications Maintenance

10. Fieldservice Bulletins

11. Installation Planning

Activity with the mouse or return key

12. Glossary and Key Word Index

required text entry via key board

Generic Safety Directions

Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products

Purpose of this document

compared to previous Revision 1.1 Editorial rework to improve comprehensibility

Agfa Company Confidential

Copyright 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare

Generic Safety Directions

WARNING: Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

System Labels concerning Laser Radiation

Figure 1: Example for Laser Classification

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

Product Complaints - References

Agfa Septestraat 27 2640 Mortsel, Belgium. Fax +32 3 444 7094

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

Connections to other Equipment

Connections to other Equipment

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

Accessories and Spare Parts

Accessories and Spare Parts

Parts and accessories replacement:

Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007

Generic Safety Directions

Safety Directions for Operation

Safety Directions for Operation

Edition 1, Revision 2 04-2007